# Avada Docs Source: https://docs.avada.io/ # Welcome to Avada Docs Documentation, guides, and references for every Avada app on Shopify. [Avada SEO SuiteAll-in-one SEO and store performance for Shopify](/seo-suite-help-center/)[Avada AEO OptimizerAI-friendly index of your store for ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Perplexity](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/)[Avada AI Blog BuilderAuto-generate high-quality blog posts that rank for SEO](/blog/)[Avada Product CopyAI-powered product descriptions that turn browsers into buyers](/ai-product-copy/)[Avada Product FeedSync your Shopify products to Google Merchant Center and keep them approved](/product-feed/)[Avada PDF InvoiceProfessional invoices, packing slips, and receipts](/pdf-invoice/)[Avada Images & Page Speed UpImprove page speed and Core Web Vitals automatically](/speed-optimizer/)[Avada Appointment BookingSell services and appointments directly on Shopify](/appointmentBooking/)[Avada Online CourseSell digital courses and lessons from your Shopify store](/onlineCourse/)[Avada Order TrackingBranded tracking pages and shipment notifications](/order-tracking/)[Avada Order EditingLet customers edit, cancel, or update their orders without contacting support](/order-editing/)[Avada Affiliate MarketingRun affiliate and referral programs that scale revenue](/affiliate-marketing/)[Avada Shipping LabelsBulk-print labels and streamline fulfillment](/shipping-labels/)[Avada Backups & RestoreAutomated daily backups for your Shopify store data](/backups-restore/)[Air Product ReviewsCollect, display, and import product reviews at scale](/air-reviews/)[Avada Cookie ConsentGDPR / CCPA cookie banner and consent management](/cookie-help-center/)[Shopvid Shoppable Video ReelsShoppable short-form video reels for your storefront](/shopvid/)[Avada AccessibilityWCAG compliance and accessibility scanner](/avada-accessibility-widget-ada/)[Avada Order LimitSet min/max purchase limits per product, collection, or cart](/order-limit-help-center/)[Avada Fraud FilterBlock fraudulent orders and risky visitors automatically](/avada-fraud-filter-ip-blocker/)[Avada Age VerificationAge-gate restricted products and entire storefronts](/age-verification-popup/)[Avada EU Withdrawal FormEU-compliant right-of-withdrawal form and request management for your storefront](/avada-eu-withdrawal-form/)[Blocko: AI Theme SectionsBrowse, preview and download ready-made theme sections into your Shopify store](/blocko/) Need help? Reach out via in-app chat or browse each app's FAQs. --- # Avada Affiliate Marketing Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/ # Welcome to Avada Affiliate Marketing Avada Affiliate Marketing is a **free Shopify app** that lets you run an affiliate program directly from your store. Create commission plans, invite affiliates, track their sales, and pay them — without paying a monthly fee for another app. ## Your Home dashboard When you open the app, the **Home** screen gives you the program at a glance: - **Four stat cards** — *Active affiliates*, *Pending approvals*, *Commission awaiting payout*, *Revenue* (filterable by date range, default *Last 30 days*). - **Quickstart** — a checklist of onboarding tasks (create a program, add an affiliate, enable the web pixel). The card shows progress like *"3 / 3 completed"*. - **Affiliate portal links** — a copy-ready link to your public affiliate signup page (`.../portal/{your-store}/register`). - **Helpdesk** — a *Chat with us* button that opens our live chat for direct support. ## What you can do with this app - **Create commission programs** — flat fee, percentage, tiered by order value, or product-specific rates. - **Invite affiliates** — share a signup link, or add them manually by email. - **Track referral orders automatically** — through referral links (Web Pixel) and coupon codes. - **Approve or deny conversions** — review every sale before it counts as commission. - **Pay commissions** — mark payouts as paid and keep a full history. - **Give affiliates their own portal** — a dedicated web app where they see earnings, copy their referral link, and manage their payment method. ## Get started in 3 steps [1. Install the app](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/install-app/)[2. Follow the Quick Start](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/quick-start/)[3. Enable tracking](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/enable-web-pixel/) ## Popular topics [Create your first program](/affiliate-marketing/managing-programs/create-program/)[Add an affiliate](/affiliate-marketing/managing-affiliates/add-manually/)[Approve a conversion](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/approve-deny/)[Pay an affiliate](/affiliate-marketing/payouts/mark-as-paid/)[How tracking works](/affiliate-marketing/how-tracking-works/referral-link/)[Troubleshooting](/affiliate-marketing/resources/troubleshooting/) ## Who is this guide for? This user guide is for **Shopify merchants** who want to launch or manage an affiliate program. It walks through every screen of the Admin app and explains what each setting does. Looking for docs aimed at your affiliates? Point them to the **[Affiliate Portal](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/overview/)** section — it is written from the affiliate's point of view. ## Need help? - **Email us:** [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) - **Install on Shopify:** [Avada Affiliate Marketing on the Shopify App Store (opens in a new tab)](https://apps.shopify.com/avada-affiliate-marketing) [Install the App](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/install-app/) --- # Viewing Your Commissions Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/conversions/ # Viewing Your Commissions The **Commissions** page (sidebar label: *Commissions*; URL still `/conversions`) shows every referral order that came from you — whether through your referral link or your discount code. It is your detailed earnings log. ## Top of the page A short heading (*"Track your commissions from customer purchases"*) and **five summary cards** at a glance: CardMeaning **Total orders**Number of referral orders, all statuses combined **Total commission**Total commission across all orders (gross) **Awaiting approval**Commission from orders the merchant has not reviewed yet (Pending) **Approved**Commission confirmed but not yet paid **Paid**Commission already paid out to you These numbers update in real time as orders come in and the merchant reviews them. ## Filter tabs Below the cards are six tabs, each showing a count badge: - **All** — every commission. - **Pending** — waiting for merchant review. - **Approved** — yours, waiting to be paid in the next payout. - **Paid** — historical. - **Denied** — rejected by the merchant. You earn $0 on these. - **Refund adjustment** — order was refunded after payout, so the merchant deducted the commission from a later payout. Click any tab to filter the list below. ## Empty state If you have no commissions yet, the list area shows: **No commissions** — When customers purchase using your referral link, your commissions will appear here. First conversions typically take 1–2 weeks after you start sharing your link. Be patient and keep sharing. ## You cannot edit commissions The merchant is the only person who can approve, deny, or change commissions. You are read-only here. If you think something was denied wrongly: - Email the merchant with the order number. - Attach proof of referral if you have it (screenshots, campaign link). ## Understanding the Pending queue Don't expect Pending commissions to be approved instantly — merchants typically wait 7–14 days after an order to give time for returns. Most pending commissions become Approved within 2 weeks. If an order stays Pending for 30+ days, feel free to email the merchant and ask about their approval schedule. ## Refund adjustments If a customer fully or partially refunds an order **after** you were already paid, the merchant cannot pull the money back from your PayPal. Instead, a row appears under the **Refund adjustment** tab with a negative amount, and that amount is automatically subtracted from your next payout. This is normal and expected — refunds happen. ## Export There is no CSV export in the portal today. If you need to show earnings for tax purposes, screenshot the tabs you need or request a summary from the merchant. ## Next step - [Viewing Your Payouts](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/payouts/) — what the merchant has paid you so far. - [Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/) — back to overview. [Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/)[Viewing Payouts](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/payouts/) --- # Affiliate Dashboard Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/ # Affiliate Dashboard The Dashboard is the first page you see after logging in. Everything you need is here: your program details, performance numbers, your referral link, and any discount codes the merchant has set up for you. ## Top of the page A short greeting (*"Welcome back, [your name]!"*) followed by two summary cards: CardWhat it shows **Program**The program you belong to, with its **Active** / **Inactive** badge **Commission type**Your commission rate — e.g. `10%` or `$5` If the program is **Inactive**, no new orders will earn you commission until the merchant re-activates it. ## Performance Four numbers update in real time as your link is clicked and orders come in: CardMeaning **Total Clicks**Number of times someone visited the merchant via your referral link **Conversions**Referral orders attributed to you (across all statuses) **Total Earnings**Everything you have ever earned (approved + paid) **Conversion Rate**`Conversions ÷ Total Clicks` — how well your traffic buys A new click appears within seconds. New conversions appear within 1–2 minutes of the customer checking out. ## Your Affiliate Link The most important thing on this page. The card shows the full URL plus a **Copy** button: ``` https://merchant-store.myshopify.com?affily_ref=AFF-XXXXXX ``` Share this link wherever you promote the merchant — Instagram bio, TikTok captions, YouTube descriptions, blog posts, newsletter, anywhere a link goes. When someone clicks it, a tracking cookie is dropped on their browser. Any purchase they make in the next **30 days** (or the merchant's custom duration) is credited to you. ### Making the link shorter The full URL is long. If you want a shorter version: - Use a free link shortener — Bitly, TinyURL. - Use a Linktree-style bio page that includes the link. ## Your Discount Codes If your program has the *Customer discount* feature enabled, the merchant has auto-generated a unique coupon code just for you. You will see it in this card with: - The **Discount Code** (e.g. `SARAH-X7K2`) and a **Copy** button. - The discount value (e.g. *"10% off · Enter code at checkout"*). - A **Show more** link to view conditions (minimum purchase, usage limits, etc.). **How discount codes work for you:** - Share the code anywhere — video captions, livestreams, podcast ads, even verbal recommendations. - When a shopper uses it at checkout, **you get the credit** even if they never clicked your link. - Codes work on **any device** (cookies don't carry between phones and laptops, but codes do). If you don't see this card, your program does not use coupon-code tracking — only referral links. Ask the merchant if you want them to enable it. ## Need help? The bottom of the page shows the merchant's support email. Click it to email them directly — for questions about commissions, payouts, or your account. ## Tips for more earnings - **Use both link and coupon when you have one** — cover every sharing channel. - **Post natively on each platform** — a link in an Instagram story works better than the same generic link everywhere. - **Be honest about affiliate relationships** — disclosure builds trust and FTC / local ad laws often require it. - **Focus on value** — *why* someone should buy, not just *that* there's a discount. ## Next step - [Viewing Your Conversions](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/conversions/) - [Viewing Your Payouts](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/payouts/) - [Profile & Payment Method](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/profile/) [Registration & Login](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/registration/)[Viewing Conversions](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/conversions/) --- # Affiliate Portal Overview Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/overview/ # Affiliate Portal Overview Welcome — this section of the user guide is written for **you, the affiliate**. It walks through every screen of your portal: what you see, how to find your referral link, how to track your earnings, and how to manage your payment details. If you are a merchant setting up an affiliate program, the rest of this documentation (everything outside the *Affiliate Portal* section) is for you. This section is what you can point your affiliates to. ## What is the affiliate portal? The affiliate portal is a web app where you, as an affiliate, can: - **See your earnings** in real time. - **Copy your unique referral link** to share on social media, blogs, YouTube, etc. - **See your coupon codes** (if the merchant has given you one). - **Track every referral order** you brought in, and see if it has been approved. - **See your payout history** — what has been paid and what is still coming. - **Update your profile** — payment method, password, contact info. Every merchant who uses Avada Affiliate Marketing gives their affiliates the **same portal** — so once you know your way around it for one brand, you know it for all of them. ## How do I get access? There are two ways: - **The merchant adds you directly** — you receive a welcome email with a link to set your password. - **You sign up via the merchant's public link** — you fill in the form yourself and wait for approval. See [Registration & Login](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/registration/) for the full flow. ## The portal at a glance Once you log in, you see four main screens accessible from the left sidebar: ScreenWhat is there **Dashboard**Overview — program info, performance stats, your referral link, your discount code (if any). **Commissions**Every referral order you brought in, with status (Pending / Approved / Paid / Denied / Refund adjustment). The route is `/conversions` but the sidebar label and page heading both say "Commissions". **Payouts**Your payment history — past payments, what is awaiting payout, and total earned. **Profile**Your name, payment method, password, and a read-only summary of your program. ## Your referral link The single most important thing in the portal is your **referral link**. It looks like: ``` https://merchant-store.myshopify.com?affily_ref=AFF-ABC123 ``` The `AFF-ABC123` part (or a custom code the merchant gave you, like `SARAH`) is unique to you. Whenever someone clicks this link and buys from the store within 30 days (or whatever the merchant set), **you earn commission**. You can copy this link from two places: - **Dashboard** — the *Affiliate Link* card with a Copy button. - **Profile** — the *Your Affiliate Link* card at the top. See [Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/) for more detail. ## Your coupon code (if you have one) If the merchant attached a coupon to your program, you will also see a **coupon code** you can share (e.g. `SARAH10` for 10% off). When a customer uses your code at checkout, it counts as a referral — **even if they never clicked your link**. This is great for content like Instagram reels or TikToks where links are hard to share. ## How do I get paid? The merchant handles payments outside the app — usually via PayPal, bank transfer, or store credit. The portal shows: - Your current **unpaid balance**. - Your past **payouts** with date, amount, and method. You do not initiate payouts yourself. The merchant triggers them on their own schedule (usually monthly). You will get an email when a payout is on the way. ## Need help? - **Payout questions, referral issues, general questions** → contact the merchant directly. Their support email is in the portal footer. - **Portal bugs or technical problems** → email [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) (the app developers). ## Next step - [Registration & Login](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/registration/) — first-time signup and daily login. - [Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/) — your main landing page. [Email Notifications](/affiliate-marketing/settings/email-notifications/)[Registration & Login](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/registration/) --- # Viewing Your Payouts Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/payouts/ # Viewing Your Payouts The **Payouts** page shows your payment history and your current earning status. Use it to check that you were paid correctly and to see when the next payout is likely. ## Summary cards Three numbers at the top: CardMeaning **Total earned**All-time earnings: approved + paid commission. **Awaiting payout**Approved commission that has not been paid yet. This is what the merchant owes you right now. **Paid**Everything you have ever been paid. `Total earned = Awaiting payout + Paid` ## Payment history Below the summary cards is the **Payment history** section. Each row is one payment from the merchant. The table shows the payment date, the amount you received, and the transaction ID the merchant added (if any) — useful for cross-checking against your PayPal or bank statement. ## When is my next payout? The merchant controls the payout schedule. Most merchants pay weekly or monthly. Some pay on request. **Things that affect the next payout:** - **Merchant's schedule** — you do not control this. Ask the merchant if unclear. - **Minimum payout amount** — usually $50. If your Awaiting payout is below this, you wait until next cycle. - **Approval speed** — orders still Pending aren't eligible. They become Awaiting payout only after the merchant approves them. - **Payment method on file** — if you have not set a Payment method in your [Profile](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/profile/), the merchant cannot pay you (the *Mark as paid* button on their side stays disabled). ## Why is my Awaiting payout different from my Awaiting approval? Two different things: - **Awaiting approval** (on the [Commissions](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/conversions/) page) = orders the merchant has NOT yet approved. - **Awaiting payout** (here) = orders the merchant HAS approved, but not paid. Approved orders flow from "Awaiting approval" → "Awaiting payout" when the merchant approves them. Then flow from "Awaiting payout" → "Paid" when the merchant marks the payout as paid. ## Empty state If you have never been paid yet: This is normal for new affiliates. Your first payout typically lands 1–2 months after you start referring. ## What if I did not receive a payout? Sometimes the app shows **Paid** but the money has not reached your account. Possible reasons: - **Wrong payment details** — the merchant paid to an old PayPal email. Check your [Profile](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/profile/) for the current address and fix if needed, then tell the merchant. - **Processing delay** — bank transfers take 1–5 business days depending on country. PayPal is usually instant but can be delayed if flagged. - **Merchant error** — they marked it paid in the app before actually paying. Politely nudge them. Always contact the **merchant** first (their support email is in the portal footer). Only escalate to [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) if there's a bug in the portal. ## Fees and currency - **Currency** — amounts are shown in the merchant's shop currency. If the merchant pays you in a different currency, they convert at send time. - **Fees** — standard practice is the merchant covers payment fees (PayPal, wire). Ask them to confirm. ## Next step - [Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/) — back to overview. - [Profile & Payment Method](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/profile/) — update payout details. [Viewing Conversions](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/conversions/)[Profile & Payment Method](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/profile/) --- # Profile & Payment Method Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/profile/ # Profile & Payment Method The **Profile** page is where you manage every setting tied to your account. It is one scrollable page with five separate cards. Each card has its own save button, so you can update just one thing at a time without touching the others. ## 1. Your Affiliate Link Shows your current referral link and a **Copy** button. - **You cannot change the referral code yourself.** It is assigned by the system (e.g. `AFF-XXXXXX`). - If you want a cleaner custom code (e.g. your Instagram handle), email the merchant and ask — they can set it for you. ## 2. My Program Read-only summary of the program you belong to: - Program name and **Active** / **Inactive** badge. - Description (if the merchant added one). - **Commission Type** — *Fixed commission* or *Tiered by order value*. - **Commission amount** — e.g. `10%` or `$5`. - Two chips at the bottom: **Products** (`All products` or specific) and **Cookie** (the tracking duration in days). You cannot change programs from here. Ask the merchant if you want to move programs. ## 3. Account Information Edit your name. Your email is shown above the inputs but is **read-only** — to change it, contact the merchant. FieldNotes **First name**Shown in the portal and on merchant reports **Last name**— Click **Save profile** in this card to apply. ## 4. Payment Settings This is where you tell the merchant how to pay you. **Always keep this updated** — wrong info means delayed or missing payouts. - Pick a **Payment method** from the dropdown — currently **PayPal**. - Enter your **PayPal email address** (the one that receives payments). Must be exact. - Click **Save payment information**. **Double-check your PayPal email.** One typo and the payment goes to a stranger — no recovery. If you do not set a payment method, the merchant cannot pay you. The **Mark as paid** button on their side stays disabled until you fill this in. ## 5. Update Password Change your login password. - Enter your **Current password** (security check). - Enter the **New password**. - **Confirm new password**. - Click **Update password**. You stay logged in after changing. If you have other sessions open on other devices, those stay active too — log out manually if you want to kick them off. **If you forgot your current password**, use the [Forgot password flow](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/registration/#forgot-your-password) instead — it does not require the old one. ## Tips - **Test your payment method with a small payout** — ask the merchant to pay a $5 test before scaling up. - **Update before a payout is triggered** — if you change PayPal email today and the merchant marks payouts paid tomorrow, the next one goes to the new email. - **Use a dedicated email** — affiliate programs send a lot of notifications. A `yourname+affiliate@gmail.com` alias keeps them out of your main inbox. ## Deleting your account The portal does **not** have a self-delete button. To leave the program: - Ask the merchant to delete your affiliate account (Affiliates page → trash icon), or - Just stop using the portal. Your data stays but you earn no more commission. For full GDPR-style deletion, email [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) with the merchant's store name and your email — we will process within 30 days. ## Next step - [Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/) - [Viewing Your Payouts](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/payouts/) [Viewing Payouts](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/payouts/)[Referral Link + Web Pixel](/affiliate-marketing/how-tracking-works/referral-link/) --- # Registration & Login Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/registration/ # Registration & Login This page covers everything about getting into your affiliate portal — first-time signup, returning logins, and password recovery. ## First time — signing up There are two ways you might end up here: ### Case A — The merchant added you directly You will receive a welcome email titled something like *"Welcome to [Store Name]'s affiliate program"*. In that email: - Click the **Set your password** button. - A new tab opens on the portal password-setup page. - Enter a password (minimum 6 characters) twice. - Click **Save**. You are now logged in. Go to [Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/) and start promoting. **The link expires in 15 minutes** — if you waited too long, see [password reset](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/registration/#forgot-your-password) below. ### Case B — You signed up via a public link The merchant shared a signup URL with you (from their emails, social bio, etc.). When you open it, you see a registration page with the program details on the left and a *Create your account* form on the right: The left side shows the program you will join (name, description, commission rate, value type, tracking duration) so you know what you are signing up for. Fill in the form on the right: FieldNotes **First name**Shown in the portal and on the merchant's reports. **Last name**— **Email**Your contact email. Used for login and all notifications. **Password**Minimum 6 characters. Use something strong — this is how you log in. **Confirm password**Must match the password above. Click **Create account**. Payment method is **not** asked at signup. You add it later in your [Profile](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/profile/) — and the merchant cannot pay you until you do. **What happens next:** - Your application is submitted with **Pending** status. - **You cannot log in yet.** The merchant has to approve you first. - When approved, you receive an email — then you can log in normally. ## Daily login Once approved, logging in is simple: - Go to your portal URL — `https://luna-affiliate.firebaseapp.com/portal//login`. The merchant gives you the exact one (their shop handle, e.g. `acme-store`). - Enter your **Email address** and **Password**. - Click **Log in**. You land on your [Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/). ### Login errors Error messageWhat it means *"Invalid email or password"*Typo, or account does not exist for this merchant. *"Your account is pending approval"*Merchant has not approved you yet — wait for the approval email. *"Your account is not active"*Merchant deactivated your account. Contact them. *"Too many failed attempts"*Security lockout after 5 wrong passwords — wait 15 minutes. ## Forgot your password? - On the login page, click **Forgot password?** - Enter your email → click **Send reset link**. - Check your inbox — the email arrives within a minute. Check spam if it doesn't. - Click the reset link in the email. - Enter a new password twice → click **Save**. - Log in with the new password. **The reset link expires in 15 minutes**. If you click an old one, you get *"Link expired"* — request a new one. **Rate limit**: you can request up to **3 reset links per 15 minutes**. Beyond that, the page shows *"Too many requests"* — wait 15 minutes before trying again. ## Changing your password later Once logged in, go to [Profile](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/profile/) → **Update Password** card. You need to enter your current password, then the new password twice, then click **Update password**. ## I work with multiple merchants — do I need one account per merchant? **Yes.** Each merchant maintains their own affiliate list. You need to sign up (or be added) for each program separately. They are completely independent: - Different logins. - Different referral codes. - Different commissions. - Different payouts. ## Next step - [Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/) — your main landing page after login. - [Profile](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/profile/) — manage your account details. [Overview](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/overview/)[Dashboard](/affiliate-marketing/affiliate-portal/dashboard/) --- # Approve or Deny Conversions Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/conversions/approve-deny/ # Approve or Deny Conversions Every new conversion arrives in **Pending** status. You decide whether to: - **Approve** — the affiliate earns the commission. It will be paid out next payout cycle. - **Deny** — the affiliate earns nothing on this order. You can approve/deny one at a time, or in bulk (see [Bulk Actions](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/bulk-actions/)). ## Why review before approving? Auto-approval would make your life easier but is risky. Common reasons to deny: - **Fraud** — the affiliate placed the order themselves to collect commission (self-referral). - **Duplicate / test orders** — the affiliate is testing things, not real sales. - **Return risk** — customer has a history of returning everything. - **B2B / wholesale order** — your affiliate program may not cover these. - **Gift card orders** — you may exclude gift-card-only orders. Most merchants review conversions 1–2x a week. Active programs can build up quickly — use [bulk actions](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/bulk-actions/) if you have many to process. ## Approving one conversion - Go to **Conversions**. - Click the **Pending** card at the top to filter. - Find the row you want to approve. - Click the **✓** icon in the **Actions** column (tooltip: *Approve*). The row's status badge changes to **Approved** (green). Commission is now locked and waiting to be paid. The affiliate receives an email: *"Your commission of $X on Order #XXXX is approved"* (if [email notifications](/affiliate-marketing/settings/email-notifications/) are on). ## Denying one conversion - Same page, same row. - Click the **✕** icon (tooltip: *Deny*). - Status badge changes to **Denied** (red). Commission = $0. The affiliate receives an email: *"Commission on Order #XXXX was not approved"* with an optional reason you can set in [email settings](/affiliate-marketing/settings/email-notifications/). ## Changing your mind If you approved or denied by mistake, the row exposes an **Undo** action (the curved-back arrow icon) that reverts the row to **Pending** so you can choose again. Once a conversion is **Paid**, you cannot change it — the row is locked. To handle a disputed paid commission, issue a refund in Shopify; the app will create a **Refund adjustment** row that nets out at the next payout — see [Refund Handling](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/refund-handling/). ## How long should I wait before approving? A good default is **1–2 weeks** after order creation. This gives you time to see if the customer returns the order — denying after a return is easier than clawing back a paid commission. Some merchants approve immediately for trusted affiliates (influencers on contract) and hold back on approval for unknown affiliates until the order ships. ## What happens if I never approve? Pending conversions sit forever unless you take action. They do **not** auto-approve. The affiliate can see them in their portal (in the Pending tab) but they do not count toward the affiliate's balance. If you want to clear old pending conversions in bulk, use [Bulk Actions](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/bulk-actions/). ## Viewing an order from the conversion Each conversion row links to the Shopify order. Click the **Order ID** (e.g. `#1234`) to open the order in Shopify Admin in a new tab. This is the fastest way to verify details before approving. ## Next step - [Bulk Actions](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/bulk-actions/) — approve/deny many at once. - [Refund Handling](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/refund-handling/) — what happens when an approved/paid order is refunded. [Conversion Lifecycle](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/lifecycle/)[Bulk Actions](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/bulk-actions/) --- # Bulk Actions Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/conversions/bulk-actions/ # Bulk Actions If your store has many affiliates, you will get many conversions. Approving them one at a time is slow. The **Conversions** page has built-in bulk actions for exactly this. ## How to select conversions - Go to **Conversions**. - Optionally filter by **Status = Pending** to see only the ones you need to review. - Click the **checkbox** on the left of each row you want to act on. - To select all on the current page, click the header checkbox at the top. A bar appears at the top showing "N selected" and the available bulk actions. ## Available bulk actions Action label in the toolbarWhat it does **Approve selected**Set all selected Pending rows to Approved. Sends approval emails. **Deny selected**Set all selected Pending rows to Denied. Sends denial emails. Both actions are reversible — select the same rows again and use the opposite action, or use the per-row **Undo** action. A success toast appears when the operation completes, e.g. *"Approved 12 conversion(s)"*. ## Selecting across pages Bulk select only covers the **current page** (25 or 50 rows depending on your page-size setting). If you have 300 pending conversions and want to approve all, you need to: - **Option A** — Increase page size to the max (100), then select-all-and-approve, then do the next page, etc. - **Option B** — Filter by **Affiliate** (if approving for one affiliate) or by **Date range** to reduce to one page. ## What happens when you bulk approve Behind the scenes, the app processes each conversion in sequence: - Updates the status to **Approved**. - Recalculates the affiliate's pending payout total. - Queues the approval email (sent within a few minutes). For 50+ conversions, this can take 10–30 seconds. A loading indicator stays visible until it completes. ## Bulk-denying with a reason Bulk deny does not let you add a per-conversion reason. If you want to explain *why* a batch was denied, update your default **denial reason** in [Email Notifications](/affiliate-marketing/settings/email-notifications/) before denying. Every denial email uses that reason. ## Non-actionable statuses You **cannot** bulk-act on conversions with these statuses: - **Paid** — locked, no edits allowed. - **Refund adjustment** — system-created, not user-editable. Selecting these in a bulk action has no effect — they are skipped silently. ## Tips for high-volume workflows - **Review once a week** — most merchants batch-review every Monday. Takes 15 minutes for a 100-affiliate program. - **Auto-approve trusted affiliates** — manually approve their conversions in bulk immediately after they appear. - **Deny by pattern** — filter by affiliate name (if one affiliate is gaming the system) and bulk-deny. - **Use Date filter** — only review conversions older than 7 days, to give time for refunds to settle. ## Next step - [Refund Handling](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/refund-handling/) - [Pending Payouts](/affiliate-marketing/payouts/pending-payouts/) [Approve or Deny Conversions](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/approve-deny/)[Refund Handling](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/refund-handling/) --- # Conversion Lifecycle Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/conversions/lifecycle/ # Conversion Lifecycle A **conversion** is a referral order — a customer bought something because of an affiliate. Every conversion has a status that tells you where it is in the approval and payout flow. ## The five statuses StatusMeaningTone **Pending**The order is in — waiting for you to approve.Caution (yellow) **Approved**You approved it. Commission is locked in; waiting to be paid out.Success (green) **Paid**You have paid this commission to the affiliate.Info (blue) **Denied**You rejected it. Commission = $0.Critical (red) **Refund adjustment**The order was refunded *after* the commission was paid. The amount appears as a negative offset that gets deducted from the affiliate's next payout.Critical (red) The app does **not** use separate "Cancelled" or "Refunded" statuses. Refunds before payout silently reduce the commission on the existing row; refunds after payout create a separate **Refund adjustment** row. ## The typical flow ``` Customer clicks ref link or uses coupon ↓ Customer completes order ↓ Web Pixel / Coupon matcher creates conversion ↓ [Pending] ↓ You review ├─ Approve → [Approved] │ ↓ │ You mark the affiliate's payout as paid → [Paid] │ └─ Deny → [Denied] ``` When a refund happens **after** the commission is Paid: ``` Order refunded in Shopify ↓ App receives refunds/create webhook ↓ Creates a separate row with status [Refund adjustment] ↓ Negative amount auto-deducts from the affiliate's next payout ``` ## Status transitions From → ToAllowed?Notes Pending → ApprovedYesClick ✓ in the Actions column or use bulk **Approve selected** Pending → DeniedYesClick ✕ in the Actions column or use bulk **Deny selected** Approved → PendingYesUse the **Undo** action on an approved row Denied → PendingYesUse the **Undo** action Approved → PaidAutomaticTriggered when you [mark a payout as paid](/affiliate-marketing/payouts/mark-as-paid/) Paid → anything**No**Once paid, the row is locked. Refund handling uses a separate Refund adjustment row. ## When a conversion is created The app creates a Pending conversion in two cases: - **Referral-link orders** — Web Pixel saw the `affily_ref` cookie and matches it to the checkout. The **Tracking** column shows a `Link` badge. - **Coupon-code orders** — the order's `discount_codes[]` contains a code linked to an affiliate. The **Tracking** column shows a `Coupon` badge. If both apply (visitor clicked a link AND used a coupon), **coupon wins** — see [How tracking works](/affiliate-marketing/how-tracking-works/coupon-code/). ## Summary cards at the top The Conversions page shows **four** summary cards above the table: CardWhat it counts **Pending**Awaiting your review **Approved**Confirmed, awaiting payout **Denied**Rejected commissions **Refund adjustment**Negative offsets from post-payout refunds The total dollar amount of each status appears under its count. The numbers update in real time as you approve/deny rows. ## Filtering the table Filters available above the table: - **Status** — Pending, Approved, Paid, Denied, Refund adjustment. - **Tracking type** — All, Link, Coupon. - **Date range** — Today, Last 7 days, Last 30 days, Custom. There is also a search box that takes an order name like `#1001`. ## Next step - [Approve or Deny Conversions](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/approve-deny/) - [Refund Handling](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/refund-handling/) - [Pending Payouts](/affiliate-marketing/payouts/pending-payouts/) [Edit or Delete](/affiliate-marketing/managing-affiliates/edit-delete/)[Approve or Deny Conversions](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/approve-deny/) --- # Refund Handling Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/conversions/refund-handling/ # Refund Handling When a referral order is refunded, the affiliate should not earn commission on the refunded amount. Avada handles this automatically in most cases, but there are edge cases worth understanding. ## How refunds are detected When a refund happens in Shopify, Shopify sends a `refunds/create` webhook to the app. The app looks up the order, finds any conversions tied to it, and adjusts commission accordingly. Refunds are detected: - When you refund through Shopify Admin (full or partial). - When you issue a store credit that counts as a refund. - When a payment gateway auto-refunds (chargebacks, fraud reversals). ## The four refund cases ### Case 1 — Partial refund on a percentage program **Example:** Order = $100. Commission = 10% = $10. You refund $30. The app reduces the commission proportionally: - New refund amount: $30 - Commission adjustment: $30 × 10% = **$3** - Commission stays **Approved** but now reads `$10 - $3 = $7` The row shows a "Partially refunded" badge in orange. The affiliate's pending balance updates. ### Case 2 — Full refund on a percentage program, before payout **Example:** Order = $100. Commission = $10. Status = Approved. You refund the full $100 before paying out. - Commission on the existing row drops to `$0`. - The row stays **Approved** but with a partially-refunded indicator. - Affiliate's pending balance drops by $10. No money has been exchanged, so nothing to recover. ### Case 3 — Full refund on a percentage program, after payout **Example:** Same as above, but you already paid the $10 to the affiliate. - The original row stays **Paid** — once paid, rows are locked. - A new row appears with status **Refund adjustment** (red), amount `-$10`. - That negative amount is automatically subtracted from the affiliate's **next** payout — you do not need to chase the affiliate manually. You can see Refund adjustment totals in the dedicated card on the Conversions page summary. ### Case 4 — Partial refund on a flat-amount program Flat-amount programs behave differently. Because commission is a fixed dollar amount (not tied to order total), the app only deducts commission when the **cumulative refunds reach the full order total**. **Example:** Flat $5 program. Order = $100. Commission = $5. - You refund $30 → Commission stays **$5**. Order is still mostly kept. - You refund another $30 (total $60 refunded) → Commission still **$5**. - You refund another $50 (total $110, fully refunded) → Commission becomes **$0** (or, if already paid, a Refund adjustment row appears for `-$5`). This behavior is intentional — flat commissions are meant to reward the referral act, not the order total. ## Product-specific refunds If a refund covers only some line items and you have a [product-specific commission](/affiliate-marketing/managing-programs/commission-types/), the adjustment is calculated per-line-item: - Line 1 refunded (Product A at 20%) → commission on that line goes to $0. - Line 2 kept (Product B at 10%) → commission unchanged. ## Viewing refund history Click any conversion row to expand it. The detail panel shows: - Original commission. - List of refund events with date, amount refunded, commission adjustment. - Current "net" commission after all refunds. ## Notifications When a refund triggers a commission adjustment: - **Affiliate** receives an email: *"Commission on Order #XXXX was updated due to a refund"* (if notifications are on). - **Merchant** does not get an email (too noisy on high-volume stores). ## What you cannot do - **Un-refund a commission** — if Shopify reverses a refund (rare), the app does not auto-restore the commission. Email [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io). - **Refund only commission without refunding order** — there is no "claw back commission" button. The affiliate's commission is tied to the order's refund status, not independent. ## Tips - **Wait before approving** — give 7–14 days after order for refunds to settle. Reduces paid-then-refunded cases. - **Watch the Refund adjustment card** — these are amounts you'll auto-deduct from upcoming payouts. Worth a sanity-check before the next payout cycle. - **Keep a refund reserve** — some merchants hold back 10% of each payout as a refund buffer, released after 30 days. ## Next step - [Conversion Lifecycle](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/lifecycle/) - [Payout History](/affiliate-marketing/payouts/payout-history/) [Bulk Actions](/affiliate-marketing/conversions/bulk-actions/)[Pending Payouts](/affiliate-marketing/payouts/pending-payouts/) --- # Enable Web Pixel Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/get-started/enable-web-pixel/ # Enable Web Pixel ## Why this matters Without the Web Pixel, **every sale that comes through an affiliate's referral link is invisible to the app** — affiliates don't get credited, you can't see which traffic sources convert, and no commissions are calculated. Connecting the pixel takes under a minute and is the single most important step after installing Avada Affiliate Marketing. Coupon-code tracking works **without** the Web Pixel because coupons are matched at the order level. But referral-link tracking — which is how most affiliates share your store — needs this pixel to run. ## What the Web Pixel does behind the scenes When someone clicks a link like `yourstore.com/?affily_ref=AFF-ABC123`, the pixel: - Reads the `affily_ref` parameter from the URL. - Generates an anonymous **visitor ID** and stores it in a browser cookie (default 30 days). - Sends a **click event** to Avada with the visitor ID, referral code, and page metadata. - When the visitor completes checkout, fires a **checkout event** with the order's checkout token. - Backend matches the token to the stored click → creates a **Conversion** → credits the affiliate. ## Before you start - Your store was created after **October 2023** (older stores use Script Tag, which Avada installs automatically with no extra action needed — you can skip this page). - You have **Manage apps** permission in Shopify admin. - You have already installed Avada Affiliate Marketing from the Shopify App Store. If not, see [Install the App](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/install-app/) first. ⚠️ If your theme uses a **custom checkout flow** (checkout extensibility, headless storefront, or a Plus checkout.liquid fork), also install the [Theme App Extension](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/install-theme-extension/) after this step. The pixel alone can miss conversions on non-standard checkouts. ## Setup ### Step 1 — Open Settings In your Shopify admin sidebar, click **Settings** (bottom-left gear icon). ### Step 2 — Open Customer events In the Settings sidebar, click **Customer events**. You will see a list of pixels installed by apps you have on your store. ### Step 3 — Verify the Avada pixel is Connected Find the row labelled **Avada Affiliate Marketing**. The **Status** column should read **Connected** and the **Data** column should read **Optimized**. For most stores this happens **automatically when you install the app** — there is no manual Connect button to click. If the row already shows **Connected / Optimized**, you are done. Skip to *Verify tracking works* below. If the row is missing or shows **Disconnected**, the simplest fix is to **uninstall and reinstall the app** from the Shopify App Store. Reinstalling re-registers the pixel via the Shopify Web Pixels API. If that does not resolve it, contact [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io). ## Verify tracking works The fastest way to confirm is a self-click test: - In Avada Affiliate Marketing, go to **Affiliates**, click any approved affiliate, and copy their **Referral link**. - Open a **fresh incognito / private window** and paste the link. - Browse your store, add any product to cart, and complete a test checkout — use Shopify's test mode or a real card with a small refund afterwards. - Wait **1–3 minutes**. - In the app, open the **Conversions** page. A new row should appear in **Pending** status with the correct affiliate, order total, and commission. **Expected timing**: Click events arrive in under 5 seconds. Conversion matching runs off the Shopify `orders/create` webhook and usually completes within 1–2 minutes of checkout. If nothing appears after 5 minutes, jump to [Troubleshooting](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/enable-web-pixel/#troubleshooting) below. ## How attribution actually works Understanding the matching logic saves hours of debugging later. ### Time windows WhatHow longWhy it matters Cookie lifetime**30 days** (default, editable in Settings → Tracking → *Referral tracking duration*)Visitor must check out within this window for the click to count. Click deduplication**24 hours**If the same visitor clicks the same affiliate's link twice in 24 hours, only one click is recorded. Normal for re-visits — not a bug. Tracking data TTL**7 days** server-sideClick records are auto-deleted after 7 days to control storage. A checkout 8+ days after the click cannot be matched. Email fallback window**1 hour**If the checkout token doesn't match (rare Shopify edge case), the app falls back to matching by customer email — but only if the email was captured within 1 hour of checkout. ### Matching priority On every new order, the app runs this chain: - **Primary** — match the order's `checkoutToken` to a stored click. This works for most orders. - **Fallback** — if no token match, match by `customerEmail` within the 1-hour window. - **Coupon-code match** — if no pixel match, check whether the order used an affiliate's coupon code. Coupon matches work with or without the pixel. - **No match** — the order is not attributed. No commission is created. ### Last-click attribution If a visitor clicks two different affiliates' links within 24 hours, **only the most recent click is credited** when they eventually buy. This is standard last-click attribution. ## Known limitations ⚠️ The scenarios below are **not bugs** — they are inherent to how browser cookies and Shopify work. Set expectations with affiliates upfront to avoid disputes. - **Cross-device** — a visitor who clicks on desktop and buys on mobile will not be attributed. The cookie lives on one device only. - **Incognito / private mode** — cookies are cleared when the window closes. If the visitor doesn't complete checkout in the same session, the click is lost. - **Cookie blockers** — extensions like uBlock Origin, Privacy Badger, or Brave's shields block the pixel cookie. Affiliates who expect high tech-savvy audiences should also share a coupon code. - **Coupon overrides link** — if the order uses an affiliate's coupon code, the coupon wins even if the visitor clicked a different affiliate's link. This prevents double-paying. - **Inactive affiliates** — if an affiliate is Inactive (i.e. you disapproved them while Pending), any orders from their links will not create conversions. Reactivating an Inactive affiliate is not supported in the merchant UI today; if the click was legitimate, ask them to register again. ## Troubleshooting Pixel shows **Connected** but no conversions appear: SymptomLikely causeFix Self-click test produces 0 conversionsTest window was not incognito — your browser already had a checkout sessionRepeat in a fresh incognito window Conversion appears but commission is $0Order used a $0 discount code, or order value is below the program's minimumCheck Program settings → Commission rules Conversion for affiliate A but you clicked affiliate B's linkVisitor had a prior click from A within 24h (last-click rule)Clear cookies before testing "Connected" status but pixel not firing on storefrontTheme is using a custom checkout that bypasses Shopify eventsInstall the [Theme App Extension](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/install-theme-extension/) Conversion missing even after 10+ minutesClick was more than 7 days ago → tracking record expiredExpected behaviour. Ask affiliate to re-share the link. Some orders attribute, others don'tCustomer email changed between cart and checkout → fallback match failedNo fix on the merchant side. Most orders still match via the checkout token. Conversions page is completely emptyAffiliate is in **Pending** or **Rejected** statusApprove the affiliate in the **Affiliates** page Still stuck? See [Resources → Troubleshooting](/affiliate-marketing/resources/troubleshooting/) or contact support from the app's top-right help menu. ## Data & privacy The pixel records only what is strictly needed for attribution and analytics: - **Anonymous visitor ID** — random string, cookie-based, no personal identifier. - **Referral code** — the `affily_ref` value from the URL. - **Click metadata** — page URL, referrer, user agent, screen dimensions, language. Used for your admin analytics only. - **Checkout token** — temporary Shopify identifier, used once to match the order. - **Customer email** — captured only at checkout, used solely as a fallback match and deleted after 7 days. No names, addresses, or payment details are stored. See [Resources → Privacy Policy](/affiliate-marketing/resources/privacy-policy/) for full disclosure. ## Next step Tracking is live. Install the optional [Theme App Extension](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/install-theme-extension/) for edge-case coverage, then head to [Quick Start](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/quick-start/) to create your first program and recruit affiliates. [Quick Start (3 Steps)](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/quick-start/)[Install Theme Extension](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/install-theme-extension/) --- # Install the App Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/get-started/install-app/ # Install the App Avada Affiliate Marketing is a free Shopify app. It installs in the same way as any other app from the Shopify App Store. ## Steps - Open the [Avada Affiliate Marketing listing (opens in a new tab)](https://apps.shopify.com/avada-affiliate-marketing) on the Shopify App Store. - Click **Install app**. - Shopify shows an access request screen listing the permissions the app needs (orders, customers, discount codes, etc.). Click **Install app** again to confirm. - Shopify redirects you back to your admin. The app opens automatically on the **Home** dashboard. That is it — the app is live and ready to use. ## What permissions does the app need? During installation, Shopify asks you to approve access to: ScopeWhy the app needs it **Orders**Detect referral orders, calculate commission **Customers**Attribute orders to the right affiliate by email **Products**Apply product-specific commissions **Discount codes**Match coupon codes to affiliates **Script tags / Theme app extensions**Drop the referral tracking cookie **Web Pixel**Record referral clicks and conversions **Order tags**Auto-tag orders with affiliate info (optional) These scopes are read-only for orders and customers — the app never modifies customer data. ## What happens the first time you open the app On first launch, the app creates a few defaults for you so nothing is empty: - A **Shop record** in our database with your store name and support email set to your Shopify email. - **Default settings**: 30-day referral cookie duration, monthly payout schedule, $50 minimum payout. - **Email notifications** turned on for both merchant and affiliate events. You can change all of these later in [Settings](/affiliate-marketing/settings/general/). ## Next step After installing, the fastest way to get value from the app is the [Quick Start (3 Steps)](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/quick-start/) guide. It walks you through creating your first program, adding an affiliate, and sharing the referral link — all in about 10 minutes. If you want to set up tracking properly before creating any program, continue to [Enable Web Pixel](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/enable-web-pixel/). ## Uninstalling If you ever need to uninstall the app, go to your Shopify admin → **Apps** → find *Avada Affiliate Marketing* → click **Delete**. Shopify sends us an uninstall webhook and we remove your shop's data within 48 hours, as required by GDPR. See the [Privacy Policy](/affiliate-marketing/resources/privacy-policy/) for details. [Introduction](/affiliate-marketing/)[Quick Start (3 Steps)](/affiliate-marketing/get-started/quick-start/) --- # Install Theme Extension Source: https://docs.avada.io/affiliate-marketing/get-started/install-theme-extension/ # Install Theme Extension The **Theme App Extension** is an optional block you add to your Shopify theme. It works together with the Web Pixel to capture referral clicks even in edge cases — for example, when a visitor's browser blocks the pixel, or when your theme uses custom checkout routing. For most stores on a stock Shopify theme, the Web Pixel alone is enough. The Theme Extension gives you extra coverage and is especially recommended if you run a **headless store** or a **custom theme**. ## Steps - In your Shopify admin, go to **Online Store → Themes**. - Click **Customize** on your active theme. - In the theme editor, click the **App embeds** icon in the left sidebar (looks like a puzzle piece). - Find **Avada Affiliate Tracking** in the list and toggle it **On**. - Click **Save** in the top-right. The extension is now live on every page of your storefront. ## Verifying it is active - Open any product page on your storefront in a new browser tab. - Right-click → **View Page Source** (or press **Ctrl+U** / **Cmd+U**). - Press **Ctrl+F** / **Cmd+F** and search for `avada-affiliate` or `affily`. You should find a small `` tags themselves. - Alternatively, you can simply paste your **Pixel ID(s)** into the input field. - Click **Save**. ⚠️ Make sure you paste only the JavaScript code content, not the full HTML script tags. The app wraps the code in script tags automatically. ### Turn On the Integration Click the **Turn On** button to activate the Meta Pixel integration. The pixel will now only fire after a visitor gives consent for marketing cookies. You can **Turn Off** the integration at any time if you need to disable it temporarily or switch to a different setup. [Google Consent Mode](/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-google-consent-mode/)[TikTok Pixel](/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-tiktok-pixel/) --- # Integrate with Microsoft Consent Mode (UET) Source: https://docs.avada.io/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-microsoft-consent-mode-uet/ # Integrate with Microsoft Consent Mode (UET) Microsoft Consent Mode allows your Microsoft UET (Universal Event Tracking) tags to respect visitor consent choices. This integration works alongside your existing UET setup. **Prerequisite:** You must have a Microsoft UET Tag already set up on your store before enabling this integration. ### Upload Integration Script - Go to **Shopify Admin > Online Store > Themes > Actions > Edit Code**. - In the **Assets** folder, click **Add a new asset**. - Upload the file `avada-cookiebar-mcm-integration-v1.js`. - Open your `theme.liquid` file. - Add the following script tag **after** your UET Tag script: ``` ``` ### Turn On Microsoft Consent Mode In the Avada Cookie Consent app, navigate to **Integrations > Microsoft Consent Mode** and click **Turn on** to enable the integration. Once enabled, Microsoft Consent Mode will adjust UET tag behavior based on the visitor's consent status, ensuring compliance while still collecting aggregated data where permitted. [TikTok Pixel](/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-tiktok-pixel/)[IAB TCF v2.3 Compliance](/cookie-help-center/integrations/iab-tcf-v2.3-compliance) --- # Integrate with Pinterest Source: https://docs.avada.io/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-pinterest/ # Integrate with Pinterest The Pinterest integration ensures that Pinterest tracking respects your visitors' consent choices. ### Turn On Pinterest Consent Mode Navigate to **Integrations > Pinterest** in the Avada Cookie Consent app and click **Turn On** to enable the integration. ### Test the Integration Click the **View guide** button to open the built-in verification guide. Follow the 5-step verification process to confirm the integration is working correctly: - Open your storefront in a new browser tab. - Open the browser Developer Tools (F12). - Navigate to the **Console** tab. - Interact with the cookie consent banner. - Verify that Pinterest consent signals are sent correctly based on the visitor's consent choice. [Google Consent Management Requirements](/cookie-help-center/integrations/google-consent-management-requirements-explained/)[Klaviyo](/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-klaviyo/) --- # Integrate with Swym Wishlist Source: https://docs.avada.io/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-swym-wishlist/ # Integrate with Swym Wishlist The Swym Wishlist integration ensures that Swym cookies are managed in accordance with visitor consent choices. Swym cookies are **enabled by default** for wishlist functionality, as they are typically classified as functional cookies necessary for the wishlist feature to work. ### Turn On the Integration Navigate to **Integrations > Swym Wishlist** in the Avada Cookie Consent app and click **Turn On** to enable the integration. ### Test the Integration Click the **View guide** button to open the built-in verification guide. Follow the steps to confirm the integration is working correctly and that Swym cookies are properly managed based on consent. The integration respects visitor rejection. If a visitor declines functional cookies, Swym wishlist cookies will not be set, and the wishlist functionality may be limited. [Hydrogen](/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-hydrogen/)[Notification Email to Customer](/cookie-help-center/settings/customize-notification-email-to-customer/) --- # Integrate with TikTok Pixel Source: https://docs.avada.io/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-tiktok-pixel/ # Integrate with TikTok Pixel Integrating TikTok Pixel with Avada Cookie Consent ensures the pixel respects visitor consent choices and only fires when marketing cookies are accepted. ### Add Your TikTok Pixel Script - Navigate to **Integrations > TikTok Pixel** in the Avada Cookie Consent app. - Copy your TikTok Pixel script from your TikTok Ads Manager. - Paste the script content into the input field. - Click **Save**. ### Turn On the Integration Click the **Turn On** button to activate the TikTok Pixel integration. The pixel will now only fire after a visitor consents to marketing cookies. You can **Turn Off** the integration at any time without removing the script. When turned off, the TikTok Pixel will load normally without consent gating. [Meta Pixel](/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-meta-pixel/)[Microsoft Consent Mode (UET)](/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-microsoft-consent-mode-uet/) --- # Plans & Pricing Source: https://docs.avada.io/cookie-help-center/plans/plans-and-pricing/ # Plans & Pricing Avada Cookie Consent offers four pricing tiers to fit stores of all sizes. All plans include unlimited banner impressions. ## Plan Comparison FeatureFreeProfessionalAdvancedEnterprise **Price**$0/mo$8.29/mo$19.96/mo$28.33/mo Cookie BannerYesYesYesYes Banner Templates310+10+10+ Cookie ScannerManualScheduledScheduledScheduled Consent LoggingBasicFullFullFull GDPR ComplianceYesYesYesYes CCPA ComplianceYesYesYesYes Custom CSSNoYesYesYes Implied ConsentNoYesYesYes Google Consent Mode V2NoYesYesYes Email Notifications (Customer)NoYesYesYes Email Notifications (Store Owner)NoNoYesYes Cross-Domain Consent SyncNoNoYesYes Checkout Consent (Shopify Plus)NoNoNoYes IAB TCF v2.3NoNoNoYes Priority SupportNoNoNoYes Save **17%** by choosing yearly billing on any paid plan. ## How to Upgrade ### Review Available Plans Navigate to **Plans** in the Avada Cookie Consent app to see all available plans and their features. ### Select a Plan Click the **Upgrade** button on the plan that best fits your needs. ### Confirm Billing Review the billing details and confirm the upgrade through Shopify's billing system. ### Start Using Premium Features Once the upgrade is confirmed, all premium features for your plan are immediately available. ## Frequently Asked Questions ### Are banner impressions unlimited? Yes, all plans include **unlimited banner impressions**. There is no cap on how many times the cookie consent banner can be displayed to your visitors. ### Can I downgrade my plan? Yes, you can downgrade to a lower plan at any time. Your current plan features will remain active until the end of the billing cycle, then the lower plan takes effect. ### How do I cancel my subscription? You can cancel your subscription at any time from the **Plans** page. After cancellation, your plan will revert to the Free tier at the end of the current billing period. ### Do paid plans have a trial period? Yes, all paid plans come with a **7-day free trial**. You can try all premium features before being charged. [Share Consent Across Sub-Domains](/cookie-help-center/settings/share-consent-across-sub-domains/)[How to Add CCPA to Your Website's Menu](/cookie-help-center/faqs/how-to-add-ccpa-to-your-websites-menu/) --- # Customize Notification Email to Customer Source: https://docs.avada.io/cookie-help-center/settings/customize-notification-email-to-customer/ # Customize Notification Email to Customer You can customize the email notifications sent to customers when they submit data requests through the Privacy Policy page. ### Select Page Navigate to **Settings > Email Content** in the Avada Cookie Consent app. Select the email template you want to customize from the available options. ### Enter Content in Setting Contents Edit the email body content. You can customize the subject line, greeting, message body, and closing text. Use the available template variables to personalize the email. ### Preview Click the **Preview** button to see how the email will appear to customers. Review the layout, content, and formatting before saving. ### Send Test Email Click **Send test email** to send a sample to your own email address. This lets you verify the final appearance in an actual email client before activating the template. [Swym Wishlist](/cookie-help-center/integrations/integrate-with-swym-wishlist/)[Notification Email to Store Owner](/cookie-help-center/settings/customize-notification-email-to-store-owner/) --- # Customize Notification Email to Store Owner Source: https://docs.avada.io/cookie-help-center/settings/customize-notification-email-to-store-owner/ # Customize Notification Email to Store Owner ⚠️ This feature requires the **Advanced plan** or above. You can customize the email notifications sent to the store owner when customers submit privacy-related requests. ### Navigate to Email Settings Go to **Settings > Email Content** in the Avada Cookie Consent app. ### Select "Send to Store Owner" Dropdown In the email template selector, choose **"Send to store owner"** from the dropdown menu. ### Choose Template Select one of the five available email templates: TemplateDescription **Export Customer Profile**Sent when a customer requests an export of their data **Edit Customer Profile**Sent when a customer requests to edit their personal data **Delete Customer Profile**Sent when a customer requests deletion of their data **Data Sales Opt-Out**Sent when a customer opts out of data sales (CCPA) **Manage Request**General notification for other privacy-related requests ### Edit Content Customize the email body using the following template variables: VariableDescription `{email_name}`The customer's email address `{shop_name}`Your store's name ### Send Test Email Click **Send test email** to preview the email in your inbox before saving. ### Save Click **Save** to apply your changes. The customized email templates will be used for all future notifications. ## How It Works When a customer submits a privacy request through the Privacy Policy page: - The customer's request is recorded in the **Data Request** section. - A notification email is sent to the store owner using the appropriate template. - The store owner reviews the request and takes the necessary action. [Notification Email to Customer](/cookie-help-center/settings/customize-notification-email-to-customer/)[Share Consent Across Sub-Domains](/cookie-help-center/settings/share-consent-across-sub-domains/) --- # Share Consent Across Sub-Domains Source: https://docs.avada.io/cookie-help-center/settings/share-consent-across-sub-domains/ # Share Consent Across Sub-Domains The **Syncing Consent** feature allows you to share cookie consent status across multiple subdomains of the same root domain. This means visitors only need to give consent once, and their choice applies across all your subdomains. ## Benefits - **Improved User Experience** — Visitors are not asked for consent repeatedly when navigating between subdomains. - **Data Accuracy** — Consistent consent status across domains ensures accurate tracking and analytics. - **Simple Implementation** — Easy setup through the app settings without custom code. ## Scope ⚠️ Consent syncing only works for subdomains that share the **same root domain**. For example, `shop.example.com` and `blog.example.com` can sync consent, but `example.com` and `different-domain.com` cannot. ### Navigate to Syncing Consent Settings Go to **Settings > Syncing Consent** in the Avada Cookie Consent app. ### Import Domains from Shopify Click the **Import** button to automatically pull in all domains connected to your Shopify store. This saves you from manually entering each domain. ### Add Custom Domains If you have additional domains or subdomains not connected through Shopify, click **Add domain** and enter them manually. ### Manage Domain List Review your complete domain list. You can: - **Remove** domains that should not share consent. - **Add** new domains as your store expands. - **Verify** that all domains share the same root domain for syncing to work properly. [Notification Email to Store Owner](/cookie-help-center/settings/customize-notification-email-to-store-owner/)[Plans & Pricing](/cookie-help-center/plans/plans-and-pricing/) --- # Translation Source: https://docs.avada.io/cookie-help-center/translation/translation/ # Translation Avada Cookie Consent supports multiple languages to help you serve a global audience. You can configure the default language, set up automatic language detection, and add extra languages with AI-powered translation. ## Default Language The cookie banner comes with built-in support for the following default languages: - English - German - Italian - French You can select your store's primary language from this list. The banner text, buttons, and preference popup will all display in the selected language. ## Detecting Language Avada Cookie Consent can automatically detect your visitor's preferred language using one of two methods: MethodDescription **Browser Language**Detects the language set in the visitor's browser settings **Customer IP**Detects the visitor's location via IP address and shows the corresponding language Browser language detection is generally more accurate for individual preferences, while IP-based detection works better for region-specific compliance messages. ## Adding Extra Languages You can add additional languages beyond the four defaults. ### Add New Language Navigate to the **Translation** section and click **Add new** to start adding a new language. ### Choose Language Select the language you want to add from the dropdown list. The list includes all commonly used languages. ### Translate Content Choose your translation method: - **AI Translate** — Automatically translate all banner text using AI. This provides a quick starting point that you can refine later. - **Manual Translation** — Enter translations manually for each text field (consent message, button labels, preference categories, etc.). ### Confirm Translation Review the translated content to ensure accuracy. Make any necessary adjustments to the auto-generated translations. ### Save Click **Save** to add the new language. It will now be available for automatic detection or manual selection. ## Edit or Remove Languages To edit an existing language translation, click on the language in the list and modify the text fields as needed. To remove a language, click the **Delete** button next to the language entry. ⚠️ Removing a language means visitors who speak that language will see the banner in your default language instead. [Consent Compliance on Customized Domain](/cookie-help-center/banner-settings/set-up-consent-compliance-on-customized-domain-customer-account-pages/)[Data Request](/cookie-help-center/consent-activities/data-request/) --- # Dashboard Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/ # Dashboard The Dashboard is the landing page of the Online Course app — a quick overview of your courses and students with shortcuts to the most common tasks. ## How to Access - Open the Online Course app from your Shopify Admin - The Dashboard page appears at `/app` ## Page Sections ### Quick Actions Three buttons at the top of the page for the most common tasks. **Best for:** starting a new task without navigating through menus. - **Create course** — opens the Create course form - **View all courses** — goes to the Courses list - **Enroll student** — goes to the Students page where you can manually enroll ### Statistics A row of four cards showing the current state of your courses and students. **Best for:** a quick health check at the start of your day. - **Total Courses** — count of all courses, including Draft and Published - **Total Students** — count of unique students who have enrolled in any course - **Enrollments This Month** — number of new enrollments since the first day of the current month - **Completion Rate** — percentage of enrollments where the student has finished all lessons ### Empty State A welcome message that appears when the shop has no courses yet. **Best for:** first-time merchants who have just installed the app. - Title: "Welcome to Online Course!" - Description: "Get started by creating your first course." - A single CTA button that opens the Create course form ## Reading the Numbers - Open the Dashboard - Wait for the statistics cards to finish loading (they show a skeleton while loading) - Compare the four numbers to gauge how your courses are doing - Click any Quick Action button to take the next step ## Important Rules - Statistics are calculated in real time from your courses and enrollments - A new shop with no data shows zero on every card — this is expected - If a card fails to load, a small error banner appears but the rest of the page still works - The Dashboard does not include charts or onboarding checklists in the current version; those are planned for a later release [Manage course](/onlineCourse/course/manage-course/) --- # Course Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/course/ # Course Everything about courses — listing, creating, and structuring them with modules and lessons. - [Manage course](/course/manage-course/) — The Courses page lists every course in your shop and lets you search, filter, sort, and run quick actions on each row. From here you also publish or unpublish a course. - [Create course](/course/create-course/) — A course is the main unit students enroll in. Creating a course sets up its title, description, thumbnail, Shopify Product link, visibility mode, and the structure students will work through. - [Module](/course/create-course/module/) — A module is a container that groups related lessons inside a course. Every course has at least one module, and every lesson belongs to exactly one module. - [Lesson](/course/create-course/lesson/) — A lesson is the individual learning unit students complete. Each lesson belongs to exactly one module and has a content type — Video or File — that determines what students see. [Lesson](/onlineCourse/course/create-course/lesson/)[Manage student](/onlineCourse/students/manage-student/) --- # Create course Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/course/create-course/ # Create course ## How to Access - Go to Courses - Click **Create course** at the top right - The Create course form appears at `/app/courses/new` ## Page Sections ### Course details Basic information shown to students on the storefront and in emails. **Best for:** every course — these fields are the foundation. - **Title** — required, 1 to 200 characters - **Description** — rich text; supports headings, lists, images, and links; up to 50,000 characters - **Thumbnail** — 16:9 image; recommended 1280×720; JPG, PNG, or WebP; up to 10 MB ### Shopify Product The product customers buy to enroll in the course. **Best for:** paid courses with Private visibility. - Click **Link Product** to choose from your Shopify catalog - Price, name, and main image are pulled from the Shopify Product - You can change or remove the link until the first student enrolls ### Curriculum The learning content organized in two levels: Module → Lesson. **Best for:** structuring content into chapters and individual learning units. - Click **+ Add module** to create a chapter - Click **+ Add lesson** inside a module to create a learning unit - Drag and drop modules and lessons to reorder them - See [Module](/course/create-course/module/) and [Lesson](/course/create-course/lesson/) for details ### Access & Visibility The mode that controls who can see and enroll in the course. **Best for:** every course — choose Open for free, Private for paid. - **Open** — any logged-in customer can access for free; no Shopify Product required - **Private** (default) — only customers who purchased the linked Shopify Product can access; a linked product is required before publishing ## Creating a Course - Click **Create course** on the Courses page - Fill in the Course details card - Link a Shopify Product if the course will be sold - Add at least one module and one lesson in the Curriculum section - Choose **Open** or **Private** in the Access & Visibility card - Click **Save** to keep the course as a Draft, or **Publish** to make it live ## Important Rules - A course is saved as **Draft** until you click Publish - Private courses require a linked Shopify Product before they can be published - After the first student enrolls, the linked Shopify Product cannot be changed or removed - The price of a course is always managed in Shopify, not in the app - Unsaved changes trigger a warning if you try to leave the page - Switching from Private to Open keeps existing enrollments untouched; new visitors get free access - Switching from Open to Private does not remove existing students; only new visitors will need to purchase [Manage course](/onlineCourse/course/manage-course/)[Module](/onlineCourse/course/create-course/module/) --- # Lesson Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/course/create-course/lesson/ # Lesson ## How to Access - Go to Courses - Open a course in edit mode - Scroll to the Curriculum section - Open any module to see its lesson list ## Page Sections ### Lesson list The ordered list of lessons inside a module. **Best for:** scanning the contents of a module at a glance. - Each row shows the lesson title, content type, and status - Drag handle on the left for reordering - Edit and Delete icons on the right - Empty state when the module has no lessons yet: "No lessons yet." ### Lesson item A single row representing one lesson. **Best for:** opening, renaming, or removing a specific lesson. - **Title** — between 1 and 200 characters - **Content type** — Video or File (chosen at creation, cannot be changed later) - **Free preview** toggle — lets non-enrolled customers view this lesson with a Free badge - **Status** toggle — Published (visible to students) or Draft (hidden) - **Delete** icon — removes the lesson; asks for confirmation if students have already accessed it ## Lesson Types ### Video lesson (Most popular) Students watch an embedded video from YouTube or Vimeo. **Best for:** lectures, tutorials, demos, recorded webinars. - Paste a YouTube or Vimeo URL — the player is generated automatically - Auto-marks complete when students watch 80% of the video - Students can manually mark complete at any time ### File lesson Students view a list of attached files and download them if allowed. **Best for:** worksheets, slides, audio recordings, supporting materials. - Supports PDF, DOC, DOCX, XLS, XLSX, PPT, PPTX, MP3, ZIP - Up to 50 MB per file, 10 files per lesson - Toggle **Allow download** on or off per lesson - Students mark complete by clicking the button at the end of the lesson ## Creating a Lesson - Open the course in edit mode - In the Curriculum section, find the module you want to add to - Click **+ Add lesson** inside the module - Enter a lesson title (1 to 200 characters) - Select **Video** or **File** in the Content type field - Fill in the URL (for Video) or upload files (for File) - Optionally toggle **Free preview** on - Set the status to Published or Draft - Save the lesson ## Editing a Lesson - Find the lesson in the module - Click the lesson title or its Edit icon - Change the title, content, free preview, or status - Save the changes ## Reordering Lessons - Hover over a lesson to reveal the drag handle on the left - Drag the lesson up or down within its module - The new order is saved automatically ## Deleting a Lesson - Click the **Delete** icon next to the lesson - Confirm the dialog (an extra warning appears if students have already accessed it) - The lesson is removed permanently ## Important Rules - A lesson must have exactly one content type - Lesson type cannot be changed after the content has been saved — delete and recreate if you need to switch - A course must have at least one Published lesson before it can be published - Draft lessons are hidden from students; toggle to Published when ready - Lessons cannot move between modules in the current version — duplicate the content if you need to relocate it - A Video lesson URL must contain `youtube.com`, `youtu.be`, or `vimeo.com`; private or restricted videos trigger a warning - File lessons accept up to 10 files at 50 MB each; uploads count toward your shop's storage quota [Module](/onlineCourse/course/create-course/module/)[Course](/onlineCourse/course/) --- # Module Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/course/create-course/module/ # Module ## How to Access - Go to Courses - Open a course in edit mode - Scroll to the Curriculum section ## Page Sections ### Module list The ordered list of modules shown inside the course's Curriculum section. **Best for:** scanning the structure of a course at a glance. - Each row shows the module title and a count of its lessons - Drag handle on the left for reordering - Edit and Delete icons on the right - Empty state when the course has no modules yet: "No modules yet. Add the first module." ### Module item A single row representing one module. **Best for:** opening, renaming, or removing a specific module. - **Title** — between 1 and 200 characters - **Edit** icon — opens the rename popup - **Delete** icon — removes the module and all lessons inside it - **Drag handle** — reorders the module within the list - **Lesson list** — the lessons that belong to this module (see [Lesson](/course/create-course/lesson/)) ### Module edit modal The popup used to rename an existing module. **Best for:** quick title edits without leaving the curriculum view. - **Title** field — required, 1 to 200 characters - **Save** button — applies the change; disabled if the title is empty - **Cancel** button — closes the modal without saving ## Creating a Module - Open the course in edit mode - In the Curriculum section, click **+ Add module** - Enter a module title (1 to 200 characters) - The module is saved automatically and appears at the bottom of the list - Add lessons to the module by clicking **+ Add lesson** inside it ## Editing a Module - Find the module in the list - Click the **Edit** icon next to its title - Change the title in the popup - Click **Save** ## Reordering Modules - Hover over a module to reveal the drag handle on the left - Drag the module up or down - The new order is saved automatically ## Deleting a Module - Click the **Delete** icon next to the module title - Confirm the dialog - The module and every lesson inside it are removed permanently ## Important Rules - A module cannot exist without a parent course - Deleting a module deletes every lesson inside it; this cannot be undone - A module title must be between 1 and 200 characters; empty titles are not allowed - Modules cannot be moved between courses in the current version — duplicate the course if you need to relocate content - Reordering takes effect immediately for students who are mid-course [Overview](/onlineCourse/course/create-course/)[Lesson](/onlineCourse/course/create-course/lesson/) --- # Manage course Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/course/manage-course/ # Manage course ## How to Access - Open the Online Course app - Click **Courses** in the main menu - The Courses list page appears at `/app/courses` ## Page Sections ### Search and filters Tools to narrow down the list when you have many courses. **Best for:** finding a specific course quickly in a large catalog. - **Search** — type a course name; results update after a short delay - **Status filter** — All, Draft, or Published - **Sort** — Newest, Oldest, Name A–Z, or Most students ### Course table The main list of courses with one row per course. **Best for:** scanning the catalog and jumping to edit pages. - **Thumbnail** — 16:9 image, placeholder if missing - **Course name** — click to open the edit page - **Status** — Published or Draft badge - **Students** — total number of enrolled students - **Created** — date the course was created - **Actions** — menu with Edit, Duplicate, and Delete ### Empty state The message shown when no courses exist or when filters return no results. **Best for:** guiding new users or telling you to clear filters. - No courses yet: "No courses yet. Start by creating your first course." - No search results: "No courses match your search. Try clearing filters." ## Row Actions ### Edit Opens the course edit page so you can change content, modules, lessons, and settings. - Click **Edit** in the row action menu, or click the course name - No confirmation needed ### Duplicate Creates a copy of the course as a new Draft. - The new course is named "Copy of [original name]" - All modules, lessons, and content are copied - Students and enrollments are not copied - The Shopify Product link is not copied ### Delete Permanently removes the course and all related data. - All modules, lessons, and enrollments are deleted - The linked Shopify Product is set to Draft, not deleted - If the course has enrolled students, you must type the course name to confirm ## Publishing or Unpublishing ### Publishing a course - Open the course in edit mode - Confirm it has a title, at least one Published lesson, and (if Private) a linked Shopify Product - Click **Publish** at the top right - A success toast appears with a link to view the course on your storefront ### Unpublishing a course - Open a published course - Click **Unpublish** at the top right - The course returns to Draft and disappears from the storefront for new visitors - Students who already enrolled keep their access and progress ## Important Rules - The list shows 20 courses per page; use pagination to see more - Deleting a course cannot be undone — students lose access immediately - Duplicating always produces a Draft so you can edit safely before publishing - Publishing fails with a clear error if the course has no title, no Published lesson, or no linked Shopify Product (when Private) - Unpublishing does not revoke existing enrollments; students can still finish the course - If the linked Shopify Product is deleted outside the app, the course automatically returns to Draft [Dashboard](/onlineCourse/)[Overview](/onlineCourse/course/create-course/) --- # Settings Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/settings/ # Settings App-wide settings split across two tabs: **General** for branding, language, and refund behavior, and **Mail Notifications** for sender details and automated emails. ## How to Access - Open the Online Course app - Click **Settings** in the main menu - The Settings page appears at `/app/settings` ## Tabs - [General](/settings/general/) — App display name, language, refund behavior, storage info, and storefront appearance. - [Mail Notifications](/settings/mail-notifications/) — Sender details and templates for the Welcome and Course Completion emails. [Students](/onlineCourse/students/)[General](/onlineCourse/settings/general/) --- # General Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/settings/general/ # General Top-level options that affect every course in the shop. **Best for:** branding the app, choosing the language, and controlling refund behavior. - **App display name** — name shown on the storefront and in emails; defaults to `"{Store Name} Courses"`; up to 100 characters - **Language** — Vietnamese or English; controls storefront text and email defaults - **Auto-revoke on refund** — when on, refunding a Shopify order automatically revokes the student's access to the matching course; when off, refunds are logged but access stays untouched - **Storage info** — progress bar showing storage used versus your shop's quota; warning banner when usage exceeds 80%; uploads blocked at 100% ## Appearance Visual identity of the storefront and customizable labels. **Best for:** matching the storefront with your store's brand and adjusting the wording. - **Portal logo** — image at the top of student-facing pages; PNG with transparent background recommended; up to 5 MB; recommended 200×60 pixels - **Primary color** — color for buttons, highlights, and progress bars; entered as a hex code; defaults to a standard blue - **Live preview** — panel that updates as you change the logo or color - **Storefront text** — labels for the My Courses page title, Start learning button, Continue button, and Completed badge [Overview](/onlineCourse/settings/)[Mail Notifications](/onlineCourse/settings/mail-notifications/) --- # Mail Notifications Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/settings/mail-notifications/ # Mail Notifications Sender details and the templates for automated emails. **Best for:** making emails look like they come from your store and adapting their content. - **Sender name** — name shown in the student's inbox; defaults to your store name - **Reply-to email** — address that receives replies from students - **Welcome / Enrollment Confirmation** — sent when a student is enrolled; supports `{{student_name}}`, `{{course_name}}`, `{{course_url}}`, `{{store_name}}` - **Course Completion** — sent when a student finishes all lessons; supports `{{student_name}}`, `{{course_name}}`, `{{completion_date}}`, `{{store_name}}` - Each template has an Enable toggle, editable subject and body, Preview button, and Send test button ## Integrations Placeholder tab for third-party connections. **Best for:** future use; this tab has no active features in the current version. - The tab is visible but its content is empty for now - No action is required from you ## Updating Settings - Open the tab you want to edit - Change any field — a save bar appears at the top of the page - For email templates, click **Preview** to see the rendered email and **Send test** to email yourself a real version - Click **Save** to apply changes - Or click **Discard** to revert your edits ## Important Rules - Changes take effect immediately after saving - Each tab has its own pending changes; switching tabs prompts you if you have unsaved edits - Auto-revoke only triggers when a refund includes specific line items; refunds with only a money amount are logged but never auto-revoke access - The primary color must be a valid hex code; invalid values are highlighted and block saving - Disabled email templates are not sent, even when their trigger fires - Variables outside the supported list appear as raw text in the email - Storefront text labels accept plain text only — no HTML or special formatting - The current version supports two email templates only; drip and expiring-access emails are planned for a later release - The app cannot increase your storage quota — clean up unused files when you approach the limit [General](/onlineCourse/settings/general/) --- # Students Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/students/ # Students Manage the people enrolled in your courses — adding them manually, browsing the list, and controlling their access. - [Manage student](/students/manage-student/) — Browse, search, and filter every student in your shop. Open a student's detail page to review their per-course progress and revoke or restore access. - [Create student](/students/create-student/) — Manually enroll an existing Shopify customer into a published course. Useful for handling refunds, comps, or migrations. [Create student](/onlineCourse/students/create-student/)[Overview](/onlineCourse/settings/) --- # Create student Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/students/create-student/ # Create student ## How to Access - Go to Students - Click **+ Add Student** at the top right of the page - The Enroll student modal appears ## Modal Fields ### Customer search The customer who will receive access to the course. **Best for:** any existing Shopify customer in your store. - Search by name or email - Results appear as you type - Pick exactly one customer from the dropdown ### Course selector The course to enroll the customer in. **Best for:** courses already published and ready for students. - Only Published courses appear in the list - Pick exactly one course per enrollment - A customer cannot be enrolled in the same course twice ### Send notification toggle Controls whether the customer receives a Welcome email. **Best for:** decide whether the student should be notified or quietly added. - On (default): the Welcome email is sent immediately after enrollment - Off: the enrollment is created silently with no email ## Creating a Student - Click **+ Add Student** on the Students page - Search for the customer and pick them from the dropdown - Select the course from the dropdown - Toggle **Send notification** on or off - Click **Enroll** - The modal closes and a success toast appears - The student now shows up in the Students list ## Important Rules - Manual enrollments are tagged with source **manual**; automatic enrollments from purchases are tagged **auto** - A customer must already exist in your Shopify store; the modal does not create new customers - Trying to enroll a customer who is already enrolled in the same course shows an error - Draft courses are excluded from the course selector — publish the course first - Manually enrolled students count toward your Total Students stat just like paid enrollments - The Welcome email is sent only when the **Send notification** toggle is on at the time of manual enrollment [Manage student](/onlineCourse/students/manage-student/)[Students](/onlineCourse/students/) --- # Manage student Source: https://docs.avada.io/onlineCourse/students/manage-student/ # Manage student ## How to Access - Open the Online Course app - Click **Students** in the main menu - The Students list page appears at `/app/students` ## Page Sections ### Search and filters Tools to narrow the list when you have many students. **Best for:** finding a specific student or group quickly. - **Search** — type a name or email; results update after a short delay; works with unaccented Vietnamese (typing "Nguyen" matches "Nguyễn") - **Course filter** — show only students enrolled in a specific course - **Status filter** — All, Not Started, In Progress, Completed, or Revoked - **Date range** — filter by enrollment date ### Student table The main list of students with one row per student. **Best for:** scanning enrollments and jumping to a student profile. - **Name** — click to open the student detail page - **Email** — student's email address - **Courses** — badges showing the courses the student is enrolled in; if more than three, a "+N" badge appears - **Progress** — a progress bar showing average completion across all courses - **Enrolled date** — most recent enrollment date - **Status** — Not Started, In Progress, Completed, or Revoked ### Empty state The message shown when no students exist or filters return no results. **Best for:** new shops or to confirm filters are too narrow. - No students yet: "No students yet. Students appear after they enroll in a course." - No search results: "No students match your search. Try clearing filters." ## Student Detail ### Student info card Basic information pulled from the student's Shopify customer profile. **Best for:** confirming you are looking at the right person. - **Name** — first and last name - **Email** — primary email address - **Shopify customer link** — opens the matching customer profile in Shopify Admin - **Joined date** — date of the student's first enrollment - **Last activity** — relative time since the student last accessed a lesson ### Enrollment tabs One tab per course the student is enrolled in. **Best for:** seeing detailed progress for a specific course. - **Progress** — percentage of lessons completed - **Enrolled date** — when the student joined this specific course - **Source** — Auto (from a purchase) or Manual (added by you) - **Status** — Active or Revoked - **Lesson progress table** — per-lesson status, watch time, and access count ## Access Actions ### Revoke access Hides the course from the student without deleting their progress. **Best for:** refunds you want to handle manually, policy violations, or trial windows that have ended. - Visible only when enrollment status is Active - Shows a confirmation dialog before applying - The student loses access on their next visit; they are not kicked out of an active session - Progress is preserved and reappears if access is restored later ### Restore access Reactivates a previously revoked enrollment. **Best for:** reversing a refund decision, ending a temporary block, or fixing a mistaken revoke. - Visible only when enrollment status is Revoked - No confirmation needed - Progress is restored exactly as it was before the revoke ## Browsing the List - Open the Students page - Use search, filters, or sort to narrow down results - Click a student name to open the detail page - Switch course tabs to review per-course progress - Click **Revoke access** or **Restore access** to change the student's access on the selected course ## Important Rules - The list shows 20 students per page by default; you can switch to 50 or 100 per page - A student appears once even if they are enrolled in multiple courses; courses show as badges in the row - Revoke and restore can be repeated as many times as needed; each action is logged with a timestamp - A revoked student keeps their progress; restoring brings everything back exactly as it was - A student watching a video at the moment of revoke is not disconnected — the block applies on their next page load - Revoke affects only the specific course; the student keeps access to any other courses they are enrolled in - If the underlying Shopify customer is deleted, the detail page still works but shows "(Customer deleted)" in the profile area [Course](/onlineCourse/course/)[Create student](/onlineCourse/students/create-student/) --- # Avada Order Editing Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/ # Welcome to Avada Order Editing ## Self-Service Order Editing for Shopify Avada Order Editing lets your customers fix their own orders — change the shipping address, add a note, edit items, or cancel — directly from the Order Status Page. Fewer support tickets, fewer wrong-address shipments, happier customers. Every change is logged with a full before/after audit trail, and refunds or extra charges are handled automatically. ## Discover Avada Order Editing [Get StartedInstall the app, configure your rules, and add the widget to your theme in 3 steps.](/order-editing/get-started/install-app)[Edit Shipping AddressLet customers correct their delivery address within a time window you control.](/order-editing/for-customers/edit-address)[Edit ItemsChange variant, change quantity, or add and remove products — with automatic charge or refund of the difference.](/order-editing/for-customers/edit-items)[Cancel an OrderOne-click self-service cancellation with automatic refund and restock — no manual work.](/order-editing/for-customers/cancel-order)[Activity PageSee every change with before/after diffs and a complete audit trail.](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page)[SettingsControl which edits are allowed, the edit time window, max edits per order, and email alerts.](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types) ## Why Avada Order Editing? FeatureAvada Order Editing **Fewer Support Tickets**Customers fix their own orders **Automatic Refund & Restock**No manual work on cancellations **Full Audit Trail**Every edit logged with before/after diffs **You Stay in Control**Time window, allowed edit types, and max edits per order **Email Alerts**Instant for cancellations, batched for edits ## Need Help? - Browse our [FAQ](/order-editing/resources/faq/) for quick answers - Check [Troubleshooting](/order-editing/resources/troubleshooting/) for common issues - **Email us:** [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) [Install the App](/order-editing/get-started/install-app/) --- # Add an Order Note (Customer Flow) Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/for-customers/add-note/ # Add an Order Note (Customer Flow) Order notes are a free-text field on the order. Customers use them for things like *"Leave at the back door"* or *"Gift wrap, please"*. Both you and the customer can edit the note. ## Enabling notes You control whether customers can edit notes. In [Settings → Allowed edit types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/), turn on **Allow customer to add note**. The setting is off by default — when off, only you can add notes from the admin. ## What the customer sees On the Order Status Page, inside the *Edit your order* card, a row labelled **Add order note**. - Click the row → it expands with a textarea pre-filled with any existing note. - Up to 1000 characters. - Click **Save** → row collapses with *Saved* state. The note appears on the order in your Shopify admin under **Notes** in the right sidebar — same field merchants have always had. ## Limits - **1000 characters** max — we trim and warn before save. - **No HTML / scripts** — plain text only, anything tag-like is escaped. - **No PII validation** — if a customer types a card number we do not block it. Train your staff to ignore PII in notes. ## When notes do not show up - The merchant has **Allow customer to add note** off — the row is hidden. - The order is past the [time window](/order-editing/settings/edit-time-window/) — the row is hidden along with the rest of the edit card. ## See also - [Edit shipping address](/order-editing/for-customers/edit-address/) — same UX pattern (inline accordion + immediate save) - [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/) — note edits show up here with full history [Cancel an Order](/order-editing/for-customers/cancel-order/)[Activity Page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/) --- # Cancel an Order (Customer Flow) Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/for-customers/cancel-order/ # Cancel an Order (Customer Flow) Customers can cancel an order themselves if you have **Cancel order** turned on in [Settings → Allowed edit types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/). Cancellation is **immediate** — no approval queue, no merchant action. ## What the customer sees On the Order Status Page, inside the *Edit your order* card, a row labelled **Cancel this order**. Clicking it expands a small confirmation: - A short reason dropdown (*Changed my mind*, *Bought wrong item*, *Found a better price*, *Other*). - A red **Cancel order** button. - A *Keep order* button to back out. When the customer clicks **Cancel order**: - We mark the order as cancelled in Shopify. - We **auto-refund** the full amount to the original payment method. - We **auto-restock** every line item that was reserved. - The Order Status Page updates with a *Cancelled* badge. ## What happens behind the scenes ActionDefaultNotes RefundFull, to original payment methodStripe / Shopify Payments / PayPal — whatever was used RestockAll items, all locationsRespects original reservation Email to customerShopify's standard cancellation emailWe do not send a duplicate Email to merchantSent immediatelyCancellations always email you regardless of [notification setting](/order-editing/settings/notifications/) ## What customers cannot cancel - Orders past the [time window](/order-editing/settings/edit-time-window/) you configured. - Orders that are already **fulfilled**, **partially refunded**, or **on hold for risk review**. - Orders paid via methods we cannot auto-refund (rare — manual gateways). The row hides for those. ## What if the customer changes their mind? Cancellation is final. To re-create the order, the customer places it again on your store. We do this on purpose — restoring a cancelled order would re-reserve inventory and re-charge, which is rarely what anyone actually wants. ## See also - [Email delivery rules](/order-editing/how-it-works/email-delivery/) — why merchant gets the email instantly - [Refund & restock behavior](/order-editing/how-it-works/refund-restock/) — edge cases with mixed payment / multi-location [Edit Items](/order-editing/for-customers/edit-items/)[Add an Order Note](/order-editing/for-customers/add-note/) --- # Edit Shipping Address (Customer Flow) Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/for-customers/edit-address/ # Edit Shipping Address (Customer Flow) This is what your customers see when they want to fix the shipping address after placing an order. You do not have to do anything for each request — the change applies to the order automatically. ## Where the option appears After checkout, Shopify emails the customer an order confirmation with a *View your order* button. That link opens the **Order Status Page**. Our app block sits inline on that page as a card titled *Edit your order*, with a row labelled **Edit shipping address**. If the option is not visible, one of these is true: - The order is past your configured [time window](/order-editing/settings/edit-time-window/). - The order is already fulfilled. - You have **Edit address** turned off in [Settings → Allowed edit types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/). ## What the customer does - Click the **Edit shipping address** row → it expands inline (no new page, no modal). - The current address fields are pre-filled. The customer edits any line. - Click **Save**. We validate the address shape, push the change to Shopify, and the row collapses with a green *Saved* state. There is no *Review & Confirm* step — the save is immediate. The customer can re-open the row and edit again as long as the order is still within the rules. ## What happens behind the scenes - Shopify is the source of truth — we update the address on the order via the Admin API and refresh from Shopify on success. - The change shows up immediately in your Shopify admin order page and on the [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/) inside our app. - If [notifications](/order-editing/settings/notifications/) are set to *all events*, you get an email summarising the diff. If set to *cancel only*, this edit is silent. ## What we do not allow - **Country change** — Shopify recalculates shipping zones / taxes / duties when country changes, which can break the order. Customers can change everything except country. - **Address change after fulfilment** — the carrier already has the package. The row hides as soon as fulfilment status flips. ## See also - [How edit sessions work](/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/) - [Email delivery rules](/order-editing/how-it-works/email-delivery/) [Dashboard Overview](/order-editing/get-started/dashboard-overview/)[Edit Items](/order-editing/for-customers/edit-items/) --- # Edit Items (Customer Flow) Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/for-customers/edit-items/ # Edit Items (Customer Flow) This is what your customers see when they want to change the **products** on an order after checkout — swap a size/colour, change quantity, add another product, or remove one. Each change recalculates the order total and charges or refunds the difference automatically. You do not approve anything per request. Which actions are available depends on what you turned on in [Settings → Allowed edit types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/): **Change product variant**, **Change product quantity**, **Add new products**, **Remove products**. ## Where the option appears On the **Order Status Page**, inside the *Edit your order* card, a row labelled **Edit items**. It only shows if **at least one** of the four item switches is on. If the row is not visible, one of these is true: - All four item switches are off in [Settings → Allowed edit types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/). - The order is past your configured [time window](/order-editing/settings/edit-time-window/), already fulfilled, or a local-delivery order. - The order has hit its [max edits](/order-editing/settings/max-edits/) limit. ## What the customer does Clicking **Edit items** expands the order's line items inline. Each item has an **Edit** button, and below the list there's an **Add new product** button and a live **Price difference** bar. ### Change a variant or quantity - Click **Edit** on an item → an **Edit item** popup opens. - Change **Size / Color** (only the options you allowed appear) and/or the **Quantity** with the stepper. The minus button is disabled at quantity 1; the plus button stops at available stock and shows an *Out of stock* note if the limit is reached. - The **Apply** button stays hidden until something actually changes — then it appears so the customer can confirm. Click **Apply** to keep the change. ### Remove an item - In the **Edit item** popup, click the trash icon. - The footer turns into a **Cancel / Remove** confirmation right there. Click **Remove** to drop the item, or **Cancel** to keep it. - Removing is final for that edit — there is no separate undo. An order must always keep **at least one item**; if a customer tries to remove everything, *Save changes* is blocked and they're pointed to *Cancel this order* instead. ### Add a new product - Click **Add new product** → the **Add More Items** picker opens. - Search by name, pick each product's variant options and quantity, then tick it. Sold-out products/variants show **⚠ Out of stock** and can't be selected. - Click **Add Selected** — the products drop into the item list, and the **Price difference** bar updates. ### Save When done, the customer clicks **Save changes** once. All edits (variant, quantity, add, remove) are committed together in a single update. ## What happens with the money The order total is recalculated and the difference is settled automatically through the **original payment method**: OutcomeWhat the customer sees **Total goes down** (e.g. removed an item)A refund is sent to the original payment method (usually 5–10 business days). **Total goes up** (e.g. added a product)We **email a secure payment link** for the extra amount — there is no in-page checkout redirect. **No change in total**Just a confirmation that the products were updated. ## What happens behind the scenes - Shopify is the source of truth — all changes commit in one transaction, so it's all-or-nothing (no half-applied edits). - The change shows up in your Shopify admin order page and on the [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/) inside our app, tagged **Products**. - If [notifications](/order-editing/settings/notifications/) are set to *all events*, you get an email summarising what changed. ## Limits worth knowing - **At least one item** must remain on the order at all times. - **Adding products** is unavailable when the order's currency differs from your store currency. - A product/variant that sells out **between adding it and saving** is rejected at save time — the customer is asked to review and try again (nothing is half-committed). ## See also - [Allowed edit types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/) — turn each item action on/off - [Refund & restock](/order-editing/how-it-works/refund-restock/) — how money and inventory are handled - [How edit sessions work](/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/) [Edit Shipping Address](/order-editing/for-customers/edit-address/)[Cancel an Order](/order-editing/for-customers/cancel-order/) --- # Activity Page Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/ # Activity Page The **Activity** page is your ledger of every customer-facing change. One row per *edit session* — one customer, one order, one block of edits within 5 minutes. Open a row for the full diff. ## Columns ColumnWhat it shows **Order**Order number (e.g. `#1042`). Click to open the order in your Shopify admin. **Customer**Name + email. **Type***Address*, *Note*, *Cancel*, or *Multiple* (if a session had more than one action). **Status***Active* (still inside the 5-minute session window) or *Completed* (session closed). **Last updated**Timestamp of the last action in the session. Updates live while *Active*; frozen on *Completed*. **Actions**Open the diff modal. ## Filter and search - Date range filter (default *Last 30 days*). - Type filter (*All*, *Address*, *Note*, *Cancel*). - Search by order number or customer email. ## Detail modal Clicking a row opens a side modal with: - **Session summary** — when it started, who did it, how many actions. - **Diff list** — each action with *Before* / *After* values, side by side. - **Open in Shopify** — deep link to the order in your Shopify admin. ## What counts as a session A session is **all actions on the same order by the same customer within 5 minutes** of the first save. Add a note, then change the address 30 seconds later → one session, two diffs. Save again 6 minutes later → second session, separate row. The session window is fixed at 5 minutes from the first save and **does not reset** when the customer saves again. This keeps your activity feed predictable. See [How edit sessions work](/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/) for the full rules. ## Empty state When you have no edits yet, the page shows a friendly empty state with a link to the [Quick Start](/order-editing/get-started/quick-start/) — usually means the widget is not on the theme yet, or no test edit has been placed. [Add an Order Note](/order-editing/for-customers/add-note/)[Edit Orders from Admin](/order-editing/for-merchants/edit-from-admin/) --- # Edit Orders from Admin Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/for-merchants/edit-from-admin/ # Edit Orders from Admin Avada Order Editing extends the Shopify Order page with the same editing power your customers have, plus a few merchant-only actions. This is useful when: - A customer emailed in instead of using the self-serve flow. - The order is past the customer time window but still needs a fix. - You want to add a note or tag yourself. ## Where to find it Go to **Shopify admin → Orders → click any order**, then open **More actions** (top-right of the order) → **Avada Order Editing**. That launches the app for that order so you can apply edits and the merchant-only actions below. ## Actions available ActionNotes **Edit shipping address**Same form as the customer side. No country change. **Add / edit note**Plain text, 1000-char limit. **Add / edit tags**Multi-select. Customer-facing flow does not include tags — admin only. **Add / remove items**Variant search → adjust quantity. Triggers price diff preview. **Cancel order**Same auto-refund + restock behavior as the customer flow. Asks for a reason. ## Price diff preview Whenever an action changes the order total (adding items, removing items, qty change), we show a *Before / After* preview: ``` Subtotal: $80.00 → $112.00 Tax: $ 6.40 → $ 8.96 Total: $86.40 → $120.96 (+$34.56) ``` You confirm or cancel. On confirm, we: - Charge / refund the difference via the original payment method. - Update Shopify with the new line items. - Email the customer (configurable per action). If the original payment method cannot capture extra charge (e.g. some manual gateways), we block the *increase total* action and show why. ## Activity log Every admin-side edit also lands on the [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/), tagged with **Source: admin** so you can tell apart customer-driven and merchant-driven changes. ## See also - [Refund & restock behavior](/order-editing/how-it-works/refund-restock/) - [Manage order tags](/order-editing/for-merchants/manage-tags/) [Activity Page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/)[Manage Order Tags](/order-editing/for-merchants/manage-tags/) --- # Helpdesk & Support Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/for-merchants/helpdesk/ # Helpdesk & Support We run live chat (Crisp) inside the app, plus email for anything bigger. ## Live chat The **Helpdesk** card on your dashboard has a *Chat with us* button. Clicking it opens Crisp inside the app. You stay in your Shopify admin, no new tab. - **Hours**: Monday-Friday 9am-6pm UTC+7. - **Response**: usually within an hour during hours, longer outside. - **Escalation**: if your chat is unanswered after 30 minutes, switch to email — chat may be down. ## Email Email **[support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io)** for: - Anything that needs screenshots or files. - Bug reports outside live chat hours. - Account / billing questions. ## What to include in a support request Bug reports are easier to fix when you include: - **Store domain** — `*.myshopify.com` is fine. - **Order number** that reproduced the bug, if relevant. - **What you did** — clicked X, expected Y, got Z. - **Screenshot or short Loom** — saves a lot of back-and-forth. - **Browser + device** — *"Chrome on Mac"* is enough. For storefront bugs (the customer side), also include: - Theme name and version. - The Order Status Page URL of the affected order (we can replay). - Any console errors from the browser dev tools. ## Status page We are working on a public status page — for now, if the app dashboard does not load, check [@AvadaIO on X (opens in a new tab)](https://twitter.com/AvadaIO) for incident posts. [Manage Order Tags](/order-editing/for-merchants/manage-tags/)[Allowed Edit Types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/) --- # Manage Order Tags Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/for-merchants/manage-tags/ # Manage Order Tags Order tags are a free-form labelling system on the Shopify order. Avada Order Editing lets you add, edit, or remove tags directly from our admin card on the Order page — and (optionally) auto-tag orders that have been edited or cancelled. ## Why use tags - **Filter in your Shopify admin** — *all orders tagged address-edited after fulfilment*. - **Trigger Shopify Flow** — *if order tagged customer-cancelled, send slack alert*. - **Segment for analytics** — see which tag drives the most refunds. ## Manual tagging Order tags live in Shopify's native **Tags** field on the order page (right column). You manage them there as usual: - Open an order in Shopify admin. - In the **Tags** field (right column), type a tag and press Enter — or pick from existing tags via dropdown. - Save. Avada Order Editing reads and writes the **same** native tags field, so anything the app auto-tags shows up here too. ## Auto-tagging (optional) Two switches in [Settings → General](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/): - **Auto-tag edited orders** with `order-edited` (off by default). - **Auto-tag cancelled orders** with `order-cancelled` (off by default). When on, every successful customer edit / cancel adds the tag automatically. Existing tags are kept — we only add ours. ## What about customers tagging? Customers cannot edit tags from the storefront. This is intentional — tags often gate internal workflows, and we do not want a customer accidentally clearing them. If you have a real use case for customer tag editing, [tell us](mailto:support@avada.io). ## Removing tags Remove a tag the same way: open the order's **Tags** field, click the × on the chip, save. Removing a tag we auto-added does not re-add on the next edit — once you remove, it stays removed. [Edit Orders from Admin](/order-editing/for-merchants/edit-from-admin/)[Helpdesk & Support](/order-editing/for-merchants/helpdesk/) --- # Dashboard Overview Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/get-started/dashboard-overview/ # Dashboard Overview The **Home** screen is the first thing you see when you open the app. It is built around three things: stats you care about, what to do next, and how to get help. ## Greeting + date range At the top: a greeting (*"Good morning, [your name]"*) and a date range filter — default *Last 30 days*. The filter applies to all metric cards below. ## Metric cards Two cards summarise the period: - **Edits this period** — total successful customer edits. Address changes, notes, and any future edit types all count here. - **Cancellations this period** — total customer-initiated cancellations. Each one auto-refunds and restocks unless you have changed those defaults. ## Quickstart card A 3-step onboarding checklist: - **Configure settings** — done when you visit *Settings* and save once. - **Enable the app** — done when the master toggle is on. - **Add the widget** — done when our app block is detected on your Order Status Page. When all three are green, the card shows *3 / 3 completed* and stays collapsed. You can re-expand it any time. ## Helpdesk card A *Chat with us* button opens our live chat (Crisp) so you can talk to support without leaving the app. ## What you will not see here - **Per-order details** — those live on the [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/). - **Settings** — separate sidebar item, not on the dashboard. The dashboard is intentionally short. If you find yourself wanting more here, [tell us what is missing](mailto:support@avada.io). [Quick Start (3 Steps)](/order-editing/get-started/quick-start/)[Edit Shipping Address](/order-editing/for-customers/edit-address/) --- # Install the App Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/get-started/install-app/ # Install the App Avada Order Editing installs in the same way as any other Shopify app. ## Steps - Open the [Avada Order Editing listing (opens in a new tab)](https://apps.shopify.com/avada-order-editing) on the Shopify App Store. - Click **Install app**. - Shopify shows an access request screen with the permissions the app needs (orders, customers, theme app extensions, etc.). Click **Install app** again to confirm. - Shopify redirects you back to your admin and the app opens on the **Home** dashboard. ## Permissions the app requests ScopeWhy we need it **Orders (read & write)**Read order details, apply customer edits, issue refunds on cancel **Customers**Verify the customer who is requesting the edit **Discount codes**Recalculate price diffs when items change **Theme app extensions**Inject the *Edit your order* block on the Order Status Page **Order tags**Tag edited / cancelled orders (optional, off by default) ## What happens on first launch On first launch, the app creates safe defaults so nothing is empty: - **Allowed edit types**: address only (cancel and note off until you turn them on). - **Edit time window**: off (customer can edit until the order is fulfilled). - **Email notifications**: *cancel only* (only cancellations email you, edits are silent). - **Quickstart card** on the dashboard with 3 steps to finish setup. You can change all of these in [Settings](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/). ## Next step Continue to the [Quick Start (3 Steps)](/order-editing/get-started/quick-start/) guide — it gets the app live on your store in about 5 minutes. ## Uninstalling Go to your Shopify admin → **Apps** → find *Avada Order Editing* → click **Delete**. We delete your store data within 48 hours per GDPR. See the [Privacy Policy](/order-editing/resources/privacy-policy/) for details. [Introduction](/order-editing/)[Quick Start (3 Steps)](/order-editing/get-started/quick-start/) --- # Quick Start (3 Steps) Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/get-started/quick-start/ # Quick Start (3 Steps) The **Quickstart** card on your dashboard tracks these three steps. Once all three are done, your customers can start editing their orders. ## Step 1 — Configure your settings Open **Settings** in the sidebar and decide: - **Allowed edit types** — which actions you let customers perform: *Edit address*, *Cancel order*, *Add note*. You can enable any combination. - **Edit time window** — until when customers can edit. Options: *until fulfilled* (default) or *within X hours / minutes after order*. - **Max edits per order** — cap how many times a single order can be edited (off by default = unlimited). - **Email notifications** — *all events* (every edit + cancel) or *cancel only* (default). Read the full settings guide at [Settings → Allowed edit types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/). ## Step 2 — Enable the app The app is **off by default** until you flip the master toggle. Open **Settings** and turn on **Enable customer-facing edits**. This is the kill-switch — if anything goes wrong you can disable instantly without uninstalling. ## Step 3 — Add the widget to your theme The customer-facing block is a Shopify Theme App Extension. To add it: - Open your theme editor: **Online Store → Themes → Customize**. - From the top dropdown, switch to **Order Status Page** (under *Checkout & system pages* in newer themes, or the customer account flow in older themes). - Click **Add block** in the main section and pick **Edit your order — Avada**. - Save. Now place a test order on your store and open the order from the confirmation email — you should see the *Edit your order* card inline: ## Verify it works The Quickstart card on your dashboard will show *3 / 3 completed* once all three steps are done. If a step is missing, the card shows you exactly which one. ## Next step - Walk customers through the [Customer edit flow](/order-editing/for-customers/edit-address/). - Check the [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/) after your first edit comes in. [Install the App](/order-editing/get-started/install-app/)[Dashboard Overview](/order-editing/get-started/dashboard-overview/) --- # How Edit Sessions Work Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/ # How Edit Sessions Work A **session** is the unit we count, log, and email about. Most merchants never need to know what a session is — but if you want to understand the timing in your activity log or email cadence, this is the page. ## The rule A session is **all actions on the same order by the same customer within 5 minutes of the first save**. The 5-minute window is **fixed** — it starts when the customer first saves something, and it does **not reset** when they save again. After 5 minutes, the session closes. Any save after that opens a new session. We picked fixed-window over debounce on purpose. Debounce ("reset every save") makes the cadence unpredictable for both the customer and you. ## State machine A session is in one of three states: StateMeaning **Active**First save happened, less than 5 minutes ago, and not closed yet. **Completed**5 minutes have passed since the first save. Locked in. **Cancelled**The customer cancelled the order during the session — supersedes everything. Only **completed** and **cancelled** sessions trigger merchant emails (in *all events* mode). Active sessions are visible on the [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/) live. ## How sessions show up ### On the Activity page - **Status column** = session state. - **Last updated** = timestamp of the last action in the session. Updates live while *Active*. ### In the email - **One email per completed session** in *all events* mode. - **Cancel** breaks out: the cancel email fires the moment cancel happens, not when the session closes. ### Counting against the cap If you have [Max edits per order](/order-editing/settings/max-edits/) on, the count is **per session**, not per save. 5 saves in 4 minutes = 1 session = +1 to the count. ## What if the customer is on the page and the window closes mid-edit? The save still goes through. We close the session at the 5-minute mark and the next save opens a new one. From the customer's perspective there is no UI change — they just keep editing. From your side, the activity log gets a second row. ## Implementation notes (for the curious) - We use a Cloud Tasks scheduled job that fires 5 minutes after the first save to close the session, snapshot the diff, and trigger the email. - The session ID is stored on the `orderEdits` document along with `sessionStartAt` and `sessionStatus`. - Concurrency: if two saves happen within milliseconds, we serialize on the order ID to avoid race conditions on the diff. [Email Notifications](/order-editing/settings/notifications/)[Email Delivery](/order-editing/how-it-works/email-delivery/) --- # Email Delivery Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/how-it-works/email-delivery/ # Email Delivery We follow two rules so your inbox stays useful: - **Cancellations email immediately.** Always. - **Edit events email once per session, when the session closes.** That's it. The rest of this page is the why. ## Timing diagram ``` Customer saves address T+0:00 → session opens, no email yet Customer saves note T+0:30 → joins same session, no email Customer saves address again T+2:00 → joins same session, no email T+5:00 → session closes T+5:00 → ONE email sent with all 3 diffs Customer cancels order T+anytime → email sent immediately (separate) ``` ## Why batched edits A nervous customer can save the same address 4 times in 30 seconds while reading it back to themselves. Sending 4 emails turns the merchant inbox into noise. One email with the final state is cleaner and more actionable. ## Why instant cancel A cancel changes inventory and refund state — you may need to act fast (stop the picker, check fraud signals). Batching cancels would defeat the point. ## What happens if I have cancel only on? EventMode = all eventsMode = cancel only Customer edits addressBatched email at session closeNo email Customer adds noteBatched email at session closeNo email Customer cancelsInstant emailInstant email So **cancel-only** silences edits entirely — that is its purpose. Default for new merchants because most edits are low-stakes. ## Recipients The store's **support email** in Shopify Settings → General. Change there, we pick up automatically. ## Deliverability We send via Sendgrid. If your support email is hosted on Gmail Workspace or Outlook, expect ~99% inbox rate. If you use a custom domain, add our SPF / DKIM records (see the Crisp helpdesk article — we send the records on signup). ## See also - [How edit sessions work](/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/) — what closes a session - [Email notifications setting](/order-editing/settings/notifications/) — switch between *all events* and *cancel only* [Edit Sessions](/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/)[Refund & Restock](/order-editing/how-it-works/refund-restock/) --- # Refund & Restock Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/how-it-works/refund-restock/ # Refund & Restock When a cancellation goes through (customer self-serve or merchant-side), we run two actions automatically. ## Default behavior ActionWhat we doConfigurable **Refund**Full refund to the original payment method.No (MVP). **Restock**Restock every item to the original location it was reserved from.No (MVP). This matches Shopify's "*Refund and restock*" checkbox — we always tick both for self-serve cancels. The cancellation detail — reason, refund amount, refund status, and whether items were restocked — is recorded on the [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/): ## Edge cases ### Mixed payment methods If the order was paid with a gift card + credit card, the refund splits the same way Shopify splits it natively. We do not override. ### Multi-location restock If an order pulled inventory from two locations, the restock returns each line item to its original reservation location. There is no merge-to-one-location step. ### Manual gateways Some manual / offline payment methods cannot be refunded via API. For those, the *Cancel order* row hides on the customer-facing widget — we do not show an option we cannot honor. Cancel from your Shopify admin manually if needed. ### Partial fulfilment If part of the order has shipped, we treat the order as **fulfilled** and the cancel option hides. Issuing a partial refund/restock for the remaining items requires merchant judgement (e.g., is the carrier still able to recall?). We do not auto-do that. ### High-risk orders If Shopify flagged the order as high risk and you have not approved the charge, the refund still works (no charge to refund). The order goes to *cancelled* state cleanly. ## What about store credit? MVP does not offer store-credit refunds. Roadmap item — currently planned for the post-MVP P1 release. [Email us](mailto:support@avada.io) if this is critical for your store. ## What if the customer wants to re-place the order? They place a new order on the storefront. We do not "uncancel". This is intentional — uncancelling re-reserves inventory and re-charges, which rarely matches the customer's intent. [Email Delivery](/order-editing/how-it-works/email-delivery/)[FAQ](/order-editing/resources/faq/) --- # Changelog Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/resources/changelog/ # Changelog ## v1.0 — MVP launch (2026-05) The first public version. Includes: - Customer-facing inline edit on Order Status Page (address, note, cancel). - Customer-facing item edits: change variant, change quantity, add product, remove product — each toggleable in Settings → Allowed Edit Types. - Merchant Dashboard with metrics, Quickstart, and Helpdesk cards. - Activity page with session-based grouping and full diff modal. - Settings: allowed edit types, time window, max edits per order, email notifications. - Merchant-side editing on Shopify Order page (address, items, tags, notes, cancel). - Email notifications: *cancel only* (default) or *all events* with hybrid delivery (instant cancel / batched edits). - GDPR webhooks + 48-hour uninstall data purge. - Auto-tag on edit / cancel (off by default). ## Roadmap (post-MVP) Tracked publicly so you can vote / request: - **Custom email templates** — override the default merchant + customer emails. - **Multi-language storefront** — i18n for the customer widget. - **Store-credit refunds** — alternative to cash refund on cancel. - **Custom rules per product / collection** — finer-grain control of allowed edits. - **Shopify Flow trigger** — first-class trigger on edit / cancel events. - **Address validation** — Google address validation pass before save. [Tell us what to prioritize](mailto:support@avada.io). [Troubleshooting](/order-editing/resources/troubleshooting/)[Privacy Policy](/order-editing/resources/privacy-policy/) --- # FAQ Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/resources/faq/ # FAQ ## Is the app free? Yes — Avada Order Editing is free during MVP. Pricing tiers will roll out post-launch and existing free-plan installs are grandfathered for at least 90 days with notice. ## Does this work on the legacy customer accounts? Yes. The app block sits on the **Order Status Page** which exists in both classic and the new customer accounts. We render whichever Shopify is currently using. ## Can a customer change country in the address? No. Country change recalculates shipping zones, taxes, and duties — too easy to break the order. Customers can change every field except country. ## What happens if the customer hits the time window mid-edit? If the order is now past the time window when they hit *Save*, the save is rejected with a friendly message. The customer's typed values are not lost in the form, but they cannot persist them. ## Can I edit my own emails / templates? MVP uses fixed templates. Custom templates are on the roadmap. ## Does the widget slow down my Order Status Page? The block is lazy-loaded — only when the page is visible. Lighthouse perf score on a typical OSP is unchanged within ±2 points. ## Is this GDPR compliant? Yes. We respond to Shopify's three GDPR webhooks: `customers/data_request`, `customers/redact`, `shop/redact`. Data is purged within 48 hours of uninstall. See the [Privacy Policy](/order-editing/resources/privacy-policy/). ## What if the customer's order is paid with a gift card? Refunds on cancel return funds the same way Shopify splits them — gift card portion to the gift card, payment-method portion to the original card. ## Does Avada Order Editing work with Shopify Flow? We do not have a first-class Flow trigger yet, but the app sets order tags on edit / cancel (when you turn auto-tag on) — you can drive Flow off those. ## Multi-language? English-only at MVP. i18n is on the roadmap. ## More questions? [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) — we usually answer within an hour during business hours. [Refund & Restock](/order-editing/how-it-works/refund-restock/)[Troubleshooting](/order-editing/resources/troubleshooting/) --- # Privacy Policy Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/resources/privacy-policy/ # Privacy Policy This page summarises how Avada Order Editing collects, uses, and deletes data. The full legal text is at [avada.io/privacy (opens in a new tab)](https://avada.io). ## What we collect ### From the merchant (your store) - Store domain, store name, support email — to identify the install. - Currency, plan, timezone — to render the dashboard correctly. - App settings (allowed edit types, time window, etc.) — what you typed in. ### From customers (when they use the widget) - Order ID, customer email, the address fields they edited. - The *before* and *after* values — so the merchant can see the diff. - A timestamp and session ID — for activity logging. We do **not** collect payment card information, browser fingerprints, or anything not directly tied to the edit. ## How we use it - Power the app — Activity page, emails, dashboard metrics. - Diagnose bugs — engineering can see anonymised error traces. - That is it. We do not sell, share, or rent any of this data. ## Where it lives Firestore (Google Cloud, EU region for EU stores, US region for US stores). Encrypted at rest, TLS in transit. ## How long we keep it - **Activity log** — 12 months. Older entries auto-purge. - **Edit session metadata** — 90 days. - **Aggregated metrics** (counts only) — kept indefinitely for the dashboard. - **PII** (customer emails, addresses) — purged 90 days after the related order is fulfilled. ## GDPR webhooks Shopify sends three GDPR webhooks; we honor all three: WebhookOur action `customers/data_request`We email the merchant a JSON export of all data we hold for that customer within 30 days. `customers/redact`We delete all PII for that customer within 30 days, keeping only anonymised counts. `shop/redact`We delete the entire store record within 48 hours. ## Uninstall When you uninstall, Shopify sends `app/uninstalled`. We: - Disable the app immediately (no further writes). - Schedule full data purge in 48 hours (Shopify gives a grace window for re-installs). - Send `shop/redact` confirmation back to Shopify when complete. ## Sub-processors ServicePurposeRegion Google Cloud (Firestore, Cloud Functions)Hosting + databasePer-store region SendgridTransactional emailUS CrispLive chat / helpdeskEU ## Contact Data protection officer: [privacy@avada.io](mailto:privacy@avada.io). [Changelog](/order-editing/resources/changelog/) --- # Troubleshooting Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/resources/troubleshooting/ # Troubleshooting ## The widget does not appear on the Order Status Page Check, in order: - **App enabled?** Settings → master toggle on. - **Block added to theme?** Online Store → Themes → Customize → Order Status Page → look for *Edit your order — Avada* block. If missing, [add the widget](/order-editing/get-started/quick-start/). - **Time window expired?** If the order is older than your configured window, the widget hides on purpose. - **Order fulfilled?** Same — the widget hides post-fulfilment. - **All edit types disabled?** With all three switches in [Allowed edit types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/) off, the widget is hidden. ## Customer says save failed but I see no error Most common cause: address validation failed silently. Check: - Was the customer trying to change country? That is blocked. - Is the postal code valid for the country? Shopify rejects on its end. If those are fine, check the [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/) — failed saves are *not* logged (because nothing changed). Have the customer retry while you watch the page in real time. ## I am not getting merchant emails Check: - **Notifications setting** — is it on *cancel only* and the event was an edit, not a cancel? - **Support email** in Shopify Settings → General — is it correct and active? - **Spam folder** — first emails sometimes land there until your provider learns we are legit. - **Edits are batched** — emails fire 5 minutes after the *first* save, not after the last. Wait the full window. ## Cancellation is not refunding The order's payment method is likely manual / offline. Our *Cancel* row hides for those — but if you cancelled from the merchant admin instead, the cancellation goes through *without* the refund. Issue the refund manually from Shopify's Refund button. ## Activity page is empty even after a customer edited Most common cause: the customer's session is still **Active** and the table is filtered to *Completed* by default. Switch the filter to *All* or wait 5 minutes. ## My theme blew up after adding the block The block is non-destructive — it only adds itself to the section you dropped it in. Most theme errors after adding the block are pre-existing issues that surface because the OSP got re-rendered. Remove the block and the issue should still be there. If removing the block fixes it, [send us your theme name + version](mailto:support@avada.io) — we want to fix the conflict. ## Still stuck? [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) — include order number, store domain, and a screenshot. [FAQ](/order-editing/resources/faq/)[Changelog](/order-editing/resources/changelog/) --- # Allowed Edit Types Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/ # Allowed Edit Types The second card in **Settings** (below *Edit Limits*). It controls what shows up on the customer-facing widget. ## Core switches SwitchWhat it lets the customer do **Edit shipping address**Change any address line except country. **Cancel order**Cancel with auto-refund + restock. **Edit order note**Free-text 1000-char note on the order. ## Edit items The same card has an **Edit items** section that lets customers change the products on their order: SwitchWhat it lets the customer do **Change product variant**Swap to another variant (size, color…) of the same product. **Change product quantity**Increase or decrease the quantity of a line item. **Add new products to order**Add another product — flagged **Higher risk** because it can raise the order total and trigger an extra charge. **Remove products from order**Remove a line item, with refund for the removed amount. Item edits recalculate the order total and charge or refund the difference through the original payment method. After changing any switch, click **Save** (top right) to apply. Customers visiting the Order Status Page after that see the new set of options. 💡 Not sure what a switch does to the customer view? The [Preview](/order-editing/settings/preview/) panel on the right shows it live as you toggle — before you save. ## How to think about this - **Address only** — safest for new merchants. Cancellations are sticky to undo, address is reversible. - **Address + cancel** — great for stores with high *changed-my-mind* tickets. Auto-refund means zero work for you. - **All three** — most permissive. If your AOV is high or your fulfilment is slow, give customers the most control. You can change this at any time. The change applies to **all orders within the time window** — including orders placed *before* you flipped the switch. ## When the customer sees nothing If all three are off, the *Edit your order* card is hidden entirely on the Order Status Page. No empty state, no nag — clean. ## See also - [Edit time window](/order-editing/settings/edit-time-window/) — until when customers can edit - [Email notifications](/order-editing/settings/notifications/) — who gets emailed and when [Helpdesk & Support](/order-editing/for-merchants/helpdesk/)[Refund Method](/order-editing/settings/refund-method/) --- # Edit Time Window Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/settings/edit-time-window/ # Edit Time Window The **Edit Limits** card — the first card in **Settings** — decides when the customer-facing widget hides itself. Tick **Limit edit time after checkout** to switch from the default (until fulfilled) to a fixed window. ## Two modes ### Mode 1 — Until fulfilled (default) The customer can edit until the order is **fulfilled** in Shopify. The moment fulfilment status flips, the widget hides — even mid-edit, the next save is blocked with a friendly *"This order is now in fulfillment"* message. This is the **most permissive** option and the one we recommend for most stores. It mirrors how customers think — *"my package hasn't shipped yet, of course I can change it"*. ### Mode 2 — Fixed window after order Tick **Allow edits for** and set a window in **hours and minutes**. Examples: - `0h 30m` — half-hour grace period. - `2h 0m` — fits a 2-hour pick window. - `24h 0m` — covers a full day. When the window expires, the widget hides regardless of fulfilment state. If fulfilment happens *before* the window expires, fulfilment wins (the widget hides early). The dropdown is gone in v6.0+. We use a checkbox + two number inputs because *"6 hours 30 minutes"* is hard to express in a single dropdown. ## What the customer sees when blocked If the order is past the window or already fulfilled, the entire *Edit your order* card is hidden. We do **not** show a *"You can no longer edit"* banner — that creates support pings (*"why not?"*) without giving any value back. ## Edge cases - **Partial fulfilment** — we treat as fulfilled. Better safe. - **Fulfilment cancelled** — the window does *not* re-open. Once expired, always expired. - **Pre-orders / draft orders** — not in scope for MVP. ## See also - [Max edits per order](/order-editing/settings/max-edits/) — cap how many sessions a single order can have - [How edit sessions work](/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/) — what counts as one edit [Preview](/order-editing/settings/preview/)[Max Edits per Order](/order-editing/settings/max-edits/) --- # Max Edits per Order Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/settings/max-edits/ # Max Edits per Order Part of the **Edit Limits** card (the first card in **Settings**), alongside the time window. Optional cap on edit *sessions* per order. ## How it works - Tick **Limit edits per order**. - Set a number — e.g. `3`. - Save. From now on, each order can have at most 3 edit **sessions**. When the limit is hit, the customer-facing widget hides on that specific order with no further explanation. ## What counts as one edit A **session** is the unit we count, not individual saves. One session = all actions on the same order by the same customer within 5 minutes of the first save. So if a customer: - Changes the address, then 30 seconds later adds a note → **1 session**. - Saves a note, comes back 6 minutes later and saves another → **2 sessions**. This rule keeps the cap fair. A nervous customer who edits the same field three times in a row is not punished. ## Why session-based? Earlier versions of the app counted every individual save. Customers hitting the limit by re-reading the address back to themselves was a real support volume problem. Session-based counting fixed it. ## When the limit is not useful - **Cancellation does not count** — a customer cannot edit-edit-edit-cancel and then create a new order with the same problem. Cancel is its own action. - **Admin edits do not count** — when you edit from the Shopify admin, you are not bound by this limit. - **Default is OFF** — most merchants do not need it. Turn it on only if you see real abuse. ## See also - [How edit sessions work](/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/) — full session rules - [Activity page](/order-editing/for-merchants/activity-page/) — how sessions appear in your log [Edit Time Window](/order-editing/settings/edit-time-window/)[Email Notifications](/order-editing/settings/notifications/) --- # Email Notifications Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/settings/notifications/ # Email Notifications The **Notifications** card — the last card in **Settings**. Controls when *you* get an email about a customer change. Customer-facing emails are unaffected — Shopify still sends its own confirmation/cancellation emails. ## The two modes Option (as labelled in the app)What you get emailed about **Email me for all changes**Every edit (address, note, items) **and** every cancellation. **Email me only when an order is canceled**Only cancellations. Edits are silent. Pick *only when an order is canceled* if you ignore address-change emails — cancellations have an action attached (check stock, follow up), edits usually don't. ## Hybrid delivery — no email spam Even in *all events* mode, we do not email you for every save. Two rules: - **Cancellations email immediately.** Always. Across both modes. - **Edit events are batched per session.** One email per session, sent when the session closes (5 minutes after the first save). So a customer who saves an address, a note, and another address change within 4 minutes triggers **one email** with a combined diff — not three. ## What the email looks like The merchant email is intentionally simple: - **Subject** — *Order #1042 was edited by your customer* / *Order #1042 was cancelled*. - **Header** — store name + order number. - **Summary** — *"Address changed, note updated"*, etc. - **Before / after diff** — only the fields that changed. - **One CTA** — *View order in Shopify*. We removed the secondary CTAs, footer fluff, and *"No action required"* banner from older versions. If you have feedback on the template, [let us know](mailto:support@avada.io). ## Where the email goes The store's **support email** in Shopify (Settings → General). You cannot change the recipient inside our app — change it in Shopify and we pick it up. ## See also - [Email delivery rules](/order-editing/how-it-works/email-delivery/) — full timing diagram - [How edit sessions work](/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/) — when a session closes [Max Edits per Order](/order-editing/settings/max-edits/)[Edit Sessions](/order-editing/how-it-works/edit-session/) --- # Preview Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/settings/preview/ # Preview Next to the settings (on the right of the **Settings** page) is a live **Preview** panel. It shows the customer-facing *Edit your order* widget exactly as it will appear on the Order Status Page — and it updates **instantly** as you flip switches, before you even click Save. ## Why it's there You no longer have to place a test order and open your storefront to check your configuration. Toggle a switch on the left and watch the customer view change on the right — what shows up, in what order, and what each option lets the customer do. ## What it reflects Setting you changeWhat happens in the preview **Allowed Edit Types** (address, cancel, note)The matching option appears or disappears in the widget. **Edit items** (variant, quantity, add, remove)Shows the **Edit items** option; opening it reflects which actions are available. **Edit Time Window**Shows the countdown badge (e.g. *1h 45m remaining*), or hides it when no time limit is set. **All edit types off**The preview shows that the widget won't appear to customers at all. **Email Notifications**No effect — notifications are emails to you, not part of the customer view. The preview reads your **current, unsaved** changes — so it's a safe place to experiment before committing. ## See what customers can set Click any option inside the preview to expand the exact screen your customer would use: - **Edit shipping address** — the address form. - **Edit items** — the item list with **Edit** and **Add new product**. Open **Edit** to see the variant/quantity/remove screen; open **Add new product** to see the product picker. Each control appears only if you enabled the matching switch. - **Add order note** — the note box. - **Cancel this order** — the refund summary and reason. ## Desktop & mobile Use the **Desktop / Mobile** toggle at the top of the panel to preview both layouts. Most storefront traffic is mobile, so it's worth a look at the phone view. ## Good to know - The preview is a close approximation — the exact colors and fonts on your live store follow **your theme**. - It uses **sample data** (a demo order and products), not a real order. - The widget only appears to a real customer when the order is still editable (not fulfilled, not cancelled, within the time window). ## See also - [Allowed Edit Types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/) — choose what customers can change - [Edit time window](/order-editing/settings/edit-time-window/) — until when customers can edit [Refund Method](/order-editing/settings/refund-method/)[Edit Time Window](/order-editing/settings/edit-time-window/) --- # Refund Method Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-editing/settings/refund-method/ # Refund Method The **Refund method** setting in **Settings** decides where a customer's money goes whenever an edit or a cancellation refunds them. Keep refunds on the original payment method, or hand them back as **store credit** so the money stays in your store for the customer's next order. ## Two options Open **Settings → Editing rules** and find the **Refund method** card. OptionWhat happens **Original payment method** (default)Refunds go back to the card or wallet the customer paid with, exactly as before. **Store credit**The refund is added to the customer's store credit balance, which they can spend on a future order. This applies to **every refund the app makes**: when a customer removes an item, lowers a quantity, switches to a cheaper variant, applies a discount, or cancels the order. ## Set an expiry (optional) When you choose **Store credit**, tick **Set an expiry date for store credit** and enter how many days the credit stays valid. Leave it off and the credit never expires. Shopify does not send an "expiring soon" reminder for store credit. If you set an expiry, keep the window reasonable and let customers know, so the credit gets used in time. ## Before you switch to store credit For customers to actually **spend** store credit, two Shopify settings must be turned on. These live in your **Shopify admin**, not in the app: - **New customer accounts** — Shopify **Settings → Customer accounts**. - **Apply store credit at checkout** — Shopify **Settings → Payments**. If these are off, the credit is still issued but the customer cannot spend it, so turn them on before you switch the refund method. ## What the customer sees When a refund will be issued as store credit, the customer sees a clear note before they confirm an edit or a cancellation on their order status page: The confirmation email for the edit or cancellation also shows the store credit amount, the expiry date (if you set one), and how to use it. To spend the credit, the customer signs in to their account with the order email (a one-time code, no password needed) and chooses **Apply store credit** at checkout. ## Good to know - **Guest orders**: if an order has no customer account, the app automatically refunds the original payment method instead, so no one receives credit they can't use. - **Currency**: store credit is issued in the currency the customer paid in, and can only be spent in that same currency at checkout. - **Switching back**: change the setting to **Original payment method** at any time. It only affects refunds made after the change. ## See also - [Cancel an Order](/order-editing/for-customers/cancel-order/) — a common trigger for a refund - [Email Notifications](/order-editing/settings/notifications/) — the emails that tell customers about their refund - [Allowed Edit Types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/) — what customers can change [Allowed Edit Types](/order-editing/settings/allowed-edit-types/)[Preview](/order-editing/settings/preview/) --- # Getting started with Avada Order Limit Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/ # Getting started with Avada Order Limit ### What you can do with Avada Order Limit The app turns one big question — *"how do I keep customers from buying too little, too much, or the wrong combination?"* — into five focused limit types. Each type targets a different scope, and you can run as many of them in parallel as you need. Limit typeWhat it controls **Product limit**Minimum and maximum **quantity, total value, or total weight** for specific products (or every product in your store). Best for protecting hot SKUs and enforcing per-product caps. **Collection limit**Minimum and maximum **quantity or total value**, counted across every product inside a Shopify collection. Useful for category-wide rules — e.g., a shopper can add at most 3 items total from your "Limited Edition" collection to a single cart. **Customer limit**Limits scoped by customer tag. Apply different rules to wholesalers, VIPs, B2B accounts, or any segment you tag in Shopify. **Order limit**Whole-cart caps based on the total number of items, the cart value, or the cart weight. Great for shipping thresholds, minimum order values, and store-wide quantity ceilings. **Product blocking**Stops specific products from being purchased together — for example, blocking a discount item when a competing SKU is already in the cart. ### Why merchants reach for it - **Protect inventory during sales.** Cap quantities so the first 50 customers don't take every unit. - **Enforce fairness.** Give more shoppers a shot at hot drops by limiting how many a single customer can buy. - **Encourage bulk buys.** Require minimums for wholesale offers, packs, or B2B catalogs. - **Stay compliant.** Enforce purchase caps for products with legal restrictions (age-gated, regional, regulated). - **Lock in shipping economics.** Use Order limits to require a minimum cart value or weight before checkout. ### How a limit works, end to end Every limit you create follows the same flow inside the app: - **Choose a limit type** — Product, Collection, Customer, Order, or Product blocking. - **Name the limit** — internal-only, so use a descriptive name for your future self. - **Pick what the limit applies to** — specific products, a collection, a customer tag, or the whole cart. - **Set the condition** — minimum/maximum **quantity**, **value**, or **weight**, plus optional multiples and per-variant behavior. - **Configure advanced settings** — start/end dates, when to notify the customer, re-purchase rules, and an optional "Contact us" link. - **Customize the message** — write the on-storefront text and use variables to keep it dynamic. When the customer hits the limit in the storefront, the app shows the message you wrote and (depending on the rule) disables the Checkout button until the cart matches. ### Pick your first limit Most merchants start with one of these two: - **Cap a single hot product.** Use [Create a Product limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-product-limit/) to set "max 2 per order" on a specific SKU. - **Set a minimum order value.** Use [Create an Order limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-order-limit/) to require a $50 cart minimum. From there, layer on Collection, Customer, and Product blocking rules as your store grows. ### Furthermore Once you've got a feel for the basics, dig into the advanced features: - **Multiples** — force purchases in pairs, six-packs, or any custom bundle size. - **Skip quantity values** — block specific quantities (e.g., 9 and 18) from being added to the cart. - **Re-purchase limit** — limit how often a customer can buy the same product over time. - **Branding & translation** — match the limit message to your store's look and translate it for international shoppers. And there you have it! You now know what Avada Order Limit can do and how the pieces fit together. Pick a limit type that matches a real problem in your store and walk through the matching guide — most merchants have their first rule live in under 10 minutes. If you have any questions or run into any issues, don't hesitate to reach out. We're here to help! **Next:** [App Overview](/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/dashboard/) [Dashboard](/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/dashboard/) --- # Create Collection Limit Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/create-collection-limit/ # Create Collection Limit 💡 **Requires:** Free plan (notification timing and re-purchase rules require Paid plan) ### Step 1: Open Limits management and create a new limit From the left-hand menu of the app, click **Limits management** to open the list of your rules. Click **Create new order limit** (or **Create new limit**, in the top-right, if you already have rules) to open the limit type chooser. ### Step 2: Choose the limit type On the limit type chooser, find the **Collection limit** card and click **Select**. Each Collection limit is independent — you can run several at once across different collections, each with its own conditions and date window. ### Step 3: Name your limit In the **General** card, enter a name in the **Limit Name** field. This name is for internal use only — customers will never see it. Use something descriptive like "Black Friday — max 3 from Sneakers collection" so you can audit your rules later. ### Step 4: Select the collection to limit Under **Select collections to limit**, click the **Select collection** button to open the collection picker. - Search for a collection by name. - Tick the collection(s) you want to limit. - Click **Select** to confirm. You can pick more than one collection — the same min/max rule applies across all of them. ### Step 5: Set the limit conditions Open the **Limit conditions** card and choose the **Condition type** that matches what you want to cap: Condition typeWhat it caps **Total product quantity**Total number of units from the selected collection in the cart. **Total product value**Money value of items from the selected collection. Currency follows your store. Then fill in the min/max fields: - **Minimum quantity from collection** / **Maximum quantity from collection** - **Minimum value from collection** / **Maximum value from collection** ⚠️ Leave the **maximum** field blank to set **no upper limit**. Set **maximum = 0** to block customers from purchasing any product in the collection. #### Sell product in multiples (Total product quantity only) Tick **Sell product in multiples** to force purchases in fixed bundle sizes (e.g., pairs, six-packs). When enabled, you also pick where the multiple applies via the **Apply multiple to** dropdown: - **Collection** — total quantity from the collection must be a multiple. - **Each product** — each product in the collection must be added in multiples. - **Each variant** — each variant must be added in multiples. ### Step 6: Configure Advanced Settings Expand the **Advanced Setting** card to control *when* the limit is active, *how* the notification behaves, and *whether* re-purchase rules apply. #### Active dates - **Start date** — the date (GMT +00:00) the limit becomes active. Required. - **Set end date** — tick this checkbox to add an end date. The limit stops applying after the end date. Leave it unchecked for an indefinite rule. #### Notify about limit when 💡 **Pro plan:** **Notify about limit when** is available on Pro and above. On Free, this dropdown is locked to the default option. Pick when the on-storefront notification should appear: - **The limit has been reached** — only show the message once the limit is hit. - **"add-to-cart" button is clicked and in cart page** — show whenever the customer adds to cart or changes the cart in a way that would break the limit. - **No notification** — silent mode. The Checkout button is disabled when the limit is hit, but no message is shown. #### Limit customer re-purchase 💡 **Paid plan:** **Limit customer re-purchase** is available on Paid plan. On Free, this dropdown is locked to **No re-purchase limit**. Cap how often a single customer can re-purchase from the collection over time: - **Once per lifetime** - **Once per year** - **Once per month** - **No re-purchase limit** - **Custom time** — set your own interval in hours, days, months, or years. For the full breakdown of each option, see the [Re-purchase limit guide](/order-limit/re-purchase-limit/). #### "Contact us" in notification Tick **"Contact us" in notification** to add a Contact us button to the limit message. When enabled, paste the destination link (live chat URL, contact form, or social channel) in the **"Contact us" URL** field. The button text itself is edited in the Message tab. ### Step 7: Customize the message and save Switch to the **Message** tab to tailor the limit notification text and add translations. The default language card sits at the top; below it you can add more languages via **Add supported language**. Use the available variables shown under **Note: Here are a few variables you can use** to inject the live limit values into your copy. For a Collection Limit, the available variables are: - `{{minimum_product_quantity}}` / `{{maximum_product_quantity}}` — minimum / maximum product quantity - `{{minimum_total_product_value}}` / `{{maximum_total_product_value}}` — minimum / maximum total value - `{{minimum_product_weight}}` / `{{maximum_product_weight}}` — minimum / maximum product weight - `{{multiple}}` — current multiple value - `{{skip_value}}` — quantity value excluded from the multiple rule - `{{weight_unit}}` — the shop's weight unit (lb, kg, g, oz) - `{Button text}` — for the Contact us button copy The app shows only the variables that match your chosen condition type. For the full translation walkthrough (adding languages, toggling them on, setting a default), see [Customize and translate limit message](/order-limit/customize-and-translate-limit-message/). When everything looks right, click **Save** at the top of the page. The limit goes live on the start date you set. 💡 **Tip:** Open the collection page in an incognito tab and try to add more than the allowed quantity. Confirm the limit triggers and the message appears as expected. ### Tips - **One collection, one rule.** Avoid stacking multiple Collection limits on the same collection — the stricter rule usually wins and that's rarely what you want. - **Add products to a Shopify collection, not the limit.** The limit auto-applies to every product in the collection. Add or remove products in Shopify and the rule follows. - **Re-purchase needs login.** The re-purchase rule depends on a logged-in customer. In Shopify Admin → **Settings → Checkout**, switch customer accounts on so the limit can identify repeat buyers. - **Test with a real cart.** Before going live, add the maximum quantity + 1 to a test cart and confirm the message wording and Checkout button behavior. [Create Product Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-product-limit/)[Create Order Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-order-limit/) --- # Create Customer Limit Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/create-customer-limit/ # Create Customer Limit 💡 **Requires:** Free plan (advanced gating options require Paid plan) ### Step 1: Open Limits management and create a new limit From the left-hand menu of the app, click **Limits management** to open the list of your rules. Click **Create new order limit** (or **Create new limit**, in the top-right, if you already have rules) to open the limit type chooser. ### Step 2: Choose the limit type On the limit type chooser, find the **Customer limit** card and click **Select**. A Customer Limit applies on top of every order from customers carrying the tag(s) you choose — useful for "VIP gets unlimited", "wholesale max 100 units", or "tagged buyers must order $500+". ### Step 3: Name your limit Enter a name in the **Limit name** field. This name is for internal use only — customers will never see it. Pick something that identifies the segment, for example "VIP — unlimited orders" or "Wholesale — $500 minimum". ### Step 4: Pick the customer tags to limit Under **Select customer tag to limit**, choose how broadly the rule fires: OptionWhen to use **All customer tags**The rule applies to every tagged customer. Use this for a blanket "anyone who has a tag" rule. **Specific customer tags**Hand-pick the tags that trigger the rule. Click **Browse**, tick the tags you want in the **Select customer tag** modal, and click **Select**. Best for targeting one segment. 💡 **Tip:** Customer tags are managed in Shopify Admin → **Customers** → open a customer → **Tags**. Apply your segment tag (e.g., `vip`, `wholesale`) before testing the rule. #### Exclude customer tags (optional) Tick **Exclude customer tags** to remove specific tags from the rule's reach. Useful when a customer carries both an "include" tag and an "exclude" tag — the exclusion wins. 💡 **Pro plan:** **Exclude customer tags** is available on Pro and above. On Free, the checkbox is locked and a pricing prompt appears next to it. ### Step 5: Choose where the limit applies (Apply limit to) Under **Apply limit to**, pick the scope the cap should evaluate against: OptionWhat the limit measures **Apply to order**The full cart contents from the tagged customer. Caps the **total quantity**, **total value**, or **total weight** of the order. **Apply to collection**Only items from a chosen collection count toward the cap. You'll be prompted to pick the collection right after. **Apply to product**Only items from a hand-picked product list count toward the cap. Caps **product quantity** only. ### Step 6: Set the limit conditions Open the **Limit conditions** card and pick the **Condition type** that matches your goal. The available types change based on the **Apply limit to** choice from Step 5: Apply limit toAvailable condition types **Order**Total product quantity, Total product value, Total product weight **Collection**Total product quantity, Total product value **Product**Total product quantity Then fill in **Minimum** and **Maximum** values for the chosen condition. #### Sell product in multiples (optional) Tick **Sell product in multiples** when the tagged customer must buy in fixed packs — for example, "only in multiples of 6". Two more fields appear: - **Multiple** — the pack size. - **Skip quantity values** — optional. List specific quantities (comma-separated) that are allowed to bypass the multiple rule. ### Step 7: Set the re-purchase rule (optional) In the **Re-purchase limit** card, use **Limit customer re-purchase** to cap how often a single logged-in customer can re-order within the rule — once per lifetime, per year, per month, a custom window, or no limit at all. 💡 **Pro plan:** **Limit customer re-purchase** is available on Pro and above. On Free, it stays at **No re-purchase limit**. Re-purchase rules also require customer login to be enabled on your store. For the full breakdown of every option, the **Reset repurchase at the start of the period** behavior, and the required Shopify login setup, see the dedicated [Re-purchase limit guide](/order-limit/re-purchase-limit/). ### Step 8: Configure Advanced Setting Expand the **Advanced Setting** card to control *when* the limit runs, *how* notifications behave, and the optional **Contact us** link. #### Active dates - **Start date** — the date (GMT +00:00) the limit becomes active. Required. - **Set end date** — tick this to add an end date. Leave unchecked for an indefinite rule. #### Notify about limit when 💡 **Pro plan:** **Notify about limit when** is available on Pro and above. On Free, the dropdown is locked to the default option. - **The limit has been reached** — only show the message after the limit has been hit. - **"add-to-cart" button is clicked and in cart page** — show whenever the customer adds to cart or changes a cart line in a way that would break the limit. - **No notification** — silent mode. The Checkout button is disabled when the limit is hit, but no message is shown. #### "Contact us" in notification Tick **"Contact us" in notification** to add a Contact us button to the limit message. When enabled, paste the destination link in the **"Contact us" URL** field. ### Step 9: Customize the message and save Switch to the **Message** tab to tailor the limit notification text and add translations. Available variables for Customer Limit: - `{{minimum_product_quantity}}` / `{{maximum_product_quantity}}` - `{{minimum_total_product_value}}` / `{{maximum_total_product_value}}` - `{{minimum_product_weight}}` / `{{maximum_product_weight}}` (Order scope only) - `{{multiple}}` — current multiple value - `{Button text}` — for the Contact us button copy For the full translation walkthrough, see [Customize and translate limit message](/order-limit/customize-and-translate-limit-message/). When everything looks right, click **Save**. The limit goes live immediately on the start date. 💡 **Tip:** Open the storefront in an incognito tab, log in as a tagged customer, and try to break the limit. Confirm the notification fires and the message reads as expected. ### Tips - **Tag customers first.** A Customer Limit only fires for logged-in shoppers whose Shopify customer record carries the listed tag(s). Apply tags via Shopify Admin → Customers → Tags before testing. - **Stack tags carefully.** A buyer can hold many tags. If you also use **Exclude customer tags**, exclusion always wins. - **Don't double-up rules.** Avoid stacking Customer Limit on top of Product or Order Limit covering the same SKU — the stricter rule usually wins. - **Re-purchase needs login.** In Shopify Admin → **Settings → Checkout**, switch customer accounts on. - **Use a test tag.** Tag a test customer (e.g., `qa-vip`) and rehearse the cart flow end-to-end before announcing the rule. [Create Order Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-order-limit/)[Create Product Blocking Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-product-blocking-limit/) --- # Create Order Limit Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/create-order-limit/ # Create Order Limit **Requires:** Free plan (notification timing and re-purchase rules require Pro) ### Step 1: Open Limits management and create a new limit From the left-hand menu of the app, click **Limits management** to open the list of your rules. Click **Create new order limit** (or **Create new limit**, in the top-right, if you already have rules) to open the limit type chooser. ### Step 2: Choose the limit type On the limit type chooser, find the **Order limit** card and click **Select**. An Order limit is a whole-cart rule — it looks at the cart in aggregate rather than at individual products or collections. You can still run several Order limits in parallel (e.g., one for minimum value, another for max items). ### Step 3: Name your limit In the **General** card, enter a name in the **Limit Name** field. This name is for internal use only — customers will never see it. Use something descriptive like "Free shipping floor — $50 minimum" so you can audit your rules later. ### Step 4: Scope the limit — exclude products or cap items per order (optional) By default, an Order limit applies to the **entire cart** — every product counts toward the rule. Under **Select limit apply to**, two optional checkboxes let you fine-tune that. Leave both unchecked for a simple store-wide cap (e.g., "minimum order value $50"). #### Exclude products Leave **Exclude products** unchecked to count every product in the cart. Tick it when you want certain products *left out* of the calculation, then choose how to identify them: OptionWhen to use **Group of products (by tags/vendor/title)**Exclude products matching a dynamic rule. Set whether products must match **All conditions** or **Any conditions**, then click **Add condition** to build the rule (tag, vendor, or title). **Specific products**Hand-pick the exact products to exclude. #### Limit products/variants per order Tick **Limit products/variants per order** to also cap how many distinct items a single order may contain. Choose **Products** or **Variants**, then enter the maximum number allowed per order. ### Step 5: Set the limit conditions Open the **Limit conditions** card and choose the **Condition type** that matches what you want to cap: Condition typeWhat it caps **Total number of products in the order**Total item count across the matching cart lines. **Total value in order**Money value of the matching cart lines. Currency follows your store. **Total weight in order**Total weight of the matching cart lines. Unit follows your Shopify weight setting. Then fill in the min/max fields, which adapt to the condition type: - **Minimum quantity in order** / **Maximum quantity in order** - **Minimum value in order** / **Maximum value in order** - **Minimum weight in order** / **Maximum weight in order** **Important:** Leave the **maximum** field blank to set **no upper limit**. Set **maximum = 0** to block checkout entirely whenever the matching products are in the cart. #### Sell product in multiples (Total quantity only) Tick **Sell product in multiples** to force the cart total in fixed increments — for example, a multiple of 6 to require six-pack-sized orders. When enabled, you also pick where the multiple applies via the **Apply multiple to** dropdown: - **Order** — the cart total across matching products must be a multiple. - **Each product** — each product line must be in multiples. - **Each variant** — each variant must be added in multiples. ### Step 6: Configure Advanced Settings Expand the **Advanced Setting** card to control *when* the limit is active, *how* the notification behaves, and *whether* re-purchase rules apply. #### Active dates - **Start date** — the date (GMT +00:00) the limit becomes active. Required. - **Set end date** — tick this checkbox to add an end date. The limit stops applying after the end date. Leave it unchecked for an indefinite rule. #### Notify about limit when **Pro plan:** **Notify about limit when** is available on Pro and above. On Free, this dropdown is locked to the default option. Pick when the on-storefront notification should appear. The choices for an Order limit are: - **"Add-to-cart" button is clicked and in cart page** — show whenever the customer adds to cart or changes the cart in a way that breaks the limit. - **Only show notification in cart page** — keep the message on the cart page only, so product pages stay clean. - **No notification** — silent mode. The Checkout button is disabled when the cart doesn't match, but no message is shown. #### Limit customer re-purchase **Pro plan:** **Limit customer re-purchase** is available on Pro and above. On Free, this dropdown is locked to **No re-purchase limit**. Cap how often a single customer can re-place an order that matches the limit: - **Once per lifetime** - **Once per year** - **Once per month** - **No re-purchase limit** - **Custom time** — set your own interval in hours, days, months, or years. For the full breakdown, see the [Re-purchase limit guide (opens in a new tab)](https://file+.vscode-resource.vscode-cdn.net/order-limit-help-center/re-purchase-limit). #### "Contact us" in notification Tick **"Contact us" in notification** to add a Contact us button to the limit message. When enabled, paste the destination link (live chat URL, contact form, or social channel) in the **"Contact us" URL** field. The button text itself is edited in the Message tab. ### Step 7: Customize the message and save Switch to the **Message** tab to tailor the limit notification text and add translations. The default language card sits at the top; below it you can add more languages via **Add supported language**. Use the available variables shown under **Note: Here are a few variables you can use** to inject the live limit values into your copy. For an Order Limit, the available variables are: - `{{minimum_product_quantity}}` / `{{maximum_product_quantity}}` — minimum / maximum product quantity - `{{minimum_total_product_value}}` / `{{maximum_total_product_value}}` — minimum / maximum total value - `{{minimum_product_weight}}` / `{{maximum_product_weight}}` — minimum / maximum product weight - `{{multiple}}` — current multiple value - `{{maximum_product_per_order}}` — maximum number of different products per order - `{{maximum_variant_per_order}}` — maximum number of different variants per order - `{{weight_unit}}` — the shop's weight unit (lb, kg, g, oz) - `{Button text}` — for the Contact us button copy The app shows only the variables that match your chosen condition type. Click the copy icon next to any variable to put it on your clipboard. For the full translation walkthrough (adding languages, toggling them on, setting a default), see [Customize and translate limit message (opens in a new tab)](https://file+.vscode-resource.vscode-cdn.net/order-limit-help-center/customize-translate-limit-message). When everything looks right, click **Save** at the top of the page. The limit goes live on the start date you set. **Tip:** Build a test cart that's just below your minimum (or just above your maximum) and confirm the message and Checkout button behave correctly before you announce the change. ### Tips - **Pair Order limits with shipping rules.** A "$50 minimum order" Order limit pairs naturally with a "free shipping over $50" rate in Shopify. - **Use Total weight for fragile / bulky items.** If you ship by weight tier, a max-weight Order limit prevents carts that don't fit your packaging. - **Re-purchase needs login.** The re-purchase rule depends on a logged-in customer. In Shopify Admin → **Settings → Checkout**, switch customer accounts on so the limit can identify repeat buyers. - **Keep messages clear about what to do.** Customers can't fix the cart unless the message tells them how — write "Add $12 more to check out" rather than "Order limit not met". And there you have it! You've successfully created an Order limit for your store. Customers now see a clear notification whenever the cart falls outside your rule, and you stay in control of every order that reaches checkout. If you have any questions or run into any issues, don't hesitate to reach out. We're here to help! **Previous:** [Create a Customer Limit (opens in a new tab)](https://file+.vscode-resource.vscode-cdn.net/order-limit-help-center/create-customer-limit) | **Next:** [Create a Product Blocking Limit (opens in a new tab)](https://file+.vscode-resource.vscode-cdn.net/order-limit-help-center/create-product-blocking-limit) [Create Collection Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-collection-limit/)[Create Customer Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-customer-limit/) --- # Create Product Blocking Limit Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/create-product-blocking-limit/ # Create Product Blocking Limit 💡 **Requires:** Free plan (advanced gating options require Paid plan) ### Step 1: Open Limits management and create a new limit From the left-hand menu of the app, click **Limits management** to open the list of your rules. Click **Create new order limit** (or **Create new limit**, in the top-right, if you already have rules) to open the limit type chooser. ### Step 2: Choose the limit type On the limit type chooser, find the **Product blocking** card and click **Select**. Unlike a Product or Customer Limit, a Product Blocking rule keys off the **products already in the shopper's cart**. When the trigger product is detected (or absent), the rule fires against the targets you choose in Step 5. ### Step 3: Name your limit Enter a name in the **Limit name** field. This name is for internal use only — customers will never see it. Pick something that describes the trigger and target, for example "Sale bundle — locks regular items" or "Wholesale SKU — forces $500 cart". ### Step 4: Choose the trigger type, pick the trigger products, and set the trigger condition The trigger card now has three parts: #### Pick the trigger type Under **Select trigger type**, choose how the trigger products are defined: - **Specific products** — pick individual products one by one, same as before. Click **Browse** to open the product picker, tick the products (and optional variants) that should fire the rule, then click **Select**. You can edit the list any time by clicking **Edit** under the selected count. - **Group of products (by tags/vendor/title)** — match a whole group of products at once instead of ticking them one by one. Click **Add condition**, choose the field to match (**Tags**, **Vendor**, or **Title**), the operator, and the value. Add more conditions if needed, then choose **All conditions** (a product must match every condition) or **Any conditions** (matching one condition is enough) to decide how the conditions combine. - **Collection** — pick a single collection; every product inside that collection counts as a trigger product. #### Pick when the rule applies Under **Apply limit below when:**, pick one: - **Cart contains one of trigger products** — fire the rule the moment any trigger product is in the cart. - **Cart does not contain any trigger products** — fire the rule whenever the trigger products are *absent*. Useful for "you must add this item to check out". ### Step 5: Pick the limit target (Type of limit) Under **Apply limit to**, use the **Type of limit** dropdown to choose what the cap evaluates against once the trigger fires: Type of limitWhat gets capped **Apply to order**The full cart contents (excluding the trigger products themselves). **Apply to collection**Items from a chosen collection. You'll be prompted to pick the collection right after. **Apply to product**Items from a hand-picked product list. ⚠️ Trigger products are automatically **excluded** from whichever target you pick — they are the switch, not the thing being capped. This applies no matter which trigger type you picked in Step 4. ### Step 6: Set the limit conditions Open the **Limit conditions** card and pick the **Condition type** for the cap. The available types match the Type of limit you picked in Step 5: Type of limitAvailable condition types **Order**Total product quantity, Total product value, Total product weight **Collection**Total product quantity, Total product value **Product**Total product quantity Then fill in **Minimum** and **Maximum** values for the chosen condition. ⚠️ Leave the **maximum** field blank to set **no upper limit**. Set **maximum = 0** to block the affected products from being purchased while the trigger is in the cart. ### Step 7: Configure Advanced Setting Expand the **Advanced Setting** card to control *when* the rule is active, *how* notifications behave, and the **"Contact us"** affordance. #### Active dates - **Start date** — the date (GMT +00:00) the rule becomes active. Required. - **Set end date** — tick this to add an end date. Leave unchecked for an indefinite rule. #### Notify about limit when 💡 **Pro plan:** **Notify about limit when** is available on Pro and above. On Free, the dropdown is locked to the default option. - **The limit has been reached** — only show the message after the limit has been hit. - **"add-to-cart" button is clicked and in cart page** — show whenever the customer adds to cart or changes a cart line in a way that would break the limit. - **No notification** — silent mode. The Checkout button is disabled when the limit is hit, but no message is shown. 💡 **Limit customer re-purchase** does not apply to Product Blocking rules and is intentionally hidden for this limit type. #### "Contact us" in notification Tick **"Contact us" in notification** to add a Contact us button to the limit message. When enabled, paste the destination link in the **"Contact us" URL** field. ### Step 8: Customize the message and save Switch to the **Message** tab to tailor the limit notification text and add translations. Available variables for Product Blocking: - `{{minimum_product_quantity}}` / `{{maximum_product_quantity}}` - `{{minimum_total_product_value}}` / `{{maximum_total_product_value}}` - `{{minimum_product_weight}}` / `{{maximum_product_weight}}` - `{{multiple}}` — current multiple value - `{{product_title}}` — title of the product that triggered the limit - `{{weight_unit}}` — the shop's weight unit - `{Button text}` — for the Contact us button copy The app shows only the variables that match your chosen condition type. For the full translation walkthrough, see [Customize and translate limit message](/order-limit/customize-and-translate-limit-message/). When everything looks right, click **Save**. The rule goes live immediately on the start date. 💡 **Tip:** Open the storefront in an incognito tab and add only the trigger product first — confirm the warning fires on the target items as expected. Then remove the trigger and re-verify the cart can clear checkout. ### Tips - **Trigger is the switch, not the target.** The trigger product is never the thing being capped — the targets you pick in Step 5 are. Don't put the same SKU in both lists. - **Pick the trigger type that matches how you sell.** Use **Specific products** for a short, stable list; **Group of products** when the trigger list is defined by a shared tag/vendor/title pattern (so new matching products are picked up automatically); **Collection** when you already maintain a collection for the trigger items. - **Pair with date windows for flash promotions.** A start/end date scoped Product Blocking rule is a clean way to run "buy this special edition, max 1 of these others" promotions. - **Mind the trigger condition.** **Cart does not contain** flips the logic — every order is checked, and the cap kicks in *unless* the trigger product is added. Use sparingly. - **Test both states.** Place a test order both with and without the trigger product in the cart to confirm the rule behaves as expected. [Create Customer Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-customer-limit/)[Re-purchase Limit](/order-limit-help-center/re-purchase-limit/) --- # Create Product Limit Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/create-product-limit/ # Create Product Limit 💡 **Requires:** Free plan (advanced gating options require Paid plan) ### Step 1: Open Limits management and create a new limit From the left-hand menu of the app, click **Limits management** to open the list of your rules. Click **Create new order limit** (or **Create new limit**, in the top-right, if you already have rules) to open the limit type chooser. ### Step 2: Choose the limit type On the limit type chooser, find the **Product Limit** card and click **Select**. This is the entry point for every product-level rule. Each rule is independent, so you can run several Product Limits at once with different conditions and date windows. ### Step 3: Name your limit Enter a name in the **Limit name** field. This name is for internal use only — customers will never see it. Pick something that tells you at a glance what the rule does, for example "Hot sneakers — max 2 per order" or "Holiday gift set — sell in pairs". ### Step 4: Choose which products the limit applies to Under **Select product to limit**, pick one of three scopes: OptionWhen to use **All products**Apply the limit to every product in your store. Best for store-wide rules (e.g., max 10 items per order). **Group of products (by tags/vendor/title)**Apply the limit to any product matching a dynamic rule — for example, all products tagged `limited-edition`, or every product from a specific vendor. The group updates automatically as you add products. **Specific products**Hand-pick the exact products (and optional variants) you want to limit. Best for a small, fixed list. #### Group of products — build the matching rule When you pick **Group of products (by tags/vendor/title)**, a condition builder appears. - Choose the matching mode: **All conditions** (product must match every row) or **Any conditions** (one match is enough). - For each row pick a **field type** — **Tags**, **Vendor**, or **Title**. - Pick an operator — **Is equal to**, **Is not equal to**, **Starts with**, **Ends with**, **Contains**, or **Does not contain**. - Enter the value. Tags and Vendor offer autocomplete from your store data; Title accepts free text. - Click **Add condition** to stack more rows. 💡 **Tip:** Use **Group of products** for any "evergreen" rule. New products that match the conditions are limited automatically, with no need to re-edit the rule. #### Specific products — pick a fixed list When you pick **Specific products**, click the **Select product** button to open the product browser, tick the products you want to limit, optionally drill into variants, then click **Select**. #### Exclude products (optional) When **All products** is selected, you can fine-tune the scope with **Exclude products**. Tick the checkbox, then choose whether the exclusion is a **Group of products (by tags/vendor/title)** or a **Specific products** list. 💡 **Pro plan:** Exclude products is available on Pro and above. On the Free plan the checkbox is locked and a pricing prompt appears next to it. ### Step 5: Set the limit conditions Open the **Limit conditions** card and choose the **Condition type** that matches what you want to cap: Condition typeWhat it caps **Total product quantity**Number of units of the matching products in the cart (whole numbers). **Total product value**Money value of the matching products. Currency follows your store. **Total product weight**Combined weight of the matching products. Unit follows your Shopify weight setting. Then fill in the **Minimum** and **Maximum** fields, which adapt to the condition type: - **Minimum quantity** / **Maximum quantity** - **Minimum value** / **Maximum value** - **Minimum weight** / **Maximum weight** ⚠️ Leave the **Maximum** field blank to set **no upper limit**. Set **maximum = 0** to block customers from purchasing the matching products altogether. #### Sell product in multiples Tick **Sell product in multiples** to force purchases in fixed bundle sizes — for example, pairs of socks (multiple = 2) or six-packs (multiple = 6). The app rounds the minimum to the nearest valid multiple automatically. #### Apply to each variant Tick **Apply to each variant** so the min/max applies *per variant* rather than across the entire product. Useful when a single product has many sizes or colors and you want a cap on each one. ### Step 6: Set a re-purchase limit (optional) **Re-purchase limit** is its own collapsible section, sitting just below Limit conditions and above Advanced Settings. 💡 **Pro plan:** Re-purchase is available on Pro and above. On Free, the dropdown is locked to **No re-purchase limit**. Use the **Limit customer re-purchase** dropdown to cap how often a single customer can re-buy the limited products over time: - **Once per lifetime** - **Once per year** - **Once per month** - **No re-purchase limit** - **Custom time** — set your own interval in hours, days, months, or years. 💡 Re-purchase counts a customer's purchases over a period and **requires customers to be logged in** to work properly. For the full breakdown of each option, the **Reset re-purchase at the start of the period** behavior, and the Shopify login setup, see the [Re-purchase limit guide](/order-limit/re-purchase-limit/). ### Step 7: Configure Advanced Settings Expand the **Advanced Setting** card to control *when* the limit is active and *how* the notification behaves. #### Active dates - **Start date** — the date (GMT +00:00) the limit becomes active. Required. - **Set end date** — tick this to add an end date. The limit stops applying after the end date. Leave it unchecked for an indefinite rule. #### Notify about limit when 💡 **Pro plan:** **Notify about limit when** is available on Pro and above. On Free, the dropdown is locked to the default option. Pick when the on-storefront notification should appear: - **The limit has been reached** — only show the message after the limit has been hit. - **"add-to-cart" button is clicked and in cart page** — show whenever the customer adds to cart or changes a cart line in a way that would break the limit. - **No notification** — silent mode. The Checkout button is disabled when the limit is hit, but no message is shown. #### "Contact us" in notification Tick **"Contact us" in notification** to add a Contact us button to the limit message. Use it to give customers a path to reach you for bulk requests, B2B inquiries, or special exceptions. When enabled, paste the destination link (live chat URL, contact form, social channel, etc.) in the **"Contact us" URL** field. ### Step 8: Customize the message and save Switch to the **Message** tab to tailor the limit notification text and add translations. The default language card sits at the top; below it you can add more languages via **Add supported language**. Use the available variables shown under **Note: Here are a few variables you can use** to inject the live limit values into your copy. For a Product Limit, the available variables are: - `{{minimum_product_quantity}}` / `{{maximum_product_quantity}}` — minimum / maximum product quantity - `{{minimum_total_product_value}}` / `{{maximum_total_product_value}}` — minimum / maximum total value - `{{minimum_product_weight}}` / `{{maximum_product_weight}}` — minimum / maximum product weight - `{{multiple}}` — current multiple value - `{{skip_value}}` — quantity value excluded from the multiple rule - `{{product_title}}` — title of the product that triggered the limit - `{{weight_unit}}` — the shop's weight unit (lb, kg, g, oz) - `{Button text}` — for the Contact us button copy The app shows only the variables that match your chosen condition type. Click the copy icon next to any variable to put it on your clipboard. For the full translation walkthrough (adding languages, toggling them on, setting a default), see [Customize and translate limit message](/order-limit/customize-and-translate-limit-message/). When everything looks right, click **Save** at the top of the page. The limit goes live immediately on the dates you set. 💡 **Tip:** Open the published product page in an incognito tab and try to add the limited product to your cart. Confirm the limit triggers and the message appears as expected. ### Tips - **Name limits clearly.** Use names that describe the rule (e.g., "Black Friday — 1 per customer, sneakers") so your future self can audit them quickly. - **Run rules in parallel, not stacked.** Avoid overlapping rules on the same product — the stricter one usually wins and that's rarely what merchants expect. - **Use Group of products for evergreen rules.** Tagging your new products with the right tag is faster than editing the limit every time you add SKUs. - **Re-purchase needs login.** The re-purchase rule depends on a logged-in customer. In Shopify Admin → **Settings → Checkout**, switch customer accounts on so the limit can identify repeat buyers. - **Test with a real cart.** Before announcing a sale, place a test order to confirm min/max behavior, multiples rounding, and the message wording. [Ask Shopify Sidekick](/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/ask-shopify-sidekick/)[Create Collection Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-collection-limit/) --- # Customize and Translate Limit Message Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/customize-and-translate-limit-message/ # Customize and Translate Limit Message **Customizing and Translating Limit Message** gives you the ability to personalize and localize the warning messages that customers see when they reach product or order limits in your store. By creating custom messages in multiple languages, you can provide a clearer, more accessible shopping experience for your international customers. ### Why Customize Limit Messages Effective communication is essential when customers encounter purchasing limits in your store. Default limit messages may not always convey the right tone or provide enough information for your specific products or business policies. By customizing your limit messages, you can: - Provide clearer explanations about why limits exist - Match your brand's tone and voice - Offer alternative suggestions or next steps for customers - Reduce customer frustration and support inquiries - Ensure international customers understand restrictions in their preferred language ### How to customize limit message #### Step 1: Accessing the Limit Message Settings Follow these steps to access the limit message customization area: - Click on **Limit Management** in the main navigation menu. - Select an existing limit rule that you want to customize messages for, or create a new rule. - Within the rule settings, locate and click on the **Message** tab. The Message tab is where you'll customize your default message and add translations. This centralized location makes it easy to manage all your limit messages from one place. #### Step 2: Customizing Limit Message Your default limit message is the foundation for all your communications about purchase limits. Here's how to create an effective default message: - In the Message tab, you'll see a text field for your default message (typically in English, unless you've changed the default language). - Enter your customized message. Consider including: A clear explanation of the limit - The reason for the limit (if appropriate) - What the customer can do next - Use variables like `{{minimum_product_quantity}}` or `{{maximum_product_quantity}}` to dynamically insert the specific limit values. - Review your message for clarity and tone. - Click **Save** to apply your changes to the default message. A well-crafted default message serves as the foundation for all your translations and ensures customers understand your policies clearly. #### Step 3: Adding Language Translations The Auto-Translate feature allows you to provide limit messages in multiple languages, which will be automatically displayed based on each customer's browser language settings. Follow these steps to add translations: - Click on the **Add Supported language** button. - Select a language from the menu. - Enter the translated message. - Repeat for all required languages. - Toggle on to enable language after you add. - Change default language as you want. **Customize and Translate Limit Message** empowers you to communicate effectively with all your customers, regardless of their preferred language. By providing clear, localized messages when customers encounter purchase limits, you enhance the shopping experience, reduce confusion, and maintain positive customer relationships even when enforcing necessary restrictions. [Re-purchase Limit](/order-limit-help-center/re-purchase-limit/)[Branding](/order-limit-help-center/customize-branding/branding/) --- # Branding Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/customize-branding/branding/ # Branding 💡 **Requires:** Free plan ### Step 1: Pick a Preset Open the **Preset** section. Three theme cards are shown — click one to apply it to the notification. ThemeLookUse when **Light Theme**Yellow background, dark textDefault — warm, friendly, high-contrast on most storefronts **Basic**White background, black textClean minimal look — matches almost any store theme **Dark Theme**Black background, white textBold contrast for dark-mode storefronts Picking a preset overwrites the color fields below — you can still tweak individual colors afterwards. 💡 **Tip:** Want a custom palette that none of the three presets cover? Pick the closest preset, then adjust the color pickers in **Step 3: Styling**. ### Step 2: Choose a Position The **Position** section controls *where* and *how* the order limit notification appears on a product page. Open the **Display type** dropdown and pick one of two values: Display typeBehavior **Inline**Embeds the notification directly inside the product page — sits as part of the page content, near the Add to cart area. **Popup**Shows the notification as a modal overlay on top of the page — higher visibility, harder to miss. #### If you pick Inline On most Online Store 2.0 themes the inline notification is added automatically via an app block. If your theme doesn't support app blocks, a snippet field appears below the dropdown: ``` ``` - Click the copy icon to copy the snippet. - Paste it into your product page template at the exact position where the notification should render. - If you can't add the snippet yourself, click **Contact us** — our team will help. #### If you pick Popup No theme edit is required — the popup is injected by the app and shown automatically when the order limit is hit. ⚠️ Switching between **Inline** and **Popup** also switches which color fields are visible in the **Styling** section below. ### Step 3: Customize Styling The **Styling** section bundles colors, font, alignment, and size into one place. #### Colors The color fields you see depend on the **Display type** you chose in Step 2. **For Inline (Inline message color):** FieldWhat it controls **Background color**The fill color of the inline notification block **Text color**The color of the notification message text **For Popup ("Contact us" button color):** FieldWhat it controls **Button background color**The fill color of the **Contact us** button inside the popup **Button message color**The text color of the **Contact us** button label Click any color swatch to open the color picker — pick a swatch or paste a hex value, then close to apply. #### Font family - Click the **Font family** picker to open the font browser. - Type in the search box to filter — pick any Google Font from the list, or pick **Inherit** to use the storefront's existing font. #### Sync fonts to Shopify Just below the font picker is a checkbox: **Sync fonts to Shopify**. - **Unchecked** (default): the selected font loads from the Google Fonts CDN on your storefront. - **Checked**: the selected font is uploaded to your Shopify Files and the app loads it directly from your Shopify CDN — no third-party request. 💡 **Tip:** Tick **Sync fonts to Shopify** if your store sells in the EU. Loading fonts directly from Shopify avoids sending visitor IPs to Google Fonts, which helps with GDPR compliance and improves Lighthouse performance scores. #### Text alignment OptionEffect **Left**Text aligns to the left edge **Center**Text is centered **Right**Text aligns to the right edge #### Font size Drag the **Font size** slider between **8 px** and **20 px**. The number to the right of the slider shows the current value in pixels. The Preview panel updates as you drag. ### Step 4: Open Advanced Settings Click the chevron next to **Advanced settings** at the bottom of the page to expand the section. #### Custom CSS (Developer Zone) A multi-line text field where developers can paste CSS rules to override the notification's default styling — useful for matching tight brand guidelines. - Paste any valid CSS targeting the notification's classes. - Changes apply immediately on **Save** — no theme edit needed. - Use specific selectors (for example, `.Avada-OrderLimit-Block__Container`) to keep the rules scoped to the notification. ⚠️ Bad CSS can hide the notification or break its layout. Test on a draft theme or staging store before saving to production. ### Step 5: Save and Verify The Avada Order Limit admin uses Shopify's contextual save bar. - Edit any field → the **Save** / **Discard** bar appears at the top of the page. - Click **Save** — changes go live on your storefront within seconds. - Click **Discard** — revert without saving. To verify on your storefront: - Open a product that has an active order limit rule. - Trigger the limit (for example, add a quantity above the maximum to the cart). - Confirm the notification appears with the colors, font, and position you configured. ### Tips - **Start with a preset, then tweak.** Picking **Light Theme**, **Basic**, or **Dark Theme** first gets you 80% of the way there in one click. - **Match font size to your product page.** A 14-16 px notification usually reads well next to most theme body text. - **Use Sync fonts to Shopify for EU stores.** Loading fonts from Shopify instead of Google Fonts removes an external request and helps with GDPR compliance. - **Inline vs Popup — pick based on urgency.** Use **Inline** for soft guidance ("Max 5 per order") that lives quietly on the page. Use **Popup** for hard limits where you need to interrupt the customer. - **Keep an eye on the Preview.** The right column updates live — you don't need to save to see how a color or font feels. [Customize and Translate Limit Message](/order-limit-help-center/customize-and-translate-limit-message/)[Shopify Flow](/order-limit-help-center/integrations/shopify-flow/) --- # Manage Your Avada Order Limits Directly From Shopify Sidekick Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/ask-shopify-sidekick/ # Manage Your Avada Order Limits Directly From Shopify Sidekick Avada Order Limits now works with **Shopify Sidekick**, the AI assistant built into your Shopify Admin. Ask Sidekick questions about your order limit rules, or tell it to take action on your behalf - all without leaving your current page. With Sidekick, you can: - Ask about your active order limit rules and how many you have - Check which orders were recently blocked and why - Get a summary overview of all your rule types - Tell Sidekick to make changes to your rules directly ## Prerequisites - Avada Order Limits must be installed on your store. - Shopify Sidekick must be available on your store (Shopify is rolling this out gradually to all Admin accounts). ### Open Sidekick Click the Sidekick icon in the top-right corner of Shopify Admin. ### Ask about Avada Order Limits Type your question or request in plain language. Sidekick recognizes Avada Order Limits and pulls the relevant data straight from your store - or makes the change you asked for. ## What you can ask Example questionWhat Sidekick tells you "How many order limit rules do I have active?"Count and summary of active limit rules "Have any orders been blocked recently?"Recent orders blocked and which rule blocked them "Give me an overview of my limit rules"Summary across all rule types (product, collection, cart value) "Turn off my order limit rule for [rule name]"Sidekick updates the rule status directly in your store Sidekick reads live data from your store, so answers always reflect your current rule setup. ## Tips - If Sidekick doesn't recognize a question about Avada Order Limits, try rephrasing using the setting or metric name (for example, "limit rules" instead of "order caps"). - Sidekick complements the app - use the Dashboard for full rule management, and Sidekick for a quick answer while you're working elsewhere in Admin. ## Related Articles - [Getting Started](/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/) And there you have it! You can now get quick answers about your order limit setup straight from Shopify Sidekick. If you have any questions or run into any issues, don't hesitate to reach out. We're here to help! [Plans & Pricing](/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/plans-and-pricing/)[Create Product Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-product-limit/) --- # Dashboard Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/dashboard/ # Dashboard Two usage KPIs, a Theme store app embed indicator, a Quick guide checklist, and a Helpdesk card — everything you need to confirm your limits are running. ### Anatomy of the Dashboard The Dashboard stacks the following blocks from top to bottom: BlockWhat it shows **Welcome banner**"Hi [admin name]!" + "Welcome to Avada Order Limit" **Theme store app embed** indicator + **App embed settings** buttonAt-a-glance status of whether the app is embedded in your live theme **Overview** cardTwo KPIs — **Impressions** and **Contacts** — for your store this period **Quick guide** widgetA 4-task setup checklist with a progress bar **Helpdesk** cardChat with us + Read guide buttons ### Block 1: Theme store app embed A horizontal status bar between the welcome banner and the Overview card. - **Off** (grey) — the app isn't embedded on your active theme. No limit will run on the storefront. - **On** (green) — embed is active. Limits will fire when visitors trigger a rule. Click **App embed settings** at the right of the bar to jump straight to the Shopify theme editor with the Avada Order Limit embed pre-selected. **Important:** If this shows **Off** after install, finish step 1 of the Quick guide below before anything else. Without the embed, none of your limit rules will be enforced on the storefront. ### Block 2: Overview The Overview card sits above the Quick guide and shows two KPIs side by side. KPIWhat it shows **Impressions**Number of times Avada Order Limit has successfully blocked invalid actions on your store **Contacts**Total customer contacts made through the app's "Contact us" entry on the limit notification If you are on a **Free** plan, the **Impressions** card also shows your free impression usage (e.g., **20 / 50 free impressions**). This is a **one-time lifetime allowance** — it does **not** reset each month. When it runs out, your limit rules stop enforcing on the storefront until you upgrade. **Tip:** If **Impressions** stays at **0** but you have active rules, check the **Theme store app embed** bar above. The embed must be **On** for impressions to count. ### Block 3: Quick guide A 4-task checklist that takes a new store from install to fully enforced limits. Above the tasks you'll see a progress line — for example, **"2 of 4 tasks completed"** — that fills as you finish each one. StepTaskWhat it means **1****Activate app**Enable our app to see it visible on your store. Click **Activate app** to open the Shopify theme editor, or **Refresh status** to re-check the embed. **2****Create your first limit**Set up your limit with various types. Click **Create new limit** to open the limit type picker and configure your first rule. **3****Add the block to show inline limit notification**Once you click **Go to Settings**, the app blocks will be added automatically. All you need to do is click **Save** on the theme editor page." **4****Add checkout rule**The app now automatically adds Checkout rules for you. To confirm, click **Go to checkout settings** to check their status in your Admin panel. **Tip:** Step 1 is the only blocker for the storefront. Step 4 is the safety net — without it, a savvy customer can land on `/checkout` directly and bypass your limits. We recommend completing all 4 steps before going live. ### Block 4: Helpdesk A small card at the bottom of the Dashboard for direct support. - **Chat with us** — opens the in-app live chat with the Avada team (replies usually within minutes during business hours) - **Read guide** — opens this help center ### Understanding Your Metrics #### Impressions Each impression counts one time Avada Order Limit successfully blocked an invalid add-to-cart, cart update, or checkout attempt. Rising impressions mean your rules are catching real customer behavior. If the number sits at zero for days, either no shoppers hit your rule or the embed is off. #### Contacts Counts customers who clicked the "Contact us" link inside the limit notification. A spike here often means your limit threshold is confusing or too restrictive — worth a review. ### Tips - **Bookmark the Dashboard.** It's the fastest way to spot when something has broken — e.g., a theme update accidentally toggled the embed off. - **Watch Impressions early.** If the number stays at 0 after install, you have an embed or rule-coverage problem. Don't wait a month to notice. - **Treat the Quick guide as a gate.** Don't share the store URL with customers until all 4 tasks show as completed. - **Free plan?** Keep an eye on the free impression counter on the Overview card so you don't hit the cap mid-campaign. And there you have it! You now know what every block on the Avada Order Limit Dashboard means. Complete the Quick guide, then check back weekly to monitor impressions and contacts. If you have any questions or run into any issues, don't hesitate to reach out. We're here to help! [Getting Started with Avada Order Limit](/order-limit-help-center/)[Plans & Pricing](/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/plans-and-pricing/) --- # Plans & Pricing Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/plans-and-pricing/ # Plans & Pricing The price for your plan will be based on your current Shopify plan. **Yearly pricing:** **Monthly pricing:** Easily set purchase limits and enhance customer experience. Start with our free plan and customize to your needs. Take control over your inventory. ### FAQs about pricing **Can I cancel my subscription at anytime?** Yes, you can cancel your subscription at any time. **If I cancel the paid plans, will I lose the features or effects that were available in the previous paid plan?** If you decide to cancel your paid plan, you can still access our app main features which include all your created limit rules. Another thing to keep in mind is that when you downgrade, the free impressions limit will continue counting. After total free impressions expired, you won't be able to activate limit rules. **Will I be charged after uninstalling the app?** The app's subscription charge module automatically charges the specified amount at regular intervals, usually monthly or annually. If you uninstall the app before the subscription period ends, you will still be charged the full amount for the entire subscription period. **Will I be charged after downgrading from paid plans to the Free plan?** The app's subscription charge module automatically charges the specified amount at regular intervals, such as monthly or annually. If you switch to the Free plan before the subscription period ends, our app will still function normally and you will still be charged the full amount for the entire subscription period. [Dashboard](/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/dashboard/)[Ask Shopify Sidekick](/order-limit-help-center/getting-started/ask-shopify-sidekick/) --- # Shopify Flow Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/integrations/shopify-flow/ # Shopify Flow Shopify Flow is a low-code automation tool built by Shopify. With this integration, Avada Order Limit becomes a **trigger** inside Flow — you can tag the customer, send a Slack or email alert, push the event to Klaviyo or Omnisend, or chain any other app you already use. Don't worry, we'll walk you through every step. ### Prerequisites - Avada Order Limit is installed and at least one limit rule is published - Shopify Flow is installed on your store from the Shopify App Store - (Optional) The third-party app you want to connect to ### Step 1: Connect Avada Order Limit to Shopify Flow Open Avada Order Limit and go to **Integrations > Shopify Flow** from the left menu. You will see two cards: **Integrate with any apps** and **Connect to Shopify Flow**. - Locate the **Connect to Shopify Flow** card - Click the **Connect** button on the right - Wait for the status badge next to the page title to change from **Disconnected** to **Connected** **Note:** The **Create a flow** button stays disabled until the integration shows as **Connected**. If the badge still says **Disconnected**, refresh the page and try again. ### Step 2: Open the Shopify Flow editor From the same screen, click **Create a flow** on the **Integrate with any apps** card. This opens the Shopify Flow editor in a new tab, ready for you to build your automation. **Tip:** You can also reach the editor directly from **Shopify admin > Apps > Flow > Create workflow**, but starting from Avada saves a few clicks because the trigger app is already linked. ### Step 3: Choose an Avada Order Limit trigger In the Flow editor, click the **Trigger** node, search for **Avada Order Limit**, and pick one of the three triggers below. TriggerFires when **Limit Max Reached**A customer adds an item to cart and reaches the maximum quantity allowed by your rule **Limit Max Violated**A customer tries to exceed the maximum quantity allowed by your rule **Limit Min Violated**A customer's cart falls below the minimum quantity required by your rule Each trigger exposes the same payload, so you can use any of the following fields downstream: - `Customer Id`, `Customer Email` - `Min value`, `Max value`, `Multiple` - `Rule Name`, `Rule Type` - `Product Name`, `Collection Name` ### Step 4: Add conditions (optional) Conditions let you narrow the automation to specific rules or products. Click the **+** under the trigger and choose **Condition**. Common examples: - Run the flow only when `Rule Name` equals `MOQ 20` - Run the flow only when `Product Name` starts with `Sample` - Run the flow only when `Rule Type` equals `Product Limit` **Tip:** Skip this step if you want the automation to run for every limit event — you can always add conditions later. ### Step 5: Add the action Click the **+** at the end of the branch and choose **Action**. Pick the app you want to fire — Shopify, Klaviyo, Omnisend, Slack, Google Sheets, or anything else available in your Flow library. Popular actions for Order Limit events: - **Add customer tag** — segment customers who keep hitting the max - **Send Slack message** — alert your team about wholesale violations - **Send Klaviyo/Omnisend event** — trigger a follow-up email or SMS - **Create draft order** — convert a max-violated cart into a sales conversation - **Update customer metafield** — flag VIPs or rule-breakers for later use ### Step 6: Name, turn on, and test the flow - Click the flow title at the top and rename it to something descriptive (e.g., `Tag wholesale violators`) - Click **Turn on workflow** in the top-right - Open your storefront and trigger the limit rule — for example, add more units than allowed to the cart - Return to Shopify Flow and open the **Runs** tab to confirm the run completed successfully **Important:** A flow runs only when **both** conditions are true — the workflow is **On** in Shopify Flow, **and** the integration is **Connected** in Avada Order Limit. If runs are missing, check both sides. ### Managing the integration Come back to **Integrations > Shopify Flow** in Avada Order Limit at any time to: - **Disconnect** — click the **Disconnect** button on the **Connect to Shopify Flow** card to pause all Avada triggers in Flow. Existing flows stay saved, they just won't fire. - **Reconnect** — click **Connect** again to resume. - **Need a hand?** — click **Let us help** under the **Create a flow** button to chat with our support team about a custom flow. ### Tips - Use the `Rule Name` condition to keep one flow per rule clean — easier to debug than one giant flow with many branches. - If a flow doesn't fire, check the **Runs** tab in Shopify Flow. A missing run usually means the trigger never matched (wrong rule name, customer not logged in, etc.). - The `Customer Email` field is empty for guest checkouts. Add a **Condition: Customer Email is not empty** branch if your action requires an email. - Test each new flow with a draft rule before turning it on for live shoppers — Shopify Flow does not have a sandbox mode. And there you have it! You've successfully connected Avada Order Limit with Shopify Flow. Every time a customer hits or breaks a limit rule, your automation will take over from there — no manual work required. If you have any questions or run into any issues, don't hesitate to reach out. We're here to help! [Branding](/order-limit-help-center/customize-branding/branding/)[Add Snippet Code](/order-limit-help-center/settings/add-snippet-code/) --- # Re-purchase Limit Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/re-purchase-limit/ # Re-purchase Limit **Requires:** Pro plan The Re-Purchase Limit feature gives you powerful control over how much customers can purchase across multiple orders within a specific time period. Unlike basic order limits that apply to individual transactions, this advanced feature tracks customer purchases by email address, allowing you to restrict total quantities or order values regardless of how many separate orders they place. ### What is Re-purchase Limit Re-purchase Limit provides a sophisticated system for tracking and restricting customer purchases. Here's a breakdown of its core functionality: - **Customer tracking**: The system identifies customers by their email address across multiple orders. - **Accumulated purchase limits**: You can set restrictions on either the total product quantity or total order value a customer can purchase within your specified timeframe. - **Flexible time periods**: Choose from preset time frames (lifetime, monthly, yearly) or create a custom time period that fits your specific business needs. - **Customer account requirement**: To accurately track purchases, customers must log in to their accounts during checkout. By understanding these key components, you'll be able to implement purchase limits that help you maintain inventory control while ensuring fair distribution of your products. ### How to set up Re-purchase Limit Follow these step-by-step instructions to configure Re-Purchase Limit for your store: ### Step 1: Open the rule and find the Re-purchase limit section Open the rule you want the re-purchase cap to apply to and scroll to the **Re-purchase limit** section, which sits just above Advanced settings near the bottom of the form. - From your Shopify admin, open the **Avada Order Limit** app - Go to **Limits management** - Select an existing rule, or click **Create limit** to start a new one - Scroll to the **Re-purchase limit** section (just above **Advanced settings**) — expand it if it is collapsed ### Step 2: Choose a re-purchase window In the **Re-purchase limit** section, find the **Limit customer re-purchase** dropdown. Pick the period you want the rule's quantity or value cap to accumulate over. OptionDescription **No re-purchase limit**Default. The cap resets every order — the rule only checks each single transaction. **Once per lifetime**The customer can hit the cap exactly once, ever. After that, they are blocked permanently for this rule. **Once per month**The cap accumulates across a 30-day rolling window per customer. **Once per year**The cap accumulates across a 360-day rolling window per customer. **Custom time**Define any window from 1 hour up to 2 years (see Step 3). **Note:** The dropdown only appears on Product, Collection, Customer, and Order limit rules. It is hidden on Product Blocking rules because blocking is not quantity-based. ### Step 3: Set a Custom time window (optional) If you picked **Custom time**, a second field appears so you can enter the exact period. - Enter a whole number in the **Limit re-purchase period end** input - Choose the unit from the dropdown on the right: **Hour(s)**, **Day(s)**, **Month(s)**, or **Year(s)** Maximum values per unit: UnitMaximum Hours17,520 (2 years) Days730 (2 years) Months24 Years2 **Tip:** Use **Hours** for flash sales or limited drops (e.g. "after 24 hours"). Use **Months** or **Years** for long-term allocation rules like subscription boxes or pre-orders. ### Step 4: Customize how the period counts (optional) Two extra checkboxes below the dropdown let you adjust how the window tallies each customer's purchases. #### Reset repurchase at the start of the period When you choose **Once per month**, **Once per year**, or **Custom time**, the **Reset repurchase at the start of the period** checkbox appears. - **Unchecked (default):** The window is a **rolling** period counted from each customer's first qualifying purchase. Example with "Once per month": a customer who buys on the 10th gets a fresh window on the 10th of next month. - **Checked:** The window aligns to a **fixed calendar boundary**. Every customer's counter resets together at the start of each month, year, or custom cycle — useful for monthly allocations, fairness campaigns, or accounting periods. **Note:** This checkbox is hidden when you select **No re-purchase limit** or **Once per lifetime** — those options have nothing to reset. #### Exclude past canceled orders Tick **Exclude past canceled orders** to leave canceled orders out of each customer's running total. With it on, an order that was placed and later canceled no longer counts toward the re-purchase cap — so a customer is not blocked by a purchase they never actually completed. **Note:** This checkbox appears whenever you select a re-purchase window. It is hidden only when **No re-purchase limit** is selected. ### Step 5: Save and verify - Click **Save** at the top of the rule - Sign in to your storefront as a test customer - Place an order that reaches the rule's quantity or value cap - Try a second order with the same account — the app should block checkout with your configured message ### Tips - **Customer login is mandatory.** The app keys the running total off the customer's email. Guest checkout cannot be tracked, so the limit will silently let guests through if login is not required at checkout. - **Picking the right time unit matters for the math.** Monthly = 30 days and Yearly = 360 days under the hood. If you need exact calendar months (e.g. "reset on the 1st"), use the **Reset repurchase at the start of the period** checkbox. - **Re-purchase Limit stacks with the rule's own cap** — it does not replace it. The rule's quantity or value limit is what gets enforced; the re-purchase window just controls how long the count keeps adding up. - If the dropdown is greyed out, your store is on the Free plan. Re-purchase Limit is a Pro feature — see [Plans & Pricing (opens in a new tab)](https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/plans-pricing) to upgrade. And there you have it! You've successfully set up Re-purchase Limit. Your store will now track each customer's accumulated purchases against this rule and block additional orders once they hit the cap within the time window you defined. If you have any questions or run into any issues, don't hesitate to reach out. We're here to help! [Create Product Blocking Limit](/order-limit-help-center/create-product-blocking-limit/)[Customize and Translate Limit Message](/order-limit-help-center/customize-and-translate-limit-message/) --- # Add Block in Theme Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/settings/add-block-in-theme/ # Add Block in Theme **Who can use this feature?** This feature is available for all users. To make this happen, please ensure that the Avada Order Limit app is **active**. ### Step 1: Navigate to Themes editor Please navigate to **Online Store → Themes → Customize**. ### Step 2: Locate the Product page Next, please select '**Product**'. ### Step 3: Add Avada Order Limit block Now, click on '**Add block**' → Select '**App**' → Choose '**Avada Order Limit**'. ### Step 4: Block placement and save Finally, drag and drop the block to the location where you want it to be displayed. Don't forget to hit the **Save** button for your changes. And there you have it! Your inline limit notification is now set up at your desired location. If you have any other questions or need further assistance, please don't hesitate to ask. [Add Snippet Code](/order-limit-help-center/settings/add-snippet-code/)[Adding a Checkout Rule](/order-limit-help-center/settings/adding-a-checkout-rule/) --- # Add Snippet Code Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/settings/add-snippet-code/ # Add Snippet Code **Who can use this feature?** This feature is available for all users. ### Step 1: Accessing the Snippet Code Firstly, please navigate to the Avada Order Limit app, then click on '**Branding**'. Here you'll find the snippet code that you need to copy. ### Step 2: Navigating to the Theme Code Next, please go to **'Online Store'**, then '**Themes**', and finally click on '**Edit code**'. ### Step 3: Adding the Snippet Code to Product.liquid Now, please select '**product-template.liquid**'. Here, you will paste the snippet code at the location where you want the notification to appear. ### Step 4: Adding the Snippet Code to Cart.liquid Similarly, please select '**Cart.liquid**'. Here, you will paste the snippet code at the location where you want the notification to appear. ### Step 5: Saving Your Settings Finally, please click on '**Save**' to keep your settings. And voila, you're all set! Thank you for following this guide. If you have any questions or need further assistance, don't hesitate to ask. We're here to help! [Shopify Flow](/order-limit-help-center/integrations/shopify-flow/)[Add Block in Theme](/order-limit-help-center/settings/add-block-in-theme/) --- # Adding a Checkout Rule Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-limit-help-center/settings/adding-a-checkout-rule/ # Adding a Checkout Rule 💡 **Requires:** Free plan ### Why this matters Limit messages on the product page and cart are friendly nudges. A determined shopper can still bypass them — for example, by visiting `/checkout` from a saved link, sharing a cart URL, or ignoring the warnings. The checkout rule closes that back door by re-running the validation at the final step. By setting this up, you protect your store from unexpected bulk purchases, avoid shipping complications, and keep your inventory balanced. ## Part 1: Register the validation in Shopify Admin ### Step 1: Open Checkout rules in Shopify In your Shopify admin, navigate to **Settings → Checkout → Checkout rules** and click **Add rule**. ### Step 2: Select Avada Order Limit's validation In the dropdown, choose **Avada Order Limit → avada-order-limit-validation**. This connects the Shopify checkout step to Avada's validation function. ### Step 3: Turn on the checkout rule After saving in Shopify, make sure the new rule is **enabled** — toggle the switch next to the rule you just added. ## Part 2: Configure the rule inside Avada Order Limit Once Shopify is registered, jump back into the Avada app to control how the validation behaves. Open Avada Order Limit and navigate to **Settings → Checkout rules**. The page is titled **Settings** and contains three cards: **Checkout validation**, **Rule settings**, and **Debug mode**. ### Step 4: Turn on Checkout validation In the **Checkout validation** card, look at the **Checkout rules status** badge: - If it reads **Off**, click **Turn on** — the badge flips to **On** (green) and the validation is active. - If it reads **On**, you're already covered. ### Step 5: Pick what happens if validation fails Shopify's checkout rules can occasionally fail to execute (network blips, function timeouts, etc.). The **Rule settings** card lets you decide the fallback behavior. Under **If the checkout validation fails or experiences a problem**, choose one: - **Allow customer to complete the checkout** — the app keeps working normally before checkout, but if a customer reaches checkout (e.g., via a direct link) the rules are not enforced and the order proceeds. Recommended for most stores. - **Block customer from completing the checkout** — all orders are blocked as if a limit rule were violated. Safer for inventory but may stop legitimate orders during a function outage. 💡 **Tip:** Pick **Allow customer to complete the checkout** unless you have strict inventory rules. A short outage of Shopify's checkout function is rare, but blocking every order during one will hurt revenue. After choosing, click **Save** in the top bar to apply. ### Step 6: (Optional) Share function logs for debugging The **Debug mode** card is for troubleshooting. If something looks wrong — for example, a limit isn't enforced at checkout — our support team may ask you to share the checkout function's logs. - Click **Share logs** on the right side of the Debug mode card. - This opens the Shopify Apps page for Avada Order Limit. - Click the **action button (...)** next to **Avada Order Limit: Checkout Rules**. - Choose **View details**. - Scroll down to **Share function logs** and click **Share logs**. - Once sharing is enabled, share the logs URL with our support team. ### Step 7: Verify end-to-end Open your storefront in an incognito window and try to violate a limit at checkout: - Add a quantity that exceeds your limit rule. - Skip the cart and go to `/checkout` directly (paste the URL if needed). - The checkout should be blocked with a clear limit message. If the order goes through anyway, recheck Part 1 (the rule must be added and enabled in Shopify) and Part 2 Step 4 (Checkout rules status must read **On** in the app). ### Tips - **Both halves are required:** Registering the validation in Shopify (Part 1) without turning it on in the app (Part 2 Step 4) won't enforce anything — and vice versa. - **Allow vs. Block trade-off:** "Allow" optimizes for smooth checkout; "Block" optimizes for strict inventory control. Pick based on which failure mode hurts your store more. - **Logs are scoped per request:** Function logs are short-lived. If a customer reports an issue, grab the logs as soon as possible after the failed checkout. - **No code editing needed:** Unlike the legacy snippet flow, the checkout rule is fully managed by Shopify Functions — there's nothing to paste into your theme. [Add Block in Theme](/order-limit-help-center/settings/add-block-in-theme/) --- # Introduction Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/ # Introduction **Avada Order Tracking** helps Shopify merchants reduce "Where is my order?" support tickets by giving customers a branded, self-serve tracking experience — plus automated notifications, multi-language support, and post-purchase upsells. ## What Avada Order Tracking does For your customersFor you Look up any order 24/7 using order number or tracking numberManage all shipments in one admin view with filters by status and carrier See a clear timeline: Ordered → Preparing → In Transit → Out for Delivery → DeliveredCustomize the tracking page to match your brand — no code required Get email updates when shipment status changesSend automated emails at key shipment milestones Browse in their own language (40+ languages supported)Promote products on the tracking page to increase AOV See carrier information for major couriers worldwideGet alerted when shipments stall or fail Track delivery performance with built-in Analytics dashboard ## Who this guide is for Shopify merchants using the Avada Order Tracking app. No coding required — everything in this guide is configurable through the app admin interface. ## Getting the app Avada Order Tracking is **free to install** with no credit card required. You can find it on the [Shopify App Store (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/zzrR3r). ## Reading order If you're new to the app, follow these pages in order: - [Getting started](/getting-started/) — install and first-time setup (5 minutes) - [Tracking page](/tracking-page/) — customize what customers see - [Email notifications](/email-notifications/) — automate shipment updates - [Analytics](/analytics/) — track shipping performance metrics - [Storefront experience](/storefront/) — understand the customer view Otherwise, use the sidebar to jump to any feature. ## Need help? - [FAQ & troubleshooting](/faq/) for common questions - In-app chat support is available 24/7 from the app's home page [Getting started](/order-tracking/getting-started/) --- # Analytics Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/analytics/ # Analytics Track shipping performance at a glance. The Analytics dashboard gives you the metrics that matter — delivery rates, transit times, exception counts, and carrier performance — all in one place. ## Opening Analytics Click **Analytics** in the app sidebar. ## Date range filter Choose the period you want to analyze. Available options: - Last 7 days - Last 30 days (default) - Last 90 days - This month - Last month - Custom range All sections on the page update together when you change the date range. A **Last updated** timestamp + Refresh icon at the top right shows when the data was last refreshed — click to force a refresh. ## Overview blocks Four KPI cards at the top of the page give you the big picture. CardShowsIncludes **Total Orders**Orders synced in the selected period% change vs the previous equivalent period **Delivered Rate**Percentage of orders that reached "Delivered" status% change vs previous period **In Transit**Orders currently in transitOverdue warning if any have been in transit longer than 7 days **Exceptions**Orders in Exception or Failed Attempt statusClick the card to jump to the Orders page filtered to Exception ## Order Trends A line chart showing three series over time: - **New Orders** — orders that haven't moved past Pending or Info Received - **Delivered** — orders successfully delivered - **Exceptions** — orders with delivery problems Switch the time bucket between **Daily / Weekly / Monthly** depending on the date range you've selected. Long ranges look cleaner with weekly or monthly granularity. ## Orders by status A donut chart showing the current distribution of orders across statuses (Delivered, In Transit, Out for Delivery, Exception, Pending, Failed Attempt, Info Received). Use this to spot bottlenecks — for example, a large slice of "In Transit" orders may indicate a slow carrier, while a growing "Exception" slice signals a delivery problem worth investigating. ## Transit Time Analysis A histogram showing how many days your shipments take to deliver, bucketed into 1-day, 2-day, 3-day, ..., 10+ day buckets. Below the histogram you'll see: - **Average transit days** across all delivered orders in the period - **Fastest order** — quickest delivery with carrier name - **Slowest order** — longest delivery with carrier name This is your single best metric for tracking shipping speed improvements. ## Carrier performance A table breaking down delivery metrics by carrier: ColumnWhat it shows CarrierName + logo TotalTotal orders shipped via this carrier DeliveredCount + percentage of total In transitCurrently in transit ExceptionsFailed deliveries or exceptions Avg transit daysMean delivery time for this carrier Sort by any column to find your best and worst-performing carriers. ## How to use Analytics for decisions QuestionWhere to look "Are my deliveries getting slower?"Transit time distribution + month-over-month comparison "Should I switch carriers?"Carrier performance table — compare avg transit days and exception rates "Are my customers complaining about late delivery?"Overview overdue warning + Exception count "Is my fulfillment team keeping up?"Order trend (New Orders line) — should grow steadily, not spike "Did my shipping changes work?"Delivered Rate before/after the change ## Notes on data - Numbers may differ slightly from Shopify's native reports because we count by **shipment status** (the carrier's truth), not by **fulfillment date** (when you marked the order shipped). - "Overdue" is fixed at 7 days for the In Transit card. [Getting started](/order-tracking/getting-started/)[Orders](/order-tracking/orders/) --- # Email notifications Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/email-notifications/ # Email notifications Automate your post-purchase communication. Send branded emails to customers at every key shipment milestone — from order confirmation to delivery — without writing a single line of code. ## Opening Email notifications Click **Email notifications** in the app sidebar. ## Six built-in email triggers Each trigger sends an email at a specific point in the shipment lifecycle. Enable only the ones that fit your customer experience. TriggerSent when **Order confirmed**A new order is placed **Shipped**The order is fulfilled and has a tracking number **In transit**The shipment status updates to "in transit" **Out for delivery**The shipment is with the final-mile courier **Delivered**The order has been delivered **Exception / Failed delivery**There's a delivery exception or failed attempt ## Sender Settings At the top of the page you'll find sender settings that apply to all emails: SettingDescription **Sender Email**The "From" email address. Defaults to a shared Avada address for deliverability. **Sender Name**The "From" name customers see in their inbox (e.g. "Acme Store"). **Reply-to Email** (Optional)Where customer replies are sent — typically your support inbox. ## How the trigger list works Each trigger appears as a row with: - **Name** and short description. - **Status toggle** — turn this trigger on or off without deleting the template. - **Edit** button — opens the template editor. Toggling a trigger off stops all emails for that milestone going forward. Emails already sent are not affected. ## Editing an email template Click **Edit** on any trigger to open the template editor. The editor has two tabs (**Content** and **Branding**) plus a live preview on the right. A **Reset to default** button at the top right reverts the template. ### Content tab FieldPurposeLimit **Subject Line**What customers see in their inbox. Use variables like `{{ order_name }}` to personalize.200 chars **Email Heading**The main headline at the top of the email body.100 chars **Email Body**Rich text editor with Bold, Italic, Underline, Alignment, Variables, Lists, Indent, Font Family, Font Size, Insert HTML toolbar.— **CTA Button Text**Text on the action button (e.g. "Track order").— **CTA Button URL**Where the button points (see options below).— **Footer Text**Short text shown at the bottom of the email above the unsubscribe link.— **CTA URL options:** - **Tracking Page** — link to your app's branded tracking page (recommended). - **Shopify Order Status Page** — link to Shopify's native order status page. - **Custom URL** — type any URL you want. **Include Sections** — checkboxes that toggle which content blocks appear in the email: - **Tracking Information** — carrier, tracking number, current status. - **Order Items** — products in the order with images and quantities. - **Shipping Address** — where the order is going. Turn off sections to keep the email shorter, or all on for the most informative experience. ### Branding tab Customize the look of all your emails in one place. Branding is shared across all triggers — change it once, every email uses it. SettingDescription **Logo URL**Paste a URL to your store logo (hosted publicly). **Logo Position**Left, Center, or Right. **Primary Color**Used for buttons and links. **Background Color**Outer email background (around the content). **Body Background Color**Inner content background. **Text Color**Body text color. **Button Text Color**Text inside the CTA button. **Font Family**Arial, Helvetica, Georgia, Times New Roman, or Verdana. **Show "Powered by AVADA" in footer**Toggle whether to show the badge at the email footer. ### Variables Personalize your emails with dynamic variables (Liquid-style syntax): - `{{ customer_first_name }}` — the customer's first name. - `{{ order_name }}` — the Shopify order number (e.g. #1024). - `{{ tracking_number }}` — the carrier tracking number. - `{{ carrier }}` — the courier name (e.g. "USPS"). - `{{ shop_name }}` — your store name. - `{{ tracking_url }}` — direct link to this order's tracking page. - `{{ shop_email }}` — your store contact email. Type `{{` in any text field to see the full variable picker. ## Preview The right panel shows a live preview using sample data. Toggle between **Desktop** and **Mobile** to check both layouts. The preview reflects: - Your current subject, body, CTA, and branding settings. - Variable replacement using sample values. - Responsive email layout (single column on mobile). ## Sending test emails Click **Send test email** in the template editor. The app sends a preview email to your shop owner's email address so you can check it in a real inbox. ## Saving changes Click **Save** at the top right. Changes take effect immediately for future emails — no delay. ## Email delivery Emails are sent from a reliable transactional email service. Typical delivery is under one minute. If customers report missing emails: - Ask them to check spam/junk folder. - Confirm the trigger is enabled. - Check the customer email on the order is correct. ## Tips - **Start with fewer triggers.** Turn on **Shipped**, **Out for delivery**, and **Delivered** first. These are the most valuable. Add others later if your customers ask for more granularity. - **Keep subject lines short.** Under 50 characters so they don't truncate on mobile. - **Use the tracking page URL, not Shopify's.** Customers get a better experience, and you can promote products via [Product upsell](/product-upsell/). - **Test every template.** Send yourself a test email for each trigger before turning it on. [Translation](/order-tracking/translation/)[Product upsell](/order-tracking/product-upsell/) --- # Exception alerts Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/exception-alerts/ # Exception alerts Catch delivery problems before customers email you about them. Exception alerts monitor every shipment and notify you when something goes wrong — lost packages, stuck orders, failed deliveries. ## Opening Exception alerts Click **Exception alerts** in the app sidebar. ## Why this matters Most shipping problems follow the same pattern: the customer notices first, opens a support ticket, and you investigate. With exception alerts, you see the issue the moment the carrier reports it — giving you time to contact the customer, reship, or refund before frustration sets in. ## Two sub-tabs The Exception alerts page has 2 sub-tabs: - **Alert Settings** — configure which alert types are enabled and their thresholds. - **Exception Orders** — see the list of orders that have triggered an alert. A master toggle at the top right turns the entire feature on or off. ## Four alert types (Alert Settings tab) ### Exception Status Triggered when the carrier reports a shipment exception — lost package, damaged package, returned to sender, wrong address, etc. **Enable when:** You want to know immediately about any delivery problem. ### Failed Delivery Triggered when the carrier attempts delivery but is unable to complete — nobody home, incorrect address, refused by customer. **Enable when:** You ship items that require signature or are in markets with delivery attempt issues. ### Stale Orders Triggered when an order has been sitting in **Pending** status for too long without carrier activity. - **Default threshold:** 3 days. **Enable when:** You want to catch orders your fulfillment team may have missed. ### Long In Transit Triggered when a shipment has been in **In transit** status longer than expected. - **Default threshold:** 7 days. **Enable when:** You ship internationally or want to proactively reach customers with slow-moving packages. ## Setting up alerts For each alert type, you'll find: - A **toggle** to enable/disable. - A **threshold days** input (only for warning-type alerts with adjustable thresholds). Start by enabling only the alerts that match your business: - Domestic-only stores: **Exception status** + **Failed delivery**. - International stores: enable all four, with longer thresholds for stale/long-transit. - High-volume stores: start with **Exception status** only to avoid notification fatigue. ## Notification channel When an alert fires, an email is sent to your sender email (set up in [Email notifications](/email-notifications/)) with order details and a link to the Order detail page. ## Exception Orders tab The **Exception Orders** sub-tab lists all orders that have triggered an alert. Each row shows: - Alert type. - Affected order number. - Timestamp. - Current status of the order. Click any row to open the Order detail page and investigate. ## Resolving an alert There's no "resolve" button — alerts automatically clear when the underlying issue changes: - **Exception status** clears when the carrier moves the shipment to a non-exception status. - **Failed delivery** clears when the carrier successfully delivers on a later attempt. - **Stale orders** clears when tracking activity resumes. - **Long in transit** clears when the shipment is delivered. If a problem can't self-resolve (truly lost package, wrong address), handle it with the customer through normal support channels. The alert stays in the history for reference. ## Tips - **Set realistic thresholds.** If your international shipments usually take 12 days, set Long in transit threshold to 15+. Default 7 days will spam you. - **Triage daily, not hourly.** Check the alerts page once a day to batch-process exceptions. Real-time reaction isn't usually necessary. - **Forward to CS team.** If you have a customer service team, route the email notifications to a shared inbox they can work from. - **Pair with email notifications.** When an exception fires, your customer also gets the [Exception email](/email-notifications/). Make sure the copy is reassuring, not alarming. [Product upsell](/order-tracking/product-upsell/)[Storefront experience](/order-tracking/storefront/) --- # FAQ & troubleshooting Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/faq/ # FAQ & troubleshooting Common questions and fixes for the Avada Order Tracking app. ## Installation & setup ### Is the app really free? Yes. No paid plans, no credit card, no trial limit. The app is free to install and use on any Shopify plan. ### Which Shopify plans are supported? All of them: Basic, Grow, Advanced, and Plus. No plan-specific restrictions. ### Do I need to touch code? No. All features are configured through the app admin interface. The tracking page is created for you, the theme extension is a one-click enable. ### Can I uninstall without breaking my store? Yes. When you uninstall: - The tracking page you created stays in your Shopify admin. You can delete it manually or keep it. - The menu item in your main navigation stays. Remove it via **Online Store → Navigation** if desired. - Orders synced to the app are deleted. ## Orders ### Orders from before I installed aren't showing up. Only orders placed after install are synced automatically. To import older orders: - Go to **Orders**. If the list is completely empty, you'll see a **Sync orders** button that imports the last 7 days. - For older orders (30+ days), contact support through in-app chat. ### Some orders are missing tracking numbers. A few reasons this happens: - **Not yet fulfilled.** If the order status is Pending, no tracking exists. You'll see the tracking number once you fulfill in Shopify. - **Carrier not supported.** The app supports 1,000+ carriers but rare local carriers may not be recognized. Contact support to add your carrier. - **Fulfillment was edited.** If you fulfilled without a tracking number, then added it later, click **Refresh** on the order detail page. ### Carrier shows as wrong (e.g. "An Post" for a US order) This happens when Shopify auto-detects the carrier incorrectly. To fix: - Go to Shopify admin → the order → Edit fulfillment. - Change the **Shipping carrier** dropdown to the correct carrier. - Save. The Avada Order Tracking app picks up the correction within a minute. ### How often does tracking status update? Tracking status refreshes when the carrier reports new scans. Typical carrier cadence is every 4–12 hours. You can force a refresh manually from the order detail page. ## Tracking page ### The tracking page URL is weird / I want a custom URL. The default URL is `/pages/order-tracking`. You can change the slug from inside the app: - Go to **Order tracking page** in the app sidebar. - Open the **URL** tab. - Type your preferred slug (e.g. `track`, `where-is-my-order`, `theo-doi-don-hang`). Max 30 characters. Don't edit the page handle directly in Shopify admin — change it in the app so the URL stays in sync everywhere (storefront widget, emails, menu link). If a Shopify Page already uses your chosen handle, Shopify will auto-append `-1` to avoid conflicts. Delete or rename the conflicting page in **Online Store → Pages** first. ### My brand colors aren't showing up. Check: - **Did you save?** The preview updates live but you need to click **Save** for the storefront to pick up. - **Browser cache.** Shopify caches metafields. Hard-refresh (Ctrl/Cmd + Shift + R) or test in incognito. - **Theme CSS conflict.** Your theme may have !important styles overriding. Contact support — we can add CSS overrides. ### Can customers look up orders without knowing the order number? Yes, if you enable **Lookup by tracking number**. They'll need the carrier tracking number (usually in the shipping confirmation email). ### Why do I need both order number AND email for lookup? To prevent someone from guessing order numbers (`#1001`, `#1002`, `#1003`...) to see other people's shipping addresses, items, and personal info. Requiring email is a privacy safeguard. ## Email notifications ### Customers aren't receiving emails. Check in this order: - **Trigger enabled?** Go to [Email notifications](/email-notifications/) and verify the trigger toggle is on. - **Spam folder.** Ask the customer to check junk/spam. - **Correct email on order.** On the Order detail page, confirm the customer email is correct. If Shopify cached an old email, edit it in Shopify admin and click Refresh. - **Email logs.** Contact support and we'll pull logs for specific emails. ### How do I customize the "From" email address? Currently emails send from a shared Avada address for deliverability. Custom sender (your domain) is on our roadmap. Vote for it via in-app chat. ### Can I schedule emails (e.g. "review request 7 days after delivery")? Yes for the delivered trigger — it fires automatically. For custom delays, this is on our roadmap. ## Translation ### I added a language but customers still see English. Two things to check: - **Language is enabled.** Toggle on the row needs to be on. - **Detection method matches customer reality.** If you picked **Browser's language** but your customer's browser is set to English, they'll see English. Try **Customer's IP** if you're based in one country but serve multiple. ### I need a language that's not on the list. Contact support through in-app chat. We add languages on request (takes ~1 week). ### Can I translate the emails too? Yes. The Translation page translates tracking page text. For email templates, the email editor has per-language templates — coming soon. ## Product upsell ### Why aren't my products showing up on the tracking page? Check: - **Master toggle is on.** Product upsell page top toggle. - **Products are selected.** The product list must have at least one product. - **Product is published.** Draft products won't show. Publish in Shopify admin. - **Browser cache.** Hard-refresh the tracking page. ### How do I know if upsell is working? Look at your Shopify analytics: - **Online store → Reports → Referrer reports** → filter by Tracking page URL. - Check conversion on the specific products you're promoting. ### Can I show different products based on what the customer ordered? Not yet. Currently all customers see the same product list. Personalized upsell is on our roadmap. ## Analytics ### Numbers in Analytics don't match Shopify reports. Analytics counts orders by **shipment status from the carrier**, not by Shopify's fulfillment status. So: - An order Shopify shows as "Fulfilled" may still be "In Transit" in Analytics until the carrier scans it as Delivered. - Analytics excludes cancelled and deleted orders. - Numbers in Analytics may lag Shopify by a few minutes since BigQuery refreshes from webhooks. ### "Overdue" in transit — can I change the 7-day threshold? Currently fixed at 7 days for the In Transit overview card. Configurable threshold is on our roadmap. For now, use the [Exception alerts](/exception-alerts/) **Long in transit** alert for customizable thresholds (3-60 days). ### Why are my "New Orders" numbers different from total orders placed? "New Orders" in the trend chart counts orders whose latest tracking status is still **Pending** or **Info Received** (i.e. not yet shipped). Orders that have moved further appear in the **Delivered** or other status lines. ## Exception alerts ### I'm getting too many alerts. Adjust in [Exception alerts](/exception-alerts/): - **Increase thresholds.** If Long in transit fires too often, bump from 7 days to 14. - **Disable low-value alerts.** If you don't ship internationally, Stale orders alerts may be noise. - **Batch check daily.** Don't react real-time; check once per morning. ### The email alert doesn't go to my team inbox. Alerts send to the shop owner email in Shopify settings. If you need a different email: - Go to Shopify admin → **Settings → Store details → Contact information**. - Update **Shop owner email**. - Set up email forwarding from that address to your team inbox. ## Carriers ### My local carrier isn't detected. The app supports 1,000+ carriers but may not recognize very local/regional services automatically. Workarounds: - **Set carrier manually in Shopify.** When fulfilling, choose the correct carrier from Shopify's dropdown. - **Request carrier support.** Contact us through in-app chat with the carrier name and a sample tracking number. We typically add new carriers in 1–2 weeks. ### Can customers click the tracking number to see carrier details? Yes. On the tracking page, the tracking number is a clickable link that opens the carrier's own tracking page for deeper scan data. ## Performance & reliability ### Does the app slow down my storefront? No. The tracking widget only loads on the tracking page (`/pages/order-tracking`). It doesn't run on your home page, product pages, or cart. Bundle is under 50KB gzipped and loads asynchronously. ### What happens if the app is down? The tracking page itself is hosted with global CDN so availability is 99.9%+. If the carrier API is slow, tracking info may be delayed but the page still loads. ### Are my customer emails stored securely? Yes. All data is stored in Google Cloud (Firestore). We comply with GDPR and CCPA. Emails are used only to power the tracking lookup — never resold or used for marketing. ## Still stuck? - Click the **Chat with us** button on the Home page for live support. - For feature requests, use the same chat — we log every request. [Storefront experience](/order-tracking/storefront/) --- # Getting started Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/getting-started/ # Getting started Set up Avada Order Tracking in under five minutes. By the end of this guide your customers will be able to track their orders from a page on your storefront. ## 1. Install the app - Open the [Shopify App Store (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/WORgaA) and search for **Avada Order Tracking**. - Click **Add app** and approve the requested permissions. - Once installed, you'll land on the Avada Order Tracking **Home** screen with a 2-step Quickstart checklist: Activate - Customize page ## 2. Activate the app on your storefront The app needs to be activated inside your theme before customers can use the tracking page. - From the **Home** screen, click **Activate** in the Quickstart card. - Your Shopify theme editor opens with the Avada Order Tracking app embed highlighted. Toggle it **on**. - Click **Save** in the theme editor. - Return to the app and click **Refresh status**. The task is marked complete when the embed is detected. ## 3. Customize the tracking page By default the tracking page uses neutral styling. To match your brand: - Go to **Order tracking page** in the app sidebar. - Switch between the **URL**, **Lookup**, **Status**, and **Style** tabs to adjust the page slug, lookup form, progress bar sections, and colors. - Changes update the preview on the right in real time. See the [Order tracking page](/tracking-page/) section for full details on each tab. ## After Quickstart: sync your existing orders New orders sync automatically from the moment you install the app. To populate the Orders list with your recent history: - Go to **Orders** in the app sidebar. - Click the **Sync orders** button at the top of the page. - Choose how far back to sync: **Last 7 days**, **Last 30 days**, or **Last 60 days**. - Orders appear in the table within a minute or two, depending on shop size. If you need older orders imported, contact support through the in-app chat. ## You're done Your customers can now track their orders. Visit `https://.myshopify.com/pages/order-tracking` to see it live. ## Next steps Now that the basics work, consider setting up: - [Email notifications](/email-notifications/) — automate order updates at every shipment milestone - [Exception alerts](/exception-alerts/) — get notified when shipments stall or fail - [Translation](/translation/) — support customers in multiple languages - [Product upsell](/product-upsell/) — increase revenue from tracking page traffic - [Analytics](/analytics/) — monitor shipping performance with built-in dashboards [Introduction](/order-tracking/)[Analytics](/order-tracking/analytics/) --- # Order details Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/order-detail/ # Order details Click any order row from the **Orders** page to open its detail view. This page shows everything related to a single shipment. ## Layout The page is split into two columns: - **Left (main)** — Order info and shipment timeline. - **Right (side)** — Tracking, customer, shipping, and line items. ## Header At the top you'll find: - **Back button** — returns to the Orders list. - **Order number** — linked to the order in your Shopify admin. - **Status badge** — current shipment status. - **View tracking page** — opens the public tracking page for this order in a new tab. - **Refresh** — re-fetches the latest data from Shopify and the carrier. ## Order info card Shows the order number, created date, and current status. Clicking the order number opens it in your Shopify admin. ## Tracking timeline A vertical timeline showing every status change this shipment has gone through, from order creation to the latest carrier scan. Each timeline entry includes: - The status (e.g. "In transit") - Timestamp - Location (when provided by the carrier) - Description (e.g. "Arrived at distribution facility") The timeline only appears when there's tracking history available. For brand-new orders or orders without tracking yet, you'll see a "No tracking updates yet" message. ## Tracking information card Shows carrier and tracking details: - **Carrier logo and name** — clicking opens the carrier's homepage. - **Fulfillment name** — Shopify's internal fulfillment identifier. - **Tracking number(s)** — if the order has multiple shipments, all numbers are shown. ## Customer information card Contains: - **Full name** — clickable to open the customer in your Shopify admin. - **Email** — the email the app will send review requests and notifications to. - **Phone** — customer phone number if provided. ## Shipping information card Full shipping address including address line 1 and 2, city, province/state, country, ZIP/postal code, and contact phone. ## Items card Lists the products in this order. For each item you see: - Product image (thumbnail) - Product title — linked to the product in Shopify admin - Variant (if applicable) - Quantity By default only the first item shows. If the order has more items, click **Show more** to expand the list. ## Troubleshooting If the order details look stale, click **Refresh** in the header. The app will re-query Shopify for the latest order and customer info. [Orders](/order-tracking/orders/)[Tracking page](/order-tracking/tracking-page/) --- # Orders Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/orders/ # Orders The **Orders** page is your command center for every shipment. Monitor statuses, search for specific orders, and drill into individual shipments. ## Opening the Orders page Click **Orders** in the app sidebar. If the list is empty (e.g. fresh install), you'll see an empty state with "No orders found" and a single **Sync orders** button to import recent history. ## What you see ColumnDescription OrderThe Shopify order number. Clicking the number opens the order in your Shopify admin. Clicking anywhere else on the row opens the order detail in the app. Tracking numberThe carrier tracking number. If an order has multiple shipments, hover to see all numbers. CustomerFirst and last name of the customer. CarrierThe courier handling the shipment (USPS, UPS, FedEx, DHL, etc.) StatusCurrent shipment status as a colored badge. Created atWhen the order was placed. ## Shipment statuses StatusMeaning **Pending**Order placed but no fulfillment yet. **Info received**Carrier has received the label info but hasn't scanned the package. **In transit**Package is on its way to the customer. **Out for delivery**Package is with the final-mile courier today. **Ready for pickup**Waiting for customer to collect (locker, pickup point). **Delivered**Package has reached the customer. **Exception**Delivery attempt failed or the shipment is stuck. **Failed attempt**Carrier attempted delivery but was unable to complete. Status badges are color-coded for quick scanning — green for Delivered, amber for In transit, red for Exception. ## Filtering orders Use the filter bar to narrow the list. ### Status tabs Click any status tab at the top to show only orders in that status. The **All** tab shows everything. ### Search Type in the search box to find orders by: - Order number (e.g. `#1024`) - Tracking number (e.g. `9400111...`) - Customer name (e.g. `John Doe`) Search is debounced — there's a brief pause after you stop typing before results update. ### Filters Click **Filter** to open additional filters: - **Carrier** — multi-select from carriers that actually appear in your orders. - **Fulfillment date** — select a preset range: Today, Last 7 days, Last 30 days, Last 60 days, Last 90 days. Applied filters appear as chips below the filter bar. Remove a filter by clicking the **×** on its chip. ### Sorting Orders are sorted by creation date (newest first) by default. Click the **Sort** control to change. ## Pagination Page through results using the **Previous** and **Next** buttons at the bottom. Change the number of orders per page using the **Items per page** dropdown. ## Syncing orders The **Sync orders** button at the top of the Orders page imports historical orders from Shopify. Click it to open a dropdown: - **Last 7 days** — quick sync of the most recent week - **Last 30 days** — populate the past month - **Last 60 days** — full two months of history New orders placed after install sync automatically through Shopify webhooks — you only need to sync once for backfill. If you need orders older than 60 days imported, contact support through in-app chat. ## Opening an order's details Click any row to open its [Order details](/order-detail/) page, where you can see the full status timeline, customer info, and items. [Analytics](/order-tracking/analytics/)[Order details](/order-tracking/order-detail/) --- # Product upsell Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/product-upsell/ # Product upsell Turn the tracking page into a revenue channel. Customers checking their order status see recommended products right below the tracking timeline — a prime moment because they're already engaged with your brand. ## Opening Product upsell Click **Product upsell** in the app sidebar. ## How upsell works When a customer looks up their order on the tracking page and views the result: - They see the progress timeline for their order. - Below the timeline, a "You might also like" section appears with your selected products. - Clicking a product takes them to the product page on your storefront. This happens only on the tracking page result view — not the lookup form or order details elsewhere. ## Enabling upsell Toggle the master switch at the top of the Product upsell page. When off, no upsell section appears on the tracking page regardless of other settings. ## Widget settings ### Heading The title shown above the product list. Examples: - "You might also like" - "Customers also bought" - "Complete your order" - "Trending right now" Keep it short — mobile screens truncate long headings. ### Recommendation mode Choose how the app picks which products to show: ModeHow it worksBest for **Manual selection**You hand-pick the exact products to show.Curated upsells, seasonal promos, hero products. **Auto – Best Sellers**Auto-pulls your top-selling products from Shopify.Stores with strong best-seller patterns; minimal maintenance. **Auto – Related Products**Shows products related to what the customer ordered.Cross-sell accessories or complementary items. You can switch modes at any time without losing your manual product selection. ### Number of products to show Choose how many products appear. Options: - **2** — compact, fits nicely on mobile. - **3** — balanced for most layouts. - **4** — default, fills desktop width. - **6** — for stores with a large catalog wanting maximum exposure. ### Selected Products (Manual selection mode only) When using Manual selection mode, click **Add Products** to open the product picker and select which products to showcase. Search by product name and pick the products you want. **Tip:** Choose complementary products, not duplicates of what the customer just ordered. If they bought a phone case, show screen protectors or chargers — not another phone case. ### Display Settings Additional controls available regardless of mode: - **Show price** — toggle visibility of product prices. - **Show compare-at price** — show the original price with a strikethrough next to discounted prices. - **Layout** — choose between **Grid** or **Carousel** (horizontal scroll). - **Button text** — customize the product CTA label. Default: "View product". ## Preview The right panel shows how the upsell widget will appear on the tracking page. It updates as you change settings. ## Saving changes Click **Save** at the top right. Changes apply immediately on the storefront. ## Strategies that work - **Cross-sell, don't re-sell.** Promote accessories, consumables, or complementary items. Avoid showing the same product they just bought. - **Use "seasonal" picks.** Rotate products based on holidays, new arrivals, or sales. - **Match price points.** If they bought a $50 item, showing $500 products feels off. Keep recommendations in range. - **Rotate monthly.** Refresh your upsell products monthly to avoid stale suggestions for repeat customers. ## Measuring impact Check your Shopify analytics for: - **Referral traffic from the tracking page** — tells you how many clicks the upsell generates. - **Conversion rate on recommended products** — compare pre/post upsell enable dates. [Email notifications](/order-tracking/email-notifications/)[Exception alerts](/order-tracking/exception-alerts/) --- # Storefront experience Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/storefront/ # Storefront experience How your customers interact with Avada Order Tracking. Share this page with your team so they understand exactly what buyers see. ## The tracking page URL After completing the Quickstart, your tracking page is live at: ``` https://.myshopify.com/pages/ ``` Default slug: `order-tracking`. Customize from the **URL** tab in [Order tracking page](/tracking-page/) settings. This URL is also linked from your main navigation menu as **Order tracking** (or the equivalent translation based on store language). ## Looking up an order When a customer visits the tracking page, they see the **Lookup form**. Depending on your [Tracking page](/tracking-page/) settings, they'll have: ### Option 1: Lookup by order number + email/phone Most common setup. Requires both fields to prevent anyone from fishing for other people's orders. The customer types: - **Order number** (e.g. `#1024` or `1024` — both work). - **Email or phone** — whichever was used when placing the order. Click the **Track** button to look up. ### Option 2: Lookup by tracking number For customers who have the tracking number directly (from a carrier notification email, for example). The customer types: - **Tracking number** (e.g. `9400111899223828290226`). No email needed — tracking numbers are unique and can't be enumerated. ### Option 3: Both methods available If both lookup options are enabled, the customer sees two tabs and can choose which method to use. ## Viewing the order Once the lookup succeeds, the customer sees: ### Progress timeline A horizontal bar with five steps: **Ordered → Preparing shipment → In transit → Out for delivery → Delivered**. The active step is highlighted in your brand color (set in [Tracking page > Style](/tracking-page/)). ### Tracking information - Carrier name and logo (e.g. "USPS", "UPS", "FedEx"). - Tracking number (clickable — opens the carrier's tracking page in a new tab for maximum detail). ### Shipment updates (if available) A list of tracking events from the carrier: pickup, in transit scans, out for delivery, delivered. Each event has a timestamp and location. ### Order information Summary of the order: items ordered, quantities, variants. ### Estimated delivery date (if shown) Based on carrier data, an estimated arrival date. Not all carriers provide this — may be hidden for some shipments. ### Product upsell (if enabled) Your selected products shown as a "You might also like" section. See [Product upsell](/product-upsell/). ## Mobile experience The tracking page is fully responsive. On mobile: - Lookup form stacks vertically with full-width inputs. - Progress bar remains horizontal but shrinks for narrower screens. - Carrier info and events stack in a single column. - Product upsell switches to a 2-across grid. Tested on iOS Safari, Android Chrome, and major mobile browsers. ## Error states ### "Order not found" Shown when the lookup doesn't match any order. Common causes: - Order number typed incorrectly. - Email/phone doesn't match the one on the order. - Order was placed before the app was installed and hasn't been synced yet. - Customer used a different email than what they entered. Message text is customizable under [Translation](/translation/). ### "Please enter an order number" Shown when the customer submits the form with empty required fields. Placeholder text is also customizable. ## Language display The tracking page automatically picks the customer's language based on: - Your [Translation](/translation/) detection setting (Browser / IP / Store language). - Available translations you've enabled. - Falls back to the default language if no match. No language switcher appears on the public page — customers just see the right language automatically. ## Speed and performance The tracking widget is lightweight and loads asynchronously, so it doesn't slow down your main storefront bundle. First render typically completes within a second on mobile. ## Shareable tracking URL Each tracking result has a direct URL customers can bookmark or share: ``` https://.myshopify.com/pages/order-tracking?order=1024&email=jane@example.com ``` Including the order + email in the query string auto-fills the form and runs the lookup. Useful for: - "Track your order" links in confirmation emails. - Post-purchase redirect flows. - Customer service messaging. ## Your customer's journey A typical flow after a purchase: - Customer places an order. Gets Shopify's confirmation email, plus your **Order confirmed** email ([Email notifications](/email-notifications/)). - You ship. Customer gets **Shipped** email with a tracking link. - They click the link, land on your branded tracking page, see their progress. - They come back over the next few days to check status — each visit is a touchpoint for your brand (and a chance for [Product upsell](/product-upsell/)). - Package arrives. Customer gets **Delivered** email with a review request or next-order coupon. Every step is yours to customize. [Exception alerts](/order-tracking/exception-alerts/)[FAQ & troubleshooting](/order-tracking/faq/) --- # Order tracking page Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/tracking-page/ # Order tracking page The tracking page is what your customers use to look up their orders on your storefront. The default URL is `/pages/order-tracking` — you can customize the slug from the **URL** tab. Customize it at **Order tracking page** in the app sidebar. The page is split into a settings panel on the left and a live preview on the right that updates as you change settings. ## Four customization tabs TabControls **URL**The slug at the end of your tracking page URL **Lookup**Search form fields customers see **Status**Progress bar, tracking info, order info sections **Style**Colors of buttons and progress bar ## URL Customize the URL of your tracking page to match your brand. Your URL stays on your store domain. ``` https://.myshopify.com/pages/ ``` Default slug: `order-tracking`. Maximum 30 characters. SettingDescription URL slugType the slug you want — e.g. `track`, `where-is-my-order`, `theo-doi-don-hang`. A status badge shows whether the page exists: - **Active** — page is created and live on your storefront. - **Not created** — page doesn't exist yet (run the Quickstart to create it, or change slug to trigger creation). **Managed by your app** — Your tracking page is created and kept in sync from this admin. Avoid editing the page handle directly in **Online Store → Pages** — change it here so customers always land on the right URL. ## Lookup Controls the search form customers use to find their order. SettingDescription Heading textTitle shown above the lookup form. Default: "Track your order". Button textText on the submit button. Default: "Track order". **Order number** (toggle) - When enabled, customers can search by order number plus email or phone. - Customize 2 placeholders: **Order ID placeholder** and **Email/Phone placeholder**. - Email/phone is required alongside order number to prevent anyone from looking up any order. **Tracking number** (toggle) - When enabled, customers can search by tracking number alone. - Customize the **Tracking number placeholder**. - No email/phone needed since tracking numbers are already unique identifiers. If both toggles are on, customers see two tabs to choose between. ## Status Controls the result view shown after a customer finds their order. Three independent sections, each with a toggle and a customizable heading. ### Progress bar When enabled, a horizontal progress bar shows the shipment's position across five steps. You can customize the label for each step: - **Ordered** — default label, customize as desired. - **Preparing shipment** — default label, customize as desired. - **In transit** — default label, customize as desired. - **Out for delivery** — default label, customize as desired. - **Delivered** — default label, customize as desired. Examples: change "Preparing shipment" to "Packing your order" or "Delivered" to "Arrived at your door". ### Tracking information When enabled, the result shows the carrier name, tracking number, and (if the carrier supports it) the latest scan event. Customize the section heading. ### Order information When enabled, the result shows the order summary — items, quantities, shipping address. Customize the section heading. ## Style Controls colors used on the tracking page. SettingControls Track buttonBackground color of the submit button. Button textText color inside the submit button. Progress barActive steps on the progress timeline. Pick colors that match your brand. The preview updates instantly. ## Preview panel The right panel shows a live preview using sample order data. You don't need a real order to test the look and feel. The preview reflects: - Your current URL, Lookup, Status, and Style settings. - Active translation (English by default — see [Translation](/translation/)). - Mobile and desktop layouts automatically. ## Saving changes Settings sync to Shopify metafields so the storefront widget picks them up within seconds — no theme republish needed. ## Customer URL After customization, customers can reach the tracking page at: ``` https://.myshopify.com/pages/ ``` A menu link is also added automatically to your store's main navigation when you run the Quickstart. ## Troubleshooting **Preview doesn't update:** Hard-refresh the admin page (Ctrl/Cmd + Shift + R). **Colors don't show on storefront:** Clear your browser cache or test in incognito mode. Shopify caches metafields for a few seconds after saves. **Lookup returns "Order not found":** Confirm the order has been synced to the app (see [Orders](/orders/)). Orders placed before you installed need a sync. **Slug change didn't take effect:** Make sure no existing Shopify Page already uses that handle. If a conflict exists, Shopify auto-appends `-1`. Check **Online Store → Pages** and delete or rename the conflicting page. [Order details](/order-tracking/order-detail/)[Translation](/order-tracking/translation/) --- # Translation Source: https://docs.avada.io/order-tracking/translation/ # Translation Serve your global customers in their own language. The **Translation** page lets you translate every text element on the tracking page into 40+ languages. ## Opening Translation Click **Translation** in the app sidebar. ## Default language The **Default language** dropdown sets what appears when the app can't detect a customer's preferred language. Available defaults: - English (en) - German (de) - Italian (it) - French (fr) - Dutch (nl) If your customers are primarily in a specific region, set the default language to match. ## Language detection Choose how the app decides which language to show each visitor: MethodHow it works **Browser's language**Reads the visitor's browser language preference. Works well for most customers. **Customer's IP**Infers language from the visitor's IP country. Useful if customers don't set browser language. **Store language**Always uses the language currently active on your Shopify store (based on Shopify Markets). ## Adding languages Beyond the 5 defaults, you can add extra languages from a wide list (Arabic, Chinese variants, Japanese, Korean, Vietnamese, and more): - Click **Add extra languages** on the Translation page. - Select the target language from the dropdown. - The language appears in your list as a new row in the languages table. The languages table has these columns: ColumnDescription **No.**Order index. **Language**Language name and locale code. **Activate**Toggle to enable/disable serving this language to customers. **Last updated**Timestamp of the latest edit. **Action**Edit (pencil) opens the translation editor; Delete removes the language. ## Editing a translation Click **Edit** on any language row to open the editor. You'll see every translatable field grouped by section: - **Lookup form** — heading, button, placeholder texts, error messages. - **Progress bar** — labels for the five status steps. - **Tracking information** — section headings, field labels. - **Order information** — section headings, field labels, "N/A" fallback. - **Messages** — success and error messages shown after lookup. Type the translation into each field. Changes save automatically as you edit. ## Enabling/disabling languages Each language has a toggle: - **On** — the language is live. Customers whose detected language matches will see the translated tracking page. - **Off** — the language is stored but not served. Use this to draft translations without exposing them yet. ## Removing a language Click the **⋯** menu on any language row and select **Delete**. The translation is permanently removed. You cannot delete the default language. To change it, set a new default first. ## How customers experience translation When a customer opens the tracking page: - The app detects their language using the method you selected. - If a translation exists for that language, the page renders in that language. - If no translation exists, the default language is used. There's no language switcher on the public tracking page — customers see their detected language automatically. ## Tips - **Start with your top 3 markets.** You don't need to translate into every language at once. Pick the languages your top customer countries speak. - **Get reviews from native speakers.** Machine translation is a starting point; have a native speaker review before enabling. - **Keep placeholders clear.** Translated "Enter your order number" should match the exact format you use locally. - **Progress bar labels matter.** "Out for delivery" may sound awkward literally translated — use natural equivalents. [Tracking page](/order-tracking/tracking-page/)[Email notifications](/order-tracking/email-notifications/) --- # Welcome Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/ # Welcome Welcome to Avada PDF Invoice — generate, customise, print and email professional invoices, packing slips, refund receipts and draft orders for your Shopify store. Invoices are more than paperwork. They carry your branding, prove every transaction, and help customers reconcile their purchase the moment it lands in their inbox. But preparing them by hand — for every order, every refund, every wholesale request — drains hours every week and rarely produces a result that looks consistent across documents. Avada PDF Invoice automates the entire flow. Pick a branded template, let the app generate the PDF as soon as an order is paid, and choose how it reaches the customer — attached to an automation email, embedded in a Shopify notification, or printed in bulk for fulfilment. You stay focused on selling. Documentation takes care of itself. ## Discover Avada PDF Invoice [Create & customize templatesDesign branded templates for invoices, packing slips, refunds and draft orders](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/create-new-templates)[Print PDF documentsPrint single or bulk documents from the app or Shopify Admin](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/print-pdf-invoice-documents)[Send invoice email in bulkDeliver hundreds of invoice PDFs to customers in one action](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/send-invoice-email-in-bulk)[Set up automation emailTrigger PDF emails automatically on order events](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/set-up-the-automation-email)[B2B featuresWholesale company management, combined orders and net terms](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/company-management)[SettingsStore branding, multi-language and online store integration](/pdf-invoice/settings/update-store-information-in-pdf-invoice) [How PDF Invoice useful for customers?](/pdf-invoice/how-pdf-invoice-useful-for-customers/) --- # Combine orders Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/combine-orders/ # Combine orders **Who can use combined orders?** - Available on Shopify Plus or Shopify B2B (Wholesale plan) - Cannot combine orders that are **Paid**, **Refunded**, **Partially refunded**, or **Authorized** Merge several wholesale orders from the same company into a single unified PDF invoice — totals, taxes, shipping and discounts all roll up. ## Overview Wholesale buyers often place multiple orders inside one billing cycle. Combine orders lets you collapse those into one consolidated invoice so finance teams only chase one payment, and customers receive one document instead of ten. ## How to use ### Step 1: Configure combine settings Before merging, set defaults for the combined order: - **Tags** — labels applied to the new combined order. - **Notes** — internal context carried over from each source order. - **Archival preferences** — whether the original orders should be archived once combined. ### Step 2: Combine orders inside a company Open **B2B Purchase**, choose the company, then select the orders to merge. Confirm the action — the app creates a new unified order containing all line items, with taxes, shipping fees and discounts recalculated. ### Step 3: Review the combined invoice Open the new order and verify: - All line items from the source orders are present. - Taxes and shipping are correct after consolidation. - The discount totals match expectations. You can now print or email this single invoice instead of one per original order. ## Restrictions You **cannot** combine orders if any selected order has one of these statuses: - **Paid** - **Refunded** - **Partially refunded** - **Authorized** These statuses indicate the payment lifecycle has already moved past the point where consolidation is safe. ## Tips - Run combine weekly or monthly per company rather than ad-hoc — it keeps the source order history clean. - Tag every combined order (e.g. `combined-2026-W21`) so finance can trace it back to the cycle. - If a single order in the batch is **Authorized**, capture or void it in Shopify first, then retry the combine. [Company management](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/company-management/)[Payment with net terms discount](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/payment-with-net-terms-discount/) --- # Company management Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/company-management/ # Company management **Who can use B2B Purchase?** - Available on Shopify Plus or Shopify B2B (Wholesale plan) - The app automatically separates B2B and B2C orders Company management is the central dashboard for every wholesale customer in your store — orders, payments, outstanding balances and document history, all in one place. ## Overview Without a B2B layer, most stores track wholesale by email threads and spreadsheets. Company management replaces that: the app monitors which orders belong to which company, surfaces payment status, and lets you generate or send documentation in a few clicks. Typical savings: 5–8 hours per week on wholesale reconciliation work. ## How to use ### Step 1: Open the B2B dashboard In Shopify Admin, open **Avada PDF Invoice > B2B Purchase**. ### Step 2: Review company data You will see every B2B customer with: - Total order value - Payment status (paid, outstanding, overdue) - Document history ### Step 3: Filter and sort Use the search and filter controls to slice by criteria — payment status, timeframe, company name. The dashboard updates instantly. ### Step 4: Generate documentation From any company row you can: - Print orders in bulk - Download reports - Send invoice emails using your branded templates See [Combine orders](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/combine-orders/) to merge multiple wholesale orders into one consolidated invoice. ### Step 5: Monitor finances The summary view tracks total orders, payments received, outstanding balances and overdue amounts so you know exactly where each company stands. ## Tips - Filter to **Overdue** weekly and trigger a follow-up email straight from the dashboard. - Pair company management with [Net terms discount](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/net-terms/) to incentivise faster payment on outstanding balances. - Sort by total order value to identify your most strategic wholesale accounts. [Introduction](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/introduction-to-b2b-compatible-features/)[Combine orders](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/combine-orders/) --- # Features coming soon Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/ # Features coming soon - [Sum unpaid orders for single payment (opens in a new tab)](https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/sum-unpaid-orders-for-single-payment.md) - [Balance owing caculation (opens in a new tab)](https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/balance-owing-caculation.md) - [Credit limits for store credit (opens in a new tab)](https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/credit-limits-for-store-credit.md) [Download on new customer account](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/historical-documents/download-on-new-customer-account/)[Sum unpaid orders for single payment](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/sum-unpaid-orders-for-single-payment/) --- # Balance owing caculation Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/balance-owing-caculation/ # Balance owing caculation [Sum unpaid orders for single payment](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/sum-unpaid-orders-for-single-payment/)[Credit limits for store credit](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/credit-limits-for-store-credit/) --- # Credit limits for store credit Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/credit-limits-for-store-credit/ # Credit limits for store credit [Balance owing calculation](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/balance-owing-caculation/)[Update store information](/pdf-invoice/settings/update-store-information-in-pdf-invoice/) --- # Sum unpaid orders for single payment Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/sum-unpaid-orders-for-single-payment/ # Sum unpaid orders for single payment [Features coming soon](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/)[Balance owing calculation](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/balance-owing-caculation/) --- # Historical documents Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/historical-documents/ # Historical documents 💡 **Note** **Who can use this feature?** This feature is available for **Wholesale** plan only ### What is this Historical documents? This feature allows users to filter historical B2B orders by date range and download selected documents (e.g., invoices, shipping slips) as a ZIP file. ### How does it help? - **Streamlines Records Management**: Easily access and organize order documents for auditing or financial reviews. - **Improves Workflow Efficiency**: Saves time by consolidating multiple files into one downloadable ZIP. - **Enhances Cash Flow Monitoring:** Quickly retrieve historical order data to track payments and manage finances. ### Step-by-Step Instructions You can have a look at the video below, or read the detailed guide below to quickly learn how to Download Historical documents: [Step-by-step guide to Historical documents (opens in a new tab)](https://youtu.be/9ec9li8Iw54?si=pQalmA1u6HYtJZA9&t=330) ### Filter Orders by Date Range - Navigate to the **Company List** or **Order List** section. - Use the **Date Range Filter** to select the desired time period for historical documents. - Click the **Download** button to proceed. ### Select Document Type and Template - When prompted, a modal will appear allowing you to: Choose the document type (e.g., Invoice, Shipping Slip). - Select a template for the documents. - **Note**: The modal will not show a document preview. - Confirm your selection by clicking **Download**. ### Download as ZIP File - Once confirmed, the system processes the selected orders: Documents are generated based on your selected filters. - A ZIP file containing the PDFs is created for download. - Save the ZIP file to your desired location for easy access. ### Additional Notes - **Focus on Downloads**: This guide focuses on downloading documents. Printing and sending actions are managed in separate workflows. - **File Format**: All selected documents are consolidated into a single ZIP file for simplicity. - **Date Range Accuracy**: Ensure the date range is correctly applied to avoid generating unnecessary files. By following these steps, wholesale users can efficiently download and manage historical documents, making it easier to monitor finances, fulfill audits, and streamline operations. [Payment with net terms discount](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/payment-with-net-terms-discount/)[Download on new customer account](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/historical-documents/download-on-new-customer-account/) --- # Download on New customer account Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/historical-documents/download-on-new-customer-account/ # Download on New customer account 💡 **Note** **Who can use this feature?** This feature is available for **Wholesale** plan only ### What is Download on New customer account? The Download Order History feature streamlines your access to order documentation by allowing you to download multiple PDF invoices at once. With built-in filtering options, you can specify a date range and payment status (paid, unpaid, or overdue) to retrieve exactly the invoices you need. Once selected, all matching invoices are automatically compiled and sent to your email address for convenient access. ### How does it help? - Save time by downloading multiple invoices at once instead of one by one - Easily track your purchase history for accounting purposes - Keep organized records with filtered downloads based on payment status - Access your order documentation whenever needed through email delivery ### Step-by-step guide You can have a look at the video below, or read the detailed guide below to quickly learn how to Download Historical documents: [Step-by-step guide to Download order history on New customer account (opens in a new tab)](https://youtu.be/9ec9li8Iw54?si=dNLtJ0awHPywZdU8&t=364) **Access your order history** - Log into your account - Go to the Orders section ### Start the download process - Look for the "Download Order History" button - Click to begin ### Set your preferences - Select your desired date range - Choose payment status filters: Paid - Unpaid - Overdue ### Complete the download Complete the download - Click the "Download" button - Check your email for the PDF invoices ### Conclusion The Download Order History feature streamlines your order management process by providing easy access to past order invoices. Once you've completed these steps, you'll receive an email containing all your requested PDF invoices, making it simple to maintain your purchase records and handle accounting tasks efficiently. [Historical documents](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/historical-documents/)[Features coming soon](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/) --- # Introduction to B2B compatible features Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/introduction-to-b2b-compatible-features/ # Introduction to B2B compatible features 💡 **Note** **Install Avada Order Printer app** [here (opens in a new tab)](https://apps.shopify.com/avada-pdf-invoice?utm_source=userguide&utm_medium=pdfB2B) ### Introduction For B2B merchants looking to streamline invoicing, manage customer accounts, and support wholesale operations, AG Order Printer provides a suite of B2B-compatible features designed to simplify order management and improve cash flow. In this guide, we’ll explore the powerful features of AG Order Printer’s B2B capabilities, from managing company orders to setting up net terms and simplifying payments for multiple orders. Watch the full introduction video here: 💡 **Note** **B2B features** are only available for **Wholesale** plan only ### 1. B2B Management ### Company Management AG Order Printer helps merchants manage B2B orders by tracking payment progress for each company. Through the B2B Oder List, merchants can view all orders by company and see a breakdown of each order’s status, including: - **Total Order Value** – The full payment amount for each order. - **Total Amount Paid** – The amount already paid by the company. - **Total Amount Owed** – The remaining balance, including overdue amounts. - **Total Amount Past Due** – The total overdue balance, helping merchants identify at-risk accounts. #### Balance Owing Calculation (coming soon) AG Order Printer allows merchants to accurately calculate balance owing based on either the fulfillment date or the invoice sent date. By setting the "Start calculation from" option in the order details, merchants can keep track of the issued date and auto-update balances, helping maintain clear payment timelines. #### Credit Limits for Store Credit (coming soon) Store credit expiration is essential for managing customer accounts efficiently. AG Order Printer offers flexible settings for credit expiration based on local laws and store time zones. If customers hold multiple store credits, the system automatically applies credit with the soonest expiration date first, simplifying credit use and enhancing the customer experience. ### Historical Documents For businesses managing multiple B2B orders, accessing historical documents is key for efficient cash flow management. AG Order Printer provides single and bulk actions for printing, downloading, or sending documents. Merchants can: - Print or download historical documents directly from the company or order list. - Use bulk actions to manage multiple orders at once, with options to select document types and templates. ### Download order history on New customer account This feature help is a self-service order history download function for customers on the New customer account. It can help: - Reduce support emails by up to one half percent - Almost accurate guarantee ### 2. B2B Order Support ### Net Terms With AG Order Printer, merchants can set up net terms for orders, allowing due dates to appear clearly on invoices. This ensures that customers understand payment expectations, helping merchants promote timely payments and build trust. ### Combine orders This feature allows you to merge multiple orders, either personal or company orders, into a single draft order. It aggregates order details, discounts, and payment information into one unified PDF invoice for customers. #### Wholesale Templates Wholesale templates are designed for customers making bulk purchases or paying for multiple orders simultaneously. These templates streamline documentation, providing a professional, consistent format for wholesale transactions. #### Sum Unpaid Orders for Single Payment (coming soon) AG Order Printer makes it easy for merchants to consolidate unpaid orders into a single payment link, simplifying transactions for customers with multiple outstanding invoices. Features include: - "Send Unpaid Order" from the backend. - A payment link directing customers to Shopify Payment, including a downloadable PDF with a summary page (invoice total) and detailed unpaid or partially paid invoices. - Automated email content with attachments and payment links, creating a seamless payment experience. ### Conclusion AG Order Printer’s B2B-compatible features give merchants the tools to manage orders, customize payment terms, and streamline invoicing for B2B transactions. From tracking company payments to setting up net terms and consolidating invoices, AG Order Printer simplifies every step of the B2B process. Explore these features to enhance your B2B workflow and improve customer satisfaction through efficient, professional invoicing. [Insert PDF Invoice in email notification](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/insert-pdf-invoice-in-email-notification/)[Company management](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/company-management/) --- # Net terms discount Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/payment-with-net-terms-discount/ # Net terms discount **Who can use net terms discount?** - Available on Shopify Plus or Shopify B2B (Wholesale plan) - Cannot apply to fully paid orders, orders with custom discounts, orders past their due date, or partially fulfilled orders (except the unfulfilled items) Offer wholesale customers a discount for paying before the due date — accelerate cash flow, reduce outstanding receivables and automate payment reminders. ## Overview Net terms discount is an early-payment incentive: the customer pays sooner, you collect cash faster, and the app handles the reminder communications. You define the discount per order, the customer sees it on the invoice, and the offer expires automatically if the deadline passes. ## How to use ### Step 1: Open the order Go to **App > B2B Purchase**, select the company, then open the specific order you want to apply the discount to. ### Step 2: Enable early payment benefit Click **Enable Early Payment Benefit**, then select **Create**. ### Step 3: Configure the discount Set the discount parameters: - **Discount type** — percentage or fixed amount. - **Expiration date** — the deadline after which the discount no longer applies. - **Value** — the percentage or amount the customer saves. Save and the offer is attached to the order. ### Step 4: Manage and communicate - Modify the discount settings at any time before expiration. - Use **Send invoice** from the order page to trigger payment reminders that include the discount terms. ## Restrictions The discount cannot be applied to an order if it: - Is already **fully paid**. - Has a **custom discount** applied at order creation. - Has **reached its due date**. - Is **partially fulfilled** — except for the unfulfilled portion. ## Tips - Set the expiration date 5–10 days before the standard due date — long enough to incentivise, short enough to actually accelerate cash flow. - Use fixed-amount discounts for high-value orders and percentages for smaller recurring orders. - Pair this with [automation email](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/set-up-the-automation-email/) so reminders go out automatically as the expiration date approaches. [Combine orders](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/combine-orders/)[Historical documents](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/historical-documents/) --- # Create & customize templates Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/documents-management/create-new-templates/ # Create & customize templates **Who can use templates?** - Available for all plans Templates control how every PDF — invoice, packing slip, refund, draft order — looks and reads. Configure four panels and the same template applies to all orders that match its type. ## Overview A template is built from four panels: **General settings**, **Theme**, **Content** and **Design**. You can keep one shared template for most stores, or maintain separate ones for invoices and draft orders so each document type carries the right fields and wording. ## How to use ### Step 1: General settings Open **Templates > Create template** and fill in: - **Template name** — internal label only. - **Currency** — display in the store's currency or the customer's billing currency. - **Type** — choose **Order** for standard invoices and packing slips, or **Draft Order** for quotations and pre-orders. ### Step 2: Choose a theme Toggle **Print by default** if you want this template selected on the order screen, then pick a layout from the pre-made themes. Click **More themes** to browse the full set, and **Load template** to preview before saving. ### Step 3: Set up content Use the checkboxes to show or hide order information, payment and shipping details, and the items list. You can also: - Customise the sequence number with prefix or suffix — for example `INV-1005-Lakashop`. - Toggle the PDF generation date, item discounts, footer notes and thank-you message. - Add a supplementary page or watermark for paid / unpaid status. ### Step 4: Design Final panel adjusts the visual styling: - Logo size - Font family - Primary colour - Body font size Save the template and it becomes available on every matching order. ## Tips - Create one **Order** template and one **Draft Order** template before customising further — you can clone and tweak per use case later. - Use the **Print by default** toggle to keep the workflow consistent for your fulfilment team. - Preview every change in **Load template** before saving — colours and font sizes look different at A4 print scale. - If you sell internationally, leave **Currency** on billing currency so each customer sees the price they paid. [E-Invoice Regulation Guide](/pdf-invoice/e-invoice-regulation-guide/)[Send invoice email in bulk](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/send-invoice-email-in-bulk/) --- # Insert PDF into email notifications Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/documents-management/insert-pdf-invoice-in-email-notification/ # Insert PDF into email notifications **Who can use email notifications?** - Available for all plans - Requires editing Shopify email notification templates Add a "Download PDF" link to any Shopify notification email so customers can grab their invoice straight from the order confirmation, shipping update or fulfilment message. ## Overview This works differently from [automation email](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/set-up-the-automation-email/). Instead of sending a new email from the app, you generate a snippet of HTML and paste it into Shopify's built-in notification templates. The link points to a PDF the customer can download on demand. ## How to use ### Step 1: Open email notifications in the app In the app, go to **Emails > Email notification**. ### Step 2: Select the notification template Choose which Shopify notification will host the link — order confirmation, shipping confirmation, refund notification, and so on. Each template generates its own snippet, so repeat the process if you want the link in more than one email. ### Step 3: Configure the link label Enter the text customers will click — for example "Click here to download your invoice" or "View invoice PDF". This is the visible portion of the link. ### Step 4: Copy and paste into Shopify The app generates a snippet of HTML/Liquid. Copy it, then: - Open Shopify **Admin > Settings > Notifications**. - Find the same notification email you selected in Step 2. - Paste the snippet where you want the link to appear in the message body. - Save the Shopify template. ## Tips - Always test by triggering the real notification — Shopify sometimes caches templates, so a paste-and-save preview is not enough. - If you change the link label later, regenerate the snippet and repaste — Shopify does not auto-sync. - Refer to [Shopify's notification template guide (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/orders/notifications) for the underlying Liquid syntax if you want to style the link with CSS. [Set up the automation email](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/set-up-the-automation-email/)[Introduction](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/introduction-to-b2b-compatible-features/) --- # Print PDF documents Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/documents-management/print-pdf-invoice-documents/ # Print PDF documents **Who can use printing?** - Available for all plans Print invoices, orders, packing slips, refunds and draft orders straight from the Avada app or from your Shopify Admin — single document or up to 30 in one batch. ## Overview There are two entry points. Use the Avada app when you need to pick a specific template or language. Use Shopify Admin when you are already triaging orders there and want to keep that flow. ## How to use ### Method 1: From the Avada app — single order, fast path Go to **App > Orders** and click the printer icon on the order row. The PDF opens in a new tab using the template marked **Print by default**. ### Method 2: From the Avada app — order detail page Go to **App > Orders**, open the order, then: - Select the template you want. - Pick the document language. - Click **Print**. This route lets you switch template or language without changing your defaults. ### Method 3: From the Avada app — multiple orders at once Go to **App > Orders**, select up to 30 orders, click **Actions**, then choose **Print order**. The app generates a single PDF containing every selected document. For more than 30 orders, use [Send invoice email in bulk](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/send-invoice-email-in-bulk/) — the system emails you a download link instead of printing inline. ### Method 4: From Shopify Admin Go to **Admin > Orders**, open the order, click **More actions** and select **Print by Avada**. Choose the template and language, optionally preview, then click **Print**. ## Tips - Filter the orders list by **Order status**, **Financial status** or **Fulfilment status** before bulk-selecting — it cuts the wrong-document risk to zero. - Mark the most-used template as **Print by default** so the printer icon shortcut always produces the right output. - Use **Method 3** for daily fulfilment batches (≤ 30 orders); use [bulk email](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/send-invoice-email-in-bulk/) for monthly archives. [Send invoice email in bulk](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/send-invoice-email-in-bulk/)[Set up the automation email](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/set-up-the-automation-email/) --- # Send invoice email in bulk Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/documents-management/send-invoice-email-in-bulk/ # Send invoice email in bulk **Who can use bulk email?** - Available for all plans - Triggers when you select more than 30 orders When you need to deliver invoice PDFs for more than 30 orders in one go, Avada packages them and emails you a download link instead of streaming a heavy file through the browser. ## Overview Bulk email is the safe path for monthly reconciliation, accounting hand-offs, or any time fulfilment needs a large invoice archive. You set the recipient once, then trigger the export from the Orders list. ## How to use ### Step 1: Settings — set the recipient Open the app, go to bulk email settings, then enter: - **Recipient email address** — where the download link will land. - **BCC** — optional, for sending a copy to accounting or fulfilment. ### Step 2: Trigger the bulk send Go to **App > Orders** and select **30 or more** orders. Open the **Actions** menu and choose **Print orders**. The system queues the export and notifies you when the PDF archive is ready. ### Step 3: Check your inbox Open the recipient inbox. If the email is not there within a few minutes, check the spam folder. Click the download link to retrieve the bulk PDF archive. ## Tips - Use bulk email for any selection **above 30 orders**. For smaller batches, the inline print from [Print PDF documents](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/print-pdf-invoice-documents/) is faster. - Set a shared accounting alias in **BCC** so the archive is auto-filed without manual forwarding. - Filter the order list (financial / fulfilment status, date range) before selecting — bulk exports are cheaper to get right the first time than to redo. [Create new templates](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/create-new-templates/)[Print PDF Invoice documents](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/print-pdf-invoice-documents/) --- # Set up automation email Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/documents-management/set-up-the-automation-email/ # Set up automation email **Who can use automation email?** - Available for all plans Automation email sends an invoice PDF to your customer the moment Shopify reaches a trigger you choose — order paid, fulfilled, refunded — with no manual step. ## Overview You enable a trigger, point it at a template, write the message once, then let Shopify events do the rest. The PDF is attached automatically, and you can test the whole flow before going live. ## How to use ### Step 1: Open the settings In the app, go to **Dashboard > Automation > Email Automation**. ### Step 2: Enable and configure triggers Toggle automation on, then choose one or more events that will send the email: - Order created - Payment completed - Order fulfilled Pick the PDF template you want attached for each trigger. ### Step 3: Customise the email content Craft the message that travels with the PDF: - **Subject line** — keep it scannable, e.g. `Your invoice for order #{order_number}`. - **Body** — use personalisation variables for customer name, order number and total amount. - Confirm the PDF attachment block is enabled. ### Step 4: Additional settings - Add a **BCC** address for your accounting team. - Customise the footer with policies, return windows or contact details. ### Step 5: Test before going live Click **Send test email** to receive a sample at your inbox. Verify the subject, body, personalisation variables and PDF attachment render correctly before enabling the automation for real customers. ## Tips - Always run the test step. A wrong variable or broken PDF link reaches every customer once automation is live. - Use separate triggers — paid vs fulfilled — only if you want to send the document at distinct moments; otherwise pick the one closest to the customer's expectation. - Combine automation with [translation settings](/pdf-invoice/settings/set-up-translation-section/) to localise the email body and PDF for international customers. [Print PDF Invoice documents](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/print-pdf-invoice-documents/)[Insert PDF Invoice in email notification](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/insert-pdf-invoice-in-email-notification/) --- # E-Invoice Regulation Guide Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/e-invoice-regulation-guide/ # E-Invoice Regulation Guide ## What is E-Invoicing? E-Invoicing (electronic invoicing) is the digital exchange of invoice documents between suppliers and buyers. Many countries now require businesses to issue electronic invoices after selling goods or services, particularly for e-commerce transactions. ## Why Understanding E-Invoice Regulations Matters E-Invoice regulations help you: - Maintain legal compliance in your target markets - Avoid penalties and business disruptions - Streamline your financial processes - Reduce paper waste and operational costs - Build trust with customers and tax authorities ## E-Invoice Requirements by Region ### Europe **Italy** - **Status**: Mandatory since 2019 - **Who must comply**: All businesses (B2B & B2C) - **Key requirements**: Must use government SDI platform - Digital storage for 10+ years - Specific XML format required **France** - **Status**: Mandatory (phased implementation) - **Who must comply**: B2B initially - **Timeline**: July 2024: Large businesses must receive e-invoices - January 2025: Large businesses must issue e-invoices - January 2026: All businesses must comply fully **Germany** - **Status**: Mandatory (phased implementation) - **Who must comply**: B2B transactions - **Timeline**: January 2025: All businesses must accept e-invoices - January 2028: All businesses must issue e-invoices **Belgium** - **Status**: Mandatory from January 2026 - **Who must comply**: B2B transactions **Poland** - **Status**: Mandatory from July 2024 - **Who must comply**: B2B transactions ### Latin America **Brazil** - **Status**: Mandatory since 2005 - **Who must comply**: All businesses - **Key requirements**: Real-time tax authority authorization needed - XML format with digital signatures - Government-validated before being legally valid **Mexico** - **Status**: Mandatory since 2012 - **Who must comply**: All businesses - **Key requirements**: Must use authorized service providers - QR codes required on invoices - Real-time validation system **Chile** - **Status**: Mandatory since 2001 - **Who must comply**: All businesses ### Asia **India** - **Status**: Mandatory (threshold-based) since 2020 - **Who must comply**: Businesses with turnover above INR 5 crore (~$600,000) - **Key requirements**: Must register with Invoice Registration Portal - Unique Invoice Reference Number required - Phased implementation expanding over time **South Korea** - **Status**: Mandatory since 2011 - **Who must comply**: All businesses - **Key requirements**: National Tax Service portal reporting - Specific formatting standards **Thailand** - **Status**: Voluntary (encouraged) - **Who must comply**: Not mandatory yet **Indonesia** - **Status**: Mandatory - **Who must comply**: All businesses - **Key requirements**: e-Faktur system implementation ### Middle East **Saudi Arabia** - **Status**: Mandatory - **Who must comply**: All VAT-registered businesses - **Timeline**: Phase 1 (2021): Generate and store e-invoices - Phase 2 (2023): Integrate with tax authority systems - **Key requirements**: QR codes required for B2C transactions **Egypt** - **Status**: Mandatory (phased) - **Who must comply**: Large taxpayers initially - **Timeline**: From June 2023 ## Benefits of Compliance - **Avoid Penalties**: Many countries impose significant fines for non-compliance - **Faster Payments**: E-invoices are typically processed and paid more quickly - **Reduced Costs**: Save on printing, postage, and manual processing - **Improved Accuracy**: Fewer errors compared to manual invoicing - **Better Record-Keeping**: Easier access to transaction history - **Environmental Impact**: Significant reduction in paper usage - **Enhanced Customer Experience**: Professional, consistent invoicing - **Simplified Audits**: More accessible documentation for tax authorities ## How AG: Order Printer, PDF Invoice Helps ✅ **Note** If you haven't installed our app yet, you can get it [here (opens in a new tab)](https://apps.shopify.com/avada-pdf-invoice) **AVADA Order Printer, PDF Invoice** simplifies e-invoice compliance for Shopify merchants. The app allows you to create, customize, and send professional invoices that meet regulatory requirements across multiple countries. Merchants can print invoices directly from their Shopify admin, download invoice PDFs for record-keeping, or enable customers to download their own invoices from your store. With built-in templates and regular updates to stay current with changing regulations, **AVADA Order Printer** helps you maintain compliance while saving time. [Quick start](/pdf-invoice/getting-started/quick-start/)[Create new templates](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/create-new-templates/) --- # Introduction Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/getting-started/intro/ # Introduction **Who can use Avada PDF Invoice?** - Available for all Shopify plans - B2B features (company management, combined orders, net terms) require Shopify Plus or Shopify B2B Avada PDF Invoice generates, customises, prints and emails the documents your store produces every day — invoices, packing slips, refund receipts and draft orders — without the manual work. ## What is Avada PDF Invoice? It is a complete document engine for Shopify merchants. Once installed, you pick a branded template and the app produces a polished PDF the moment Shopify creates the order. Key benefits: - **Save hours every week** — automation emails attach the PDF the moment an order is paid, fulfilled or refunded. - **Stay on-brand** — logo, colour, font and contact details apply to every document. - **Sell across borders** — 70+ languages translate document content based on the customer's billing address. - **Handle wholesale** — B2B Purchase consolidates company orders, merges invoices and runs net terms discounts in one place. ## When to use it - **Invoice** — give customers a tax-compliant record of every purchase. - **Packing slip** — hand fulfilment a clean picklist that matches the invoice. - **Refund receipt** — close out returns with documentation customers can keep. - **Draft order** — turn quotations and pre-orders into printable documents before the sale is final. ## Get more assistance - Start fast with the [Quick start](/pdf-invoice/getting-started/quick-start/). - Configure store branding in [Store information](/pdf-invoice/settings/update-store-information-in-pdf-invoice/). - Open a support ticket from the app's **Help** menu inside Shopify. [How PDF Invoice useful for customers?](/pdf-invoice/how-pdf-invoice-useful-for-customers/)[Quick start](/pdf-invoice/getting-started/quick-start/) --- # Quick start Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/getting-started/quick-start/ # Quick start **Who can use Avada PDF Invoice?** - Any merchant who has just installed the app from the Shopify App Store Four steps to print or email your first branded PDF. ## Step 1: Install Avada PDF Invoice Open the Shopify App Store, search for **Avada PDF Invoice**, and click **Add app**. Approve the install prompt to grant Shopify access. ## Step 2: Configure store information Go to **Settings > Store details** in the app to add your logo, address, phone, email, VAT number and registered number. These appear on every document by default. See [Store information](/pdf-invoice/settings/update-store-information-in-pdf-invoice/) for the full field list and image specifications. ## Step 3: Pick or customise a template Open **Templates**, choose one of the pre-made themes, then refine the general settings, content blocks and design in four panels. Save when the preview matches your brand. See [Create & customize templates](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/create-new-templates/) for the full walkthrough. ## Step 4: Print, download or email your first invoice Open any order from **App > Orders**, pick the template and language, then click **Print**. To send instead of print, attach the PDF to an automation email — see [Set up automation email](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/set-up-the-automation-email/). You now have a branded PDF flow connected to your store. Explore [Documents Management](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/print-pdf-invoice-documents/) for bulk printing, [B2B Features](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/company-management/) for wholesale workflows, or [Settings](/pdf-invoice/settings/set-up-translation-section/) for multi-language support. [Introduction](/pdf-invoice/getting-started/intro/)[E-Invoice Regulation Guide](/pdf-invoice/e-invoice-regulation-guide/) --- # How PDF Invoice useful for customers? Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/how-pdf-invoice-useful-for-customers/ # How PDF Invoice useful for customers? ### Introduction Avada provides PDF Invoice application that helps customers print, download PDF Invoice, PDF Order, PDF Refund, PDF Packing slip quickly and easily with just one click. The application allows the store owner to easily edit the PDF template and can preview the PDF file to get an overview of the design of the template created. ### How customers benefits from PDF Invoice app? With this application, customers can perform the following actions: ### 1. Manage and customize new PDF templates With Avada Order Printer, you can manage and customize pdf templates smoothly ### 2. Print and download PDF from the backend for multiple orders at once Printing, downloading multiple PDF templates in our are made easy with intuitive actions and user-friendly ### 3. Print and download the PDF from the backend for each order Or you can access Shopify's order manager and print/ download order using Avada as an extension ### 4. Print and download PDFs at your online store You can easily enable customer to view and print their order from account page on you online store: ### 5. Print and download PDFs at email notification There are 2 options that enable buyers to **view/ print** their invoice, including: - Order confirmation email by Shopify: - Avada's dedicated order confirmation email: ### Conclusion Avada PDF Invoice streamlines managing, printing, and downloading PDFs for invoices, orders, and more. With customizable templates and easy access from the backend, online store, and email notifications, it simplifies document handling for both store owners and customers. [Welcome](/pdf-invoice/)[Introduction](/pdf-invoice/getting-started/intro/) --- # Integrate with Avada Email Marketing Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/settings/integrate-with-avada-email-marketing/ # Integrate with Avada Email Marketing 💡 **Note** **Who can use this features?** This feature is available for **all plans** ### What is the feature? This integration connects your PDF Invoice system with AVADA Email Marketing, enabling automatic sending of PDF invoices through email workflows. The setup involves connecting both apps, configuring invoice templates, and creating automated email sequences. ### How does it benefit? - Automate invoice delivery through email workflows - Ensure customers receive properly formatted PDF invoices - Customize email templates and sending schedules - Track invoice delivery through email analytics - Streamline order documentation process ### Step-by-step guide ### Install Required App - Install both [Avada Email Marketing (opens in a new tab)](https://apps.shopify.com/avada-email-marketing) and PDF Invoice ### Connect Apps with Credentials - Get App ID and Secret Key from Email Marketing - Enter keys in PDF Invoice Integration section ### Configure PDF Invoice Settings - Create templates and store information - Set up automation email options ### Create Email Workflow - Set up new automation in Email Marketing - Choose PDF Invoice integration - Customize email templates and triggers ### Helpful notes 💡 **Note** Only one app can send PDF Invoice emails - choose either PDF Invoice OR Email Marketing 💡 **Note** You must install both apps before starting the integration 💡 **Note** Always save your credentials in a secure location ### Conclusion After completing these steps, your PDF Invoice system will be fully integrated with AVADA Email Marketing. Your customers will automatically receive professionally formatted PDF invoices through your email workflows. Remember to test the automation to ensure proper delivery and formatting. [Set up Online store print button](/pdf-invoice/settings/set-up-online-store-print-button/) --- # Set up Online store print button Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/settings/set-up-online-store-print-button/ # Set up Online store print button 💡 **Note** **Who can use this features?** This feature is available for **all plans** ### What is Online store print button This feature is Online store print/ download button. You can set it up in Settings menu of the Avada Order Printer app. Then insert in on Theme editor. Follow these steps to set up the **Print PDF Invoice** button on your online store's frontend via 2 versions of customer account, allowing customers to easily print their invoices from the order detail page. ### Why Online store print button? This feature can help you with setting up and offering your customers a convenient button to download/ print button while managing their **account/ order detail pages**. 💡 **Note** There **2 versions** of **Customer accounts** page: - Classic Customer accounts (the usual one) - New Customer accounts (recently updated by Shopify) ### How to setup in Classic customer accounts ### Access Online Store Settings - Navigate to **Home > Settings > Advanced > Online Store**. - Configure the **Print PDF Invoice** button that will appear on the customer's order detail page. ### Choose the Order Template **Order Template**: Select the template type that customers can view and print when they click the print button on your online store. There are four available templates: - Invoice - Order - Refund - Packing Slip ### Add the Print Button to the Customer Login Page Once logged in, click **Add block** > **Apps** > Select **Print Order Button**. Click **here** to go to the Shopify Customer Login settings page and log in to your account. ### Verify the Setup The result should appear as shown in the image below. 💡 **Note** In Shopify's **Settings > Customer accounts**, make sure the **Login links** option is set to **Classic**. ✅ **Note** Please watch and interact with the guide below to have a detailed look on this feature! ### How to setup in New customer accounts ### Switch to Shopify the New version of Customer accounts settings 💡 **Note** If you have already used the **New** version of Customer accounts, you can skip this step - Open the Shopify settings menu - Find Customer accounts settings, and click on it - Click on New version, and review the information you may need to know - Confirm to switch ### Navigate to Customer accounts page - Open the Theme editor by clicking on the Customize button on the theme you choose - Head to Checkout and Customer accounts page. Then switch to Order status page ### Insert the Download button - Now find a position to insert the **Avada Order Printer's** **Download button** - Click on "Add app block" and search for our block name: ``` Avada Order Printer ``` ### Review the result - Have a look at the result by logging in the Customer account page on your store - Click on the Download button ✅ **Note** Please watch and interact with the guide below to have a detailed look on this feature! ### Conclusion You've now set up the Print PDF Invoice button on your store, making it easy for customers to print their invoices directly from their order page. For any help, feel free to contact our support team. [Set up Translation section](/pdf-invoice/settings/set-up-translation-section/)[Integrate with Avada Email Marketing](/pdf-invoice/settings/integrate-with-avada-email-marketing/) --- # Translation Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/settings/set-up-translation-section/ # Translation **Who can use translation?** - Available for all plans - 70+ languages supported Translate document labels and automation emails so international customers receive paperwork in the language they bought in. ## Overview Translation has two layers: **Advanced settings** that auto-detect language from the customer's billing address, and **Element translation** where you fine-tune the actual labels per document type. Both work together — auto-detection picks the language, element translation supplies the words. ## How to use ### Advanced settings — auto-detect by billing address Three independent toggles, each tied to a different surface: - **PDF document language by billing address** — invoices and email PDF attachments use the language detected from the customer's billing address. - **Email language by billing address** — when an automation email triggers, its body translates to the detected language. Falls back to your default language if no match is available. - **Download PDF with billing address language** — PDFs downloaded by the customer (e.g. from the online store button) translate automatically. Enable any combination — most stores turn on all three for full coverage. ### Element translation — fine-tune the labels Pick a language, then edit the labels across each document type: - **General** — shared fields (date, customer, total). - **Invoice** - **Quote** - **Packing slip** - **Refund** - **Order** - **Email** Every label has a pre-translated default, so you only need to adjust the wording you want to brand differently. Save and the translation applies the next time a customer in that language receives a document. ## Tips - Audit the **General** category first — those labels appear on every document type, so a single fix propagates everywhere. - Use your default store language as the fallback — leave **email language by billing address** on so customers in unsupported languages still receive a readable message. - Pair translation with [automation email](/pdf-invoice/documents-management/set-up-the-automation-email/) so the entire flow — trigger, body, attachment — is localised end-to-end. [Update store information](/pdf-invoice/settings/update-store-information-in-pdf-invoice/)[Set up Online store print button](/pdf-invoice/settings/set-up-online-store-print-button/) --- # Store information Source: https://docs.avada.io/pdf-invoice/settings/update-store-information-in-pdf-invoice/ # Store information **Who can use store information?** - Available for all plans Configure the branding and contact details that appear on every document — logo, address, tax IDs — and decide whether customers can view or print their order from your online store. ## Overview Store information is the foundation every template draws from. Set it once and every invoice, packing slip, refund and draft order picks up the same logo, address, VAT number and email contact. A second tab also controls a "Print" button you can offer customers on the order status page. ## How to use ### Section 1: Store details Go to **Home > Setting > Store details**. Fill in: - **Logo** — JPG or PNG, max 1 MB. Adjust height and width to fit your template layout. - **Address** — used as the seller address on every document. - **VAT number** — required in most EU and UK markets. - **Phone** — appears in document footers. - **Email contact** — the address customers reply to. - **Registered number** — company registration number for jurisdictions that require it. - **Barcode display** — toggle on if you want the order barcode printed. Save when done. Existing templates pick up the new values immediately. ### Section 2: Online store Go to **Home > Setting > Online store** to expose a "Print" or "View order" button on the customer's order status page. - **Enable view order on online store** — turn the feature on. - **Order template** — choose which template the button uses (Invoice, Order, Refund, Packing Slip). - **Button label** — custom text for the button (e.g. "Download invoice", "Print my order"). Customers can now grab their PDF directly from the order page without contacting support. ## Tips - Use a transparent PNG logo for cleaner output on coloured backgrounds. - Double-check the VAT and registered number fields — they print on every invoice and are hard to fix retroactively. - Set the customer-facing button label to match your store's voice ("Download invoice" feels less formal than "Print order"). [Credit limits for store credit](/pdf-invoice/b2b-compatible-features/features-coming-soon/credit-limits-for-store-credit/)[Set up Translation section](/pdf-invoice/settings/set-up-translation-section/) --- # Introduction Source: https://docs.avada.io/product-feed/ # Introduction **Avada Product Feed** syncs your Shopify products to **Google Merchant Center** and helps you keep every product approved on Google Shopping — with built-in validation that catches problems before Google rejects them, and automatic syncing that keeps your feed up to date. ## What Avada Product Feed does Getting products to GoogleKeeping them approved Sync your Shopify catalog to Google Merchant Center in a few clicksSee why a product will be rejected — before it is — and fix it in the app Build feeds for different markets (country, language, currency)One-click **Autofix** for common issues, plus manual edits per product Choose which products go in each feed — all products, a collection, or a hand-picked listTrack approval status per feed: Approved, Limited, Pending, Disapproved, Excluded Keep feeds fresh with scheduled automatic syncPull approval status back from Google so you always know where you stand ## Who this guide is for Shopify merchants using the Avada Product Feed app. No coding required — everything in this guide is done through the app admin interface. ## Getting the app Avada Product Feed is **free to install**. Install it from the Shopify App Store and open it from your Shopify admin under **Apps**. Some limits apply on the free plan (for example, the number of feeds and scheduled auto-sync). See [Plans and limits](/product-feed/manage-feed/overview/#plans-and-limits) for details. ## Reading order If you're new to the app, follow these pages in order: - [Getting started](/product-feed/getting-started/) — connect Google and create your first feed - [Dashboard](/product-feed/dashboard/) — your feed overview at a glance - [Manage feed](/product-feed/manage-feed/overview/) — create, edit, and sync feeds - [Feed details & products](/product-feed/manage-feed/feed-details/) — fix disapprovals and edit products - [Settings](/product-feed/settings/) — connection and automatic sync Otherwise, use the sidebar to jump to any feature. ## Need help? - In-app chat support — click **Chat with us** on the Dashboard [Getting started](/product-feed/getting-started/) --- # Dashboard Source: https://docs.avada.io/product-feed/dashboard/ # Dashboard The **Dashboard** is your at-a-glance overview of your Google Shopping feed — key numbers, what needs attention, and quick links into setup and support. ## Stat cards Four cards at the top summarize your catalog on Google: CardWhat it shows **Feeds**How many feeds you've created **Products synced**Total products pushed to Google Merchant Center **Approved**Products currently approved and showing on Google **Disapproved**Products Google has rejected — these need a fix ## Setup guide Until you dismiss it, a **Setup guide** card walks you through the three steps to go live: - **Connect Google Merchant Center** — button: **Connect Google**, or **Manage connection** once connected. - **Create your first product feed** — button: **Create feed**, or **Manage feeds** once you have one. - **Sync products to Google** — button: **Go to feeds**. Once you dismiss the Setup guide, it's replaced by an **Account health** strip showing three checkpoints: - **Google connected** - **Website verified** - **Feed active** If any checkpoint isn't met, that's the first thing to fix. ## Recent sync activity This section lists your most recent feed syncs, each with a status badge: BadgeMeaning **Success**The sync finished and products were sent to Google **Syncing**A sync is in progress **Failed**The sync didn't complete — open the feed to see why Before you've synced anything, this section shows an empty state — **"No sync history yet"** — with a **Create feed** button to get started. ## Getting help The **Chat with us** card opens in-app support if you're stuck. You can reach the team here any time. ## Next steps - [Manage feed](/product-feed/manage-feed/overview/) — create and sync feeds - [Feed details & products](/product-feed/manage-feed/feed-details/) — fix disapproved products - [Settings](/product-feed/settings/) — turn on automatic sync [Getting started](/product-feed/getting-started/)[Overview](/product-feed/manage-feed/overview/) --- # Data Processing Addendum (DPA) Source: https://docs.avada.io/product-feed/data-processing-addendum-dpa/ # Data Processing Addendum (DPA) This Data Processing Addendum ("DPA") supplements and forms part of the Terms of Service or other agreement ("Agreement") between you (the "Customer," "Data Controller") and **Avada Product Feed** ("Avada Product Feed," "Data Processor," "we," "us") regarding the processing of personal data under applicable data protection laws. By using **Avada Product Feed**'s services, you agree to the terms of this DPA. ### 1. DEFINITIONS The following terms have the meanings set forth below. Terms not defined here have the meanings given in applicable data protection laws or our Agreement: - "Data Protection Laws" means all applicable privacy and data protection laws, including the GDPR, UK GDPR, CCPA/CPRA, Singapore PDPA, and similar regulations worldwide. - "Personal Data" means any information relating to an identified or identifiable individual, as defined under applicable Data Protection Laws. - "Processing" means any operation performed on Personal Data, including collection, storage, use, disclosure, and deletion. - "Sub-processor" means any third party engaged by **Avada Product Feed** to process Personal Data on your behalf. - "Data Subject" means the individual to whom Personal Data relates. - "Personal Data Breach" means unauthorized access, disclosure, alteration, or destruction of Personal Data. ### 2. ROLES AND SCOPE OF PROCESSING #### 2.1 Data Controller and Processor Relationship You act as the Data Controller, determining the purposes and means of processing Personal Data. **Avada Product Feed** acts as your Data Processor, processing Personal Data solely according to your documented instructions. #### 2.2 Purpose of Processing **Avada Product Feed** processes Personal Data only to provide our loyalty program services, including: - Managing customer loyalty accounts, points, and rewards - Processing transactions and redemptions - Facilitating referral campaigns and marketing - Providing customer support and analytics - Operating loyalty widgets and customer portals #### 2.3 Categories of Data We may process the following categories of Personal Data: - Contact information (name, email, phone) - Account and transaction history - Loyalty program activity and preferences - Device and usage information - Communication records ### 3. YOUR OBLIGATIONS As the Data Controller, you must: - Maintain lawful basis for sharing Personal Data with **Avada Product Feed** - Provide adequate privacy notices to your customers - Obtain necessary consents where required by law - Not provide sensitive personal data without prior written agreement - Ensure your instructions comply with applicable Data Protection Laws ### 4. OUR COMMITMENTS #### 4.1 Processing Instructions We will process Personal Data only: - According to your documented instructions - As necessary to provide our services - To comply with applicable legal requirements - With your prior written consent for any other purpose #### 4.2 Security Measures We implement appropriate technical and organizational security measures, including: - Encryption in transit and at rest - Access controls and authentication - Regular security audits and updates - Employee training and confidentiality obligations - Incident response procedures #### 4.3 Data Protection Principles We adhere to core data protection principles: - Purpose limitation and data minimization - Accuracy and timely updates - Storage limitation - Confidentiality and integrity ### 5. SUB-PROCESSORS #### 5.1 Authorized Sub-processors We use the following third-party Sub-processors to deliver our services: **Sub-processor****Purpose****Location** Google Cloud PlatformInfrastructure and data storageUnited States FirebaseReal-time backend servicesUnited States MailgunEmail deliveryUnited States Customer.ioEmail automationUnited States CrispCustomer support chatEuropean Union PostHogAnalytics and performanceUnited States #### 5.2 Sub-processor Changes We will notify you at least 30 days before adding new Sub-processors. You may object on reasonable data protection grounds within 14 days of notice. #### 5.3 Sub-processor Obligations All Sub-processors are contractually required to provide equivalent data protection as outlined in this DPA. ### 6. DATA SUBJECT RIGHTS #### 6.1 Assistance with Rights Requests We will assist you in responding to Data Subject requests, including: - Access to Personal Data - Correction of inaccurate data - Deletion of Personal Data - Data portability - Restriction of processing #### 6.2 Request Handling If we receive direct requests from Data Subjects, we will promptly redirect them to you unless legally required to respond directly. ### 7. DATA BREACH NOTIFICATION #### 7.1 Notification Timeline We will notify you within 24 hours of becoming aware of any Personal Data Breach affecting your data. #### 7.2 Breach Information Our notification will include: - Nature and scope of the breach - Categories and number of affected individuals - Likely consequences and impact - Measures taken to address and mitigate the breach #### 7.3 Cooperation We will provide reasonable assistance with breach assessment, regulatory notifications, and communication to affected individuals as required by law. ### 8. INTERNATIONAL DATA TRANSFERS #### 8.1 Transfer Safeguards When Personal Data is transferred outside your jurisdiction, we ensure appropriate safeguards through: - Standard Contractual Clauses (SCCs) where required - Adequacy decisions by relevant authorities - Additional security measures as necessary ### 8.2 Current Transfers Personal Data may be transferred to and processed in countries where our Sub-processors operate, primarily the United States and European Union. ### 9. DATA RETENTION AND DELETION #### 9.1 Data Retention We retain Personal Data only as long as necessary to provide our services or as required by applicable law. #### 9.2 Data Return or Deletion Upon termination of our Agreement or your written request, we will: - Delete or return all Personal Data within 30 days - Provide written confirmation of deletion upon request - Retain data longer only if required by applicable law ### 10. COMPLIANCE AND AUDITS #### 10.1 Documentation We maintain records demonstrating compliance with this DPA and applicable Data Protection Laws. #### 10.2 Audit Rights You may audit our compliance with this DPA upon reasonable notice, subject to confidentiality obligations and operational limitations. #### 10.3 Certifications We may satisfy audit requirements through relevant third-party certifications and compliance reports. ### 11. CALIFORNIA PRIVACY RIGHTS (CCPA/CPRA) When applicable, **Avada Product Feed** acts as a Service Provider under California privacy laws and commits to: - Not selling or sharing Personal Information - Processing data only for agreed-upon business purposes - Not retaining or using Personal Information outside our service relationship - Providing the same level of privacy protection as required under California law ### 12. LIABILITY Our liability under this DPA is subject to the limitation of liability provisions in our main Agreement. We will indemnify you against claims arising from our material breach of this DPA, subject to prompt notification and reasonable cooperation. ### 13. UPDATES TO THIS DPA We may update this DPA from time to time to reflect changes in our practices or applicable laws. We will notify you of material changes and post the updated version on our website. Continued use of our services constitutes acceptance of the revised DPA. ### 14. GOVERNING LAW This DPA is governed by the laws of Singapore. However, where Data Protection Laws require specific governing law or jurisdiction, those requirements will take precedence. ### 15. CONTACT INFORMATION For questions about this DPA or our data processing practices, contact us at: **Avada Product Feed Privacy Team** Email: [privacy@avada.io](mailto:privacy@avada.io) Website: [https://avada.io/ (opens in a new tab) (opens in a new tab)](https://avada.io/) [Privacy Policy](/product-feed/privacy-policy/) --- # Getting started Source: https://docs.avada.io/product-feed/getting-started/ # Getting started When you open Avada Product Feed for the first time, a short setup wizard walks you through connecting Google and creating your first feed. You can finish it in a few minutes. ## 1. Welcome The first screen introduces what the app does — automatic sync, built-in validation, and multi-country feeds. Click **Get started**. ## 2. Connect Google Connect the Google account that owns your Google Merchant Center. - Sign in with Google and grant the requested permissions. - Choose the **Merchant Center account** you want to send products to. - Click **Continue**. (The button stays disabled until you've selected an account.) Don't have a Merchant Center account yet? Create one at [Google Merchant Center (opens in a new tab)](https://merchants.google.com/) first, then come back and connect it. ## 3. Verify website Google only shows products from a store whose website is **claimed and verified** in Merchant Center. This step checks that your domain matches. - If your website isn't verified yet, click **Business info** to open Merchant Center and complete verification there. - Back in the app, click **Recheck** until the status shows as verified. - Click **Continue**. ## 4. All set Choose how to continue: - **Set up feed** (recommended) — create your first feed right here without leaving the wizard. - **Explore the app** — skip for now and go straight to the Dashboard. If you choose **Set up feed**, you'll fill in the same three tabs used everywhere in the app — **General**, **Products**, and **Attributes** — then click **Create feed**. See [Create a feed](/product-feed/manage-feed/create-a-feed/) for a full walkthrough of each tab. ## You're done Once your first feed is created, sync it to push products to Google. From here, the app has three tabs in the left sidebar: - [Dashboard](/product-feed/dashboard/) — overview of your feed and account health - [Manage feed](/product-feed/manage-feed/overview/) — all your feeds, plus create / edit / sync - [Settings](/product-feed/settings/) — Google connection and automatic sync You can re-open the setup wizard's guidance any time from the **Setup guide** card on the Dashboard. [Introduction](/product-feed/)[Dashboard](/product-feed/dashboard/) --- # Create a feed Source: https://docs.avada.io/product-feed/manage-feed/create-a-feed/ # Create a feed Click **Create feed** (from the Dashboard, the Manage feed page, or the onboarding wizard) to open the feed form. The form has three tabs — **General**, **Products**, and **Attributes**. Fill them in, then click **Create feed** to save. ## General Name the feed and set the market it targets. - **Feed name** *(required)* — a name you'll recognize (customers never see it), e.g. "Google Shopping – US" or "Holiday catalog". - **Country**, **Language**, **Currency** — the market this feed is for. These come from your Shopify Markets, so pick the combination you actually sell to. Create a separate feed for each market you sell in. **Duplicate** an existing feed (from the row menu) to set up a new market quickly. ## Products Choose which products go into the feed. **Which products:** - **All products** — every product in your store. - **Specific collection** — only products in a collection you choose. - **Specific products** — a hand-picked list. **Which variants:** - **All variants** — send every variant as its own item. - **First variant only** — send just one item per product. ## Attributes Map your Shopify product data to Google Merchant Center attributes. Fields are organized into groups: GroupExamples **Product details**Title, Description, Link, Brand **Product images**Image link **Price, condition & availability**Price, Condition, Availability **Product identifiers**GTIN, MPN **Marketing methods**Promotions and related fields **Labels**Custom label 0–4 (for organizing campaigns) **Apparel product details**Color, Size, Gender, Age group, Material **Additional details**Extra optional attributes **Shipping & returns**Shipping and return settings Map the fields that apply to your catalog. Google requires a core set (such as Title, Link, Price, and Availability) — the app's built-in validation flags anything missing before you sync. ## Save Click **Create feed** to save. You'll land on the feed's [details page](/product-feed/manage-feed/feed-details/), where you can **Sync** to push products to Google. **Feed limit.** If you're on the free plan and already have a feed, you'll see **"You've reached your feed limit"**. Contact the team to unlock more feeds. [Overview](/product-feed/manage-feed/overview/)[Feed details & products](/product-feed/manage-feed/feed-details/) --- # Feed details & products Source: https://docs.avada.io/product-feed/manage-feed/feed-details/ # Feed details & products Click a feed's name in **Manage feed** to open its details page. This is where you sync the feed, see how many products are approved, and fix the ones Google rejected. ## Syncing a feed The main action is **Sync** — it pulls the latest data from Shopify and pushes it to Google Merchant Center. A progress bar shows while a sync (or status update) is running. Open the **More options** menu for: - **Load status** — refresh approval status from Google. - **View in GMC** — open the feed in Merchant Center. - **Activity** — see the feed's sync history. - **Edit** — change the feed's settings. - **Duplicate** — copy the feed. - **Edit collection** — for collection-based feeds only. - **Delete** — remove the feed. ## The overview strip Six numbers summarize the feed's health on Google: LabelMeaning **Products**Total products in the feed **Approved**Live and showing on Google **Limited**Showing, but with limited visibility **Pending**Google is still reviewing **Disapproved**Rejected — needs a fix **Excluded**Intentionally kept out of the feed If any products were rejected, a banner reads **"X products disapproved in this feed"** so you can jump straight to them. ## The product table Below the overview is a table of every product in the feed. Use it to review products and fix issues. ### Status tabs Filter the table by approval status with the tabs at the top: **All · Approved · Limited · Pending · Disapproved · Excluded** Start on **Disapproved** to see what needs attention. ### Filters Narrow the list further: - **Availability** — In stock / Out of stock. - **Issues** — show only products with issues. - **Issue type** — filter by the specific Google issue. - **Fix type** — **Auto-fixable**, **Manual fix**, or **Edit in Shopify**. The **Fix type** filter is the fast way to separate what the app can fix automatically from what you need to edit yourself. ### Fixing one product Open the **⋯** menu on a row for: - **View & edit** — open the product's details and edit its Google attributes directly. - **Sync** — re-sync just this product. - **Include in feed** / **Exclude from feed** — add or remove it from the feed. **View & edit** opens the product with its attributes grouped into sections — **Product details** (Title, Description, Link, Brand), **Product images** (Image link), **Price, condition & availability**, **Product identifiers** (GTIN, MPN), **Labels** (Custom label 0–4), **Apparel product details**, and **Shipping & returns**. Edit the field Google flagged, then save. **Prices and stock stay in sync with Shopify automatically** — you don't edit those here. Edit static fields (like title, description, or category) in the app; change price and inventory in Shopify. ### Autofix For issues the app can resolve on its own, use **Autofix**: - Select the products (or use the **Fix type → Auto-fixable** filter). - Open the **Autofix** action — a preview shows what will change. - Click **Fix N products** to apply. Autofix handles common, safe corrections. Anything that needs a real value only you know (for example a genuine barcode / GTIN) is left for you to fill in — the app won't invent one. ### Bulk actions Select several products (checkboxes) to act on them together: - **Bulk edit** — open **"Edit N products"** and change a field across all selected products at once. - **Bulk sync** — re-sync the selected products. - **Sync status from GMC** — pull the latest approval status from Google. - **Exclude** / **Include** — remove from or add to the feed in bulk. ## A typical fix-it flow - Open the feed → check the **Disapproved** count. - Click the **Disapproved** tab. - Filter **Fix type → Auto-fixable**, select all, run **Autofix → Fix N products**. - Switch **Fix type → Manual fix**, open each product with **View & edit**, correct the flagged field. - Run **Sync**, then **Load status** after Google re-reviews to confirm they're approved. ## Next steps - [Settings](/product-feed/settings/) — turn on automatic sync so this stays up to date on its own [Create a feed](/product-feed/manage-feed/create-a-feed/)[Settings](/product-feed/settings/) --- # Manage feed — Overview Source: https://docs.avada.io/product-feed/manage-feed/overview/ # Manage feed — Overview The **Manage feed** tab lists every product feed you send to Google Merchant Center. From here you create new feeds, and open, edit, duplicate, sync, or delete existing ones. ## The feed table Each row is one feed. The columns are: ColumnDescription **Feed**The feed's name. Click it to open the feed's details. **Type**How products are selected — all products, a collection, or specific products. **Target**The market the feed is built for (country / language / currency). **Products**How many products are in the feed. **Status**The feed's current state. **Account**The Merchant Center account the feed is connected to. **Sync time**When the feed was last synced. Use the **search**, **sort**, and **filter** controls above the table to find a feed quickly. ## Creating a feed Click **Create feed** at the top right. This opens the feed form with three tabs — General, Products, and Attributes. See [Create a feed](/product-feed/manage-feed/create-a-feed/) for a full walkthrough. **Empty state.** Before you have any feeds, the page shows **"Create your first product feed"** with a single **Create feed** button. ## Row actions Open the **⋯** menu on any feed row for: - **View in GMC** — open this feed in Google Merchant Center. - **Edit** — change the feed's settings. - **Duplicate** — create a copy to tweak (handy for a new market). - **Edit collection** — only for feeds built from a specific collection. - **Delete** — remove the feed. To act on several feeds at once, select their checkboxes and use the bulk **Delete** action. ## Deleting a feed When you delete a feed, a confirmation dialog appears with a checkbox: **Also delete its products from Google Merchant Center** - Leave it **unchecked** to remove the feed from the app but keep the products live in Merchant Center. - **Check it** to also remove those products from Google. ## Optimization tips Click **Optimization tips** in the header to open a **Feed optimization tips** panel — quick best-practice advice for getting more products approved. ## Warnings you might see Banners appear at the top of the page when something blocks syncing: - **Google isn't connected** — connect it in [Settings](/product-feed/settings/). - **No Merchant Center account selected** — pick one in Settings. - **Website not verified** — verify your domain in Merchant Center (see [Getting started](/product-feed/getting-started/#3-verify-website)). ## Plans and limits On the free plan you can create **1 feed**. To create more, contact the team to unlock a higher limit. The upgrade prompt reads: *"Contact us to get up to 5 feeds and 500 products for your store."* ## Next steps - [Create a feed](/product-feed/manage-feed/create-a-feed/) — the General / Products / Attributes form - [Feed details & products](/product-feed/manage-feed/feed-details/) — sync, and fix disapproved products [Dashboard](/product-feed/dashboard/)[Create a feed](/product-feed/manage-feed/create-a-feed/) --- # Privacy policy Source: https://docs.avada.io/product-feed/privacy-policy/ # 🔏 Privacy policy How Avada collects, handles, and processes data of its clients and customers ## Introduction This privacy policy describes the information Avada Commerce, Inc. ("Avada", “we” or “us”) collect from End Users (“you”) of our website (the “Site”) and the information we collect on behalf of our clients who employ our technology to use our email messaging, analytics, and other services (the “Services”). This policy does not apply to third parties that Avada does not own or control. Such third parties are not under Avada’s control and Avada is not responsible for their privacy or security practices. Any order forms or additional agreements to which users agree governing the provision of optional Avada features shall take precedence over the terms of this Privacy Policy to the extent of any differences, so please read such order forms or additional agreements carefully. Avada participates in and complies with the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework and the Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework. Avada’s accountability for personal data that it receives under the Privacy Shield and subsequently transfers to a third party is described in EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks below. In particular, Avada remains responsible and liable under the Privacy Shield Principles if third-party agents that it engages to process the personal data on its behalf do so in a manner inconsistent with the Principles, unless Avada proves that it is not responsible for the event giving rise to the damage. ## Site Privacy Policy We collect, process, and retain information from you and any devices you may use when you use or interact with our Site and Services, and in other ways described below. We receive and store information you enter on our Site or give us in any other way, including your name, mailing address, phone number, email address, and payment information, as well as company name, and colleagues’ names and email addresses. We collect information about your use of our Site, such as the pages you view and other interactions you have. We receive and store certain types of information whenever you interact with our Site. Our Site uses “cookies,” tagging and other tracking technologies to help enable us to enhance or personalize your online browsing experience. This information includes computer and connection information such as statistics on your page views, traffic to and from our Site, referral URL, ad data, your IP address, and device identifiers. This information also may include your browsing history, transaction history, and your web log information. We use your information to help us personalize and continually improve your experience on the Site, including fulfilling requests for information, analyzing and compiling trends and statistics, and communicating with you. For information about how to manage your information and the choices you have, see how to limit the use of your information below. ## Cookies and Interest-Based Advertising Cookies are alphanumeric identifiers transferred to your computer’s hard drive through your Web browser to enable our systems to recognize your browser and tell us how and when pages in our Site are visited and by how many people. Like most internet sites, We use cookies to enhance our users’ experience on the internet. These cookies do not collect personal information, and we do not combine information collected through cookies with other personal information to tell us who you are or what your name or e-mail address is. Most browsers allow you to prevent the browser from accepting new cookies, to be notified when you receive a new cookie, or to disable cookies. If you delete your cookies or if you set your browser to decline cookies, some features of the Site may not work or may not work as designed. Note that if you choose to remove cookies, you may remove opt-out cookies that affect your advertising preferences. We partner with third-party advertising companies who also use these tracking tools to provide advertisements on other websites. These third parties may use these technologies to collect information about you when you use the Site. They may collect information about your online activities over time and across different websites and other online services. They may also use persistent identifiers to track your Internet usage across other websites in their networks beyond the Site. They may use this information to provide you with interest-based advertising or other targeted content. While we do not knowingly provide these entities with information that personally identifies you such third parties may, with sufficient data from other sources, be able to personally identify you, unknown to us. Some content or applications on the Site may be served by unaffiliated third parties. We do not control these third parties’ tracking technologies or how they may be used. We are not responsible for the content or privacy practices on any website not operated by us to which our Site links or that links to our Site. Your browser or device may include “Do Not Track” functionality. Our information collection and disclosure practices, and the choices that we provide to visitors, will continue to operate as described in this privacy notice, whether or not a Do Not Track signal is received. We use Google Analytics, a web analytics service provided by Google, Inc., on our Site. Google Analytics uses cookies or other tracking technologies to help us analyze how users interact with and use the Site, compile reports on the Site’s activity, and provide other services related to Site activity and usage. The technologies used by Google may collect information such as your IP address, time of visit, whether you are a return visitor, and any referring website. The Site does not use Google Analytics to gather information that personally identifies you. The information generated by Google Analytics will be transmitted to and stored by Google and will be subject to Google’s privacy policies. To learn more about Google’s partner services and to learn how to opt out of tracking of analytics by Google, [click here (opens in a new tab)](https://tools.google.com/dlpage/gaoptout). Many of the third party advertisers that place tracking tools on our Site are members of programs that offer you additional choices regarding the collection and use of your information. You can learn more about the options available to limit these third parties’ collection and use of your information by visiting the websites for the Network Advertising Initiative and the Digital Advertising Alliance. Similarly, you can learn about your options to opt-out of mobile app tracking by certain advertising networks through your device settings. Please note that opting-out of advertising networks services does not mean that you will not receive advertising on other websites, nor will it prevent the receipt of interest-based advertising from third parties that do not participate in these programs. It will, however, exclude you from interest-based advertising conducted through participating networks, as provided by their policies and choice mechanisms. ## Collection, Use, and Disclosure of End Users’ Information Through Our Services This section describes our policies for handling information about End Users provided to us by our clients using our Services or other sources of their choosing. We provide our clients with the ability to create profiles of their End Users in order to effectively communicate with them via marketing communications tools like email, analytics services. To do this, our clients integrate our technology into their applications, websites, or other online services. Our clients’ collection, use, and disclosure of data is separately governed by their privacy policies. Our clients may collect information about their users directly; in that case, each of our clients is responsible for ensuring that their data collection follows their privacy policies and terms of use. **Collection** In the course of providing Services to our clients, We collect customer information, purchases or product views (WITHOUT customer's emails, credit card information, customer's addresses, or any personally identifiable information (“PII”) ) about End Users of our clients. We use this information to provide our Services to our clients. We may automatically collect information about your use, navigation of, and interactions with our clients’ applications, websites, or other online services when our client has installed our technology on its properties. Cookies that we set on our clients’ websites expire after three years and the expiration date updates every time you encounter our server. We retain standard web log data 5 years after you visit a client’s website, and aggregations and reports for up to 10 years after you visit a client’s website. **Use and Disclosure** We collect information about End Users at our clients’ direction and may append information to End Users’ profiles from third party sources. We do this to provide our Services, which enable our clients to optimize their communications with, and understanding of, their End Users. We consider our clients’ End Users’ information to be confidential to that client. Accordingly, we do not disclose End User information to unaffiliated third parties except in response to our clients’ explicit instructions, as provided for in an agreement between us and our client, or as otherwise described in this Privacy Policy (for example, as necessary to respond to legal requirements). We may provide services or sell products jointly with affiliated businesses. We may share End User information collected from our clients that is related to such transactions with those affiliated businesses. We require our affiliates, via contract, to provide the same level of privacy protection as set forth in this policy and they do not have the right to share or use PII for any purpose other than for an authorized transaction. If we ever were to engage in any onward transfers of your data with third parties for a purpose other than which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized, we would provide you with an opt-out choice to limit the use and disclosure of your personal data. **Information Clients Provide to Us** We receive and store any information clients enter on the Site, through the Services, or provide to us in any other way. Clients can choose not to provide us with certain information, but then they may not be able to take advantage of many of our features. We use clients’ information for such purposes as responding to their requests for Services, customizing the content they see, communicating with them about our products, and marketing our Services to them. In order for clients to use all of our features, they must register with us. We require clients’ e-mail addresses and passwords during the registration process. Further information may be required if clients choose to purchase paid components of the Services, such as credit card and billing information. We use third party partners for credit card processing who may require and store your credit card and billing information. **E-mail Communications** If a client purchases Avada’s online tools to collect and analyze user and usage data for its websites, applications, or services, we will communicate with it about the services it purchases by e-mail. Clients consent to receiving such confirmations by e-mail. If clients contact us via e-mail, we may retain a record of their contact information and any information they provide us in their messages to respond to them. We may receive a confirmation when clients open an e-mail from us. We may also send e-mails with news or promotions. If clients do not want to receive news or promotional e-mail from us, please contact us at [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) (this will not affect e-mails related to certain important, legal, or service-related messages such as outage information). ## Other Important Information **Your California Privacy Rights** If you are a California resident, California law permits you to request certain information regarding the disclosure of your PII by us and our related companies to third parties for the third parties’ direct marketing purposes. To make such a request, please send your request, by mail or email, to the addresses listed at the end of this policy. **Agents** We employ other companies and people to perform tasks on our behalf and need to share client and End User information with them to provide products and services. Examples include billing, processing payments, providing marketing assistance, and providing customer service. Our agents use the same level of privacy protection as we do. Unless we tell you differently, We do not share, and our agents do not have any right to use, PII collected from our Site and Services beyond what is necessary to assist us. **Business Transfers** In some cases, we may change our ownership or corporate organization, or may choose to buy or sell assets. End User information may be transferred to another entity, its affiliates, or service providers in connection with the transaction. You acknowledge that such transfers may occur, and that Avada or its successor organization may continue to use your information as set forth in this policy. **Protection of Avada and Others** We may release PII when we in our sole discretion believe in good faith that release is necessary or appropriate to comply with the law, enforce or apply our conditions of use and other agreements, or protect the rights, property, or safety of Avada, our employees, our clients, or others. We also may be required to disclose an individual’s PII in response to a lawful request by public authorities, including to meet national security or law enforcement requirements. **Information Security** Clients’ Avada account information is protected by a password for your privacy and security as well as other reasonable security measures. We use reasonable safeguards to protect the security of clients’ information during transmission, including by encrypting all of the information clients input. Only employees or agents who need PII to perform a specific job are granted access to it. All of our employees are kept up to date on our privacy and security practices. While we uses commercially reasonable means to secure information provided to us, we do not guarantee that such information will not be improperly accessed, disclosed, or destroyed by breach of any of our safeguards. Clients and End Users are responsible for the security of their information that is transmitted to us or that is viewed, downloaded, or otherwise accessed when using unencrypted, public or otherwise unsecured networks. **Accessing Information** You are able to access, add to, update, correct, amend, or delete certain information about you, including PII. When you update information, however, we often maintain a copy of the unrevised information in our records. A client may deactivate its Avada account by following the deactivation process set forth on the Site. Some information may remain in our records after account deletion. Please contact us at [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) if you have questions or concerns about accessing, correcting, or deleting your PII. EU and Swiss data subjects have a right to access their information. Please see the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks section below. **Conditions of Use** Your use of the Site and Services and any possible dispute over privacy are subject to this Privacy Policy and our Terms of Service, including limitations on damages, dispute resolution, and application of New York state law. **International Users (Except for EU and Swiss Data Subjects)** If you use our Websites outside of the United States, you understand and consent to the transfer of your personal information to, and the collection, processing, and storage of your personal information in, the United States and elsewhere. The laws in the U.S. and these countries regarding personal information may be different than the laws of your state or country. **Use of Avada’s Site by Children** Avada’s Site is not intended for children under the age of 18. Accordingly, we will not knowingly collect or use any PII from children that we know to be under the age of 18. If we become aware of PII in our database that was collected from a child under 18, we will delete such information. ## EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks **Definitions** For purposes of this section only, the following definitions shall apply: “Agent” means any third party that collects or uses personal information under the instructions of, and solely for, Avada or to which Avada discloses personal information for use on Avada’s behalf. “Personal information” means any information or set of information that identifies or could be used by or on behalf of Avada to identify (together with other information) a living individual. Personal information does not include information that is anonymized or aggregated. For the purposes of data received from Switzerland under the Swiss-U.S. privacy shield, personal information also includes ideological views or activities, information on social security measures or administrative or criminal proceedings and sanctions. “Sensitive information” means any personal information that reveals race, ethnic origin, political opinions, religious or philosophical beliefs, trade union membership, information that concerns health or sex life, and information about criminal or administrative proceedings and sanctions. **EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield** Avada Commerce, Inc. participates in and complies with the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework and the Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework as set forth by the U.S. Department of Commerce regarding the collection, use, and retention of personal information from the European Union and Switzerland to the United States, respectively. Avada has certified to the Department of Commerce that it adheres to the Privacy Shield Principles. If there is any conflict between the policies in this privacy policy and the Privacy Shield Principles, the Privacy Shield Principles shall govern. To learn more about the Privacy Shield program, and to view our certification page, please visit [https://www.privacyshield.gov/ (opens in a new tab)](https://www.privacyshield.gov/). **Principles** Notice: Avada receives personal information about individuals in the EEA and Switzerland collected by Avada and its clients, and personal information about clients in the EEA and Switzerland. The types of information collected and the uses of that information are described in the privacy policy above. Avada will subject all personal information received via the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shields to these Principles. Choice: Avada will offer individuals the opportunity to choose whether their information is to be used for a purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized by the individual. An individual may opt-out of such uses of their personal information by contacting us at the address given below. Avada offers an opt-out to individuals whose personal information is disclosed to non-agent third parties. Additionally, Avada will not use sensitive personal information for a purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized by the individual unless Avada has received the individual’s affirmative and explicit consent (opt-in). Avada will treat as sensitive any personal information received from a third party where the third party identifies and treats it as sensitive. Data Integrity: Avada will use personal information only in ways that are compatible with the purposes for which it was collected or subsequently authorized by the individual. Avada will take reasonable steps to ensure that personal information is relevant to its intended use, accurate, complete and current. Transfers to Agents: Avada contracts with third parties who perform business functions on our behalf. Avada uses these third parties to assist with activities such as billing, processing payments, providing marketing assistance, and providing customer service. These entities may have access to personal information if needed to perform their functions for Avada. For information received under the Privacy Shield, Avada will require its agents to safeguard personal information consistent with this Policy by contract, obligating the agent to provide at least the same level of protection as is required by the Privacy Shield Principles. Under certain circumstances, Avada may bear liability for onward transfers of personal data where its agent processes personal data inconsistent with the Privacy Shield Principles, unless Avada proves that it is not responsible for the event giving rise to the damage. Access and Correction: Upon request, Avada will grant individuals reasonable access to personal information that it holds about them. In addition, Avada will take reasonable steps to permit individuals to correct, amend, or delete information that is demonstrated to be inaccurate or incomplete. An individual may request to access their information, or otherwise correct, amend, or delete their information by contacting us at the address given below. Security: See “Information Security,” above. **Enforcement** Avada will conduct compliance audits of its relevant privacy practices to verify adherence to this Policy. Any employee that Avada determines is in violation of this policy will be subject to disciplinary action. Avada is subject to the investigatory and enforcement powers of the Federal Trade Commission (FTC). **Dispute Resolution** In compliance with the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Principles, Avada commits to resolve complaints about your privacy and our collection or use of your personal information. European Union or Swiss individuals with inquiries or complaints regarding this privacy policy should first contact Avada at [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) or using the contact information below. Avada will investigate and attempt to resolve complaints regarding use and disclosure of personal information by reference to the principles in this policy. Avada has further committed to refer unresolved privacy complaints under the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Principles to an independent dispute resolution mechanism, the BBB EU PRIVACY SHIELD, operated by the Council of Better Business Bureaus. If you do not receive timely acknowledgment of your complaint, or if your complaint is not satisfactorily addressed, please visit [www.bbb.org/EU-privacy-shield/for-eu-consumers/ (opens in a new tab)](http://www.bbb.org/EU-privacy-shield/for-eu-consumers/) for more information and to file a complaint. Please note that if your complaint is not resolved through these channels, under limited circumstances, a binding arbitration option may be available before a Privacy Shield Panel. **Questions or Concerns** If you have any questions or concerns regarding privacy at Avada, please send us a detailed message to [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) or to Avada Commerce Inc. at 651 N Broad St, Suite 206, Middletown, DE 19709. Your privacy is important to us and we will make every effort to resolve your concerns. [Settings](/product-feed/settings/)[Data Processing Addendum (DPA)](/product-feed/data-processing-addendum-dpa/) --- # Settings Source: https://docs.avada.io/product-feed/settings/ # Settings The **Settings** tab is where you manage your Google connection and decide how often the app syncs your products. ## Google connection On the right side of the page you manage the Google account your feeds send to: - Not connected yet? Click **Connect Google account** and sign in. - Already connected? Use **Change account** to switch Merchant Center accounts, or **Disconnect** to unlink. If your website still needs verifying, a banner here links you to the steps (see [Getting started](/product-feed/getting-started/#3-verify-website)). ## Automatic sync Keep your feeds fresh without syncing by hand. - Turn on **Automatic sync**. - Set **Frequency** — **Once a day** or **Once a week**. - Set **Preferred time** — when the sync should run. Set your **Schedule timezone** (a GMT offset) so the preferred time runs when you expect. ## Automatic status sync Turn on **Automatic status sync** to have the app pull approval status back from Google on a schedule, so your Approved / Disapproved counts stay current. It has its own **Frequency** and **Preferred time**. ## Choose which fields sync Click **Choose fields** to open **"Fields synced to Google"** and control which attributes the app pushes automatically. - **Required (always synced)** — **Link**, **Price**, and **Availability**. These are locked on because Google needs them. - Optional groups you can toggle: **Product content**, **Basic**, **Apparel**, **Custom labels**, **Shipping & returns**, and **Flags**. Turn on the groups that matter for your catalog, then save. **Why leave some fields off?** If you manage a field manually in the app, keep its group off so an automatic sync doesn't overwrite your edit. ## Plans and limits Scheduled automatic sync is a locked feature on the free plan. When it's locked you'll see **"Scheduled auto-sync is locked"** and the schedule controls are disabled. The prompt reads: *"Contact us to unlock scheduled automatic sync for your store."* You can always sync manually from a feed's details page. ## Next steps - [Manage feed](/product-feed/manage-feed/overview/) — create and sync feeds [Feed details & products](/product-feed/manage-feed/feed-details/)[Privacy Policy](/product-feed/privacy-policy/) --- # Avada AEO optimizer LLMs.txt Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ # Welcome Welcome to Avada AEO Optimizer - Create a concise, AI-friendly index of your store so AI assistants can answer accurately. ## Why do we need Avada AEO Optimizer? Ever wondered why AI chatbots sometimes guess when customers ask about your store? On Shopify, it isn’t straightforward to provide assistants with a short, trustworthy overview of products, collections, policies, and blog posts. Manually crafting and updating such a file is time-consuming—and easy to let slip. That’s where Avada AEO Optimizer comes in. We turn your published storefront content into a clean, readable LLMs.txt-a lightweight index that gives AI the right context first. With a reliable source to consult, assistants can deliver clearer answers about your catalog, shipping, returns, and guidance content. From an AEO (AI Experience Optimization) perspective, this fills a missing piece for Shopify merchants: helping AI understand what you sell, how you organize it, and the rules that matter to shoppers. The result is fewer wrong answers, faster support, and more confident purchasing. Alongside [Avada SEO Suite (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/L04gBa), Avada AEO Optimizer completes your AI-ready storefront toolkit. It’s a simple, sustainable way to present up-to-date store information to assistants like ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Perplexity, and DeepSeek-so they can help your customers better. [Intro to AEO](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/getting-started/intro-to-aeo/) --- # Additional .txt files Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/additional-txt-files/ # Additional .txt files Create extra, topic-specific `.txt` files that are **linked from your main llms.txt**. They let you give AI assistants deeper, focused content on a subject — a sizing guide, warranty, shipping FAQ — without bloating your main file. In **Avada AEO optimizer**, open **agent.md and llms.txt** and select the **Additional .txt files** tab. ## Create a file - Click **Create txt file**. - Give it a title and add your content. - Save. The file is published and linked from your main `llms.txt`, so AI assistants can discover it. ## Manage your files - Use the **search box** to find a file by title. - Change **Items per page** to show more or fewer files at once. - A new store starts empty — *"No .txt files yet. Click Create txt file to add one."* Keep each file to a single topic. Focused files are easier for AI assistants to use and for you to keep up to date. [Settings](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/settings/)[Markdown Alternate Pages](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/markdown-alternate-pages/) --- # agent.md Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/agent-md/ # agent.md The operating manual for AI shopping agents — how an agent discovers your store and buys safely. `agent.md` is served at `yourstore.com/agents.md`. It's the file AI **shopping agents** read to learn how to interact and transact with your store: it declares the Universal Commerce Protocol (UCP) endpoints, the agent purchase flow, and the rules agents must follow — including that no payment happens without the buyer's consent. ## Where to find it In **Avada AEO optimizer**, open **agent.md and llms.txt** and select the **agent.md** tab. Click the URL (e.g. `https://yourstore.com/agents.md`) to view the live file generated for your store. **Before AI can read it:** your storefront password must be off. If it's on, click **Disable password** in the **Password protection enabled** banner. ## Custom agent.md By default, `agent.md` is generated for you and stays current with your store. To provide your own instructions for AI agents, turn on **Custom agent.md** and click **Edit**. - **Custom overrides the auto-generated file** — your content replaces it, so include everything agents need. - Until you add custom content, this area shows an **Empty** state; the live file uses the auto-generated default. - Turn **Custom agent.md** off anytime to go back to the auto-generated file. ## Why it matters - **Agent-ready checkout.** AI shopping agents (in ChatGPT, Perplexity, Copilot, and more) can transact through Shopify's supported flow. - **Safe by design.** No payment happens without the buyer's approval. - **Your store, represented correctly.** Agents follow your declared endpoints and policies instead of guessing. [Overview](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/overview/)[llms.txt](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-txt/) --- # llms-full.txt Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-full-txt/ # llms-full.txt The full-content companion to `llms.txt` — everything an AI needs, in a single file. `llms-full.txt` is served at `yourstore.com/llms-full.txt`. It uses the **same structure** as `llms.txt` but **inlines much more detail** — descriptions, variants, availability, and page content — so an AI assistant can ingest your full store context in one fetch instead of following many links. ## llms.txt vs llms-full.txt Where `llms.txt` is a concise index (title + URL + short note), `llms-full.txt` adds the depth: - **Store information** — brand, contact, shipping, and returns summarized up front - **Products with full detail** — price, availability, variants, and descriptions - **Collections and pages** — with their content inlined rather than just linked Think of `llms.txt` as the table of contents and `llms-full.txt` as the full book — same outline, far more text. ## Where to find it In **Avada AEO optimizer**, open **agent.md and llms.txt** and select the **llms-full.txt** tab. Click the URL (e.g. `https://yourstore.com/llms-full.txt`) to view the live file generated for your store. **Before AI can read it:** your storefront password must be off — click **Disable password** in the banner if shown. ## Custom llms-full.txt By default, `llms-full.txt` is generated for you and stays in sync with your store. To override it with your own instructions, turn on **Custom llms-full.txt**, then click **Edit**. Click **Sync** anytime to refresh the file from your store and return to the auto-generated version. ## What's included `llms-full.txt` is built from the **same [Settings](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/settings/)** as `llms.txt` — the content types (Pages, Collections, Blog posts, Products), fields, and languages you choose apply to both files. ## When it matters most - **Text-heavy stores** where product descriptions and guides carry the buying decision. - Merchants who want an AI to answer **detailed spec, variant, or availability** questions accurately. - Cases where you'd rather give the AI **complete context in one request** than have it crawl page by page. Tip: keep your included content focused. A rich `llms-full.txt` is valuable, but an overly large file is slower for AI to read. [llms.txt](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-txt/)[Settings](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/settings/) --- # llms.txt Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-txt/ # llms.txt The concise index of your store — a short, curated map AI assistants read first. `llms.txt` is served at `yourstore.com/llms.txt`. It lists your store name, a summary, and your key products, collections, blog posts, and policies as links with short notes — small and easy for an AI assistant like ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Perplexity, or DeepSeek to parse. ## Where to find it In **Avada AEO optimizer**, open **agent.md and llms.txt** and select the **llms.txt** tab. Click the URL (e.g. `https://yourstore.com/llms.txt`) to view the live file generated for your store. **Before AI can read it:** your storefront password must be off. If it's on, click **Disable password** in the **Password protection enabled** banner. ## Custom llms.txt By default, `llms.txt` is generated for you and stays in sync with your store. To override it with your own instructions, turn on **Custom llms.txt**, then click **Edit**. - **Custom overrides the auto-generated file** with your own content. - Click **Sync** anytime to refresh the file from your store and return to the auto-generated version. ## Editing your llms.txt Clicking **Edit** opens the editor with an **Editor view** and a **Markdown view** side by side. It has two areas: - **Your store content** (headers, intros, descriptions) is fully editable — write it however you like. - **The list of product, collection, and page URLs is greyed out** — it's auto-generated from your store and keeps updating on its own. Hover it and you'll see: *"This part is auto-generated. Manage it in the URL Manager."* Because the URL list is locked in the editor, editing your file **no longer turns it into a static file** — new products keep flowing in automatically. To add or remove URLs, use the **URL Manager** (include or exclude specific URLs) instead of editing them here. ## What's included & who can read it Choose the content types, fields, and languages — and which AI assistants may read your files — under [Settings](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/settings/). ## Why it matters - **Fewer wrong answers.** Assistants consult a reliable source first, reducing hallucinations about price, stock, or shipping. - **Faster pre-sales support.** Customers get clear answers on product fit, returns, and delivery — without waiting for a human. - **You stay in control.** Choose what's included and which assistants may read it. `llms.txt` works alongside SEO, so you're discoverable on both search engines and AI assistants. [agent.md](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/agent-md/)[llms-full.txt](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-full-txt/) --- # agent.md & llms.txt Overview Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/overview/ # Overview Your store's three AI files, in one place. Modern AI shopping runs on three small public files at the root of your storefront. Avada AEO optimizer generates them for you and lets you control them — all from the **agent.md and llms.txt** page in the app. FileServed atWhat it does [agent.md](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/agent-md/)`yourstore.com/agents.md`The **operating manual for AI shopping agents** — how an agent buys. [llms.txt](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-txt/)`yourstore.com/llms.txt`A **concise index** of your store — where AI looks first. [llms-full.txt](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-full-txt/)`yourstore.com/llms-full.txt`The **full-content** version — everything an AI needs in one file. **Three layers, not three sizes of the same file:** `agent.md` is *how to buy*, `llms.txt` is *where to look*, `llms-full.txt` is *everything to read*. ## Configure once, applies everywhere - Use [Settings](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/settings/) to choose content types, fields, languages, and which AI assistants may read your files. - Add topic-specific pages under [Additional .txt files](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/additional-txt-files/), linked from your main `llms.txt`. ## Before you start Turn off your storefront password so AI bots can read the files — click **Disable password** in the **Password protection enabled** banner shown at the top of the page. [Pricing](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/pricing/)[agent.md](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/agent-md/) --- # Settings Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/settings/ # Settings Control what goes into your AI files and which assistants can read them. In **Avada AEO optimizer**, open **agent.md and llms.txt**, then use the **Settings** tab and the **Settings** section on the `llms.txt` / `llms-full.txt` tabs. ## AI assistant access Choose which AI assistants can learn about your store. On the **Settings** tab, tick any of: - **ChatGPT** - **Claude** - **Gemini** - **Perplexity** - **DeepSeek** The app updates your store's `robots.txt` to match your selection — no manual editing needed. Untick an assistant to stop serving it. ## Included content Choose what information AI assistants can access about your store: - **Pages** - **Collections** - **Blog posts** - **Products** These selections apply to both `llms.txt` and `llms-full.txt`. ## Template & fields Define which fields each section includes in your files (for example, price and availability for products). This shapes how much detail each entry carries. ## Language Choose which languages to include in your files, so AI assistants can represent your store correctly for shoppers in each market. Tip: keep the included content focused. Smaller, high-signal files are faster for AI assistants to read and easier to keep accurate. [llms-full.txt](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-full-txt/)[Additional .txt files](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/additional-txt-files/) --- # AI Referral Traffic Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-referral-traffic/ # AI Referral Traffic AI Referral Traffic shows you the visitors that AI agents send to your store. When someone asks ChatGPT, Perplexity, Gemini, or another AI assistant a question and clicks through to your store from the answer, that visit is captured here. Optimizing for AEO is only half the job — this screen is where you prove it worked. Instead of guessing whether AI assistants are driving real people to your store, you get the numbers: how many AI-referred visits you get, which AI agents send them, and which pages they land on. ## How it works - The app detects visits that arrive from known AI agents (by referring domain and, where available, the link's `utm_source` tag). - Each visit is matched to an AI agent and classified. Visits it cannot match yet are kept as **unassigned** so you can review and label them. - The screen aggregates everything into an overview, charts, and tables you can filter by time range. ## Who is it for? - **Merchants optimizing for AEO** who want to measure the payoff of AI files (llms.txt, agent.md, Markdown Alternate pages) - **Store owners** who want to know which AI assistants actually drive traffic to them - **Marketers** tracking a new, fast-growing traffic channel alongside search and social ## Key benefits - **Proof of AEO value** — real visit numbers, not estimates - **Per-agent breakdown** — see exactly which AI agents send traffic and in what proportion - **Trend over time** — spot growth or drops day by day - **Page-level insight** — know which products and pages AI sends people to - **Extendable** — add or classify AI agents the app doesn't recognize yet ## Turn on AI referral tracking - Open **Avada AEO Optimizer** and go to **AI referral traffic** in the sidebar. - Toggle the master switch next to the page title. Once on, the app starts recording AI-referred visits. Data is collected from the moment you enable it — there is no historical backfill. Numbers only reflect visits that happen after you turn the feature on. Give it a few days of traffic before drawing conclusions. ## Overview The top of the page shows three metrics: - **Total AI agent visits** — every visit the app identified as coming from an AI agent - **Classified visits** — visits matched to a specific AI agent - **Unassigned visits** — visits from a source the app hasn't matched to a known agent yet Use the **Last 7 / 30 / 90 days** selector to change the time range. It controls the whole page — the charts and tables update together. Click **Resync** to pull the latest data on demand. ## Top AI agents A donut chart showing the share of traffic from each AI agent, largest first. The legend lists each agent with a colored marker matching its slice, plus its percentage. Hover a percentage to see the exact visit count. - Agents with **0 visits are hidden** to keep the list clean. - Sources that don't belong to a recognized AI agent are grouped into **Others** at the bottom. Hover **Others** to see what's inside. ## Traffic over time A line chart of AI-referred visits per day (both classified and unassigned), following the time range you picked in the Overview. Hover any point to see that day's visit count. If there's no AI traffic in the period, the chart shows a short empty message. ## Top traffic pages The pages AI agents send the most traffic to, as a full table. - **Tabs by page type** — All, Products, Collections, Blog posts, Pages, Other. Each tab counts how many pages fall into it. The type is inferred from the page's URL. - **Search and sort** — search by path, sort by Visits or by Page name (A→Z / Z→A). - **Columns** — Page (path), Visits, and Share (%). Long paths are shortened; hover to see the full path. - **Pagination** — choose 10 / 20 / 50 / 100 items per page. ## Manage AI agents Control which AI agents the app recognizes in your traffic. Two tabs: - **Your agents** — the agents you've added manually. Many popular agents are detected automatically, so you only add ones the app doesn't cover. - **Unclassified sources** — traffic the app couldn't match to a known AI agent. If one of these is an AI agent, click **Use** to add it (the form opens pre-filled). ### Add a custom agent Click **Add agent** (on the Your agents tab) to open the form: - **Agent name** — the name you'll see in your reports (e.g. `Example AI`). - **Domain** — the site the visits come from, domain only, without `https://` or a page path (e.g. `exampleai.com`). - **utm_source (optional)** — fill this in if the agent tags its links with a `utm_source`; visits carrying that value are counted too. The form also lists the agents already detected automatically, so you don't add a duplicate. ⚠️ If you click **Use** on an unclassified source that only has a `utm_source` (no domain), the form currently requires a Domain to save. Enter the source's domain to continue. ## Recent visits A log of the latest AI-referred sessions, newest first: - **Time** — when the visit happened - **AI agent** — the matched agent, or the source domain if it isn't classified yet - **Landing page** — the page the visitor arrived on Recent visits is a plain time-ordered log — no tabs or search — with the same pagination options as Top traffic pages (10 / 20 / 50 / 100 per page). ## FAQs Why don't I see any data?Data is only collected after you turn the feature on, and only when AI agents actually send visitors to your store. Give it a few days. You can also click Resync to pull the latest data. What counts as an 'AI agent visit'?A visit that arrives from a known AI agent — detected by the referring domain or a link's utm_source tag. Regular search, social, and direct traffic are not counted here. What are 'unassigned' visits?Visits from a source the app hasn't matched to a known AI agent yet. If you recognize a source as an AI agent, add it under Manage AI agents so future visits from it are classified. Can I track an AI agent the app doesn't know?Yes. Go to Manage AI agents → Add agent and enter the agent's name and domain (and utm_source if it uses one). New visits matching it will be classified from then on. [Markdown Alternate Pages](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/markdown-alternate-pages/)[Changelog](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/changelog/) --- # Changelog Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/changelog/ # 📌 Changelog ## Changelog #### July 2026 **See the AI traffic your store is getting** The new AI referral traffic screen shows the real visits that AI agents send to your store. Track how many people arrive from ChatGPT, Perplexity, Gemini and other AI assistants, see which agents drive the most traffic, how it trends over time, and which pages visitors land on. You can also add or classify any AI agent the app doesn't recognize yet. It's the proof that your AEO work is bringing real visitors. [Learn more](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-referral-traffic/). **Edit your files while your product list keeps syncing** You can now customize your llms.txt and llms-full.txt without turning them into static files. The list of product, collection, and page URLs is managed in the URL Manager — it appears read-only in the editor and keeps updating automatically as your store changes. To add or remove URLs, use the URL Manager (not the editor), so new products keep flowing into your files. The editor is for your own store content, like descriptions and intros. #### June 2026 **agent.md, llms.txt & llms-full.txt — all in one place** Your AI files now live together on a single page (renamed to "agent.md and llms.txt"). Alongside llms.txt, you get **agent.md** — the file AI shopping agents read to learn how to buy from your store — and **llms-full.txt**, a full-detail version with descriptions, variants, and availability inlined. Each file can be auto-generated for you or customized with your own instructions. **A rich editor for every file** Click Edit on any file to open a full editor with both a visual (WYSIWYG) view and a Markdown view. Format text, add headings, lists, links, and images — no Markdown knowledge needed. **Additional .txt files** Create extra, topic-specific .txt files (like shipping or FAQ) that link from your main llms.txt, giving AI assistants deeper context without bloating your main file. **Markdown Alternate Pages — now smarter** The clean markdown versions of your store pages got a big upgrade. Alternate page URLs now follow your store's own handles, so they're predictable and easy for AI agents to find. Every link inside a markdown page is now a full, absolute storefront URL, and you can include your own custom metafields in the markdown output — giving AI assistants even richer context about each product and page. **llms.txt as a Theme Asset** Your LLMs.txt file can now be served as a theme asset, giving you a more reliable, native way to host it directly from your Shopify theme. **Faster Content Updates** Content syncing is now event-driven. Instead of checking for changes on a schedule, the app now updates your LLMs.txt and markdown files right after Shopify finishes processing a change — so AI assistants see your latest products and pricing sooner. **Other Improvements** - Preview now reflects your correct storefront domain across LLMs.txt, markdown source, and link lists. - Streamlined the dashboard by tidying up setup and status sections. **Bug fixes** Improved sync reliability for large catalogs and fixed duplicate market pricing so each country now shows a single, correct price. Also fixed custom shop domains not resolving correctly and resolved editor crashes when creating or editing custom markdown pages. #### May 2026 **Custom Markdown Pages** You can now add your own custom markdown pages alongside the ones generated from your store content, giving AI agents extra context you write yourself. **Other Improvements** - More efficient markdown syncing, with only published content included. **Bug fixes** Fixed incorrect market country codes appearing in LLMs.txt for multi-market stores. #### April 2026 **Markdown Alternate Pages** AI agents read markdown far better than raw HTML. Your store can now serve clean, markdown versions of its pages — a lightweight, AI-friendly copy of your products, collections, articles, and pages that assistants like ChatGPT and Perplexity can parse accurately. This new feature comes with a redesigned interface for managing it. **Other Improvements** - Article and page entries now use your meta description for cleaner, more accurate summaries. - Out-of-stock products can now be excluded from your LLMs.txt file. **Bug fixes** Unpublished products are now filtered out at the source, so they no longer slip into your files, and fixed an incorrect subpath in markdown alternate page links. #### March 2026 **Bug fixes** Fixed a display error when paging through your URL list, where some fields could appear duplicated on later pages. #### February 2026 **Additional Fields V2** Managing custom store metadata is now easier with the redesigned Additional Fields interface. Drag and drop to reorder fields, edit names and values inline with confirmation dialogs, and enjoy automatic saving after every action. Duplicate field names are now caught before saving. **Other Improvements** - Fixed Dutch (NL) translation display issue. - Improved field validation and UI consistency in Additional Fields. #### January 2026 **Additional Fields** Add custom store information to your LLMs.txt file header — things like your brand name, shipping policy, or return policy. These key-value fields give AI assistants more context about your store beyond product listings, helping them answer customer questions about policies and brand details. **Other Improvements** - Products in LLMs.txt now only include items published to your Online Store, filtering out draft or non-storefront products. **Bug fixes** Fixed settings save failures and URL Manager navigation issues. #### December 2025 **Dashboard Redesign** Based on your feedback, the dashboard now shows everything you need at a glance: LLM Status Card (published/unpublished + last generated time), Analysis Card (total, included, and excluded URL counts), improved onboarding checklist, and helpful insight posts. The layout is now fully responsive across all screen sizes. **Other Improvements** - Features are now auto-enabled when you install the app for a smoother first experience. - Accurate URL count display in the preview. **Bug fixes** Fixed LLMs.txt not loading in certain browser configurations, menu highlighting, responsive display on the settings page, and banner behavior after reinstall. #### November 2025 **Daily Auto-Update** The daily auto-update schedule now correctly triggers a full rescan and rebuild of your LLMs.txt file every day, ensuring AI assistants always have your latest products and pricing. **URL Manager Improvements** Better navigation, improved filter logic, and the template fields no longer reset when you change your content selection. **Other Improvements** - URL count banner helps you understand your LLMs.txt coverage at a glance. - Improved date/time formatting across the app. **Bug fixes** Fixed filter logic for blog content, template fields resetting after content changes, and various responsive layout issues. #### October 2025 **Multi-Language LLMs.txt** Stores selling in multiple languages can now generate LLMs.txt files with sections for each locale. Each language gets its own product, collection, article, and page sections with translated titles, localized URLs, and market-specific pricing. **In-App Translations** The app is now available in 12 languages: English, Danish, German, Spanish, French, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese (BR), Swedish, Vietnamese, and Chinese (Simplified). The app auto-detects your Shopify admin language. **Other Improvements** - More accurate URL counts and exclusion tracking. - Dashboard insight banners and navigation improvements. **Bug fixes** Fixed incorrect URLs appearing in multi-language LLMs.txt files and URL counting inaccuracies. #### September 2025 **URL Manager** Take granular control over your LLMs.txt content. The new URL Manager lets you browse all store URLs across four tabs (Products, Collections, Blog, Pages), search by keyword, and individually include or exclude specific URLs — overriding your automatic content filter rules. **Template & Fields** A new settings section lets you choose which fields appear in your LLMs.txt file for each content type. Products can display Title, URL, and Price; other types show Title and URL. **Other Improvements** - Pages (About, Contact, etc.) now appear in URL Manager alongside other content types. - Improved search with keyword and handle matching. **Bug fixes** Fixed preview not reflecting manual exclusions, search not working correctly, and Pages tab failing to load. #### August 2025 **Pages Support** LLMs.txt now includes your store's Pages (About, Contact, FAQ, etc.) alongside Products, Collections, and Blog posts — giving AI assistants a more complete picture of your store. **Other Improvements** - Checklist page added for future AEO optimization recommendations (coming soon). - Improved currency formatting for multi-currency stores. - Performance improvements for faster page loading. #### July 2025 **App Launch** Avada AEO Optimizer launched on the Shopify App Store! Create an AI-friendly index of your store so assistants like ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Perplexity, and DeepSeek can answer customer questions accurately. **What's included:** - One-click LLMs.txt generation and hosting - AI assistant access control — choose which bots can read your file - Content filtering — include all or filter by type, vendor, and more - Auto-update schedule — manual or daily automatic rebuilds - Dashboard with onboarding checklist and URL analytics - Completely free during launch phase [AI Referral Traffic](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-referral-traffic/)[FAQs](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/faqs/) --- # FAQs Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/faqs/ # ⁉️ FAQs Find answers for your questions about Avada AEO Optimizer ## General Is the app free?Yes. Avada AEO Optimizer is free during our launch phase. No credit card required. When paid tiers launch, the Free plan will keep core features. What is LLMs.txt? Does it replace robots.txt or sitemap.xml?LLMs.txt is a public, human‑readable index of your store for AI assistants (products, collections, blog posts, policies). It does not replace robots.txt or your sitemap.xml—it complements them by giving AI a concise, trustworthy brief. What content can the app include? Is my data safe?You choose what to include in Settings → Included content: Products, Collections, Blog posts and Pages. The file only exposes published storefront content; no sensitive admin data is added. You can filter or exclude items at any time. How do updates work?Turn on Daily auto‑update to rebuild the file once per day. You can also trigger a manual Update after major changes. How does the file stay up to date?You have two options: - Daily auto-update: enable this in Settings and the file rebuilds automatically every day - Manual sync: click the Sync button whenever you make significant changes to your catalog [Changelog](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/changelog/)[Privacy Policy](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/privacy-policy/) --- # Intro to AEO Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/getting-started/intro-to-aeo/ # Intro to AEO Avada AEO Optimizer-everything you need to create an AI-friendly index for your store **Who can use Avada AEO Optimizer?** - Avada AEO Optimizer is available on all Shopify plans. ## What is Avada AEO Optimizer? Avada AEO Optimizer is a simple, powerful way to publish clean storefront files that AI assistants and shopping agents can trust. The app enriches the three AI files Shopify serves — [agent.md](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/agent-md/), [llms.txt](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-txt/), and [llms-full.txt](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/llms-full-txt/) — so chatbots and agents can understand your products, collections, policies, and blog posts accurately, and even transact, without guessing. See [agent.md & llms.txt](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/overview/) for how each one works. Creating and maintaining these files is effortless with our toolkit: - Auto-generated llms.txt and llms-full.txt that stay in sync with your store - Custom agent.md for agentic-commerce readiness - Choose your included content, fields, and languages in [Settings](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/settings/) - Add topic-specific [Additional .txt files](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/additional-txt-files/) linked from your main llms.txt **Before AI can read your files**, turn off your storefront password. The app shows a **Password protection enabled** reminder with a **Disable password** button until you do. ## Why it matters (AEO) AEO - AI Experience Optimization is the practice of making your store content accessible and understandable to AI assistants. As more shoppers use ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Perplexity, and DeepSeek to research products, having a short, authoritative source for AI to consult first means: - Fewer hallucinations about pricing and availability - Faster pre-sales support - More confident buying decisions AEO doesn't replace SEO. It works alongside traditional search engine optimization so you're discoverable on both search engines and AI assistants. ## Get more assistance If you have any further concerns, search your topic on this page (hit `Ctrl` `K` for quick search) or look through our [Frequently Asked Question](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/faqs/) list. Our Customer Success team also offers 24/7 assistance via [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) and live chat right within the app. [Introduction](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/)[Pricing](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/pricing/) --- # Markdown Alternate Pages Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/markdown-alternate-pages/ # Markdown Alternate Pages Markdown Alternate Pages generate a clean `.md` version of every page on your store — products, collections, blog articles, and custom pages — and automatically tell AI crawlers where to find them. Instead of forcing ChatGPT, Claude, Perplexity, Gemini, or DeepSeek to parse heavy HTML, your store now serves a lightweight Markdown file alongside each page. AI assistants read the `.md` version — faster, cleaner, and with less room for misinterpretation. ## How it works - The app generates a `.md` file for each published page on your store. - A small theme block adds a single line to your page HTML: ``` ``` - AI crawlers detect this link tag and fetch the `.md` version instead of the HTML page. ## Markdown Alternate vs LLMs.txt Both features help AI understand your store — but they serve different purposes. LLMs.txtMarkdown Alternate Pages **Role**A single index fileOne Markdown file per page **Content**Titles + URLs (catalog map)Full page content (descriptions, variants, reviews, FAQs) **How AI finds it**Discovery at `/llms.txt``` on every page **Best for**Giving AI a map of your storeGiving AI clean readable content to quote from They work together — LLMs.txt tells AI *what exists*, Markdown Alternate tells AI *what each page actually says*. ## Who is it for? - **Store owners** who want their product content quoted accurately by AI assistants - **Merchants optimizing for AEO** (AI Experience Optimization) alongside traditional SEO - **Stores with rich product content** (detailed descriptions, many variants, customer reviews) where HTML parsing loses nuance ## Key benefits - **Higher-quality AI answers** — assistants read structured Markdown instead of guessing from HTML soup - **Automatic discovery** — no manual submission to AI platforms - **Safe for SEO** — `rel="alternate"` is a standard HTML pattern (same as RSS feeds use) and does not compete with your canonical URL - **Works per page** — every product, collection, article, and page gets its own `.md` - **Multi-language ready** — generates locale-specific Markdown for stores using Shopify Markets - **Rich content extraction** — product FAQs and reviews are pulled from your JSON-LD structured data automatically ## Turn on Markdown pages - Open **Avada AEO Optimizer** and go to **Markdown Alternate** in the sidebar. - Toggle the master switch next to the **Markdown pages** title. With the master toggle on, the app begins syncing your store and preparing to generate Markdown files. ## Overview card Once enabled, the Overview card shows three metrics at the top of the page: - **Total pages** — all eligible products, collections, articles, and pages in your store - **Pages with Markdown** — how many already have a `.md` version generated - **Coverage** — the percentage of pages currently covered by Markdown Below the metrics, the **Last synced** timestamp shows when the app last pulled data from Shopify. Click **Resync** any time to refresh — useful after bulk product changes, imports, or catalog updates. ## Choose content types and fields In the **Generate Markdown** card, select which types of pages should produce a Markdown file: Content typeWhat it covers **Products**Individual product pages with details, variants, and images **Collections**Collection pages with product listings **Articles**Blog articles with content and metadata **Pages**Custom store pages (About, Contact, FAQ, etc.) The count next to each toggle — e.g. *Products (16 pages)* — tells you how many items exist in your store today. Uncheck any type you do not want AI crawlers to read. Expand any content type to adjust which fields are written into its Markdown file. Click fields in the combobox to add them, or use **Select all** to include every field at once. ### Product fields FieldWhat it adds **Title** *(required)*`# Product name` heading **Description**Main product description, converted from HTML to Markdown **Price**Price range (e.g. `$25.00 - $42.00 USD`) **Variants**Variant table with title, price, and stock status **Images (alt text)**List of image alt text (useful for accessibility and AI context) **Vendor**Brand / manufacturer name **Product type**Product type classification **Tags**Comma-separated tag list ### Collection fields FieldWhat it adds **Title** *(required)*`# Collection name` heading **Description**Collection description **Products list**List of products inside the collection (title + handle) ### Article fields FieldWhat it adds **Title** *(required)*`# Article title` heading **Content**Full article body, converted from HTML to Markdown **Author**Article author name **Published date**ISO publish date **Tags**Article tag list ### Page fields FieldWhat it adds **Title** *(required)*`# Page title` heading **Content**Full page body, converted from HTML to Markdown ## What a generated Markdown file looks like For a product, the Markdown follows this structure: ``` # Lumiere Candle - Golden Hour Hand-poured soy wax candle with notes of bergamot and amber. ## Details - **Price:** 42.00 USD - **Vendor:** Lumiere Candle - **Type:** Home fragrance - **Tags:** candle, soy, handmade ## Variants | Variant | Price | Available | |---------|-------|-----------| | 8 oz | 42.00 USD | In stock | | 12 oz | 58.00 USD | In stock | ## Images - Golden Hour candle on wooden table - Close-up of burning candle flame ## Frequently Asked Questions **Q: How long does the candle burn?** A: Approximately 40 hours on a clean wick. ## Customer Reviews **Rating:** 4.8/5 (127 reviews) > ★★★★★ **Sarah M.** - 2026-03-12 > Beautiful scent, burns evenly. Will buy again. --- > Source: [My Store](https://mystore.com/products/golden-hour) > Updated: 2026-04-22 ``` ### Structured data bonus If your product pages contain JSON-LD schema (FAQPage, Review, AggregateRating), the app automatically extracts that data and appends it to the Markdown file. AI assistants can quote your FAQs and customer reviews directly — even when they live in your theme or a third-party app's HTML. ## Manage Markdown files Use the **Markdown files** card to review, search, edit, and publish every `.md` file generated for your store. ### Browse by content type Four tabs split the table by type: - **Product** — product `.md` files - **Collection** — collection `.md` files - **Blog articles** — article `.md` files - **Pages** — custom page `.md` files Each tab shows a count of generated files. Click a tab to filter the table. Use the **Search** icon to search by page title within the current tab. ### Table columns ColumnWhat it shows **Page**The page title **.md URL**The full public URL where AI crawlers fetch the Markdown **Source**Whether the file is **Auto-generated** or **Custom edit** (edited by you) **Status****Published** (live for AI crawlers) or **Unpublished** (hidden) **Action**View button (eye icon) and action menu (three-dot icon) ### Edit a Markdown file - Click a page title, or open the action menu (three-dot icon) and choose **Edit markdown**. - The **Edit markdown** modal opens with the current content on the left and a live preview on the right. - Edit the Markdown directly. Use standard Markdown syntax — headings, bullets, tables, links. - Click **Save Changes**. After you save an edit, the file's **Source** column switches to **Custom edit**. The app no longer overwrites this file during automatic resyncs, so your manual edits are preserved. ### Reset to auto-generated content Inside the edit modal, click **Regenerate** to discard your edits and rebuild the file from current Shopify data. The file's Source returns to **Auto-generated**. Use this when: - You want to start over with your custom edits - The underlying product or page has been updated in Shopify and you want the Markdown to catch up - You accidentally saved something you did not mean to ### View the live .md file Click the **eye icon** in the Action column to open the public `.md` URL in a new tab. This shows exactly what AI crawlers see when they fetch the file. ### Publish and unpublish To hide a Markdown file from AI crawlers without deleting it: - Open the action menu (three-dot icon). - Click **Unpublish**. - Confirm in the dialog — AI crawlers will no longer discover this page, but you can republish any time. When a file is unpublished: - The `` tag is not injected into that page's HTML - The `.md` URL still exists but AI crawlers have no way to find it - The Status column shows **Unpublished** in red To bring it back: open the action menu and click **Publish**. ## Enable the alternate link tag (theme setup) For AI crawlers to find your Markdown files, every HTML page on your storefront needs one small tag in its ``: ``` - ``` The app adds this tag automatically through a **Shopify theme app block** — no manual theme code editing required. ### Enable the theme block When you first open the Markdown Alternate page, a warning banner appears at the top: **"Markdown pages app embed requires theme setup"**. This means AI crawlers cannot yet discover your Markdown files. Click **Add Markdown pages** in the banner to jump straight into the theme editor, or follow the steps below manually. In your Shopify admin, go to **Online Store → Themes**. - On your active theme, click **Customize**. - In the theme editor, open **App embeds** (puzzle icon in the left sidebar). - Find **Markdown Alternate Link** in the list. - Toggle it **on**. - Click **Save** at the top-right of the theme editor. - Return to the Markdown Alternate page and click **Refresh** on the banner. Once activated, the banner turns green and confirms **"Markdown pages app embed is active"** — AI crawlers can now discover the Markdown versions of your store pages. ## SEO and canonicals `rel="alternate"` does not replace your canonical URL. It is a supplementary hint — the same pattern RSS feeds have used for decades: ``` ``` Search engines continue to index your HTML pages as canonical. AI crawlers that support `type="text/markdown"` pick up the lightweight alternate. Both work in parallel. [Additional .txt files](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/additional-txt-files/)[AI Referral Traffic](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-referral-traffic/) --- # Pricing Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/pricing/ # 💸 Pricing Plans and Pricing Avada AEO Optimizer LLMs.txt is **free** during our launch phase. No hidden fees. ## What's included All features are available at no cost: FeatureFree LLMs.txt generation & publishingIncluded AI assistant access control (ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Perplexity, DeepSeek)Included Content filtering (Products, Collections, Blog posts, Pages)Included URL Manager (include/exclude individual URLs)Included Additional Fields (custom store metadata)Included Multi-language / multi-locale supportIncluded Auto-update schedule (Daily)Included ## Future plans If paid options are introduced in the future, core features will be preserved in the free tier. [Intro to AEO](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/getting-started/intro-to-aeo/)[Overview](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/ai-files/overview/) --- # Privacy Policy Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/privacy-policy/ # 🔏 Privacy policy How Avada collects, handles, and processes data of its clients and customers ## Introduction This privacy policy describes the information Avada Commerce, Inc. ("Avada", “we” or “us”) collect from End Users (“you”) of our website (the “Site”) and the information we collect on behalf of our clients who employ our technology to use our email messaging, analytics, and other services (the “Services”). This policy does not apply to third parties that Avada does not own or control. Such third parties are not under Avada’s control and Avada is not responsible for their privacy or security practices. Any order forms or additional agreements to which users agree governing the provision of optional Avada features shall take precedence over the terms of this Privacy Policy to the extent of any differences, so please read such order forms or additional agreements carefully. Avada participates in and complies with the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework and the Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework. Avada’s accountability for personal data that it receives under the Privacy Shield and subsequently transfers to a third party is described in EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks below. In particular, Avada remains responsible and liable under the Privacy Shield Principles if third-party agents that it engages to process the personal data on its behalf do so in a manner inconsistent with the Principles, unless Avada proves that it is not responsible for the event giving rise to the damage. ## Site Privacy Policy We collect, process, and retain information from you and any devices you may use when you use or interact with our Site and Services, and in other ways described below. We receive and store information you enter on our Site or give us in any other way, including your name, mailing address, phone number, email address, and payment information, as well as company name, and colleagues’ names and email addresses. We collect information about your use of our Site, such as the pages you view and other interactions you have. We receive and store certain types of information whenever you interact with our Site. Our Site uses “cookies,” tagging and other tracking technologies to help enable us to enhance or personalize your online browsing experience. This information includes computer and connection information such as statistics on your page views, traffic to and from our Site, referral URL, ad data, your IP address, and device identifiers. This information also may include your browsing history, transaction history, and your web log information. We use your information to help us personalize and continually improve your experience on the Site, including fulfilling requests for information, analyzing and compiling trends and statistics, and communicating with you. For information about how to manage your information and the choices you have, see how to limit the use of your information below. ## Cookies and Interest-Based Advertising Cookies are alphanumeric identifiers transferred to your computer’s hard drive through your Web browser to enable our systems to recognize your browser and tell us how and when pages in our Site are visited and by how many people. Like most internet sites, We uses cookies to enhance our users’ experience on the internet. These cookies do not collect personal information, and we do not combine information collected through cookies with other personal information to tell us who you are or what your name or e-mail address is. Most browsers allow you to prevent the browser from accepting new cookies, to be notified when you receive a new cookie, or to disable cookies. If you delete your cookies or if you set your browser to decline cookies, some features of the Site may not work or may not work as designed. Note that if you choose to remove cookies, you may remove opt-out cookies that affect your advertising preferences. We partner with third-party advertising companies who also use these tracking tools to provide advertisements on other websites. These third parties may use these technologies to collect information about you when you use the Site. They may collect information about your online activities over time and across different websites and other online services. They may also use persistent identifiers to track your Internet usage across other websites in their networks beyond the Site. They may use this information to provide you with interest-based advertising or other targeted content. While we do not knowingly provide these entities with information that personally identifies you such third parties may, with sufficient data from other sources, be able to personally identify you, unknown to us. Some content or applications on the Site may be served by unaffiliated third parties. We do not control these third parties’ tracking technologies or how they may be used. We are not responsible for the content or privacy practices on any website not operated by us to which our Site links or that links to our Site. Your browser or device may include “Do Not Track” functionality. Our information collection and disclosure practices, and the choices that we provide to visitors, will continue to operate as described in this privacy notice, whether or not a Do Not Track signal is received. We use Google Analytics, a web analytics service provided by Google, Inc., on our Site. Google Analytics uses cookies or other tracking technologies to help us analyze how users interact with and use the Site, compile reports on the Site’s activity, and provide other services related to Site activity and usage. The technologies used by Google may collect information such as your IP address, time of visit, whether you are a return visitor, and any referring website. The Site does not use Google Analytics to gather information that personally identifies you. The information generated by Google Analytics will be transmitted to and stored by Google and will be subject to Google’s privacy policies. To learn more about Google’s partner services and to learn how to opt out of tracking of analytics by Google click here. Many of the third party advertisers that place tracking tools on our Site are members of programs that offer you additional choices regarding the collection and use of your information. You can learn more about the options available to limit these third parties’ collection and use of your information by visiting the websites for the Network Advertising Initiative and the Digital Advertising Alliance. Similarly, you can learn about your options to opt-out of mobile app tracking by certain advertising networks through your device settings. Please note that opting-out of advertising networks services does not mean that you will not receive advertising on other websites, nor will it prevent the receipt of interest-based advertising from third parties that do not participate in these programs. It will, however, exclude you from interest-based advertising conducted through participating networks, as provided by their policies and choice mechanisms. ## Collection, Use, and Disclosure of End Users’ Information Through Our Services This section describes our policies for handling information about End Users provided to us by our clients using our Services or other sources of their choosing. We provide our clients with the ability to create profiles of their End Users in order to effectively communicate with them via marketing communications tools like email, analytics services. To do this, our clients integrate our technology into their applications, websites, or other online services. Our clients’ collection, use, and disclosure of data is separately governed by their privacy policies. Our clients may collect information about their users directly; in that case, each of our clients is responsible for ensuring that their data collection follows their privacy policies and terms of use. **Collection** In the course of providing Services to our clients, We collects customer information, purchases or product views (WITHOUT customer's emails, credit card information, customer's addresses, or any personally identifiable information (“PII”) ) about End Users of our clients. We uses this information to provide our Services to our clients. We may automatically collect information about your use, navigation of, and interactions with our clients’ applications, websites, or other online services when our client has installed our technology on its properties. Cookies that we set on our clients’ websites expire after three years and the expiration date updates every time you encounter our server. We retains standard web log data 5 years after you visit a client’s website, and aggregations and reports for up to 10 years after you visit a client’s website. **Use and Disclosure** We collect information about End Users at our clients’ direction and may append information to End Users’ profiles from third party sources. We do this to provide our Services, which enable our clients to optimize their communications with, and understanding of, their End Users. We consider our clients’ End Users’ information to be confidential to that client. Accordingly, we do not disclose End User information to unaffiliated third parties except in response to our clients’ explicit instructions, as provided for in an agreement between us and our client, or as otherwise described in this Privacy Policy (for example, as necessary to respond to legal requirements). We may provide services or sell products jointly with affiliated businesses. We may share End User information collected from our clients that is related to such transactions with those affiliated businesses. We require our affiliates, via contract, to provide the same level of privacy protection as set forth in this policy and they do not have the right to share or use PII for any purpose other than for an authorized transaction. If we ever were to engage in any onward transfers of your data with third parties for a purpose other than which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized, we would provide you with an opt-out choice to limit the use and disclosure of your personal data. **Information Clients Provide to Us** We receive and store any information clients enter on the Site, through the Services, or provide to us in any other way. Clients can choose not to provide us with certain information, but then they may not be able to take advantage of many of our features. We use clients’ information for such purposes as responding to their requests for Services, customizing the content they see, communicating with them about our products, and marketing our Services to them. In order for clients to use all of our features, they must register with us. We require clients’ e-mail addresses and passwords during the registration process. Further information may be required if clients choose to purchase paid components of the Services, such as credit card and billing information. We uses third party partners for credit card processing who may require and store your credit card and billing information. **E-mail Communications** If a client purchases Avada’s online tools to collect and analyze user and usage data for its websites, applications, or services, we will communicate with it about the services it purchases by e-mail. Clients consent to receiving such confirmations by e-mail. If clients contact us via e-mail, we may retain a record of their contact information and any information they provide us in their messages to respond to them. We may receive a confirmation when clients open an e-mail from us. We may also send e-mails with news or promotions. If clients do not want to receive news or promotional e-mail from us, please contact us at [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) (this will not affect e-mails related to certain important, legal, or service-related messages such as outage information). ## Other Important Information **Your California Privacy Rights** If you are a California resident, California law permits you to request certain information regarding the disclosure of your PII by us and our related companies to third parties for the third parties’ direct marketing purposes. To make such a request, please send your request, by mail or email, to the addresses listed at the end of this policy. **Agents** We employ other companies and people to perform tasks on our behalf and need to share client and End User information with them to provide products and services. Examples include billing, processing payments, providing marketing assistance, and providing customer service. Our agents use the same level of privacy protection as we do. Unless we tell you differently, Ưe does not share, and our agents do not have any right to use, PII collected from our Site and Services beyond what is necessary to assist us. **Business Transfers** In some cases, we may change our ownership or corporate organization, or may choose to buy or sell assets. End User information may be transferred to another entity, its affiliates, or service providers in connection with the transaction. You acknowledge that such transfers may occur, and that Avada or its successor organization may continue to use your information as set forth in this policy. **Protection of Avada and Others** We may release PII when we in our sole discretion believe in good faith that release is necessary or appropriate to comply with the law, enforce or apply our conditions of use and other agreements, or protect the rights, property, or safety of Avada, our employees, our clients, or others. We also may be required to disclose an individual’s PII in response to a lawful request by public authorities, including to meet national security or law enforcement requirements. **Information Security** Clients’ Avada account information is protected by a password for your privacy and security as well as other reasonable security measures. We use reasonable safeguards to protect the security of clients’ information during transmission, including by encrypting all of the information clients input. Only employees or agents who need PII to perform a specific job are granted access to it. All of our employees are kept up to date on our privacy and security practices. While we uses commercially reasonable means to secure information provided to us, we do not guarantee that such information will not be improperly accessed, disclosed, or destroyed by breach of any of our safeguards. Clients and End Users are responsible for the security of their information that is transmitted to us or that is viewed, downloaded, or otherwise accessed when using unencrypted, public or otherwise unsecured networks. **Accessing Information** ou are able to access, add to, update, correct, amend, or delete certain information about you, including PII. When you update information, however, we often maintain a copy of the unrevised information in our records. A client may deactivate its Avada account by following the deactivation process set forth on the Site. Some information may remain in our records after account deletion. Please contact us at [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) if you have questions or concerns about accessing, correcting, or deleting your PII. EU and Swiss data subjects have a right to access their information. Please see the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks section below. **Conditions of Use** Your use of the Site and Services and any possible dispute over privacy are subject to this Privacy Policy and our Terms of Service, including limitations on damages, dispute resolution, and application of New York state law. **International Users (Except for EU and Swiss Data Subjects)** If you use our Websites outside of the United States, you understand and consent to the transfer of your personal information to, and the collection, processing, and storage of your personal information in, the United States and elsewhere. The laws in the U.S. and these countries regarding personal information may be different than the laws of your state or country. **Use of Avada’s Site by Children** Avada’s Site is not intended for children under the age of 18. Accordingly, we will not knowingly collect or use any PII from children that we know to be under the age of 18. If we become aware of PII in our database that was collected from a child under 18, we will delete such information. ## EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks **Definitions** For purposes of this section only, the following definitions shall apply: “Agent” means any third party that collects or uses personal information under the instructions of, and solely for, Avada or to which Avada discloses personal information for use on Avada’s behalf. “Personal information” means any information or set of information that identifies or could be used by or on behalf of Avada to identify (together with other information) a living individual. Personal information does not include information that is anonymized or aggregated. For the purposes of data received from Switzerland under the Swiss-U.S. privacy shield, personal information also includes ideological views or activities, information on social security measures or administrative or criminal proceedings and sanctions. “Sensitive information” means any personal information that reveals race, ethnic origin, political opinions, religious or philosophical beliefs, trade union membership, information that concerns health or sex life, and information about criminal or administrative proceedings and sanctions. **EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield** Avada Commerce, Inc. participates in and complies with the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework and the Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework as set forth by the U.S. Department of Commerce regarding the collection, use, and retention of personal information from the European Union and Switzerland to the United States, respectively. Avada has certified to the Department of Commerce that it adheres to the Privacy Shield Principles. If there is any conflict between the policies in this privacy policy and the Privacy Shield Principles, the Privacy Shield Principles shall govern. To learn more about the Privacy Shield program, and to view our certification page, please visit [https://www.privacyshield.gov/ (opens in a new tab)](https://www.privacyshield.gov/). **Principles** Notice: Avada receives personal information about individuals in the EEA and Switzerland collected by Avada and its clients, and personal information about clients in the EEA and Switzerland. The types of information collected and the uses of that information are described in the privacy policy above. Avada will subject all personal information received via the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shields to these Principles. Choice: Avada will offer individuals the opportunity to choose whether their information is to be used for a purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized by the individual. An individual may opt-out of such uses of their personal information by contacting us at the address given below. Avada offers an opt-out to individuals whose personal information is disclosed to non-agent third parties. Additionally, Avada will not use sensitive personal information for a purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized by the individual unless Avada has received the individual’s affirmative and explicit consent (opt-in). Avada will treat as sensitive any personal information received from a third party where the third party identifies and treats it as sensitive. Data Integrity: Avada will use personal information only in ways that are compatible with the purposes for which it was collected or subsequently authorized by the individual. Avada will take reasonable steps to ensure that personal information is relevant to its intended use, accurate, complete and current. Transfers to Agents: Avada contracts with third parties who perform business functions on our behalf. Avada uses these third parties to assist with activities such as billing, processing payments, providing marketing assistance, and providing customer service. These entities may have access to personal information if needed to perform their functions for Avada. For information received under the Privacy Shield, Avada will require its agents to safeguard personal information consistent with this Policy by contract, obligating the agent to provide at least the same level of protection as is required by the Privacy Shield Principles. Under certain circumstances, Avada may bear liability for onward transfers of personal data where its agent processes personal data inconsistent with the Privacy Shield Principles, unless Avada proves that it is not responsible for the event giving rise to the damage. Access and Correction: Upon request, Avada will grant individuals reasonable access to personal information that it holds about them. In addition, Avada will take reasonable steps to permit individuals to correct, amend, or delete information that is demonstrated to be inaccurate or incomplete. An individual may request to access their information, or otherwise correct, amend, or delete their information by contacting us at the address given below. Security: See “Information Security,” above. **Enforcement** Avada will conduct compliance audits of its relevant privacy practices to verify adherence to this Policy. Any employee that Avada determines is in violation of this policy will be subject to disciplinary action. Avada is subject to the investigatory and enforcement powers of the Federal Trade Commission (FTC). **Dispute Resolution** In compliance with the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Principles, Avada commits to resolve complaints about your privacy and our collection or use of your personal information. European Union or Swiss individuals with inquiries or complaints regarding this privacy policy should first contact Avada at [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) or using the contact information below. Avada will investigate and attempt to resolve complaints regarding use and disclosure of personal information by reference to the principles in this policy. Avada has further committed to refer unresolved privacy complaints under the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Principles to an independent dispute resolution mechanism, the BBB EU PRIVACY SHIELD, operated by the Council of Better Business Bureaus. If you do not receive timely acknowledgment of your complaint, or if your complaint is not satisfactorily addressed, please visit [www.bbb.org/EU-privacy-shield/for-eu-consumers/ (opens in a new tab)](http://www.bbb.org/EU-privacy-shield/for-eu-consumers/) for more information and to file a complaint. Please note that if your complaint is not resolved through these channels, under limited circumstances, a binding arbitration option may be available before a Privacy Shield Panel. **Questions or Concerns** If you have any questions or concerns regarding privacy at Avada, please send us a detailed message to [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) or to Avada Commerce Inc. at 651 N Broad St, Suite 206, Middletown, DE 19709. Your privacy is important to us and we will make every effort to resolve your concerns. [FAQs](/seo-on-aeo-optimizer/faqs/) --- # Avada AI SEO Image Optimizer Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/ # Welcome Welcome to Avada SEO Suite - all you need for Shopify SEO and store performance. We are in the world of eCommerce. We care about reaching out to as many customers as we can. Along with that, Shopify cares a lot about conversion rate and claims to be the platform with the best conversion rate. To accomplish a better conversion rate, Shopify store needs to have good performance metrics in order to save themselves from customer bounce rates. Imagine spending your money on ads and then failed to convert these traffics to sales due to bad page speed. So the two main pillars of [Avada SEO Suites (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/R0mKjN) are SEO audit (staying relevant in SEO) and store performance (good customer experience and conversion). ## Discover Avada SEO Suite [Getting startedNew to Avada SEO Suite or feeling lost? Start here](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/intro-to-seo-suite)[SEO AuditAnalyzes the factors that could be affecting organic search performance on your site](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/checklist)[Site Speed upImprove your site speed automatically and create a better user experience](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up)[Image optimizerReducing their file size, adding alt text, and renaming file names](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-compression)[Search appearanceOptimize your website's visibility in search engine results pages](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags)[BlogsCreate high-quality blog posts for better SEO](https://shopify.pxf.io/vDxW3v) Need help? 👇 Check out Frequently Asked Questions. [FAQs](/seo-suite-help-center/faqs/) ## Explore our Top 1 Shopify Chat platform - Chatty (opens in a new tab) [Intro to SEO Suite](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/intro-to-seo-suite/) --- # AI content Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/ai-content/ # AI content Use AI to generate SEO content for your entire store at scale — meta titles, meta descriptions, and FAQs — from one place. **Who can use this feature?** - Available to all users. - Generating content uses AI credits. Your plan determines how many credits you have. ## What is AI content? **AI content** is a hub that brings every AI writing tool in Avada SEO Suite into a single screen. Instead of opening each product or collection one by one, you pick the type of content you want and let AI generate it **in bulk** across your whole store — choosing the language, the amount, and any special instructions. You'll find it in the app under **AI content**. ## What you can generate The page has five cards. Three are generated **inside SEO Suite**, two open a dedicated Avada app: CardWhat it doesWhere it runs **Meta title**Click-worthy titles for all products and collections at onceIn SEO Suite **Meta description**Compelling summaries that convince shoppers to click your listingIn SEO Suite **FAQs**FAQs that help AI agents understand your store and boost Google rich snippetsIn SEO Suite **Product description**Detailed product descriptions that convertInstalls/opens **Avada AI Product Description** **Blog post**SEO-ready blog posts for steady organic trafficInstalls/opens **Avada AI Content Blog Builder** The **Product description** and **Blog post** cards open a separate Avada app. If you don't have it yet, the button installs it for you; if you already do, it just opens the app. ## How to generate content in bulk The steps are the same for **Meta title**, **Meta description**, and **FAQs**. Open a card from the AI content page to reach its workspace. ### Check the report The **Report** at the top shows how much of your store is already optimized — **Total pages**, **Pages optimized**, and **Coverage** (%). Click **Scan** to refresh these numbers with your latest store data. ### Set up the generation In **Generate in bulk**, choose your **Language**, optionally set a **Special instruction** to guide tone or keywords (e.g. "luxury brand voice, mention free shipping"), and — for FAQs — how many **FAQs per page** (1–10). ### Choose what to generate Click **Generate** and pick a scope: - **Generate for all pages** — (re)generates content for every page - **Generate for pages without content** — only fills pages not yet optimized, so you don't spend credits on pages that already have content ### Watch the progress, then apply The job runs in the background with a progress bar — you can keep working elsewhere and come back when it finishes. When it's done, open the **Preview** to review and edit what AI wrote, then apply it to your store. The **History** panel keeps a record of past runs. ## How AI credits are used Generating content uses AI credits: - **Meta title / Meta description** — **1 credit per page** - **FAQs** — **1 credit per FAQ, per page** (e.g. 3 FAQs per page = 3 credits per page) If you run out of credits, you'll be prompted to upgrade. You can open the **AI credit pricing** details directly from the Generate in bulk card. ⚠️ Use **Generate for pages without content** when you only want to fill the gaps — it skips pages that already have content and saves credits. ## Showing FAQs on your storefront FAQs need the Avada **FAQs block** added to your theme to appear on your storefront. When the block isn't installed, a banner appears with an **Add block** button that takes you straight to the theme editor. After adding it, click **Check again** to confirm. Meta titles and meta descriptions don't need a theme block — they're applied to your pages directly. [Wildcards](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor/wildcards/)[Site Verification](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/site-verification/) --- # FAQs Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/faqs/ # ⁉️ FAQs Find answers for your questions about Avada SEO Suite ### General questions Does Avada SEO Suite slow down my website speed? Avada SEO Suite does add some codes into your theme, but it will not affect your website speed at all. For example: The following code you see added by Avada SEO Suite: On theme.liquid there is a section of: {% include 'avada-seo' %} It is used to optimize your website structure and make it Google-friendly. Our app does not add CSS, JS into your theme so it cannot affect your website speed. Please check other apps that add CSS, JS codes to your storefront, they likely affect your site speed. Moreover, we make your site load faster by optimizing images and using [instant page](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/instant-page/) technology. You can test it by uninstalling Avada SEO Suite and compare the speed after that. (Test speed by this tool: [https://developers.google.com/speed/pagespeed/insights/ (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/speed/pagespeed/insights/)) What should I do if I change theme? - Go to Settings - In tab General *→* Click **Republish** so that Avada SEO Suite stays updated to new changes. Questions about pricing? Check out [our FAQs about pricing](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/pricing/#answers-for-your-questions). Does Avada SEO Suites support headless? Currently, our app integrates and supports the Online store channel only. We do not support headless custom storefronts. How many words should you have in a page? There's no ideal word count in a page for best SEO. Focus on creating high-quality, comprehensive content that thoroughly covers your topic and satisfies the user's search intent. How many H1 should a page contain? A webpage should generally contain *only one* H1 tag. This is because the H1 tag is typically used to indicate the main topic or title of the page, and having multiple H1 tags can confuse search engines and dilute the focus of your content. Why can't I access the app? If you cannot access the app, there could be one of the following reasons: - Our app requires further [access scopes (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.dev/docs/api/usage/access-scopes) and you as a staff member who cannot grant this access will make the app inaccessible. Inform the owner of this to grant extra access if needed. - Our app has a problem on our end. You can contact our live chat support so that we can sync with you our app status. Why my site is not yet indexed on Google? It can take time for Google to index your page; allow at least a week after submitting a sitemap or a submit-to-index request before assuming a problem. If your page or site change is recent, check back in a week to see if it is still missing. Try to search site:mysite.com to see all results from your domain. ### Technical SEO questions What should I do when feeds are disapproved after using image optimization? There are some cases when the feeds are disapproved by Google Merchant, Google Shopping Campaign, and Google Display So, what do you do in such a case? Actually, this issue is caused by the changed format of images after optimization. However, Avada SEO Suite app-only compresses your images, not resize or change image format. In fact, the images are uploaded in the original format. Another case is that you use the filename optimization, which will change the path of your existing images. However, the old images will not be deleted immediately by Shopify. It will stay available for about 2 weeks, enough time for Google Merchant Center to crawl the new image links from your store. The error you got with Google Merchant seems to be the general issue that many other sites experienced. How to verify my store on Google Search Console? Check our step-by-step [how to verify your shop on Google Search Console.](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/site-verification/#google-search-console) How duplicated preloader may affect my site? #### What is a Preloader, Instant Page loader?​ (opens in a new tab) When people on your site browse on the store, hovering links on desktop and mobile, people expect the next page they go to will load as fast as it can. So, making sure that the loading time of a page is fast may give an edge. Amazon and others found that removing 100 milliseconds of latency improves sales by 1% The idea is that there is a significant delay between hovering over a link and clicking that link. Say it takes you 300ms of delay. That 300ms could have been spent preloading the next page. And if you do use that time preloading, that page loads that much faster. The preloaders would load the page content before users want to visit, so when they actually do, the page is served from the cache instantly which would improve user experience. #### What if I have more than 1 page preloader?​ (opens in a new tab) The fact that you need preloaders for your site, but probably only need one. No need to preload the page a couple of times in a row. Which will turn out to waste network resources. So if you have more than 1, you should be considering to choose one active only. If not, there would be a race on preloading pages on your site in the background. How long does Avada SEO Suite optimize my images? Usually, it takes hours depending on how many images you have on your website. The maximum time is around 10 hours. You can see the estimated processing time on the Image Optimization page. You can set up [email notification](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/email-notification/) to get email when the image optimization process is done. How to check Alt Image? You can check the Alt image in the Storefront, but a few themes do not support the Alt tag to show in the Image. - Go to your website - Right click -> Click **Inspect** -> Elements - Find an image in the content, if you see an image with alt as you configured. You can also check in Shopify admin. - Go to Products -> All Products - Right click -> Click **Inspect** -> Element How to set up my social network information in Search results? - Go to "Search appearance" -> "Google structured data" Information about your social network will be in Organization rich result - In the "Organization", click **Turn on** - Click **Configure** to set up your social network link - Click **Save** Learn more about [Rich result.](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/rich-results/) How to optimize images that are not from product page, collection page or blog post? All images that are product pages, collection pages or blog posts are in the [Asset file](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/assets-optimization/). - In customized mode of speed up, click Settings - Assets optimization -> Turn on assets optimization - Click Speed up to start optimize images in asset files. Will the meta tags settings in Avada SEO Suite change the search engine listing settings in Shopify? If you're using Meta tags settings in [Search appearance](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/), it won't change the settings in Shopify. If you're using Meta tags settings in [On-page audit](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/on-page-seo/), it will change the settings in Shopify. What is **AVADA Assets - DO NOT REMOVE?** The **AVADA Assets - DO NOT REMOVE** is not a theme but rather a dedicated storage location for your collection page image backups. Why this matters: - This asset container stores important backup images for your collection pages - These images are referenced by your store and cannot be recovered if deleted What to do: - Never delete the "AVADA Assets - DO NOT REMOVE" from your Shopify store - Do not modify or delete any files within the assets folder - If you need to edit collection images, do so through the proper Shopify interface, not by altering these backup files If you encounter any issues with your collection images, please contact support rather than attempting to modify these backup files directly. ## Website performance How to enable speed up for my site? - In app, go to **Speed up** in menu. - Select mode: [auto modes](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/compare-modes/) and [custom mode](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/) you want to speed up. If you select custom mode, click Settings to customize your mode. - Click **Speed up** to start speeding up your store. Learn more about [Speed up](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/). PageSpeed Insight vs Real-user. Which should I use? Lighthouse’s scoring criteria have their limitations. They fail to represent real-world user experiences, leading to confusion and frustration, such as: - The audit is taken place on a low network, and device condition, which resulted in an unparalleled report, not reflecting how user actually loading the site. It may sometimes cause you to falsely comprehend your site speed. - Only able to audit with a few certain pages. Caused unbiased report. Sometimes, Lighthouse's scoring comes in handy when your store is just starting off the development, but after the launch, bad user experience reports may later on hurt your conversion rate silently. Meanwhile, the RUM captures actual interactions and experiences from real users. This provides a fuller understanding of how your website performs in the real world. This includes all the variations of connection types, device types, locations, and browsers. With this approach, you can optimize your store performance which directly improve your store user experience. It is still better to have a deep-dive audit of your site leveraging all possible tools up the sleeves, not just one single metric or report. On PageSpeed Insight, it is showing loading time of my site much slower than what I experience on my device? Because the PageSpeed Insight tests the site on a throttle slow 4g network, low CPU device, that is why you see the difference. If you check the RUM data and find that your users are mostly using a 4g+ connection, then there is no such worry. On the other hand, if your customers are mostly using slow connections, they are less likely to purchase from your end. It is still better to improve the website performance on the worst scenario to gain more potential customers. My Google PageSpeed is still too low, why is that? It may sometimes confuse you that the website PageSpeed score is not increasing much. However, it’s important to keep in mind that the PageSpeed score is quite a lab metric, audited in throttled condition. You should not always aim for that specifically. Since content is still king to Search Engines, only when it comes to neck-to-neck website quality that Google rank the website based on the PageSpeed score. But we are in eCommerce, we are here to gain traffic and convert it. Not doing so well without each component. So having bad metrics website will result in hurting your conversion rate and ROI for ads. You should combine both PageSpeed stats and Real User Performance data from Shopify admin to improve your site's metrics such as Largest Contentful Paint, and First Contentful Paint impacts your customer's experience much more, which later on improves your CR. Why I have done things but the RUM metrics in Shopify like Loading time is not yet improved? Since the RUM is Real User Monitor metrics, it is collected by page loads from user, real device. So it will not reflect right away via the overall number. If you hit the details session page loads, you may find the chart is reflecting the result. It may take time, stay tune. In case you need further support, feel free to reach out to us. Why should I choose throttling level? By default, when you want to measure your Lighthouse score, you are auditing your site performance under the throttled network condition as a slow 4G, or 3G connection, along with throttled CPU power equivalent to the low-end, or mid-end device. With this audit scenario, Google wants to target mostly everyone to have a good experience even under a not-so-good condition. However, sometimes, your audiences are in a country with a 5g connection, using a high-end device like an iPhone, which will lessen your concern regarding this throttled audit result. You may want to try out different throttling conditions to see if your site is performing well to your targeted audiences. ## Uninstall What do I need to do after uninstalling app? Please note, in some cases, when the app is removed from your Shopify store, our code might remain but will be disabled. This happens because we lose access to the theme files immediately when you uninstall our app. Follow these steps to manually remove snippets or remaining code. ### Step 1: Disable Minification If you’ve used the Speed Up feature, turn off Minification before uninstalling to prevent unexpected issues. - Go "Speed up" -> choose "Custom mode" - Find Minification, switch it OFF, then click Save. ### Step 2: Remove Block Avada-SEO​ (opens in a new tab) - Go "Online store" -> "Themes" - In your current theme, click **Edit code** - Find `theme.liquid` file - Find code block with name `Added by AVADA SEO Suite` and remove it - If you've enabled [Minification](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/minification/), find `avada-seo-original` and delete those code blocks - Check files below the Snippets directory of your theme and delete them ### Step 3: Remove search.avada-seo.liquid​ (opens in a new tab) - Go "Online store" -> "Themes" - In your current, click **Edit code** - Find `search.avada-seo.liquid file` and delete it. ### Step 4: Remove the Asset​ (opens in a new tab) - Go "Online store" -> "Themes" - Find "AVADA Assets - DO NOT REMOVE" and click **Remove** ### Step 5: Remove AVADA collection - Go to Collectiom - Select collection **AVADA - Best Sellers** - Click the **⋯ More action** menu - Click **Delete collection** ### Step 6 (optional): Remove HTML Sitemap Pages​ (opens in a new tab) If you have activated our HTML sitemap, delete sitemap generated by Avada. - Go to Online store -> Pages - Find pages HTML Powered by AVADA To ensure these pages are removed from our app, please double-check website URL and handle. They might include 'avada sitemap'. Can I get back the Shopify original meta title and description after uninstalling? Once you follow the above guide on uninstalling the app. The original Shopify meta title and description will be available again since the theme code will use Shopify meta title and description by default. [Changelog](/seo-suite-help-center/product-roadmap/changelog/)[Privacy Policy](/seo-suite-help-center/privacy-policy/) --- # Intro to SEO Suite Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/intro-to-seo-suite/ # Intro to SEO Suite Avada SEO Suite helps you get more people to visit your Shopify store and improve your conversion rate by having better store performance. **Who can use Avada SEO Suite?** - Avada SEO Suite is available on Shopify App Store for all Shopify store plans Avada SEO Suite helps you get more people to visit your Shopify store and improve your conversion rate by having better store performance. It's great for both new online shops and those who need to grow. Our step-by-step tutorials and expert tips will guide you through the process. Get ready to supercharge your SEO with our app and watch your business grow! ## Before you start It's important to understand your goals in overall with SEO. Ask yourself basic questions about your store. For example: - What are your SEO goals? Are you looking to increase organic traffic, improve search engine rankings, or drive more conversions? - How familiar are you with SEO best practices and strategies? - Have you conducted any previous SEO efforts? If yes, what were the results? If your start with a blank page when it comes to SEO, it's okay 'cuz we're here to help. 😉 Here are some key things you need to know along with an overall checklist: - SEO stands for Search Engine Optimization, which involves techniques and strategies to improve your website's visibility in **search engine results pages** (SERPs). - SEO is crucial for attracting **organic (free) traffic** to your website, increasing your online visibility, and reaching potential customers. - Search engines, like Google, use complex algorithms to determine which websites are most relevant and valuable to users based on their search queries. - SEO encompasses various elements, including: on-page optimization, off-page optimization, technical optimization, and content creation. Learn more about SEO with [Google SEO Fundamental. (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/fundamentals/seo-starter-guide) ## Prepare yourself Before walking through our SEO path, you can check out our [SEO Dictionary](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/). This helps your to understand important SEO terms & how your action will affect your store. [SEO Dictionary](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/) ## For your kickstart After understanding the basics in our app, follow our quick start guide here to set up initial SEO for your store. [Quick start guide](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/quick-start-guide/) ## Get more assistance If you have any further concern, search your topic on this page (hit `Ctrl` `K` for quick search) or look through our [Frequently Asked Question list](/seo-suite-help-center/faqs/). Our Customer Success team is also offer 24/7 assistance via [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) and live chat. [Introduction](/seo-suite-help-center/)[Quick Start](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/quick-start-guide/) --- # Pricing Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/pricing/ # 💸 Pricing How much you need to pay to use Avada SEO Suite and what you'll get ## Plans - Image compression: 100 - Basic speed up - Meta tags: Basic - On-page audit: 20 pages - ALT optimization: Unlimited - AI generate: 100 credits Everything in Free, plus: - Image compression: Unlimited - Pro speed up - Analytics - Pro Google Structured Data - Meta tags: Auto rule - AI generate: 1,000 credits/month (Trial limited: 100 credits) **$29/month** with annual bill Everything in Pro, plus: - 1-1 SEO consultation - Rocket speed up - Advanced Google Structured Data - AI generate: 10,000 credits/month (Trial limited: 100 credits) - Expert support 24/7 **$82.5/month** with annual bill **Unlimited image optimization requires Pro plan subscription** To protect against trial misuse, unlimited image optimization is now available only with an active Pro subscription. During your trial period, you can scan up to 100 images. ## Free Trial All paid plans include a **7-day free trial** for new subscribers. **How it works:** - The free trial is available **once per store**, on your first subscription to a paid plan. - If you downgrade to the Free plan and resubscribe later, the free trial will **not** be available again - you will be charged immediately upon resubscribing. - If you uninstall and reinstall the app, the free trial will **not** reset - it is tied to your store, not the installation. - During the trial, image compression is limited to 100 images. - During the trial, AI generation is limited to 100 AI credits (applies to both Pro and Enterprise). **What happens after the trial ends and you are charged:** - **Pro plan**: the remaining **900 AI credits** are added to your balance, bringing your first month to the full 1,000 credits. - **Enterprise plan**: the remaining **9,900 AI credits** are added to your balance, bringing your first month to the full 10,000 credits. - From the second billing cycle onward, credits reset to the full plan quota each month. **Heads up:** Once your free trial ends, you will be automatically charged the plan price. Cancel or downgrade to the Free plan before the trial ends to avoid being charged. ## Compare plans FeatureFreeProEnterprise SEO Checklist☑️☑️☑️ SEO Tools (image compressor, Sitemap, SEO test)☑️☑️☑️ Image alt optimization☑️☑️☑️ Image optimization100☑️☑️ SEO Audit for all products and other pages✖️☑️☑️ On-page audit20 pagesUnlimitedUnlimited Speed Up✖️☑️☑️ Meta TagsBasic meta tagsMeta tags ruleMeta tags rule AI request1001,00010,000 Google Structured DataCommon structured dataPro structured dataAdvanced structured data Keyword research✖️☑️☑️ Instant Indexing✖️☑️☑️ Broken LinksScanScan & Auto fix all broken linksScan & Auto fix all broken links Advanced SEO Settings✖️☑️☑️ One-on-one SEO Consultation✖️✖️☑️ Expert support 24/7✖️✖️☑️ Critical CSS✖️✖️☑️ Script manager✖️☑️☑️ ## AI Credit Packs (one-time purchase) Need more AI credits? Purchase additional packs anytime: PackPriceCredits 500$5.99500 1,000$10.901,000 2,000$19.902,000 5,000$47.905,000 10,000$89.9010,000 Credits are added immediately and do not expire. ## FAQs about pricing Can I cancel my subscription at any time?Yes, you can cancel your subscription at any time. If I cancel the paid plans, will I lose the features or effects that were available in the previous pro plan? - What you still have: Image optimization (limited), Image Alt, SEO Score, Issue checklist and HTML sitemap. Please note that these features may be affected and SEO Score may drop after the downgrade. - What you lost: All features that are only available in the paid plan Is it easy to switch between plans?Yes, it is really easy to switch plans. To switch between plans, go to the subscription page and select your desired plan. You will then be directed to your Shopify admin to approve the subscription. Can I have a refund?Yes, you can. We offer a 30-day Money Back Guarantee (30 days from the start of your free trial), which applies for the following circumstances: - You do not wish to continue the subscription after the first month - You cancel the paid plan before the first circle ends - You forget cancel trial period or have accidentally choose the paid plan without using it in the first month When will I get charged after the trial ends?The trial period lasts 7 days for all plans and starts when you activate your trial. The subscription will be automatically added to Shopify billing cycle and billed right after the trial ends according to [Shopify subscription charges (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/your-account/manage-billing/your-invoice/apps#subscriptions) Will I be charged after uninstalling the app?The app's subscription charge module automatically charges the specified amount at regular intervals, usually monthly or annually. If you uninstall the app before the subscription period ends, you will still be charged the full amount for the entire subscription period. Will I be charged after downgrading from Paid plan to Free plan?The app's subscription charge module automatically charges the specified amount at regular intervals, such as monthly or annually. If you switch to the Free plan before the subscription period ends, you will still be charged the full amount for the entire subscription period. How many images can I optimize during my trial?During your trial period, you can scan up to 100 images. This limit helps ensure our trial system is used as intended. If you need to scan more than 100 images, you'll need to activate Pro plan subscriptions without a trial. How many AI credits do I get during trial?The trial is capped at **100 AI credits** on both Pro and Enterprise plans (to prevent trial abuse). Once your trial converts into a paid subscription, the remaining credits for your plan are topped up automatically - Pro receives an additional 900 credits (total 1,000) and Enterprise receives an additional 9,900 credits (total 10,000) for the first billing cycle. From the second cycle onward, you receive the full monthly quota on schedule. What is an AI credit?An AI credit is the unit used to run AI-powered alt text generation. Each AI automation action on an image consumes 1 credit. How do I get more AI credits?You can get more AI credits by clicking the "Upgrade" button, or by going to your Subscription page in the account settings. Some subscription plans may also include monthly credits. ## Still have questions? Our Customer support team is also offer 24/7 assistance via [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) and live chat. [SEO Dictionary](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/)[Referral Code](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/referral-code/) --- # Quick start guide Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/quick-start-guide/ # Quick start guide Quick start guide helps walk you through the very first steps of SEO journey **Who can use this feature?** - Quick start guide is available for all Avada SEO Suite users. - Quick start guide may vary across different Avada SEO Suite paid plans based on the specific demand & requirements. Avada SEO Suite is a platform that helps Shopify users with SEO. After installing [Avada SEO Suite (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/7Xodrg) from Shopify App Store, you can get access to app in Shopify admin. We'll cover the basics & introduce some key features like Site Speed up, Image Optimizer. Here are 6 steps to get your store ready with SEO. Check out our [Tutorials Videos (opens in a new tab)](https://go.screenpal.com/channels/cZiIlxV3ZY) ## 1. Speed up your store **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. 40% of visitors tend to leave a website that takes longer than 3 seconds to load. Websites that load quickly and provide a smooth user experience are more likely to rank higher in Google's search results. - Go to app admin -> Dashboard - In the "Improve your search ranking", click to open tab **Speed up your store** - Click "Go to settings" - Turn on Site speed up. [Speed up](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/) ## 2. Optimize images **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users - Free plan users can optimize up to 100 images in total. Paid plan users can optimize unlimited images. Optimizing images helps your web pages load faster, boosts your search engine rankings, and attracts more visitors to your website. In fact, did you know that pages with optimized images can load up to 40% faster? That's a big impact on your website's performance and visibility. - Go to app admin -> Dashboard - In the "Improve your search ranking", click to open tab **Optimize images** - Click **Check it out** - Click **Optimize now** to start optimizing your images If there're lots of pictures in your website, you might need to wait for a while. No need to stay in app & wait. You will receive an email from us when this process is finished by setting up [email notification](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/email-notification/). After image optimization is finished, you can check each image to make sure they're all compressed, the alt and file name is optimized. Check out more settings about [image optimization](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-compression/) (alt & filename) and our tool that help [compress images.](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/compress-image-tool/) [Image alt text optimizer](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-alt-text-optimizer/) ## 3. SEO audit **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users The SEO audit is a crucial step for your success in the world of SEO. By thoroughly analyzing your website's SEO factors, it uncovers valuable insights and identifies what you're doing great, what you should improve or fix. This comprehensive evaluation ensures that your website is search engine-friendly, increases visibility and enhances overall user experience. Check out [complete SEO checklist](/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/seo-checklist/) for Shopify store. [📑SEO On-page Audit](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/on-page-seo/) ## 4. Google Structured Data **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users, but some advanced options are only available on paid plans. Google uses structured data to understand the content of your webiste. Adding structured data can enable search results that are more engaging to users and might encourage them to interact more with your website, which are called *rich results*. Learn more about [structured data (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/intro-structured-data) in Google Search. - Go to app admin -> Dashboard - In the "Enable Structured data for eCommerce", click to open tab and click **Go to settings.** Then you're directed to Google Structured Data tab. Check preview of how each page appears on search page and turn it on. You can set up your search result content then enable Google structured data. Avada SEO Suite can enable Google structure data for your: - Homepage - Product & collection page - Local business information - Rating and reviews - Breadcrumb - Sitelink search box - Frequently asked questions - Blog posts & articles Learn more about [Avada SEO Suite Google structured data](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/). ### 5. Optimize meta tags `meta` tags are HTML tags used to provide additional information about a page to search engines. Avada SEO Suite helps you to set up your meta tags easily with preview on search results. You can use Meta tags basic and Meta tag rule to set up your meta tags. Learn more about [meta tags. (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/crawling-indexing/special-tags?hl=en) - Go to app admin -> Dashboard - In the "Optimize your meta tags", click to open tab and click **Go to settings.** Then you're directed to Meta tags. You can set up your meta tags using either basic or rule mode. ### Meta tag basic In Meta tag basic, you can set up meta tags for Homepage and every Product page, Collection page and Blog posts. Learn more about [meta tags of Homepage.](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/#homepage) We set up your default meta tags ready to use, you just need to turn them on. You can freely edit them to fit your store brand voice. Then remember click **Save** to save all settings. ### Meta tag rule In Meta tag rule, you set up your own rule to create your meta tags of your Product pages, Collection pages and Blog posts. For example: You want Summer Collection have different meta tag to Winter Collection, use Meta tag rule to set up. Learn more about [set up meta tag rule.](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/#meta-tag-rule) [Meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/) ## 6. Google Search Console Google Search Console is a web service by Google which help you check indexing status, search queries, crawling errors and optimize visibility on search result page. Learn more about [Google Search Console (opens in a new tab)](https://search.google.com/search-console/about). [Intro to SEO Suite](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/intro-to-seo-suite/)[SEO Dictionary](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/) --- # Referral code Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/referral-code/ # Referral code Share your referral code with partners and earn free rewards (such as extra months of the Pro plan) when they successfully install and use Avada SEO Suite. **Who can use this feature?** - Referral rewards are only available for active, paid stores and do not apply to trial or development stores. ## What is a referral code? A referral code is a unique code generated for your store. When a new user installs Avada SEO Suite and enters this code during onboarding, the system links that store to you as the referrer. ## How does the referral program work? - You copy your referral code from Avada SEO Suite. - You share it with partners, clients, or friends who want to use the app. - They install Avada SEO Suite and enter your code on the welcome screen. - When a referral becomes successful (meets the program conditions), it is counted in your progress. - For each successful referral, you unlock corresponding rewards (for example, additional free months of the Pro plan). You can track the number of successful referrals and upcoming rewards in the Progress area next to your code. ## How to find and share your referral code ### Go to Settings → Subscription On the main app page, navigate to **Settings → Subscription**. ### Copy your referral code Find **Your referral code** and click the copy icon to copy it. ### Share with your partners Share this code with your partners via email, chat, social media, etc. Your partners will use this code during their first setup to credit the referral to you. ## How a new user enters your referral code ### Install Avada SEO Suite Install the app from the Shopify App Store. ### Find the Referral code field On the **Welcome to SEO Success** screen, scroll to the **Referral code (optional)** section. ### Paste the referrer's code Paste or type the partner's referral code into the input field. ### Click Next step Continue the onboarding flow. Once the store becomes eligible under the referral program rules, the referral will be marked as successful and the referrer's progress will be updated. The referral code field is only available for active Shopify stores. Trial and development stores will not see this field. ## Notes and limitations - Referral rewards are only applied when the referred Shopify store is active (not on trial or development plans) and meets all program conditions. - Each referral can only be linked to one referrer code. - Rewards and thresholds may change over time, depending on the current campaign. [Pricing](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/pricing/)[Overview](/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/overview/) --- # SEO Dictionary Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/ # SEO Dictionary Get clear definitions of key SEO terms and concepts to help enhance your SEO knowledge ## # **301 redirect** A 301 redirect is an HTTP status code that redirects users (and search engines) from one page to another. It indicates that a page has moved permanently. **302 redirect** A 302 redirect is a temporary way to divert users from one page on your site to a different page. It helps make sure users and bots can still access your site if a specific page or resource is unavailable. Learn more about [difference between 301 and 302 redirect.](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link/301-and-302-redirect/) **404** The Web server returns the http 404 - File not found error message, when it cannot retrieve the page that was requested. ## A **Alexa Certify Javascript** Alexa Certify Javascript is a tool provided by Amazon's Alexa service that helps improve SEO by monitoring and optimizing the performance of JavaScript code on a website. **Alt** Alternative. Image alt provides alternative information for an image on a webpage if the image fails to load on a user's screen. **Audit** Audit: to make an official examination and produce a report. SEO Audit means the process of analyzing all the factors that affects your website's visibility on search engines. ## B **Baidu Webmaster Tools** Baidu Webmaster Tools is the equivalent of Google Search Console for optimizing websites specifically for Baidu, the leading search engine in China. **Bing Webmaster Tools** Bing Webmaster Tools is similar to Google Search Console, but it is designed for optimizing websites specifically for Bing, the search engine developed by Microsoft. **Breadcrumb** A breadcrumb trail on a page indicates the page's position in the site hierarchy, and it may help users understand and explore a site effectively. ## C **Competition** Competition referring to keyword competition which is a difficulty metric representing how easy or difficult it will be to rank on Google's organic search results for a specific keyword. ## F **Favicon** A favicon is a small icon displayed in the browser tab or next to the page title in search results, serving as a visual representation or logo for a website. ## G **Google Analytics** [Google Analytics (opens in a new tab)](https://analytics.google.com/analytics/attribution/onboarding) is a free tool by Google that helps website owners understand their website's performance by providing data on visitors, traffic sources, and user behavior. **Google Search Console** [Google Search Console (opens in a new tab)](https://search.google.com/search-console/about) is a free tool by Google that helps website owners monitor and optimize their website's presence in Google search results by providing insights, alerts, and tools for managing website indexing and performance. **Google Structured Data** [Google Structured Data (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/intro-structured-data) refers to a standardized format for organizing and marking up website content, providing search engines with additional context and making it easier for them to understand and display relevant information in search results. **Google tag manager** Google Tag Manager is a free tool by Google that simplifies the process of managing and deploying various tracking tags and code snippets on a website without the need for manual coding. ## H **HTML sitemap** A sitemap is a file in format HTML where you provide information about the pages, videos, and other files on your site, and the relationships between them. ## I **Index** Index is a process of Google that analyzes the text, images, and video files on the page, and stores the information in the Google index, which is a large database. **Instant page** [Instant Page (opens in a new tab)](https://instant.page/) is a technique that preloads webpages in the background, reducing the loading time when a user clicks on a link, resulting in faster page loads and a smoother browsing experience. **Internal link** An internal link is a hyperlink that connects one page of a website to another page within the same website, allowing users to navigate between different sections or content within the site. ## J **JavaScript (JS)** JavaScript is a programming language that adds interactivity and dynamic behavior to web pages, enabling features like animations, form validation, and interactive content. ## K **Keyword density** Keyword density refers to the percentage or frequency of a specific keyword or phrase appearing within a piece of content, indicating its relevance and potential impact on search engine optimization. [Knowledge Graph (opens in a new tab)](https://support.google.com/knowledgepanel/answer/9787176?hl=en) Google’s search results sometimes show information that comes from our Knowledge Graph, our database of billions of facts about people, places, and things. The Knowledge Graph allows us to answer factual questions such as “How tall is the Eiffel Tower?” or “Where were the 2016 Summer Olympics held.” ## L **Lazy loading** Lazy loading is an optimization technique that defer the loading of images to a later point in time than loading them all upfront and allow a user gets to your site and doesn't bounce before your site fully load. **Largest Contentful Paint (LCP)** Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) is one of the core web vitals from Google. It measures the time to when the largest element on a webpage is rendered and is visible to the users. **Local business** Local Business on Google Search refers to the feature that displays business listings and information specific to a user's location, making it easier for users to find and engage with local businesses directly in search results. ## M **Meta description** Meta description on Google Search is a brief summary or snippet of text displayed below the page title in search results, providing a concise preview of the webpage's content to help users understand what the page is about. **Meta title** Meta title on Google Search is the title displayed as the clickable headline in search results, representing the main title or name of a webpage to attract users' attention and indicate the page's content. **Minification** Minification is the process of removing unnecessary characters, spaces, and formatting from code files like HTML, CSS, and JavaScript to reduce their file size and improve website performance. ## N **No follow links** A "no follow" link in SEO is a hyperlink that includes a special attribute instructing search engines not to pass any authority or ranking signals to the linked website, essentially indicating that the link should not be considered for search engine optimization purposes. **no-index** "No index" refers to an instruction or meta tag that signals search engines not to include a specific webpage in their search index, preventing it from appearing in search engine results pages (SERPs). **Norton Safe Web** Norton Safe Web is a website reputation service that scans and evaluates websites for potential security risks, malware, and other threats, providing users with information to make informed decisions about website safety. ## O **Outbound link** An outbound link is a hyperlink on a webpage that directs users to another website or domain, providing additional resources or references beyond the current website. **Open Graph meta tags** Open Graph meta tags are special HTML tags that provide structured data to social media platforms, allowing for better control over how web pages are displayed when shared on social media networks, including titles, descriptions, and images. ## P **Page respond** It is the time it takes for a web page to load and fully respond to a user's request, affecting user experience and search engine rankings. ## R **Robots.txt** It is a text file that tells search engine crawlers which pages or sections of a website should or should not be crawled and indexed, helping control the visibility of website content in search results. ## S **SEO score** SEO Score is a metric that shows how well your website is optimized for search engines. It is a measure of the factors that Google and other search engines use to rank their websites in search result page. An SEO Score **from 0-49 is considered bad, from 50-79 is medium, and from 80 upwards is good** **SEO checklist** The SEO checklist is a list of specific tasks and recommendations derived from the audit, outlining what aspects are performing well and what needs to be fixed or improved to enhance the website's search engine visibility and overall optimization. **Snippet code** It is a small piece of code or markup that provides structured data or specific instructions to search engines, influencing how search results are displayed and enhancing the visibility and relevance of the webpage. **Speed score** It is a measure of how quickly a website loads. This is important for both your website users and search engines. **Stop word** They're commonly used words like "and," "the," "but," "how," "or," "what," "when," which search engines typically ignore when indexing content for search results. ## T **Title tag** A title tag is an HTML element that specifies the title or headline of a webpage, displayed as the clickable headline in search engine results, conveying the page's content and attracting users' attention. **Transition word** Transition words show the relationship between sentences and parts of sentences. They can show things like comparison (words like "similarly" or "likewise"), contrast ("however," "on the other hand"), or show time sequences ("first," "after," "finally") and much more. ## U **URL slug** URL slug is the user-friendly and human-readable part of a website's URL that identifies a specific webpage or content, typically derived from the page title and used to improve URL structure and search engine visibility. **User-agent** User agents are like different types of search engine bots. Each bot has a unique name in [robots.txt](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor). For example, Google's bot is called "Googlebot". ## V **Variables** Variables act as placeholders that you fill in with actual information as the workflow happens, such as who's buying and what they're buying. They help describe the key parts of the process you're working on. For example: Variables: {{collection name}} What visitors see: Valentine Flower Bouquet **Volume search** This refers to the number of times a specific keyword or phrase is searched for within a given time period, indicating the popularity and potential traffic for that particular search term. ## Y **Yandex Webmaster Tools** Yandex Webmaster Tools is similar to Google Search Console, but it is designed for optimizing websites specifically for Yandex, the leading search engine in Russia and other countries in the region. [Quick Start](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/quick-start-guide/)[Pricing](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/pricing/) --- # Compress image tool Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/compress-image-tool/ # Compress image tool Compress and resize images effortlessly for speed-optimized online experience with AVADA Avada SEO Suite **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. This tool helps to: - Compress image file size to smaller size with Image quality stays the same. Only images less than 5MB in format JPG, PNG, JPEG or WebP can be compressed. - Click "SEO tools" tab to get access to **Image Compress** - Select mode to compress image quality. You can select to compress automatically or fix a percentage (1 - 100) of image quality. For good image quality, please remain above 90. - Select format of image you want to converted into. - Upload your images. - You can preview your images, download them or remove them. - All images that are compressed will be save in our History. You can compress unlimited images. But maximum 20 pictures are uploaded at the same time. [Image Alt Text Optimizer](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-alt-text-optimizer/)[Speed Up](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/) --- # Image alt text optimizer Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-alt-text-optimizer/ # Image alt text optimizer Optimize how images shows on search results **Who can use this feature?** - Image alt optimization is available for all users. - Image filename optimization is only available for users installing app before March, 2025 Optimizing images helps search engines understand and index your images, boosting your store's visibility. We help automate this process by enhancing your image alt text, making your products more discoverable in search results. - Go to Image optimization -> Image alt text optimizer - Choose your alt text optimization mode **AI Automation (Recommended):** AI analyzes the image and writes natural, context-rich alt text for you. - Select the **Language** for your alt text. - (Optional) Add **Special instructions** if you want AI to follow a specific tone, style, or keyword guideline (e.g. Highlight unique product features, mention material and color, keep tone professional and descriptive.) **Custom variant:** Generate alt text with your own formula using available variables (for example: Product title, Collection name, Shop name, etc.). - Select page - For each page, click the **** button to see and insert variables into your formula. See example. - Select which images you want to optimize, then click Optimize now to start optimizing. - After optimization, check the results in Alt text manager - Hover to see the full result - If you want to revert alt to original versions, in the image you want to revert, click the **⋯ more actions** menu → click **Revert to original**. [Image Compression](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-compression/)[Compress Image Tool](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/compress-image-tool/) --- # Image compression (Legacy version) Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-compression-legacy-version/ # Image compression (Legacy version) **Heads-up:** You're viewing the legacy documentation. Stores that installed Avada SEO Suite before March 2026 and haven't been migrated to the new version will continue to use the flow described here (optimize images by page type). Stores on the updated version now optimize at the file level — [see the new guide](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-compression/). **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users - Free plan users can optimize up to 100 images. Pro and Enterprise plan users can optimize unlimited images. ## What is Image optimization? Optimizing images helps your site load quickly, pleasing both Google Search and your visitors. Best practices include compressing images, using descriptive file names, setting alt tags for SEO, and implementing image sitemaps. [Learn about Google image SEO best practices (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/google-images) ## How does Image optimization help? Avada SEO Suite image optimization helps you: - Compress images for smaller file sizes while maintaining quality - Ensure every image has alt text ## How does it work? - Go to **Image optimization** - In **Settings**, set up your image optimization settings - Set up image quality Use auto mode (Automatic, High, Medium, Low quality) or custom quality to compress image size - Select what images you want to optimize All products images: All images of your products (including product descriptions) - Published product images and product description photos - Click **Optimize now** to start optimizing your images Note: If your website contains many pictures, the scanning and optimization process may take time. You'll receive an email notification when complete. ## After optimization When optimization is done, check your images on your storefront. If you notice any changes or problems, contact support or click **Revert** to restore original versions. You can review **Summary** and **Performance** for an overview of the optimization results. To take action on individual images, go to **Image optimization manager** in Summary. You can: - Check image optimization history - Find each image to compress - Revert images to original ## View history In Image optimization, click **View history** to see each optimization session, including total optimized images and space saved. [Image Compression](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-compression/)[Compress Image Tool](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/compress-image-tool/) --- # Image compression Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-compression/ # Image compression Avada SEO Suite's Image compression helps slim down images for faster load times, improved SEO, and a smoother user experience. **Heads-up:** Since early March 2026, Image compression has been upgraded with a new interface and now optimizes images at the file level instead of by page type. If your store is still on the previous version, [see the legacy guide](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-compression-legacy-version/). **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users - Free and Trial users can optimize up to 100 images. Pro and Enterprise plan users can optimize unlimited images. ## What is Image compression? Image compression reduces the file size of images across your store without visibly affecting their quality. Smaller images load faster, which improves Core Web Vitals, lowers bounce rate, and helps your Google Search ranking. Some best practices are: compress every product image, preview the result before applying, and re-run compression after you upload new products. [Learn about Google image SEO best practices (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/google-images#good-quality-photos%20optimize-for-speed) ## How does Image compression help? Avada SEO Suite Image compression helps you: - Compress product, collection, blog, page, and file library images in one run - Choose a quality mode that fits your store - from Automatic to Custom - Preview the compressed result before applying it to your whole store - Track how much storage space and loading time you saved - Revert every image back to its original version if needed ## How does it work? - Go to **Image optimization**, then open the **Image compression** tab - In **Image quality**, open the dropdown and pick a compression level. Each preset has a fixed quality value, or choose Custom to move the slider yourself (1–100%) - **Automatic – 92%:** recommended for most stores, keeps images looking sharp with noticeable size savings - **High – 80%:** preserves more detail, best for photography or jewelry stores - **Medium – 70%:** balanced for general retail - **Low – 50%:** maximum saving, for stores that prioritize speed - **Custom:** fine-tune the exact percentage using the slider - Click **Preview compression** to compare the original image and the compressed version side-by-side before applying This helps you check the visual quality and file size reduction on a real product photo from your store - Click **Optimize now** to start compressing your images If there're lots of pictures in your website, it takes a moment to scan and optimize them all. No need to stay in app & wait. You will receive an email from us when this process is finished by setting up email notification. ## After optimization When the compression process is done, you can check your images on store front. If you see any change or problem, click **Revert to original** to get back your original version. Please note: - There is a 20-minute cooldown between revert attempts - Each optimization batch can only be reverted once - Revert is available on all plans, including Free You can check the **Report** section at the top of the page to take an overall look on the image compression - total images, optimized images, image size before and after, and how much you saved. To take action on each image, click **Compression manager** at the top right. ## View history In Image compression, click **History** at the top right. In history, you can check on each time of image compression: date and time, total images processed, total size saved, and the status of each batch (Completed, Scanned, or Running). ## Compression manager The **Compression manager** lets you review and manage every image in your store at the file level — no longer grouped by page type. Click **Compression manager** at the top right of the Image compression page to open it. Each row shows the image thumbnail, file title, optimization status, **Size before**, **Size after**, **Size saved** (with % reduction), and **Date added**. Use the toolbar above the table to **search**, **sort**, or **reload** the list after uploading new images. **Manage a single image** - Click the image title or thumbnail to view its preview and full compression details - Open the **⋯ (more)** menu at the end of the row and choose: - **Compress** - optimize this single image - **Restore** - revert this image to its original version **Manage images in bulk** - Use the search and sort controls to narrow down the list - Tick the checkboxes next to the images you want to process, or the header checkbox to select every image on the current page - A bulk action bar appears at the top of the table showing **"X selected"** — click **Optimize image** to compress all selected images at once, or **Revert** to restore them to originals - At the bottom, the total number of images is shown on the left (e.g. *Total: 53 item(s)*). Adjust **Items per page** on the right to load more rows, and use the pagination arrows to move between pages [Social Meta Tags](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/social-meta-tags/)[Image Alt Text Optimizer](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-alt-text-optimizer/) --- # Air reviews Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/integration/air-reviews/ # Air reviews How to integrate Avada SEO Suite to Air Reviews [Air Product Reviews App & UGC (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/3koYxM) offers an automatic method to collect customer feedback to help you build customer trust and boost sales with social proof, reviews, and photos. By integrating Avada SEO and Air reviews, your product review will be eligible for Google Structured Data to show on search results. Review: rich results on Search - Go to "Settings" -> Integration - In "Air Reviews" block, click **Integrate** (Click **Install app** if you haven't installed the app yet) - Set up basic settings in Air reviews and enable app - Go to "Search appearance" -> "Google Structured data" -> "Rating & Reviews" - In **More options**, click **Air reviews** Now your reviews on Air reviews app are eligible for rich results. ## Update review Click **Refresh** to renew status of two app which keeps information updated. ## Disconnect integration Click **Disconnect** to disconnect integration between two apps. Your reviews might be not eligible for rich results after disconnecting integrations. [Settings](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/settings/)[Ali Reviews](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/ali-reviews/) --- # Ali reviews Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/integration/ali-reviews/ # Ali reviews How to integrate Avada SEO Suite to Ali Reviews [Ali Reviews (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/2RM2q7) is an all-in-one solution that helps to collect, showcase, and manage impactful reviews. By integrating Avada SEO and Ali reviews, your product review will be eligible for Google Structured Data to show on search results. Review: rich results on Search - Go to "Settings" -> Integration - In "Ali reviews" click **Integrate** (Click **Install app** if you haven't installed the app yet) - Go to "Search appearance" -> "Google Structured data" -> "Rating & Reviews" - In **More options**, click **Ali reviews** Now your reviews on Ali reviews app are eligible for rich results. ## Update review Click **Refresh** to renew status of two app which keeps information updated. ## Disconnect integration Click **Disconnect** to disconnect integration between two apps. Your reviews might be not eligible for rich results after disconnecting integrations. [Air Reviews](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/air-reviews/)Judge.me --- # eComposer Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/integration/ecomposer/ # eComposer How to integrate Avada SEO Suite to Air Reviews By integrating Avada SEO and eComposer, you can check if your content is good for SEO right when building pages in eComposer. Click to get app [eComposer (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/bk25zv) - Go to "Settings" -> Integration - In "eComposer" click **Integrate** (Click **Install app** if you haven't installed the app yet) - Go to app eComposer -> Select page you want to check SEO - Click the **SEO Audit** icon - Select Avada SEO Suite and wait for the app to scan your content. SEO score for your page is calculated on what is good and bad for SEO. - Check your issue, follow the guide and fix it. Check out our [Onpage SEO checklist](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/checklist/) for more details. [Loox](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/loox/)[Gempages](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/gempages/) --- # Gempages Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/integration/gempages/ # Gempages Build SEO-friendly pages in Gempages using the Avada SEO Suite integration **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all Gempages users. ## Why SEO matters when building pages Think of it like this: you've created a beautiful store, but if no one can find it, you're missing out on potential sales. Getting SEO (Search Engine Optimization) right from the start is much easier than fixing it later. This is where Avada SEO Suite comes in. ## Avada SEO Suite Integration in Gempages Gempages works with Avada SEO Suite to help check your page's SEO score while you build. It's like having an SEO expert looking over your shoulder, pointing out ways to improve your page's visibility in search results. ### How does this integration helps - More visibility: Better SEO helps your pages show up higher in search results - More traffic: When people can find your pages easily, you get more visitors - Better sales: More visitors usually means more chances to make sales - Save time: Fixing SEO issues while building is faster than doing it later ### How to use the SEO Score ### While building pages in Gempages, click the SEO Checker icon ### Click Scan The average scanning time is about 5 to 15 seconds. If your page does not have any section, click **Start building** to build page first. With draft page, we'll scan the preview link of your page. ### Check your current score and checklist You are given a SEO score and a checklist of what you're doing good and what you need to improve. ### Fix your issues and other improvements. ## Check out SEO checklist [On-page SEO](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/on-page-seo/) [Ecomposer](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/ecomposer/)[Search Engine Optimization SEO 101](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/search-engine-optimization-seo-101/) --- # Judge.me Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/integration/judge.me/ # Judge.me How to integrate Avada SEO Suite to Judge.me [Judge.me (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/OY4zQW) is a fast-loading, fully customizable review app that helps collect and display product reviews and star ratings. By integrating Avada SEO and Judge.me, your product review will be eligible for Google Structured Data to show on search results. Review: rich results on Search - Go to "Settings" -> Integration - In "Judge.me" click **Integrate** (Click **Install app** if you haven't installed the app yet) - Go to "Search appearance" -> "Google Structured data" -> "Rating & Reviews" - In **More options**, click **Judge.me** Now your reviews on Judge.me are eligible for rich results. ## Update review Click **Refresh** to renew status of two app which keeps information updated. ## Disconnect integration Click **Disconnect** to disconnect integration between two apps. Your reviews might be not eligible for rich results after disconnecting integrations. --- # LAI Reviews Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/integration/lai-reviews/ # LAI Reviews How to integrate Avada SEO Suite to LAI Reviews [LAI Reviews (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/6ko79q) helps build customer trust by collecting, showing, and amplifying product reviews from multiple platforms. By integrating Avada SEO and LAI Reviews, your product review will be eligible for Google Structured Data to show on search results. Review: rich results on Search - Go to "Settings" -> Integration - In "LAI Reviews" click **Integrate** (Click **Install app** if you haven't installed the app yet) - Go to "Search appearance" -> "Google Structured data" -> "Rating & Reviews" - In **More options**, click **LAI Reviews** Now your reviews on LAI reviews are eligible for rich results. ## Update review Click **Refresh** to renew status of two app which keeps information updated. ## Disconnect integration Click **Disconnect** to disconnect integration between two apps. Your reviews might be not eligible for rich results after disconnecting integrations. Judge.me[Loox](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/loox/) --- # Loox Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/integration/loox/ # Loox How to integrate Avada SEO Suite to Loox By integrating Avada SEO and Loox, your product review will be eligible for Google Structured Data to show on search results. Review: rich results on Search - Go to "Settings" -> Integration - In "Loox" click **Integrate** (Click **Install app** if you haven't installed the app yet) - Go to "Search appearance" -> "Google Structured data" -> "Rating & Reviews" - In **More options**, click **Loox** Now your reviews on Loox are eligible for rich results. ## Update review Click **Refresh** to renew status of two app which keeps information updated. ## Disconnect integration Click **Disconnect** to disconnect integration between two apps. Your reviews might be not eligible for rich results after disconnecting integrations. [Lai Reviews](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/lai-reviews/)[Ecomposer](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/ecomposer/) --- # App Deferral for Shopify Store Speed Optimization deep dive Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/app-deferral-for-shopify-store-speed-optimization-deep-dive/ # App Deferral for Shopify Store Speed Optimization deep dive Discover the key to unparalleled speed in your Shopify store with App Deferral. Learn how to optimize performance by strategically deferring third-party app scripts, ensuring a seamless UX ## The Shopify Store Conundrum In the expansive world of Shopify, speed isn’t just a luxury—it’s an absolute necessity. Shopify’s new standard, the Dawn theme, proudly sets an impressive speed benchmark. Aligning with Shopify’s stringent standards can result in a speed score exceeding 90, promising a smooth and rapid user experience. Shopify’s development team has dedicatedly focused on enhancing web performance for modern eCommerce. However, a significant challenge arises—the indispensable role of apps in your store. While a well-crafted theme may align with Shopify’s speed benchmarks, the introduction of apps injects JavaScript elements that can potentially slow down your store’s loading speed. ### The Dawn Theme: A Beacon of Speed The Dawn theme, recognized as the new benchmark by Shopify, boasts an impressive speed standard. Following Shopify’s guidelines, your theme should ideally achieve a score above 90, ensuring a swift and responsive user experience. Other free themes on Shopify Theme Stores with the best speed scores adhere to the best current practices. These themes maintain a minimal approach, avoiding the incorporation of too many features. However, it’s essential to note that despite not using all 40 apps, running the JS codes of these apps affects the site’s speed. ### The App Dilemma The catch in this scenario lies in the symbiotic relationship between your store and apps. While a well-crafted theme aligns with Shopify’s speed benchmarks, the addition of apps introduces JavaScript elements that can potentially slow down your store’s loading speed enormously. Imagine a scenario where a poorly optimized theme is coupled with the installation of numerous apps – this can significantly drop your speed score, potentially below 30. However, it’s essential to note that not all apps have a high Total Blocking Time (TBT). Some app developers prioritize speed optimization for their app widgets, but unfortunately, the majority do not. ## The Modern Challenge to Speed Scores In today’s landscape, the criteria for speed assessment have evolved, with a focus on metrics like Total Blocking Time (TBT). To maintain a good standing, TBT needs to be under 250ms. This is where the impact of app scripts becomes glaring. Imagine an array of installed apps, including live chat features widget, or a social button, each dragging in iframes that load additional content from external websites. TBT now accounts for 30% of the total speed score, demanding a meticulous approach to script management. Previously, metrics like First Contentful Paint (FCP) and Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) took up a larger portion of the score. Now with the update of Lighthouse 11 auditing, the criteria structure changes to: FCP (First Contentful Paint): 10 CLS (Cumulative Layout Shift): 25 TBT (Total Blocking Time): 30 LCP (Largest Contentful Paint): 25 SI (Speed Index): 10 As you can see, the TBT is a factor that weighs the most. Calculating TBT involves measuring the total time between First Contentful Paint (FCP) and Time to Interactive (TTI), representing the duration during which the user is unable to interact with the page due to blocking scripts. TBT measures the total amount of time that a page is blocked from responding to user input, such as mouse clicks, screen taps, or keyboard presses. The sum is calculated by adding the blocking portion of all long tasks between First Contentful Paint and Time to Interactive. Any task that executes for more than 50 ms is a long task. The amount of time after 50 ms is the blocking portion. For example, if Lighthouse detects a 70 ms-long task, the blocking portion would be 20 ms. ### The TBT Conundrum Total Blocking Time (TBT) has emerged as a critical metric, requiring meticulous attention. With the benchmark set at under 250ms for optimal performance, the challenge intensifies with the addition of apps, each contributing to the overall TBT. This becomes even more challenging on mobile devices, which have limited CPU power and rely on 4G networks. ## Other Tactics in Speed Optimization In the quest for optimal speed, various tactics come into play: - **Image Optimization:** Ensuring your images are finely tuned for performance. - **Page Stabilizer:** A technique to reduce First Contentful Paint (FCP) and CLS. - **Predictive Page Preloading:** Anticipating the next page on mouse hover and proactively loading it. - **Minification (JS and CSS):** Shrinking file sizes for faster loading. - **Critical CSS Extraction:** Extracting critical CSS for prioritized loading. - **Smart JavaScript Deferral:** The focus of our discussion. It defers 3rd-party app scripts until the first interaction of the user with the page, helping mitigate TBT. ## App Deferral Comes to the Rescue Why should you trust app deferral as a crucial strategy for speed optimization? Our smart JavaScript deferral takes a proactive approach by automatically delaying the loading of third-party apps. Users have the flexibility to customize the loading strategy for each script through our app configuration. For instance, if a review widget is set to load at the bottom of the page and relies on JavaScript rendering, loading it before the main content might result in Total Blocking Time (TBT) issues. Our approach is to load such scripts after the initial content, preventing interference with HTML and CSS painting. As you may know, JS is single-threaded; if we feed the main thread with a lot of JS, we cannot work with the most visible things on the screen – CSS, loading assets like images – which affects the loading speed of the website negatively. ### Scripts That should Take a Back Seat The following are file categories that we recommend you defer to, we recommend that you should be acutely aware of what these changes make. - **Advertising Scripts:** Google Adsense, Amazon Ads, TikTok - **Social Network Buttons:** Embedded follow and like buttons for social networks. - **Live Chat Scripts:** Zendesk, Customerly, Intercom, tawk.to, Olark, and similar live chat platforms. - **Third-Party Scripts:** Disqus Comments, Facebook Share, and others. - **Scripts Unnecessary for Above-the-Fold Content Display.** By default, all other 3rd apps should render with low priority. Users can decide on which to omit, and which to include. ### The Evolution of Optimization Techniques App deferral represents the evolution of script management, addressing the intricate challenge of optimizing speed without compromising functionality. The history of speed optimization techniques is a great journey, from the early web to PHP, WordPress, and Shopify. Techniques like image lazy loading started as tricks using JS to delay and later became official features in HTML. JS files were placed at the end of the body in HTML, and eventually, HTML implemented defer and async properties. Today, these are built-in functionalities proving that deferring app scripts on user interaction is not a trick but an evolved practice, similar to the development of image lazy loading and script defer, async attributes. We also believe that parsing and scripting JS too early is not necessary, as JS is single-threaded. So, we need a way to make scripts load with a new event, not yet supported in HTML. Soon, just like image loading, JS defer, and async properties, new attributes like onload, onready, onInteract for the script tag may be added to HTML and the web. ## Does This Solution Exist in Other Platforms? Does this innovative solution exist beyond the Shopify realm? Indeed, in the world of WordPress, platforms like Perfmatters and WP Rocket offer similar functionalities, emphasizing the importance of deferring JavaScript. Perfmatters: [https://perfmatters.io/docs/delay-javascript/ (opens in a new tab)](https://perfmatters.io/docs/delay-javascript/) WP Rocket: [https://wp-rocket.me/ (opens in a new tab)](https://wp-rocket.me/) ## Future-Proofing Through Innovation While app deferral proves to be an effective strategy today, the landscape of speed optimization is ever-evolving. As Lighthouse benchmarks shift, and new metrics emerge, continuous innovation remains the key. Just as lazy loading and image compression were once the pinnacle of speed optimization, new metrics like TBT and CLS now take precedence. ### The Unpredictable Future Predicting the future of speed optimization is a dynamic challenge. As benchmarks change and the web evolves, innovation becomes the cornerstone for maintaining optimal speed. ## Conclusion: Navigating the Speed Landscape with Avada At Avada, we not only possess expertise in the field but also adapt to the changing standards of the web. Our commitment to continuous innovation ensures that we stay ahead of the curve, offering cutting-edge solutions for sustained and exceptional speed optimization. The intricate dance between themes, apps, and scripts finds harmony through our smart JavaScript deferral, paving the way for a faster and more efficient Shopify store. Table of Contents [Writing A Good Product Description That Sales And SEO](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/writing-a-good-product-description-that-sales-and-seo/)[Google Update 2024](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/google-update-2024/) --- # Basic Core Web Vitals Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/basic-core-web-vitals/ # Basic Core Web Vitals Help you gain basic understanding of the Core Web Vitals and use it to better troubleshoot your site performance issues. Web performance metrics can seem like an alphabet soup of acronyms. For someone new to the topic, it can be a real hurdle to understanding what's going on. In this post, I'll describe each metric in a beginner-friendly way. I'll also focus more on the concepts and impact of each rather than the technical definitions. ## What are the Core Web Vitals? The Core Web Vitals are a class of specific metrics created by the Chrome team. They are currently limited to 3 metrics which are focused on user experience (more on each later): - Largest contentful paint (LCP) - Cumulative layout shift (CLS) - Interaction to next paint (INP) These three metrics together are meant to focus on how a user experiences loading, interactivity, and visual stability. We use several more metrics that help us debug performance issues, but these three are meant to summarize user experience. And guess what? User experience can impact SEO... ## How do performance metrics impact my SEO? Search engines try to offer the best content results for a user. Google considers how a user experiences a website to contribute to the quality of that content. We should already care about performance because it can lead to lower conversions and faster abandonment. Why would a search engine ignore those issues? Thus, the Core Web Vitals also feed into your search engine and ad rankings for Google. How big is their impact? We don't know for sure, but content is still king. If your content quality is above competitor websites, you might be impacted less. However, for two sites with close to equivalent content quality, the faster one is more likely to be ranked higher. The lesson here is don't let web performance be the reason why you're losing your ranking. ## Loading speed: Time to first byte (TTFB) [Time to first byte (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/ttfb/), or TTFB, is the time from when a user first requests a page (clicks on a link or types in the URL) to when the first byte of data returns to the browser from the server. Image from Shopify Performance team A TTFB of less than 0.8s is considered good, and over 1.8s is poor. Things that impact TTFB are server response times (complex queries, high traffic) and distance to that server (no CDN). ## Loading speed: First contentful paint (FCP) [First contentful paint (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/fcp/), or FCP, is the time from when a user first requests a page (same as TTFB), until the first content (text, image, or non-white canvas or SVG) is rendered on the page. As you might have noticed, it also includes the TTFB. When we use FCP for performance debugging, we focus more on the time after TTFB. An FCP of less than 1.8s is considered good, and over 3s is poor. Things that can impact FCP outside of TTFB are render-blocking resources, connections to multiple domains (origins), and many more. Most problems are usually related to render-blocking resources. CSS is a render-blocking resource because we don't want to see the unstyled page before switching to a styled page. JavaScript can be render-blocking depending on how it is loaded and used. ## Loading speed: Largest contentful paint (LCP) [Largest contentful paint (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/articles/lcp), or LCP, is the time from when a user first requests a page (same as TTFB), until the last largest element on the visible screen (viewport). is rendered. It has the same starting point as TTFB and FCP. Similar to FCP, we focus more on the time after these other metrics when debugging LCP. Image from Shopify Performance team An LCP of less than 2.5s is considered good, and over 4s is poor. Most LCP elements are images. Often, the LCP element will change based on screen size since we build websites to be responsive and mobile-friendly. Thus, common things that can impact LCP are related to the loading of the image or font used for the LCP element. For example, if you use a front-end framework like Vue or React, the browser might not know that it needs an image until after it has downloaded multiple files and parsed (read) them. Another example is poor prioritization leading to less critical assets being loaded before the ones needed for the LCP element. ## Responsiveness: Interaction to next paint (INP) [Interaction to next paint (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/inp/), or INP, measures the amount of time it takes for the browser to paint the next frame (show a change on screen) after user interaction. Think of when you click on a button on a website but don't get any visual feedback that you performed an action until after some delay. INP can only be measured with real users. It is measured for the duration of a session, not just for the first interaction, and reports the worst or nearly worst time. Image from the Shopify Performance team An INP of less than 200ms is considered good, and over 500ms is poor. Too much JavaScript running on the [main thread (opens in a new tab)](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Glossary/Main_thread) is the primary culprit for INP problems. The main thread cannot run scripts and respond to user inputs at the same time, so long scripting time trips up responsiveness. This could be due to long tasks, too many dependencies, too many third-party scripts, and more. On merchant sites, we see a lot of apps and third-party and tag manager bloat. Remove ones that are no longer used, and evaluate the rest in terms of the trade-offs between performance and feature benefits. For slow INP later in the page lifecycle, evaluate specific interactions using a performance profiler to look for opportunities to reduce or prioritize work on the main thread. ## Responsiveness: Total blocking time (TBT) [Total blocking time (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/tbt/), or TBT, measures the amount of time the main thread was blocked from FCP until [time to interactive (TTI) (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/tti/). TTI is when the main resources have finished loading and the main thread can reliably respond to user input. Remember how INP can only measure real user interactions? TBT is a "lab" metric that we can measure anytime we run a test. It helps us better predict when we may have a problem with responsiveness that would show up in INP. A TBT of less than 200ms is considered good when tested on average mobile devices. The same causes for poor INP lead to poor TBT. ## Cumulative layout shift (CLS) Cumulative layout shift, or CLS, measures the largest "burst" of unexpected layout shifts during a page session. The technical definition can be complex, but generally, we don't want the elements on a webpage to move around unless the user would expect it from an interaction. Layout shifts can be very annoying. Think of how many times you clicked the wrong button because it shifted down right before you clicked. Or when you lose your place while reading an article because an ad finally finished loading. A CLS of less than 0.1 is considered good, and over 0.25 is poor. It lacks metrics because the score is the product of the impact fraction and distance fraction. To understand the calculation in more detail, check out the [Layout shift score (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/cls/#layout-shift-score). Common culprits for unexpected layout shifts include: - An advertisement or image loads (without space reserved for it) - An announcement or cookie banner injected at the top of the screen - A shift from a fallback font to a web font - An animation [Hands On Guide To Improve On Page Product SEO Audit Score](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/hands-on-guide-to-improve-on-page-product-seo-audit-score/)[Web Performance And Speed With Shopify Ecommerce In 2024](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/web-performance-and-speed-with-shopify-ecommerce-in-2024/) --- # Critical CSS Extraction deep dive Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/critical-css-extraction-deep-dive/ # Critical CSS Extraction deep dive Improve your First Contentful Paint (FCP) with Critical CSS Extraction ## What is Critical CSS? [Critical CSS (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/articles/extract-critical-css) extraction is a technique where we only inline the necessary CSS which is needed to paint what visible in the current page view. In order to paint the site content, the browser needs HTML and CSS first. Normally, the Critical CSS technique would be implemented on as many pages as possible. However, we are in the world of eCommerce, the utmost important pages are just Home, Product, Collection, Cart, and Checkout. So, our app extracts and inlines critical CSS for home, collections, and product pages to improve the First Contentful Paint of your store. Visitors will be more patient seeing the content of the page revealed as soon as possible and get a better experience. ## Why need Critical CSS in Shopify? As we mentioned earlier, the website cannot be painted without the CSS. Most of the themes on the market will have one big CSS file containing all the most important CSS, which is used throughout the site, such as theme.css, base.css, vendor.css, main.css, or styles.css. Unlike many high-standard themes, Shopify stores these days are still using many out-of-date themes with heavy main CSS theme files, some over 50KB. Since the page needs the main theme CSS to load the First Contentful Paint, it is quite coherent to see that when the CSS main chunk is heavy, or bundled with unused CSS lines, it poses a challenge for the browser to take time and download the file. As a result, the FCP paint has been affected by slow downloading and parsing of the main CSS. During that time, the page will remain blank, causing the customer to wonder if there is anything wrong with the website. It depends on how large the main CSS file size is that decides how much impact this optimization technique can deliver. If the CSS file is around 5–10kb, then there would be no such difference made. But it ranges from 20–50kb; the impact can be noticeable, over 50kb, then the impact can be quite positive. If you see a site's main CSS is ~ 50kb, then you definitely should give this technique a try. However, one **important** thing is though. If we add the critical CSS to the HTML, then that would be fine, right? Not yet, we need to lazy load the BIG chunk main CSS. The web.dev recommends a developer delay all *render-blocking CSS files*. That seems a bit risky. Meanwhile, only a big main chunk of CSS of the theme impacts the loading of the page, so by default, our app only defers the following CSS files, which are commonly found in theme code. ## What about other CSS files? If you want to implement Critical CSS to other CSS files, we recommend reaching out to our Technical Support to implement further optimization work. We need to audit and see if deferring a CSS file will cause any trouble to the store or not. ## FAQs ### Site look broken after this feature? You can check if the Avada Critical CSS app embed is enabled or not. It may be that the CSS is lazy loaded already, but critical CSS is not on the page. Make sure both things work: critical CSS inline and the deferral of the CSS files. [The Google Algorithm Leak And What It Has To Do With Your SEO In Shopify](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/the-google-algorithm-leak-and-what-it-has-to-do-with-your-seo-in-shopify/)[Does Outbound Links Matter In SEO](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/does-outbound-links-matter-in-seo/) --- # Does outbound links matter in SEO? Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/does-outbound-links-matter-in-seo/ # Does outbound links matter in SEO? Learn how outbound links can boost your SEO by enhancing credibility and user experience. Discover best practices for effective linking. When you write your product description or blog, it is recommended to include outbound links to content where possible. Here when we mention outbound links, we mean Internal links and External links. But it is recommended to include, but not to spam these links while it is not related. ## Outbound links? What are they? As we mentioned above, there are Internal links, and External links. - **Internal links** are links that navigate from one page to another page on your website. This internal link can be a link to your Size Chart page, your FAQ page, or your campaign page just like Outrage does to link to your [reproductive justice (opens in a new tab)](https://www.the-outrage.com/pages/reproductive-justice-1) page. Or Allbirds have links to your [internal carbon footprint labelling page (opens in a new tab)](https://www.allbirds.com/pages/footprint) Outrage attach their link to their program for the POD product. AllBirds attach their macnufactoring informaiton, carbon policy page. - **External links** are links that navigate users to another page from another website which provides users with 3rd party information, and knowledge. Linking to reputable, high-quality sources can help establish your content as a valuable resource. When you provide well-researched information and back it up with credible sources, it can enhance your site's trustworthiness in the eyes of users and search engines. ## Internal links vs External links, which matters more? ### Internal links Providing internal links help your content and SEO: - Providing customers with additional information like size chart, manufacturer information, carbon-free commitment, etc. This kind of information will help customers have longer dwell time and reduce the bounce rate, not to mention help your customers with their purchasing decisions. - Help search engines understand the context and structure of your site content so that they will index it better and evaluate your site's credibility. ### External links Providing external links help your content and SEO: - Linking to trusty websites such as reviews on Trustpilot helps increase the trustability of your website. - Especially with blogs, linking to external content shows customers that you spend time researching your content before writing them. Nowadays, this is more important since the AI is creating blog content, but one thing it fails to do is show the sources for the content. Google always appreciates authentic, original content. - Sometimes, linking out to other websites can encourage those sites to link back to you. While not guaranteed, this reciprocal linking can help improve your own site's authority and search rankings. ### Some notes However, there are some notes that you need to pay attention to such as: - Use descriptive anchor text: The anchor text of your outbound links should be descriptive and relevant to the content of the linked page. Do not write like this: "See the Web Performance in Shopify post [here](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/web-performance-and-speed-with-shopify-ecommerce-in-2024/)". Instead, write "Explore the the [Web Performance in Shopify](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/web-performance-and-speed-with-shopify-ecommerce-in-2024/) in 2024" - Avoid excessive linking: Just as I mentioned in the first place, do not spam the links why it is not necessary. - Monitor broken links: Make sure that there are no broken links in your content. If the linked content has changed its URL, make sure to update it. You can use Google Search Console report or use our [404 Tracking Tools](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link-manager/) of Avada SEO Suites. - Link to external sites with high trust: If you are writing to the KB blog, remember to link to the original, first-party, and reputable. ## All in all, it matters, right? Yes, it matters. Especially now when AI content thrives and impacts the originality of the content on the web. People seem to miss out on these links. Forgetting that content for the web is beyond plain text which they got from AI tools. [Critical CSS Extraction Deep Dive](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/critical-css-extraction-deep-dive/)[Tips Writing Your Meta Title](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/tips-writing-your-meta-title/) --- # Google update 2024 Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/google-update-2024/ # Google update 2024 What to know and what to do next about Google August 2024 core update Google recently updated its search algorithm. This change might affect how your Shopify store appears in search results, potentially impacting your store's traffic. Learn more about [Google August 2024 core update. (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/blog/2024/08/august-2024-core-update?hl=en) ## What to do next ### Check traffic If you're seeing a drop in position and suspect it might correlate with the [timing of a core update (opens in a new tab)](https://status.search.google.com/products/rGHU1u87FJnkP6W2GwMi/history), use Search Console to determine whether you need to make a change. - Confirm that the core update has finished rolling out. Check the [Search Status Dashboard (opens in a new tab)](https://status.search.google.com/) and take note of the start and end date of the core update. - Compare the right dates: We recommend waiting at least a full week after a core update completes before analyzing your site in Search Console. After a week, try [comparing this week with a week before (opens in a new tab)](https://support.google.com/webmasters/answer/7576553#comparingdata) the core update started rolling out; this way you'll be able to better pinpoint what exactly has changed. - Review your top pages and queries. Assess how they were ranking before and after the core update: is the drop small or large? [Small drop in position (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/monitor-debug/debugging-search-traffic-drops#small) (dropping from position 2 to 4): There's no need to take drastic action (in fact, we recommend avoiding making changes to content that's already performing well). - Large drop in position (dropping from position 4 to 29): Do a [deeper assessment (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/updates/core-updates#assess-large-drop). ### If there's large drop If you're seeing a sustained, large drop in position for your site as a whole, read through the [self-assessment (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/fundamentals/creating-helpful-content) to check if your site overall (not just individual pages) is delivering content that's helpful, reliable, and people first. Specifically, we recommend keeping the following in mind: - Take a close look at your site as a whole, and try to be objective. You might also ask others you trust (that are unaffiliated with your site) to do an [assessment using the questions (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/fundamentals/creating-helpful-content). - Evaluate the pages that were most impacted. Look closely at these to understand how these pages may perform against the [self-assessment questions (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/fundamentals/creating-helpful-content). For example, there may be other pages on the web that are doing a better job of helping the searcher. ## Things to keep in mind when making changes - **Avoid doing "quick fix" changes** (like removing some page element because you heard it was bad for SEO). Instead, focus on making changes that make sense for your users and are sustainable in the long term. - **Consider how you can improve your content in meaningful ways.** For example, it could be that rewriting or restructuring your content makes it easier for your audience to read and navigate the page. - **Deleting content is a last resort**, and only to be considered if you think the content can't be salvaged. In fact, if you're considering deleting entire sections of your site, that's likely a sign those sections were created for search engines first, and not people. If that's the case for your site, then deleting the unhelpful content can help the good content on your site perform better. How long does it take to see an effect in Search results? If you've made improvements, it may take time to see an effect in Search results: some changes can take effect in a few days, but it could take several months for our systems to learn and confirm that the site as a whole is now producing helpful, reliable, people-first content in the long term. If it's been a few months and you still haven't seen any effect, that could mean waiting until the next core update. [App Deferral For Shopify Store Speed Optimization Deep Dive](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/app-deferral-for-shopify-store-speed-optimization-deep-dive/)[Changelog](/seo-suite-help-center/product-roadmap/changelog/) --- # Hands-on guide to improve on-page product SEO audit score Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/hands-on-guide-to-improve-on-page-product-seo-audit-score/ # Hands-on guide to improve on-page product SEO audit score Discover how to improve your on-page SEO audit scores with Avada SEO Suites as your sidekick with a hands-on walkthrough. Creating and posting a new product online involves quite a process. From setting prices and uploading product images to adding variants and categorizing products into collections, there's a lot to manage. And just when you think you're done, you realize there's [SEO](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/search-engine-optimization-seo-101/) work to tackle too. Wouldn’t it be great to have a helpful sidekick to guide you through the SEO process? That is where the Avada SEO Suites, on-page audit comes into play. Today, we will have a deep dive into how to improve the product SEO audit score in our app as much as possible. Our app acts as a sidekick, helping you enhance the SEO of your product listings without relying on automatic content generation. We believe in giving you control over this process because: - Automatically generated content can come across as inauthentic to search engines. - Content is king. It’s your product, and your unique touch can make it stand out from the competition. See the video version here if you want: ## Before you start Our main goal is to improve the product listing as close to a good level (around 80) as possible. We do not need to strictly follow the guidelines to get a good score by doing the following: - Spamming keywords where it is not needed - Inserting internal or outbound links absurdly just to clear the checklist You can learn more about [writing a good product description blog post.](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/writing-a-good-product-description-that-sales-and-seo/) ## Steps to improve ### Choose your product to audit You can visit our app audit page directly from the product page from Shopify admin via the Shopify Admin link. Visit Avada SEO Suites audit page via admin product page Another option is to the `SEO audit` menu on the left, to visit the `On page SEO audit` page and look for products with on-page SEO scores that need improvements. In this example, we will try to improve the SEO score for the product `STARESSO Plus Portable Espresso Machine` Look for products that needs improvements ### Determine the opportunities Our current product description from the manufacturer is as follows: - **【Barista-Grade Extraction】** Achieve up to 22% gold extraction with 15-20 bars of pressure, delivering rich, creamy espresso that rivals high-end machines. Become a coffee master in seconds. - **【Effortless & Stable Brewing】** The top pressure valve design ensures easy and stable extraction. Simply press with your palm, and the silicone pad keeps it steady on any surface for consistent results. - **【Premium, Durable Materials】** Crafted with baby-safe silicone and food-grade 304 stainless steel. The aerospace-grade nano-ceramic coating enhances pump durability by three times, ensuring long-lasting performance. - **【Compact & Easy to Clean】** The foldable, portable design saves space and is perfect for travel. Each component detaches easily for deep cleaning, maintaining hygiene and convenience. - **【Generous Brewing Capacity】** Brew up to 24g of coffee powder, ideal for 1-2 people. Perfect for travel, cars, home, office, and as a gift for coffee lovers. No electricity needed, offering ultimate convenience and versatility. Looking at the `Task to do` section on the left we have these problems: - We have not set a main keyword for the product. We will need to determine this. - No main keyword in the meta title or meta description - Our product description needs to be around 150 words to be good. - There are no internal links or outbound links - We have some transition word problems (optional) Current on-page SEO checklist ### Focus mode (optional) It is recommended to enter the Focus mode for the best editing experience. Focus mode for auditing on-page SEO ### Choose the main keyword In this product, after doing some research, we came up with setting the main keyword as `portable espresso machine` . Set your main keyword input You should find your keyword by using Google Trends or Find keywords functionality from our app where you can see how your targeted keyword is doing, which you should focus on your long-tail or short-tail keyword. Research your keyword volume and competition ### Tackle keyword problems There are 2 tasks we need to do. We need to make sure that the keywords appear around *2 times* in the product description without spamming the keywords. Also, the keywords should *appear in the beginning paragraph*. We can use ChatGPT to help with this, but our tuning is required to make it as authentic as possible. Here is our next version: Ever wanted to have your espresso while on a trip, but you cannot find a way to bring along your home coffee machine? What if there is a portable expresso machine that your can bring along to manually extract your own lovely cup of espresso. - **Barista-Grade Extraction:** Achieve up to 22% gold extraction with 15-20 bars of pressure, delivering rich, creamy espresso that rivals high-end machines. Become a coffee master in seconds. - **Effortless & Stable Brewing:** The top pressure valve design ensures easy and stable extraction. Simply press with your palm, and the silicone pad keeps it steady on any surface for consistent results. - **Premium, Durable Materials:** Crafted with baby-safe silicone and food-grade 304 stainless steel. The aerospace-grade nano-ceramic coating enhances pump durability by three times, ensuring long-lasting performance. - **Compact & Easy to Clean:** The foldable, portable design saves space and is perfect for travel. Each component detaches easily for deep cleaning, maintaining hygiene and convenience. - **Generous Brewing Capacity:** Brew up to 24g of coffee powder, ideal for 1-2 people. Perfect for travel, cars, home, office, and as a gift for coffee lovers. No electricity needed, offering ultimate convenience and versatility. With this one, our score **went up to 77**. But the keyword density is *just 1 time*. There is still some work to do. ### Improve internal, and outbound links With a **77 audit score**, we still have some work to do. We see that we should include some [internal links](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/does-outbound-links-matter-in-seo/) as well on our product listing. **But bear in mind**, that your internal links can be included in other sections on the product page, which you can add via the `Theme editor` using the Rich Text block. However, it is best to put it in the product description section. 77 SEO audit score In this product description, we think that since our product is quite a product that solves a specific problem in life: a portable espresso machine for on-the-go people, or coffee nerds who want to try out a new way to extract coffee. We came up with the conclusion that our brand needs to build a strong knowledge foundation hub for the customers to read and explore if this brand and product have credibility enough to purchase from. Having a blog covering topics like espresso, coffee beans, and coffee recipes is a must-have. Luckily, we do. So it is best to include the link to your blog in the product description: Find it hard having a good blogging experience on Shopify admin? Get your blogging dream up and running again with [Avada AI Blog Builder (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/MKygxq) app with an intuitive, Notion-like editor. Ever wanted to have your espresso while on a trip, but you cannot find a way to bring along your home coffee machine? What if there is a portable expresso machine that your can bring along to manually extract your own lovely cup of espresso. - **Barista-Grade Extraction:** Achieve up to 22% gold extraction with 15-20 bars of pressure, delivering rich, creamy espresso that rivals high-end machines. Become a coffee master in seconds. - **Effortless & Stable Brewing:** The top pressure valve design ensures easy and stable extraction. Simply press with your palm, and the silicone pad keeps it steady on any surface for consistent results. - **Premium, Durable Materials:** Crafted with baby-safe silicone and food-grade 304 stainless steel. The aerospace-grade nano-ceramic coating enhances pump durability by three times, ensuring long-lasting performance. - **Compact & Easy to Clean:** The foldable, portable design saves space and is perfect for travel. Each component detaches easily for deep cleaning, maintaining hygiene and convenience. - **Generous Brewing Capacity:** Brew up to 24g of coffee powder, ideal for 1-2 people. Perfect for travel, cars, home, office, and as a gift for coffee lovers. No electricity needed, offering ultimate convenience and versatility. Still not so sure if this portable espresso machine is what you need? Please explore for yourself more with [our (opens in a new tab)](https://hitcoffee.shop/blogs/news) [HitCoffee (opens in a new tab)](https://hitcoffee.shop/blogs/espresso) [blog (opens in a new tab)](https://hitcoffee.shop/blogs/news) on the espresso and coffee maker topics. With this update, the SEO score is **now 85**, which is quite a good score. There is no need to go more over this since we are quite good with this. We will continue with the meta title and meta description. Besides the blog, we can try inserting internal link such as: your shipping policy, carcon emission commitment page, related product collection, etc. ### Meta title and meta description Let's go with custom metadata for this product over the basic meta tag rule option. It is recommended to use AI assistant in our app to generate the [meta title](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/tips-writing-your-meta-title/) and description. Use AI assistant for meta title and description creation. Fine tune for the best result. After a bit of tuning, here is our **final result:** Our final meta title and meta description ### See the result Voila! Once things are done, you can test your product on the [Meta tags toolkit (opens in a new tab)](https://metatags.io/) and wait for Google to index your updated product. It will take some time for Google to crawl your content. So stay tuned, grab a coffee, and move onto the next product that needs improving on on-page SEO. [Search Engine Optimization SEO 101](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/search-engine-optimization-seo-101/)[Basic Core Web Vitals](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/basic-core-web-vitals/) --- # Search Engine Optimization (SEO) 101 Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/search-engine-optimization-seo-101/ # Search Engine Optimization (SEO) 101 Discover SEO basics with our comprehensive guide. Learn essential techniques to boost website visibility and drive organic traffic. ## Overview of Search Engine Optimization? Whenever we want to find any information, ask questions, research, or find a product, the Search Engines like Google and Bing would definitely be one of our go-to choices for most of the time. According to Google, there are **8.5 billion searches** per day, which means everyone, every day on Earth searches something on Google at least once. This is a huge traffic for your brand to connect with your audience. SEO stands for **Search Engine Optimization**, which is a process and constantly improving the visibility and appeal of your website to search engines like Google, which means appearing higher and more engaging in the search results. ## The importance of SEO If you rely on advertisements to grow your business, you might find SEO to be a form of free advertising. Organic traffic generated by SEO can be incredibly valuable. When customers search with purchase intent, they are already looking to buy a product. Most of the time, they'll click on one of the top three results on the page. That’s where you want to be for your targeted keywords to maximize your conversion rate. Even though your keywords might be targeted by Google ads, appearing at the top organically boosts your brand's recognition and credibility. It's much easier to reach the top of search results through ads than organically, but organic results are often seen as more trustworthy. For example, Search Engine Optimization would help you strategically improve your traffic by targeting your potential audiences via the search box query matching their intent. First, you will need to come up with a product or service, and then target your desired keyword with short tail and long tail. Once it starts to work, you need to optimize the conversion rate by improving the meta title, and meta description in a more engaging way, improving your product images, structure data (price, reviews, and stock status), and even the website performance for a lower bounce rate. I know SEO can seem like a lot of work, but it will pay off in the long run for your brand and business. ## The Fundamentals of SEO ### Keywords researching First, you'll need to identify keywords that your potential audience is searching for. This involves targeting both short-tail and long-tail keywords. Short-tail keywords are broader and more competitive, while long-tail keywords are more specific and often less competitive. For example, "candles" is a short-tail keyword, while "handmade soy candles in NYC" is a long-tail keyword. The latter is more specific and may attract a more targeted audience. ### On page SEO Once you have your keywords, it's time to optimize your website. This includes creating engaging meta titles and descriptions, improving product images by compressing them and adding ALT tags, enhancing content structure with a clear hierarchy, and adding internal and outbound links. All these elements help make your website more attractive to search engines and users alike. Our Avada SEO Suite can help you with most of the On-page audit tasks. Explore our [on-page SEO auditing](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/) features ### Off-page SEO Off-page SEO involves activities that take place outside your website but can significantly impact your rankings. This includes building backlinks from other reputable websites and increasing your social signals. Guest blogging can also be a great way to gain backlinks and drive traffic to your site. To learn more about off-page SEO, please refer to these recommended resources. ([Semrush (opens in a new tab)](https://www.semrush.com/blog/off-page-seo/), [Neil Patel (opens in a new tab)](https://neilpatel.com/blog/everything-you-need-to-know-about-off-page-seo/)) ### Technical SEO Technical SEO ensures that your website is fast, mobile-friendly, and easy for search engines to crawl. This includes optimizing site speed, ensuring mobile compatibility, submitting an XML sitemap to search engines, and managing your robots.txt file to control how search engines crawl your site. For technical SEO, you can explore our app's [web performance optimization](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/) suite and other technical SEO tools as well. ## More of SEO ### Content marketing Content is king in SEO. Regularly updating your site with fresh, valuable content like blog posts, videos, and infographics can help attract and retain visitors. High-quality content can also earn you backlinks from other vendors automatically since you are becoming a source of truth. One of the missing pieces of SEO that is often overlooked by Shopify store brands is the lack of blog development. Imagine that people will find a review of a product before buying it; if your brand provides content with essential knowledge about choosing proper products or reviewing a product's pros and cons, you have a huge chance of winning that potential customer. Find it hard having a good blogging experience on Shopify admin? Get your blogging dream up and running again with [Avada AI Blog Builder (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/dyne0j) app with an intuitive, Notion-like editor. **Local SEO** For businesses with a physical location or those serving specific areas, local SEO is essential. Claim and optimize your Google My Business listing, ensure your business is listed in online directories, and encourage customer reviews. ### Analytics Tracking and analyzing your website's performance is crucial for understanding what works and what doesn’t. Use tools like Google Analytics and Google Search Console to monitor your traffic and search performance. For example, Google Search Console can show you which pages are getting the most traffic and which keywords are driving that traffic, even the Core Web Vitals data regarding the site. ## Conclusion SEO is an ongoing journey that requires patience and dedication to see significant results. The key to building a strong online presence and attracting organic traffic to your e-commerce store lies in consistency, relevance, and always prioritizing the user experience. Stick with it, and over time, you'll see your efforts pay off. [Gempages](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/gempages/)[Hands On Guide To Improve On Page Product SEO Audit Score](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/hands-on-guide-to-improve-on-page-product-seo-audit-score/) --- # The Google Algorithm leak and what it has to do with your SEO in Shopify Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/the-google-algorithm-leak-and-what-it-has-to-do-with-your-seo-in-shopify/ # The Google Algorithm leak and what it has to do with your SEO in Shopify Discover the impact of the Google Algorithm leak on your Shopify eCommerce SEO. Learn how to adapt your strategies and improve your online store's visibility with our expert insights and tips. In the ever-evolving world of search engine optimization (SEO), staying ahead is a constant challenge. Google updates its algorithm 500-600 times a year, including both major and minor tweaks. This algorithm has been the tightest held as top secret throughout so many years, until recently someone from the Google team accidentally pushed a portion (seemingly) of the source code written in Elixir to GitHub. As it fell into Microsoft's hands, one of the biggest competitors of Google, this quickly spread out and provided the most unprecedented look behind the curtain of the Google Algorithm secret. We all know how influential the Google Search Engine can be, and having this mechanism exposed is a game-changer for SEOs, and soon their ground would be shifting dramatically. The leaked code, encompassing over 14,000 attributes across 2,596 modules, offers a detailed glimpse into how Google ranks websites and content. While it’s unclear whether this is a complete or partial version of the algorithm, an internal prototype, or an outdated iteration, it has validated many long-held hypotheses in the SEO community. Notably, Google has not denied the authenticity of the leaked information. To digest all these attributes and modules, you may find many other posts breaking these in-depth Google algorithms to pieces. But we are here today to dig into the most critical findings from the Google algorithm leak to understand the current web trends, and also stay competitive in SEO. ## Keys Take Aways Here is the **TLDR version** if you need quick recapping: - Google do use click-through data from the search result page as a factor to rank pages by deciding between good and bad, long and short clicks. - Domain authority and Sitewide Metrics matter. This means staying consistent with high-quality content gives you a competitive edge. - Sandbox for new sites before being indexed in the ranking system. New sites will start low and gain credibility over time. There should be no such short-term tactics to help you up and running quickly. - Chrome UX data is used for ranking. Data from users collected via [CrUX (opens in a new tab)](https://developer.chrome.com/docs/crux) programs such as Core Web Vitals metrics play quite an important role, and even more so in the future. **Google does use click data as a ranking factor** Contrary to Google's repeated denials, the leak reveals that click data is indeed used as a ranking factor. This system, known as NavBoost, is part of the broader Panda algorithm. In particular, this implements many metrics such as long clicks, short clicks, and overall user engagement (maybe Core Web Vitals metrics). These metrics may have another comprehension as bounce rate, which SEO experts have acknowledged for the past years. This indicates that Google cares about is their users are visiting a site by clicking through a Google Search result and find themselves engaged in the content, or they go back to the search result page quickly right after realizing the site content revealing slow or misleading. So, the NavBoost system tracks and analyzes the bad and good clicks to determine which clicks lead to good browsing and match user intent accurately. However, do not misunderstand the click literally as "click", meanwhile it is click-through to be precise. If you are familiar with [Core Web Vitals (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/articles/vitals), you can tell that Google values websites with good standards and practices implemented for the sake of good user experience. Google has a strong faith that the Internet, or the Web is made for everyone, so it needs to serve us as humans, not just for some plain metrics. These data will be collected to ensure the search algorithm favors content that genuinely satisfies user needs because it is a data-driven world now. Moreover, with AI Search is nearly upon us. What do you think that AI is fed on? Yes, data. Which one? The one that users interact with and produce will directly impact your ranking. AI Search is on the way This means that SEOs must not only attract clicks but also ensure that visitors find the content engaging and valuable. High bounce rates and short dwell times can negatively impact rankings, making it essential to focus on user satisfaction and content quality. In fact, Google does not lie about this. They deny the plain clicks action for the ranking algorithm, meaning that if you stay on the page, and try to trick Google with a useless button to show good interaction, or anything similar, it will not work. ### Domain Authority and Sitewide Metrics The leaked documents also confirm the existence of a "siteAuthority" metric, contradicting Google’s longstanding claims that it doesn’t use a domain authority-like measure. This metric evaluates the overall quality and credibility of a site, affecting how content from that domain ranks. The existence of siteAuthority confirms that Google considers the overall trustworthiness and reputation of a domain when determining rankings. However, it does not mean that this factor will dominate the others, but as a supplementary one. A higher siteAuthority means that content from that domain is more likely to rank well, even if individual pages are not perfectly optimized. But on the contrary, if the individual page content is badly crafted, then the siteAuthority cannot make amends for the rest. This insight requires a consistent, site-wide building of strong, authoritative, and high-quality content instead of using tricks and tips just for a few pages. If you implement on-page SEO auditing, it is better to implement a site-wide approach to maximize the effect. **Sandbox for New Sites** Another revelation is the presence of a "hostAge" attribute, which effectively sandboxes new sites, especially those suspected of being spammy. This approach has also been long present in the field of IP reputation scoring of email marketing to prevent newly registered domains from sending spam emails. The hostAge attribute is designed to prevent newly created sites from manipulating search results through short-term tactics. By applying a sandboxing effect, Google can ensure that only genuinely valuable and reliable sites rise in the rankings over time. This mechanism is particularly relevant for new sites that have not yet built up a track record of quality content and user engagement. For new Shopify stores or websites, this means understanding that your site won’t be indexed immediately. Instead of trying to bypass this sandboxing effect, focus on improving your site’s legitimacy and quality content to make a good first impression on the Google Search engine. **Chrome Data Utilization** The leak also exposes Google’s use of Chrome browser data, or may known as [Chrome UX report data (opens in a new tab)](https://developer.chrome.com/docs/crux), to inform its ranking methodology. By analyzing clickstreams and user behavior within Chrome, Google gains unparalleled insights into site popularity and user engagement, which directly influence search rankings. This confirms that Google leverages data from its widely-used browser to refine its search algorithms. Google has also provided this data publicly as a benchmark for web developers to access their website performance by publicly collecting data from real users all over the world. You can find this data with [Treo.sh (opens in a new tab)](https://treo.sh/sitespeed/) or [Google PageSpeed Insight (opens in a new tab)](https://pagespeed.web.dev/). They can showcase Core Web Vitals metrics, geography metrics, devices, and connections aggregation data. Google PageSpeed Insights By focusing on these metrics, the author can optimize their sites not just for traditional search metrics but also for the user engagement metrics that Google monitors through Chrome. This approach to SEO ensures that your site not only ranks well but also provides a valuable and engaging experience for visitors, aligning with Google’s goal of delivering the best possible search results. However, please bear in mind, that there is no way that you should only focus solely on the Chrome users, but rather focusing on improving user experience overall. ## In a nutshell: User experience matters the most It is not important click data, or Chrome data, or Panda Algorithm matters more. However, the pattern is that Google prefers user engagement metrics that directly reflect the quality and relevance level of the site, which later on play an important role in ranking the website content. User experience can be affected by: - **Website performance**: Whether your site is loading slowly and driving the user back to the search result page. Whether your button or link is reacting quickly to user interaction. Whether your content is shifting around unpredictably causing bad user experience. - **Relevant content**: Don't be mischievous. Don't show irrelevant content compared to your search result title and description. - **Mobile optimization**: Does your site look good on mobile? Is it optimized for mobile device loading? - **Be data-driven**: Look at your site data via report, dashboard from Shopify, and Google Search Console to actively improve user experience rather than focusing on lab metrics such as Google PageSpeed Insights. By focusing on these areas, you can stay competitive in the SEO landscape and ensure your Shopify store thrives in the wake of the Google Algorithm leak. By focusing on these areas, you can stay competitive in the SEO landscape and ensure your Shopify store thrives in the wake of the Google Algorithm leak. ## What should I do in my Shopify store? ### Improve site performance If the page is loading slowly, the customer will run out of patience and soon drop out of the page. It can be worse when the click is a paid ad. It would even hurt your business more. We need to combine Real User Monitoring data with Page Speed Insight audit results to produce a website performance optimization scheme. Bear in mind that you need to optimize for a good user experience, which Google highly evaluates, not just some "lab" metrics. It is better to start trying to explore our site performance optimization suite, tailored to Shopify, with Page Preloading, App Deferral, Image optimization, Critical CSS Extraction, and more to make sure your site has the best performance possible for the sake of user experience, and of utmost importance, conversion rate. Explore more about [the State of the Web performance with Shopify](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/web-performance-with-shopify/) ### Optimized for mobile Make sure your Shopify store is using an up-to-date theme version that supports good mobile optimization. These days, a responsive website is a must-have feature for a theme. However, make sure to use the up-to-date theme version that is optimized for mobile devices regarding loading speed, interactivity, and stability of the UI components on the page. Sometimes, you bump into a Shopify theme that looks amazing on a desktop, you test its responsiveness with Chrome Dev tools and things seem just right. But while it is loaded on a mobile device, the button, and the scrolling seem to react slowly to user actions causing a bad user experience and bounce rate. The tip would be to prefer themes that are available on the [Shopify Theme Store (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/yZ9W33) over ones that are not, due to the fact that these themes meet the Shopify high standard, it will suffice your needs. ### Good Navigation and Browsing. Optimize your site's navigation to improve user engagement, especially on mobile since there is less space there: - Make sure that your site is showing basic browsing buttons easily: Cart button, Menu button, Home button, Search button. All should be easily accessible. - Make sure that this button's interactivity is responsive. If you click on the button add to cart, it should show a loading icon and open the slide cart, or cart popup quickly without any flickering. - Avoid having too many overlaying elements on the page, especially on small screen sizes. For example, having a spin-to-win wheel button, review button, and sales pop, along with an annoying popup for collecting emails at the same time will only harm your site user engagement. ### Create High-Quality, Relevant, and Authentic Content Start producing compelling blog content to attract and engage your audience. Focus on providing valuable insights, tips, and information related to your products or industry to establish your brand as a trusted authority. Google or any search engine would love to prioritize the author and vendors with fresh and high-quality content. ### Intent optimized Include FAQ sections and direct answers to common user questions within your content. This approach not only satisfies user intent but also increases the chances of appearing in featured snippets. Also to include review snippets. Google emphasizes the importance of high-quality, in-depth product reviews that genuinely help users make informed decisions. But beware of the originality of these reviews. Try collecting them directly from your customer with images, and video of the real user experience. Find it hard having a good blogging experience on Shopify admin? Get your blogging dream up and running again with [Avada AI Blog Builder (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/YVBLGP) app with an intuitive, Notion-like editor. ### Data driven Leverage geographical data to tailor your marketing strategies and product offerings to meet the needs of your target audience. Stay informed about your customer's preferences and behavior to make informed decisions and stay ahead of the competition. By prioritizing these areas, you can optimize your Shopify store for success and create a positive and engaging experience for your customers. Google prefers content that is tailored to specific locations and provides localized value. ## In conclusion Some of these leaks may sound astonishing to many people. However, these attributes must have been among the SEO experts for quite a long time. It is not so hard to come up with a hypothesis on the Google Algorithm and test it out. At the end of the day, Google cannot go against trends like Data-driven approaches, User engagement focus, and the use of AI to determine good, and original content. Google is trying to stay ahead of the curve all the time, at a much faster pace than us all. So it is best to stay loyal to providing a good customer experience over anything else that will never lag you behind this race. [Web Performance And Speed With Shopify Ecommerce In 2024](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/web-performance-and-speed-with-shopify-ecommerce-in-2024/)[Critical CSS Extraction Deep Dive](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/critical-css-extraction-deep-dive/) --- # Tips writing your meta title Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/tips-writing-your-meta-title/ # Tips writing your meta title SEO best practice for writing your meta title tag ## SEO best practice for writing your meta title tag There is a long list of SEO best practices to apply when writing your title tags. Here are a few things to bear in mind: ### Number of characters It is recommended to keep your meta title between 10 to 70 characters, with an optimal range of 50-60 characters. Google generally displays only the first 50-60 characters, so exceeding this limit may result in your title being truncated in search results. The exact number of characters displayed can vary based on factors like letter size and the device used. ### Place your keyword Including your main keyword in the title tag is crucial for SEO. This helps Google understand what your page is about and improves your chances of ranking for that keyword. Ideally, place your keyword **near the beginning of the title** to make it immediately clear to both users and search engines. For example: "Cable USB Type-C to DP (DisplayPort) 8K@60Hz, 4K@240Hz, Dynamic HDR". Here, the keyword is "USB Type-C to DP". **Avoid Stop Words** Stop words are common words such as "a", "the", "is", and "are" that don't add much meaning. Avoid using too many stop words in your title tag to maximize the use of relevant keywords. However, ensure the phrasing remains natural and readable. ### Seperators Separators like "-" or "|" help break up your title into distinct keywords and phrases, aiding Google in understanding the content. For instance, "Cable USB Type-C to DisplayPort - 8K@60Hz, 4K@240Hz - MacOS". ### Include company name, secondary keywords You can set this up in our [Custom meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags/) to include your Brand, or secondary keywords to make your title more descriptive: For example: "Cable USB Type-C to DisplayPort 8K@60Hz, 4K@240Hz | Bestsellers - Baseus" ## More examples Here are more meta title ideas for eCommerce: - "Shop [Product Category] Online | Best Deals & Discounts | [Your Brand]" - "Buy [Product Name] Online | Free Shipping & Returns | [Your Brand]" - "Upgrade Your [Product Category] | Exclusive Offers at [Your Brand]" The idea may apply similar to the meta description. You can see other brands on Shopify by `site:domain` to see their title and description on Google to explore more: [Does Outbound Links Matter In SEO](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/does-outbound-links-matter-in-seo/)[Writing A Good Product Description That Sales And SEO](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/writing-a-good-product-description-that-sales-and-seo/) --- # Web performance and speed with Shopify eCommerce in 2024 Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/web-performance-and-speed-with-shopify-ecommerce-in-2024/ # Web performance and speed with Shopify eCommerce in 2024 The in and out, the upside and downside of the web performance situation at Shopify now to achieve better store speed Web performance is a constantly-changing game and adventure that requires enormous effort put in to stay up-to-date. Shopify conceives the same idea here and continually updates its platform to meet the standard. ## Understanding the importance of Core Web Vitals. Improving your store performance is not merely about gaining the loading speed up by X percent. As we are in the world of eCommerce, we care about gaining traffic and turning traffic into sales. Customers expect websites to load quickly, and intuitively, and be responsive, not just "fast". As a leading player, Google thinks that the web requires a standard to guide developers in making a better web, in our case, a better eCommerce. [Core Web Vitals (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/articles/vitals) was introduced to address this matter and acted as a bible for improving website performance, and most important, user experience. These metrics provide a standard way to measure and optimize user experience. Using real user data, they are more representative of actual performance. Scoring well in web vitals feeds into better SEO results as well as higher conversion rates. ## The data-driven web performance. Understanding the fact that eCommerce is changing at a swift pace, so as the demand for a faster online store performance. The previous Speed Score used a single Lighthouse score to assess site performance. This educated a large population of merchants in the market. But, Lighthouse’s scoring criteria have their limitations. They fail to represent real-world user experiences, leading to confusion and frustration, such as: - The audit is taken place on a low network, and device condition, which resulted in an unparalleled report, not reflecting how users actually see the loading. May sometimes cause you to falsely comprehend your site speed. - Only able to audit with a few certain pages. Caused unbiased report. Sometimes, Lighthouse's scoring comes in handy when your store is just starting off the development, but after the launch, bad user experience reports may later on hurt your conversion rate silently. On January 31, 2024, Shopify rolled out a new web performance dashboard for the online store. The new web performance dashboard captures actual interactions and experiences from real users. This provides a fuller understanding of how your website performs in the real world. This includes all the variations of connection types, device types, locations, and browsers. ## What does this report tell you? You may find the report quite intuitive inside the Shopify admin already. You can explore the Shopify admin and understand the basic ideas it delivers. ### Low data or no data Just as we mentioned above, the PageSpeed Insight data may come in handy a bit more when you are just starting off. However, with low traffic, performance can appear to jump around from day to day. If this is the case, try grouping data by week or month. ### Read the dashboard With the web performance dashboard, pinpointing performance issues becomes easier. Rather than a single score, we now provide data and ratings for 3 areas that impact user experience. - **Loading Speed** represents how fast the page loads for the user, and is known as the Largest Contentful Paint. - **Interactivity** represents how responsive the site is when a user interacts with it. This may or may not be comprehended as Total Blocking Time. Due to the fact that the browser running your Javascript code, it cannot react to the clicking, and scrolling of your site, especially on mobile devices with low CPU. It can sometimes be your mobile nav bar, or mobile cart drawer that reacts slowly and then later on impacts the Interactivity score. - **Visual Stability** represents how smoothly the page loads, avoiding sections jumping around. Any rating that is not marked as good represents an opportunity for improvement. The data point provided for each measure is the reading from the 75th percentile. This means that 3 out of 4 users would have experienced a better experience than the rating. The 4th would have experienced something worse. You can explore the data further by clicking on the metric titles. This opens a more detailed view of each metric. You’ll see the percentage of users falling into each bucket of good, moderate, and poor. Using this data you can quickly identify areas that need improvement. Clicking the metric title or the icon in the top right corner of each card (and metric) will take you through to the time series breakdown. ## The good sides This Shopify updates give the data-driven approach the throne among all other performance optimization approaches: - You can see device and network data. If your customers are using a 4g+ connection, there would be no such care about the throttled report from Lighthouse with 1M of download speed allowed. - The removal of other irrelevant, seemingly-not-so-important metrics for you to care about: Total Blocking Time, Speed Index, First Contentful Paint. - Real-time data to see if your changes reflect a better site performance or not. ## The downsides There is no such perfect solution to one single problem all the time. Since we are using real user data, there would be a few drawbacks: - If your customer is not even viewing the site content, maybe it is taking too long, maybe the content seems irrelevant, and they will quit the page quickly enough that there is no data collected, as known as the bounce rate. - If no interaction on the page, there is no interactivity data collected. - If in an early development phase, it would not be very helpful. - If there is any blocking to the anonymous data collecting, there would be no data. Then, the report can be biased. ## Summary It is still better to have a deep-dive audit of your site leveraging all possible tools up the sleeves, not just one single metric or report. It may appear sometimes that you find your stores slow but the speed tells otherwise. In Avada SEO Suites, we provide support to tackle these with our deep-dive audit and performance optimization techniques. [Basic Core Web Vitals](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/basic-core-web-vitals/)[The Google Algorithm Leak And What It Has To Do With Your SEO In Shopify](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/the-google-algorithm-leak-and-what-it-has-to-do-with-your-seo-in-shopify/) --- # Writing a good product description that sales and "SEO" Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/writing-a-good-product-description-that-sales-and-seo/ # Writing a good product description that sales and "SEO" Learn how to write effective product descriptions for Shopify that boost sales and improve SEO ## What is a product description? Whenever preparing a product on Shopify, you need to write at least two important pieces of text: **product title** and **product description**. Besides the good-looking product images, the product description can help your customer with their purchasing decision by providing details and features regarding the product itself. A product description can vary in word count, style, and format. Sometimes it is represented in the mutual voice, and sometimes in a brand's unique voice. It depends on how the brand communicates with the customers. ## What makes a good product description? A good and well-crafted would be able to deliver these goals: - Informs customers about product features, how to use them, and benefits. This helps customers quickly scan for information about the product and how it works. - Showing value and style. It can show customers how this product can solve a real-life problem, showing the brand voice over their product. Besides what it can deliver to customers, a good product description can help search engines scan and understand your product information and show your product to the desired customer intent. ## How to write a good product description This day, you may find that many people recommend you use AI tools like [ChatGPT (opens in a new tab)](https://openai.com/index/chatgpt/) to write your product description. However, these are a few things that so-called AI-generated descriptions can miss out: - Failed to use inline formatting: **bold**, *italic*, and underline to make the text legit. - Failed to provide in-depth product information such as features, details on manufacturer, material, or anything that customers specifically care about. - Failed to provide internal, and external links to pages on your store or on the internet because the AI cannot understand the store as much as you do, and it cannot trace back the information reference. To stand out in the market, you will need to leave your marks by writing a product description that speaks on behalf of your brand. ### Highlight your product If you look up on the Internet, some others might say that while writing a product description, you should focus on the benefits, not just the features. In plain English, it just means that you should explain clearly how each feature will solve the customer's problem and enhance their life quality over just a few bullet lines of fancy feature names, which are hardly comprehensible to customers. Take the product description from Casper below. They did quite a good job by explaining their features not just spamming the jargon: Zoned Support, Snow Technology, or Hybrid Technology. Last but not least, there is a punch line that sales: **Don't lose sleep**. I would definitely fall for that. Casper writing your prduct description There are a couple of things that Casper excels in writing product descriptions: - Use **inline formatting** with bold and italic format, and even color. - Break the content with **bullets** - Call to action with a simple punch line. ### Format your description for easy scanning As I mentioned earlier, not just AI-generated content is missed out on the formatting, the same goes with human-generated ones if they are not well-crafted. Here are a few tips for a better visual format of your text: - **Keep it compact:** Try not to write a lengthy product description. If it is less than 50 words, keeping a short and single paragraph would be fine. A good Shopify product description should range from 50 to 150 words combining below formatting techniques. - **Use headlines:** If your description is beyond 150 words, you should begin to break down the content with subheadings, which is not just good for the customers, but also for SEO. - **Use bullet points:** Break up information into easy-to-read bullet points like features, and highlights. It can be a number or a non-number. Or just break the line and use the inline formatting like bold, italic just like [AllBirds (opens in a new tab)](https://www.allbirds.com/products/mens-canvas-pipers) did. - **Use high-quality product images (optional):** Normally the product description does not need to include the image of the product. Sometimes, you can include size chart images, or how to use images. But they are not required since the product image section already does its part. - **Use outbound links (optional):** Although it is optional, it is highly recommended to attach links to your content like Allbirds attach links to their [Carbon footprint labeling commitment (opens in a new tab)](https://www.allbirds.com/pages/sustainable-practices) page. This shows customers that the brand does really care about environmental impacts and will highly appreciate the product. Learn more about the [outbound links](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/does-outbound-links-matter-in-seo/). Allbirds break down their content with structure formatting Allbirds use bullet point and outbound links ### Be your own version Some might say that a brand should tell a story, show its product vision, etc. However, you are maybe just starting out small, ordering a few products from the manufacturer, and setting up the store. So, what story to tell in the description apart from copying the boring product specification from the manufacturer? Well, then don't. Unique content performs better in search engine rankings and also in customer's hearts. So write your own version, add your own story, visions, and your own experience trying the sample product. This practice will also help you understand the customer persona by looking at the product from the customer's point of view. ## Beyond product description So far we have been talking solely about the product description as a copywriting composed of text and images, stored in the Shopify field called **description.** Nonetheless, the product description is more than just plain text. The product description can be anything within the product page of your store ### Showing additional data The product additional information, which you store on [Shopify Metafields (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/custom-data/metafields) and pull out using Shopify [Dynamic Source (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.dev/docs/storefronts/themes/architecture/settings/dynamic-sources) can be displayed on the product page. It is recommended to store this information in Product Metafields instead of using Text Block in the Theme Editor or using Page Builder to store that information. In addition, you may want to add a FAQ section for your product page, which is highly recommended for both customers and search engines. ### Showcase social proof You can showcase social proofs such as collected reviews as a way to help your customer with their purchasing decisions by providing indirect pieces of advice from trusted sources. While writing the product description, you cannot be a neutral third-party voice. This is where customer reviews and industry testimonials come into play. Finding [product review apps (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/NG4XDV) these days is not so hard. Try rewards to suggest your customers leave organic reviews, and opinions on the product that truly reflect the customer experience. Gaining that over time also helps you to gain your credibility over time. ### Treat it like a landing page Customers do not just stop scrolling at the product image and description, they scroll for more down the way. Add more block section content below the product information sections showing highlights of your product with banners. See [Casper product page (opens in a new tab)](https://casper.com/mattresses/casper-one-foam.html) to understand the idea. Banner for showing features of the product You can design illustrations, and banners that visually showcase your product's best features and benefits that easily catch customers' eyes. Bear in mind this, the product description is for *customers and search engines*, meanwhile, the image banners are for *customers solely*, so make it count. ## It is worth the while. Trust me Writing a product description is not just about listing out a bunch of features, but is a means for you to connect with your potential customers and audience, and persuade them that your product can fit into their lives. It is a good sign that you enjoy writing it. Paying attention to perfectly craft it as you may do to your website and products. P/S: Furthermore, it is good for Search engine optimization anyway. Google cares about high-quality content, with no tricks all the way around. Find out more on [The Google Algorithm leak and what it has to do with your SEO in Shopify](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/the-google-algorithm-leak-and-what-it-has-to-do-with-your-seo-in-shopify/) [Tips Writing Your Meta Title](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/tips-writing-your-meta-title/)[App Deferral For Shopify Store Speed Optimization Deep Dive](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/app-deferral-for-shopify-store-speed-optimization-deep-dive/) --- # Broken link Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link/ # Broken link Broken link manager helps you to detect 404 links and remove them by redirecting **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. - Advanced settings are available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. ## What is it? This helps you to detect all [404 error pages](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/#undefined) and redirect them to a new URL of your choice. ## Why should you use it? - Improve user experience by preventing users from going to 404 links or dead ends - Help maintain SEO value by redirecting traffic from 404 links to relevant, active pages - Reduce bounce rate caused by users leaving after hitting a 404 error ## How does it work? In 404 link managers, you can set up automated redirect and custom redirect. - Automated redirect: This helps auto detect and redirect 404 pages to new URL. - Custom redirect: This helps redirect specific 404 pages to new URL. ### Automated redirect - Go to "Broken link manager" - In Auto-redirect, click **Edit** - **Temporary redirect**: This helps redirect 404 pages to new URL temporarily. SEO value won't be transferred to new URL. This helps improve user experience when directing 404 link to new URL temporarily. Click Turn on -> Select page **Permanent redirect (301)**: This helps redirect 404 pages to new URL permanently. SEO value will be transferred to new URL. Learn more about [301](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link/301-and-302-redirect/). - Select how often you want us to auto-detect and fix 404 pages: Daily and weekly - Select redirect URL You'll set up redirect URL for 404 pages which are Product pages, Collection pages, Blog pages or Others. For example, if a product page goes broken, it will be redirected to new URL as set up. ### Custom Redirect In Custom redirect, you can check all 404 links detected in your site with its status and traffic. You can set up redirect to fix each 404 link. - Click **Add direct** - Enter the URL that you want to redirect from - Select your target type for the Redirect - Click **Add** - You can edit or delete rules anytime by clicking on the **Edit** or **Delete** buttons To select all broken links in all pages: Click **checkbox** to select all links on that page -> Click **Select all** to select all links in all pages. ## Report In report, you can check how many 404 links are resolved and not. 404 links that are redirected to new URL by "Temporary redirect" are **not considered as resolved**. ## Export and import ### Export Click **Export** to export all 404 pages with its details to your devices. ### Import 404 report from Google Search Console - Log in to Google search console - Go to **Pages** -> Not found (404) - Click **Export** -> Click **Download CSV** - In "Custom redirect", click **Import** -> Drop your file exported from Google Search Console - Click **Upload.** Select the checkbox "Override the broken link with matching CSV file" if you want to check and replace matching values. ## Get notification when detected 404 pages You can [set up email notification](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/email-notification/) to get email everytime we detect a 404 page on your website. You can simply click Notifications settings in the banner to go set up notification. [Google Search Consoles](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/google-search-consoles/)[301 And 302 Redirect](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link/301-and-302-redirect/) --- # 301 and 302 redirect Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link/301-and-302-redirect/ # 301 and 302 redirect The difference between 301 and 302 redirect 301 redirect302 redirect **What is 301?**A 301 redirect indicates that a page has been moved to a new location permanently.**What is 302?**A 302 redirect indicates that the page redirection is temporary. **When to use?**301 is recommended when you have to change the URL of a page as it passes most of the ranking power (SEO value) to the redirected page.**When to use?**It is often used for situations like a temporary relocation of a webpage's content during maintenance. **Authority Transfer**Nearly all the link juice and existing SEO value from the original URL are transferred to the new URL**Limited Authority Transfer**A 302 redirect doesn't pass on as much link equity as a 301. Since the redirect is supposed to be temporary, search engines will still hold the original URL in their index **Search Engine Indexing**Search engines will de-index the old URL and index the new URL as the official source of content.**Search Engine Indexing**The original URL remains indexed, and search engines expect it to be back eventually. This might be a disadvantage if the move becomes permanent because the new URL won't benefit fully from the established SEO value of the original URL. **User Experience** A 301 redirect ensures users who have bookmarked the old URL, or clicked on an old link, are seamlessly transferred to the new URL without encountering a 404 error page**User Experience** While it prevents users from reaching a dead end, it can be confusing if the redirect remains in place too long, as users and search engines may not understand the temporary intent [Broken Links](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link/)[Internal Link](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/internal-link/) --- # Email notification Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/email-notification/ # Email notification Set up email notifications to get emails for your SEO report **Who can use this feature?** - Email of "Optimize images" is for all users - Other email notification is for Pro and Enterprice plan users Email notification is a tool help you to set up email and we'll send you important update. This keep you in the loop automatically. Get timely updates on your SEO stats or when image optimization wraps up. Email type we support: Email typeWhen we sendFrequency Complete image optimization"Optimize images" process is completed Revert optimized imageRevert all" process is completed 404 pages report404 Pages are detected in storeWeekly - Go to "Settings" -> Click **Email notification** - Turn on type of email you want to receive & set up how often you want to receive (for 404 pages report only) - In "Email subcriber list", enter emails to get email - Click **Save** - You can send a test email to see how does it work. Click **Send test email** - Enter your email address and select type of email - Click **Send** By default, emails will be sent to your email address (which you use to log in Shopify) [XML Sitemap](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/xml-sitemap/)[Shopify Flow](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/shopify-flow/) --- # Google search consoles Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/google-search-consoles/ # Google search consoles How to set up Google search consoles & take advantage of it **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. Google Search Console is a fantastic tool that helps you understand how Google views your website. It provides detailed reports about your website's visibility on Google. - Go to "Google search console" - Click **Sign in with Google** -> Sign in with email that is connected with your website in [Google search console (opens in a new tab)](https://search.google.com/search-console/welcome) - Select website that you want to analyze - Click **Save** ## Understand Search report The Search Report provides detailed information about your website. It includes three types of data: Web, Image, and Video. - **Total clicks**: This is the number of times a user clicked through to your site. The way this is counted depends on the type of search result. - **Total impressions**: This is the number of times a user saw a link to your site in search results. The calculation method varies for images and other search result types, depending on whether or not the result was scrolled into view. - **Average CTR**: This is the percentage of impressions that resulted in a click. - **Average position**: This is the average position of your site in search results, based on its highest position whenever it appeared in a search. The position of individual pages is available in the table below the chart. Position determination can be complicated by features such as carousels or Knowledge Panels. ## Work with sitemaps To add a new [sitemap](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/html-sitemap/), please enter the sitemap and click **Submit**. The status of the sitemaps you've added will be displayed below. If you want to remove any sitemap, simply click the **Delete**. [Site Verification](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/site-verification/)[Broken Links](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link/) --- # Internal link Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/internal-link/ # Internal link Automatically build internal links across your store so every page gets discovered and ranked. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro users. ## Overview This feature helps you build internal links across your store automatically. It scans all pages to identify which ones lack internal links, generates relevant anchor texts using AI, and suggests where to insert links — so Google can crawl your store more effectively and distribute link equity across all pages. ## Why internal links matter Internal links connect your store's pages together. When Google crawls your site, it follows links to discover and index pages. Pages without any internal links (orphan pages) are harder for Google to find and tend to rank lower. Good internal linking also helps customers navigate between related products, collections, and content — keeping them on your store longer and increasing the chance of a purchase. ## How it works The feature works in three stages: - **Scan** — the app crawls your store to count incoming and outgoing internal links for every page. - **Set anchor texts** — enter anchor text manually for each page, or use AI to generate them automatically. - **Suggest and approve links** — the app matches anchor texts against content on other pages to find natural insertion points, then presents suggestions for you to review and approve. ## How to use ### Navigate to the feature Go to **Link manager → Internal link** tab. ### Scan your store Click **Scan** in the Report section. The app will analyze all pages and show: - **Pages without internal links** — pages that have no links pointing to them from other pages - **Pages with internal links** — pages that already have at least one internal link ### Set anchor texts In the **Automatic internal linking** section, under **Anchor text**, check how many pages are missing anchor text. You have two options: - **Enter manually** — click on any page in the resource table and type in your own anchor text. - **Generate with AI** — click **Generate missing anchors** to let AI create anchor texts automatically (1 credit per page). ### Review link suggestions Once anchor texts are set, the app generates link suggestions. Under **Internal links**: - View the total number of link suggestions available - Click **Approve all** to accept all suggestions at once - Or review suggestions individually by clicking on each item in the resource table ### Browse your pages Use the resource table to see the full picture for each page: ColumnWhat it shows TitlePage name with thumbnail Anchor textThe anchor text assigned to this page Incoming linksNumber of internal links pointing to this page Outgoing linksNumber of internal links from this page to other pages SuggestionsNumber of pending link suggestions ## Best practices - **Start with a scan** — always scan first to get an accurate picture of your store's current internal linking status - **Review AI-generated anchor texts** — AI generates relevant anchors, but review them to ensure they match your brand voice and target keywords - **Don't approve blindly** — check suggestions before approving, especially for important pages like your homepage or best-selling products - **Focus on orphan pages first** — pages with zero incoming links benefit the most from internal linking - **Keep it natural** — a few relevant internal links per page are better than stuffing links everywhere. Over-linking can look spammy to both Google and customers - **Re-scan periodically** — as you add new products or content, scan again to keep your internal linking up to date ## FAQs ### What does the internal linking feature do? It scans your entire store to find pages missing internal links, then uses AI to generate anchor texts and suggest where to insert links between related pages. This improves your store's SEO by helping Google crawl and index all pages effectively. ### Why do I need to set anchor texts first? Anchor text is the clickable text that appears in a link. Google uses anchor text to understand what the linked page is about. Without anchor text set, the app cannot generate link suggestions. You can enter it manually or use AI to generate it automatically. ### How are internal link suggestions generated? After anchor texts are set, the app analyzes the content of all pages in your store to find suitable places to insert links. It matches the context between source and target pages to ensure suggestions are topically relevant. You can review each suggestion individually or approve all at once. ### Will the app automatically change my content? No. The app only suggests internal links — you must review and approve them before any changes are made to your content. You have full control: accept, reject, or modify each suggestion. ### Can this feature harm my SEO if I add too many links? Adding too many irrelevant links to a single page can be seen as spam by Google. However, the app is designed to suggest links based on content relevance, which helps avoid over-linking. We recommend reviewing suggestions and only approving links that are genuinely relevant to the page content. [301 And 302 Redirect](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link/301-and-302-redirect/)[Sitemap Generator](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/) --- # Settings Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/settings/ # ⚙️ Settings General settings in Avada SEO Suite ## Language Avada SEO Suite are available in 8 languages: - English - Brazilian Portuguese - Danish - Dutch - French - German - Chinese - Spanish - Swedesh - Vietnamese ## App settings By turning on/off app status, you turn on/off all functions of Avada SEO Suite. When you change your website theme, click **Republish** to enable Avada SEO Suite on your new theme. ## Email notification Learn [how to turn on email notification.](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/settings/#email-notification) ## Integration Avada SEO Suite is integrated with review apps and page builder app. ## Your plan This shows which plan you are using app right now. [Shopify Flow](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/shopify-flow/)[Air Reviews](/seo-suite-help-center/integration/air-reviews/) --- # Shopify Flow Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/shopify-flow/ # Shopify Flow How to make an workflow to automate your SEO with Shopify Flow **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users ## Optimize image alt With this automation, we help optimize image alt text of all new images that are added to your store. - Go to app Flow - Click Create workflow - Click Select a trigger to choose when to start your automation - Select **Shopify** -> Select any trigger related to product. Triggers that are supported: Product created - Product deleted - Product status updated - Product variant added - Product variant back in stock - Product variant deleted - Product variant back in stock You can search or filter by categories to find it. - In workflow, click `+` to add action -> click **Action** -> select **Avada SEO Suite** -> select **Optimize product image alt** - Click **Turn on workflow** and confirm to start automation. - After turning on workflow, you can go to **Recent runs** in Flow to check if this workflow works. [Email Notification](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/email-notification/)[Settings](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/settings/) --- # Site verification Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/site-verification/ # Site verification How to verify site on various web management tools **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. ## What is ownership verification? Ownership verification means proving to Search Console that you own a specific website. A verified owner has the [highest degree of permissions (opens in a new tab)](https://support.google.com/webmasters/answer/7687615#owner_type) in Search Console. **Why do I need to verify ownership?** Site owners in Search Console have access to sensitive Google Search information about a site. Site owners can also perform actions that can affect a site's presence and behavior on Google Search and other Google services. Because of this, we want to make sure that only a real site owner is granted owner permissions on Search Console. Avada SEO Suite helps you to verify your store's ownership on popular web management tools such as Google Search Console, Bing Webmaster Tools, Pinterest, Yandex Webmaster Tools, Baidu Webmaster Tools, Alexa Certify Javascript, and Norton Safe Web. - In "Site verification" tab in menu, select which web management tool you want to verify your ownership - Fill in suitable `meta tag` - Click **Save** to start verifying your site ## Google Search Console - Sign in your [Google search console (opens in a new tab)](https://search.google.com/search-console/welcome) - Select HTML tag -> Click **Copy** meta tag - Get back to Avada SEO Suite and paste meta tag - Click Save - Get back to Google search console and click **Verify** ## Bing Webmaster Tools - Sign in [Bing Webmaster tool (opens in a new tab)](https://www.bing.com/webmasters/about) - In "Add a site", fill in your website URL -> click **Add** - Copy `meta tag` - Get back to Avada SEO Suite and paste `meta tag` -> Click **Save** - Get back to Bing Webmaster tool and click **Verify** ## Pinterest - Go to [Pinterest Claim your website (opens in a new tab)](https://help.pinterest.com/en/business/article/claim-your-website) to sign in or register for a Pinterest account - Click on **Setting** -> Go to **Claim** - Fill in your website link and click **Claim** - Select **Add HTML tag** - Copy the meta tag - Get back to Avada SEO Suite and Paste it - Click **Save** - Get back to Pinterest -> click **Next** and wait for your page to be verified. ## Yandex Webmaster Tools - Go to [Yandex (opens in a new tab)](https://passport.yandex.com/passport?mode=auth&retpath=https%3A%2F%2Fwebmaster.yandex.com%2Fsites%2Fadd%2F) - Sign in or register for an account - Click **Setting** -> add your Site Address -> click **Add** - Copy the meta tag and paste it into Avada SEO Suite -> click **Save** - Click **Verify now** to verify your page ## Baidu - To register for a Baidu account for foreigners, please click [here (opens in a new tab)](https://passport.baidu.com/v2/?login) - To get the verification, please follow the steps here. Please note that you should choose the HTML Tag Verification method. - Copy the meta tag and paste it into the Baidu Webmaster Tools field of Avada SEO Suite - Click **Save** - Click to verify your page. ## Alexa Certify Javascript - Go to [Alexa (opens in a new tab)](https://www.alexa.com/siteinfo) and sign in - Follow [this guide (opens in a new tab)](https://www.bloggerspice.com/2015/02/claim-and-verify-your-Blogger-site-in-Alexa-for-traffic-rank.html) to get your meta tag - Copy and paste in to Avada SEO Suite - Click **Save** ## Norton Safe web - Go to [Norton Submission Portal (opens in a new tab)](https://safeweb.norton.com/submit_dispute) - Click My profile -> Site dispute -> Add site - Enter your site's URL and click **Submit** - Copy the meta tag and paste it into the Avada SEO Suite - Click **Save** [AI Content](/seo-suite-help-center/ai-content/)[Google Search Consoles](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/google-search-consoles/) --- # Sitemap generator Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/ # Sitemap generator Generate custom HTML/XML sitemaps to optimize your SEO **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. ## What is sitemap? A sitemap is a list of all the pages on a website. ## How does it help? Sitemap helps search engines like Google find and understand your website better. It’s like giving Google a map of your house, showing where every room (webpage) is. This helps: - Find all your pages faster - Know when you update pages - Understand which pages are most important - Index your site more efficiently ## Sitemap difference XML vs HTML Both types can improve SEO, but they serve different audiences and purposes. XMLHTML Main usersPrimarily for search enginesPrimarily for website visitors FormatXML codeRegular webpage format PurposeHelp search engines crawl and indexHelp visitors navigate website ContentURLs, last update, priority, and change frequencyList of pages in a simple link format LocationSubmitted to search enginesOften accessible in the website’s footer **The key difference:** XML sitemaps are for search engines to crawl better, while HTML sitemaps are for helping visitors find pages on your site. ## Generate your sitemap [XML sitemap](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/xml-sitemap/)[HTML sitemap](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/html-sitemap/) ## Submit sitemap You need to connect your Google Search Console to submit sitemap. [Internal Link](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/internal-link/)[HTML Sitemap](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/html-sitemap/) --- # HTML sitemap Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/html-sitemap/ # HTML sitemap How to create HTML sitemap to improve user navigation, making it easier for visitors to find important pages on your site **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. An HTML sitemap is a webpage that lists all crucial pages of a website, making it easy for visitors to find content. It helps with SEO by ensuring that search engines can discover and index all the pages on your site. Think of it as a map for users and search bots to navigate your website more effectively. Avada SEO Suite helps you to generate a HTML sitemap, which will be shown as a page on your website. ## Create HTML sitemap - In Sitemap generator > HTML sitemap - Set the toggle to ON ## How to remove HTML Sitemap Pages - In Sitemap generator > HTML sitemap - Set the toggle to OFF [Sitemap Generator](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/)[XML Sitemap](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/xml-sitemap/) --- # XML sitemap Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/xml-sitemap/ # XML sitemap How to create your XML sitemap for search engines to easily find and index your website **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. An XML sitemap is a file that lists all the pages on a website, helping search engines like Google find and index them easily. It guides search engines like Google to the content you want noticed, improving visibility in search results. We help you edit XML sitemap and manage sub sitemap & URLs. All Shopify stores automatically generate a sitemap.xml file here: `yourdomain.com/sitemap.xml.` What is sub sitemap? **A sub sitemap:** is a smaller, focused section of an XML sitemap that groups specific types of pages, like blog posts, product pages, or categories. Sub sitemap helps organize large websites by breaking down the sitemap into manageable parts, making it easier for search engines to crawl and understand content by topic or structure. ## Create & submit XML sitemap ### Turn on XML sitemap Go to SEO tools -> Click Sitemap generator -> Turn on XML sitemap ### Manage sub sitemap You can select sub sitemap and URL you want to include in sitemap. In URL management, you can add or exclude each URL to sitemap. ### Submit sitemap Click Update for the latest sitemap -> Click Submit You need to connect your [Google Search Console](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/google-search-consoles/) account to submit sitemap. If you turn off XML sitemap (that has been submitted to Google Search Console), sitemap will stay in the GSC but all URLs in sitemap will be deleted. ## Custom XML sitemap ### In Settings, click Edit ### Edit your settings You have options to custom XML sitemap: - Set URL count limit for each sub sitemap: Set a limit for the number of URL in each sitemap. If number of URLs in a sitemap exceeds limit, a new sub sitemap will be auto-created. - Set rules to auto-exclude pages from sitemap - Set auto-update frequency: Sitemap will be updated automatically when you add new pages to your site (products, collections or blog posts) [HTML Sitemap](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/html-sitemap/)[Email Notification](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/email-notification/) --- # Privacy policy Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/privacy-policy/ # 🔏 Privacy policy How Avada collects, handles, and processes data of its clients and customers ## Introduction This privacy policy describes the information Avada Commerce, Inc. ("Avada", “we” or “us”) collect from End Users (“you”) of our website (the “Site”) and the information we collect on behalf of our clients who employ our technology to use our email messaging, analytics, and other services (the “Services”). This policy does not apply to third parties that Avada does not own or control. Such third parties are not under Avada’s control and Avada is not responsible for their privacy or security practices. Any order forms or additional agreements to which users agree governing the provision of optional Avada features shall take precedence over the terms of this Privacy Policy to the extent of any differences, so please read such order forms or additional agreements carefully. Avada participates in and complies with the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework and the Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework. Avada’s accountability for personal data that it receives under the Privacy Shield and subsequently transfers to a third party is described in EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks below. In particular, Avada remains responsible and liable under the Privacy Shield Principles if third-party agents that it engages to process the personal data on its behalf do so in a manner inconsistent with the Principles, unless Avada proves that it is not responsible for the event giving rise to the damage. ## Site Privacy Policy We collect, process, and retain information from you and any devices you may use when you use or interact with our Site and Services, and in other ways described below. We receive and store information you enter on our Site or give us in any other way, including your name, mailing address, phone number, email address, and payment information, as well as company name, and colleagues’ names and email addresses. We collect information about your use of our Site, such as the pages you view and other interactions you have. We receive and store certain types of information whenever you interact with our Site. Our Site uses “cookies,” tagging and other tracking technologies to help enable us to enhance or personalize your online browsing experience. This information includes computer and connection information such as statistics on your page views, traffic to and from our Site, referral URL, ad data, your IP address, and device identifiers. This information also may include your browsing history, transaction history, and your web log information. We use your information to help us personalize and continually improve your experience on the Site, including fulfilling requests for information, analyzing and compiling trends and statistics, and communicating with you. For information about how to manage your information and the choices you have, see how to limit the use of your information below. ## Cookies and Interest-Based Advertising Cookies are alphanumeric identifiers transferred to your computer’s hard drive through your Web browser to enable our systems to recognize your browser and tell us how and when pages in our Site are visited and by how many people. Like most internet sites, We uses cookies to enhance our users’ experience on the internet. These cookies do not collect personal information, and we do not combine information collected through cookies with other personal information to tell us who you are or what your name or e-mail address is. Most browsers allow you to prevent the browser from accepting new cookies, to be notified when you receive a new cookie, or to disable cookies. If you delete your cookies or if you set your browser to decline cookies, some features of the Site may not work or may not work as designed. Note that if you choose to remove cookies, you may remove opt-out cookies that affect your advertising preferences. We partner with third-party advertising companies who also use these tracking tools to provide advertisements on other websites. These third parties may use these technologies to collect information about you when you use the Site. They may collect information about your online activities over time and across different websites and other online services. They may also use persistent identifiers to track your Internet usage across other websites in their networks beyond the Site. They may use this information to provide you with interest-based advertising or other targeted content. While we do not knowingly provide these entities with information that personally identifies you such third parties may, with sufficient data from other sources, be able to personally identify you, unknown to us. Some content or applications on the Site may be served by unaffiliated third parties. We do not control these third parties’ tracking technologies or how they may be used. We are not responsible for the content or privacy practices on any website not operated by us to which our Site links or that links to our Site. Your browser or device may include “Do Not Track” functionality. Our information collection and disclosure practices, and the choices that we provide to visitors, will continue to operate as described in this privacy notice, whether or not a Do Not Track signal is received. We use Google Analytics, a web analytics service provided by Google, Inc., on our Site. Google Analytics uses cookies or other tracking technologies to help us analyze how users interact with and use the Site, compile reports on the Site’s activity, and provide other services related to Site activity and usage. The technologies used by Google may collect information such as your IP address, time of visit, whether you are a return visitor, and any referring website. The Site does not use Google Analytics to gather information that personally identifies you. The information generated by Google Analytics will be transmitted to and stored by Google and will be subject to Google’s privacy policies. To learn more about Google’s partner services and to learn how to opt out of tracking of analytics by Google click here. Many of the third party advertisers that place tracking tools on our Site are members of programs that offer you additional choices regarding the collection and use of your information. You can learn more about the options available to limit these third parties’ collection and use of your information by visiting the websites for the Network Advertising Initiative and the Digital Advertising Alliance. Similarly, you can learn about your options to opt-out of mobile app tracking by certain advertising networks through your device settings. Please note that opting-out of advertising networks services does not mean that you will not receive advertising on other websites, nor will it prevent the receipt of interest-based advertising from third parties that do not participate in these programs. It will, however, exclude you from interest-based advertising conducted through participating networks, as provided by their policies and choice mechanisms. ## Collection, Use, and Disclosure of End Users’ Information Through Our Services This section describes our policies for handling information about End Users provided to us by our clients using our Services or other sources of their choosing. We provide our clients with the ability to create profiles of their End Users in order to effectively communicate with them via marketing communications tools like email, analytics services. To do this, our clients integrate our technology into their applications, websites, or other online services. Our clients’ collection, use, and disclosure of data is separately governed by their privacy policies. Our clients may collect information about their users directly; in that case, each of our clients is responsible for ensuring that their data collection follows their privacy policies and terms of use. ### Collection In the course of providing Services to our clients, We collects customer information, purchases or product views (WITHOUT customer's emails, credit card information, customer's addresses, or any personally identifiable information (“PII”) ) about End Users of our clients. We uses this information to provide our Services to our clients. We may automatically collect information about your use, navigation of, and interactions with our clients’ applications, websites, or other online services when our client has installed our technology on its properties. Cookies that we set on our clients’ websites expire after three years and the expiration date updates every time you encounter our server. We retains standard web log data 5 years after you visit a client’s website, and aggregations and reports for up to 10 years after you visit a client’s website. ### Use and Disclosure We collect information about End Users at our clients’ direction and may append information to End Users’ profiles from third party sources. We do this to provide our Services, which enable our clients to optimize their communications with, and understanding of, their End Users. We consider our clients’ End Users’ information to be confidential to that client. Accordingly, we do not disclose End User information to unaffiliated third parties except in response to our clients’ explicit instructions, as provided for in an agreement between us and our client, or as otherwise described in this Privacy Policy (for example, as necessary to respond to legal requirements). We may provide services or sell products jointly with affiliated businesses. We may share End User information collected from our clients that is related to such transactions with those affiliated businesses. We require our affiliates, via contract, to provide the same level of privacy protection as set forth in this policy and they do not have the right to share or use PII for any purpose other than for an authorized transaction. If we ever were to engage in any onward transfers of your data with third parties for a purpose other than which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized, we would provide you with an opt-out choice to limit the use and disclosure of your personal data. ### Information Clients Provide to Us We receive and store any information clients enter on the Site, through the Services, or provide to us in any other way. Clients can choose not to provide us with certain information, but then they may not be able to take advantage of many of our features. We use clients’ information for such purposes as responding to their requests for Services, customizing the content they see, communicating with them about our products, and marketing our Services to them. In order for clients to use all of our features, they must register with us. We require clients’ e-mail addresses and passwords during the registration process. Further information may be required if clients choose to purchase paid components of the Services, such as credit card and billing information. We uses third party partners for credit card processing who may require and store your credit card and billing information. ### E-mail Communications If a client purchases Avada’s online tools to collect and analyze user and usage data for its websites, applications, or services, we will communicate with it about the services it purchases by e-mail. Clients consent to receiving such confirmations by e-mail. If clients contact us via e-mail, we may retain a record of their contact information and any information they provide us in their messages to respond to them. We may receive a confirmation when clients open an e-mail from us. We may also send e-mails with news or promotions. If clients do not want to receive news or promotional e-mail from us, please contact us at [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) (this will not affect e-mails related to certain important, legal, or service-related messages such as outage information). ## Other Important Information **Your California Privacy Rights** If you are a California resident, California law permits you to request certain information regarding the disclosure of your PII by us and our related companies to third parties for the third parties’ direct marketing purposes. To make such a request, please send your request, by mail or email, to the addresses listed at the end of this policy. **Agents** We employ other companies and people to perform tasks on our behalf and need to share client and End User information with them to provide products and services. Examples include billing, processing payments, providing marketing assistance, and providing customer service. Our agents use the same level of privacy protection as we do. Unless we tell you differently, Ưe does not share, and our agents do not have any right to use, PII collected from our Site and Services beyond what is necessary to assist us. **Business Transfers** In some cases, we may change our ownership or corporate organization, or may choose to buy or sell assets. End User information may be transferred to another entity, its affiliates, or service providers in connection with the transaction. You acknowledge that such transfers may occur, and that Avada or its successor organization may continue to use your information as set forth in this policy. **Protection of Avada and Others** We may release PII when we in our sole discretion believe in good faith that release is necessary or appropriate to comply with the law, enforce or apply our conditions of use and other agreements, or protect the rights, property, or safety of Avada, our employees, our clients, or others. We also may be required to disclose an individual’s PII in response to a lawful request by public authorities, including to meet national security or law enforcement requirements. **Information Security** Clients’ Avada account information is protected by a password for your privacy and security as well as other reasonable security measures. We use reasonable safeguards to protect the security of clients’ information during transmission, including by encrypting all of the information clients input. Only employees or agents who need PII to perform a specific job are granted access to it. All of our employees are kept up to date on our privacy and security practices. While we uses commercially reasonable means to secure information provided to us, we do not guarantee that such information will not be improperly accessed, disclosed, or destroyed by breach of any of our safeguards. Clients and End Users are responsible for the security of their information that is transmitted to us or that is viewed, downloaded, or otherwise accessed when using unencrypted, public or otherwise unsecured networks. **Accessing Information** ou are able to access, add to, update, correct, amend, or delete certain information about you, including PII. When you update information, however, we often maintain a copy of the unrevised information in our records. A client may deactivate its Avada account by following the deactivation process set forth on the Site. Some information may remain in our records after account deletion. Please contact us at [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) if you have questions or concerns about accessing, correcting, or deleting your PII. EU and Swiss data subjects have a right to access their information. Please see the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks section below. **Conditions of Use** Your use of the Site and Services and any possible dispute over privacy are subject to this Privacy Policy and our Terms of Service, including limitations on damages, dispute resolution, and application of New York state law. **International Users (Except for EU and Swiss Data Subjects)** If you use our Websites outside of the United States, you understand and consent to the transfer of your personal information to, and the collection, processing, and storage of your personal information in, the United States and elsewhere. The laws in the U.S. and these countries regarding personal information may be different than the laws of your state or country. **Use of Avada’s Site by Children** Avada’s Site is not intended for children under the age of 18. Accordingly, we will not knowingly collect or use any PII from children that we know to be under the age of 18. If we become aware of PII in our database that was collected from a child under 18, we will delete such information. ## EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks **Definitions** For purposes of this section only, the following definitions shall apply: “Agent” means any third party that collects or uses personal information under the instructions of, and solely for, Avada or to which Avada discloses personal information for use on Avada’s behalf. “Personal information” means any information or set of information that identifies or could be used by or on behalf of Avada to identify (together with other information) a living individual. Personal information does not include information that is anonymized or aggregated. For the purposes of data received from Switzerland under the Swiss-U.S. privacy shield, personal information also includes ideological views or activities, information on social security measures or administrative or criminal proceedings and sanctions. “Sensitive information” means any personal information that reveals race, ethnic origin, political opinions, religious or philosophical beliefs, trade union membership, information that concerns health or sex life, and information about criminal or administrative proceedings and sanctions. **EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield** Avada Commerce, Inc. participates in and complies with the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework and the Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework as set forth by the U.S. Department of Commerce regarding the collection, use, and retention of personal information from the European Union and Switzerland to the United States, respectively. Avada has certified to the Department of Commerce that it adheres to the Privacy Shield Principles. If there is any conflict between the policies in this privacy policy and the Privacy Shield Principles, the Privacy Shield Principles shall govern. To learn more about the Privacy Shield program, and to view our certification page, please visit [https://www.privacyshield.gov/ (opens in a new tab)](https://www.privacyshield.gov/). **Principles** Notice: Avada receives personal information about individuals in the EEA and Switzerland collected by Avada and its clients, and personal information about clients in the EEA and Switzerland. The types of information collected and the uses of that information are described in the privacy policy above. Avada will subject all personal information received via the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shields to these Principles. Choice: Avada will offer individuals the opportunity to choose whether their information is to be used for a purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized by the individual. An individual may opt-out of such uses of their personal information by contacting us at the address given below. Avada offers an opt-out to individuals whose personal information is disclosed to non-agent third parties. Additionally, Avada will not use sensitive personal information for a purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized by the individual unless Avada has received the individual’s affirmative and explicit consent (opt-in). Avada will treat as sensitive any personal information received from a third party where the third party identifies and treats it as sensitive. Data Integrity: Avada will use personal information only in ways that are compatible with the purposes for which it was collected or subsequently authorized by the individual. Avada will take reasonable steps to ensure that personal information is relevant to its intended use, accurate, complete and current. Transfers to Agents: Avada contracts with third parties who perform business functions on our behalf. Avada uses these third parties to assist with activities such as billing, processing payments, providing marketing assistance, and providing customer service. These entities may have access to personal information if needed to perform their functions for Avada. For information received under the Privacy Shield, Avada will require its agents to safeguard personal information consistent with this Policy by contract, obligating the agent to provide at least the same level of protection as is required by the Privacy Shield Principles. Under certain circumstances, Avada may bear liability for onward transfers of personal data where its agent processes personal data inconsistent with the Privacy Shield Principles, unless Avada proves that it is not responsible for the event giving rise to the damage. Access and Correction: Upon request, Avada will grant individuals reasonable access to personal information that it holds about them. In addition, Avada will take reasonable steps to permit individuals to correct, amend, or delete information that is demonstrated to be inaccurate or incomplete. An individual may request to access their information, or otherwise correct, amend, or delete their information by contacting us at the address given below. Security: See “Information Security,” above. **Enforcement** Avada will conduct compliance audits of its relevant privacy practices to verify adherence to this Policy. Any employee that Avada determines is in violation of this policy will be subject to disciplinary action. Avada is subject to the investigatory and enforcement powers of the Federal Trade Commission (FTC). **Dispute Resolution** In compliance with the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Principles, Avada commits to resolve complaints about your privacy and our collection or use of your personal information. European Union or Swiss individuals with inquiries or complaints regarding this privacy policy should first contact Avada at [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) or using the contact information below. Avada will investigate and attempt to resolve complaints regarding use and disclosure of personal information by reference to the principles in this policy. Avada has further committed to refer unresolved privacy complaints under the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Principles to an independent dispute resolution mechanism, the BBB EU PRIVACY SHIELD, operated by the Council of Better Business Bureaus. If you do not receive timely acknowledgment of your complaint, or if your complaint is not satisfactorily addressed, please visit [www.bbb.org/EU-privacy-shield/for-eu-consumers/ (opens in a new tab)](http://www.bbb.org/EU-privacy-shield/for-eu-consumers/) for more information and to file a complaint. Please note that if your complaint is not resolved through these channels, under limited circumstances, a binding arbitration option may be available before a Privacy Shield Panel. **Questions or Concerns** If you have any questions or concerns regarding privacy at Avada, please send us a detailed message to [win@seoon.io](mailto:win@seoon.io) or to Avada Commerce Inc. at 651 N Broad St, Suite 206, Middletown, DE 19709. Your privacy is important to us and we will make every effort to resolve your concerns. [FAQs](/seo-suite-help-center/faqs/) --- # Changelog Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/product-roadmap/changelog/ # 📌 Changelog Avada SEO suite changelog for merchants who wants a regularly-updated product. ## June 2026 **AI content: one place to write SEO content for your whole store** AI writing for meta titles, meta descriptions, and FAQs used to be scattered across the app — you had to open each product or collection and generate one at a time, which was slow and easy to leave half-finished. The new **AI content** hub brings it all together. Each content type is a card you open to generate in bulk across your entire store: pick a language, add your own instructions to steer the tone or keywords, and run it in the background. Every card shows a coverage report (total pages, pages already optimized, and a percentage) with a Scan button to refresh, plus two modes — generate for **all** pages or only for pages **not yet optimized**, so you don't spend credits redoing work. Preview results before applying, and check the History panel to see past runs. Meta titles and descriptions cost 1 credit per page; FAQs cost 1 credit per FAQ. The hub also links straight to two companion apps — **SEO On: AI Product Description** for product copy and **SEO On: AI Blog Post Builder** for articles — installing or opening them in one click. **A menu built around what you want to achieve** The main navigation has been reorganized from a flat list of tools into outcome-based groups, so features are easier to find. Related tools now live together under clear headings — **SEO Audit**, **Performance**, **Search optimization** (link manager and search appearance), and **Indexing** (robots.txt, sitemap, instant indexing, site verifications, and Google Search Console) — with each feature shown as a card explaining what it does. Nothing about how the features work has changed; they're just easier to reach. Previously buried tools like Instant Indexing, Robots.txt, and Sitemap are now surfaced in the Indexing group. **AI credits reset on a rolling 30-day window** Monthly AI credits now refresh on a rolling 30-day cycle from your billing date, instead of resetting on the first of the calendar month. This gives every store a full, consistent credit period no matter when in the month they subscribed. **More accurate SEO scores** Two audit scoring fixes make your scores more trustworthy. A live-page check that failed because Shopify briefly throttled or timed out the crawl no longer drags your score down — the app now keeps your existing result instead of flipping structured-data checks to "missing." And product pages that return 404 are no longer flagged as "missing meta description," since a page that doesn't exist shouldn't count against you. **July 4th "Happy 250th" sale** A limited-time in-app offer ran on the dashboard for the U.S. Independence Day season, with discounts on Pro and Enterprise plans over 3- and 6-month terms. The banner appeared for eligible stores and hid itself automatically after the campaign ended. **Other Improvements** - Empty meta tag fields now show clearer, action-guiding placeholder text so you can tell at a glance when a field still needs filling in. - AI credits are now only charged for image alt text that generates successfully. - Sitemaps now default to your custom domain when one is set. - The Home page support section was redesigned for a cleaner, more balanced layout. - Speed score checks now retry automatically when a measurement service returns a transient error. - Fixed feature unlocking so Enterprise stores correctly get all Enterprise features, including Google Structured Data options. **Bug fixes** Fixed the storefront FAQ block breaking on iPhone (iOS 26) with a large gap and an overlapping icon, FAQ answers not saving when a link was the only change, the audit editor scrolling the whole page instead of the text box on Safari, blog and article meta previews showing placeholder text instead of real content, the SEO checklist scan getting stuck or restarting, audit history not recording correctly, AI fix errors, publish-all issues, a collection SEO score that differed between the app and the exported file, Bulk Edit "select all" not applying to every page, related keyword generation failing when store location or language defaults were missing, FAQ language not following the store locale, the homepage 404 catch-all being tracked as a broken link, audit content translation, WhatsApp block display, and a subscription date display error. ## May 2026 **SEO Audit history and one-click rollback** After you (or an AI fix) changed a page's meta, title, body, or related keywords, there was no way to see what the previous version looked like and no way to undo — one bad AI fix could overwrite your original content for good. Now every change to an audit detail is saved as a snapshot. Open **History** on any product, collection, blog, or page audit to see a timeline, compare a past version side by side with the current one, and roll back in a single click. Snapshots start from when the feature shipped, so earlier changes won't have history. **Sharper AI image alt text, now in Romanian too** The AI that writes image alt text moved to a stronger vision model that describes products more accurately and in more detail. Romanian was also added to the supported alt text languages. **Heads-up before you hit Shopify's redirect limit** Shopify caps how many URL redirects a store can have. The app now warns you when your redirect count is approaching that cap, so you can clean up old redirects before new ones silently fail to save. **Richer Google Structured Data** Structured data gained three additions for better search results: loyalty program markup, Judge.me review ratings, and an organization image (logo) field. These help Google display more complete, trustworthy information about your store and products. **Other Improvements** - Redirect import now handles semicolon-separated CSVs, files with a byte-order mark, and multi-sheet Excel workbooks, so more of your export files import cleanly on the first try. - FAQ headings and sub-headings can now be set per page and per language. - Bulk Edit now supports sorting, so you can order rows the way you want to work through them. - SEO scores are more reliable and consistent — the score shown in the list now matches the detail view, single-H1 detection was corrected, and ignored assessments are counted correctly. - Bulk FAQ generation improvements, including a higher default number of questions per page. - Animated images are now rejected from optimization, since converting them can break the animation. **Bug fixes** Fixed AI alt text not reverting when the original was empty, the "Optimize now" filename action doing nothing when a file had no alt text, bulk FAQ "select all" sending invalid product references and not recording AI usage, percent-encoded redirect paths not reconciling during 404 sync, a page SEO score mismatch between the list and detail views, missing translation keys showing raw text like "BulkEdit.title" on non-English stores, unsafe rendering in the AI meta generator, a JavaScript defer toggle not applying on save, multilingual keyword handling, and truncated descriptions. ## April 2026 **Bulk Edit: change SEO fields across many pages at once** A new Bulk Edit page lets you edit SEO fields on dozens or hundreds of products, collections, or articles at once, without opening each one. Switch between a spreadsheet-style **Table view** (with customizable columns) and a **Card view** to scan visually. Twelve edit modals cover the fields merchants asked for most: meta title, meta description, social title/description/image, URL handle, canonical, no-index, image alt, structured data flags, and bulk variable apply. FAQ management joins the bulk workflow too. Turn FAQs on or off across every language in one action, or bulk-delete legacy FAQ entries you no longer need. Both run as background jobs with progress tracking. **Meta tags, redesigned: one view, smart rules, and AI writing** Meta tags used to live in two separate modes (Basic and Rule) that you had to switch between. We've merged them into a single, clearer layout: **Default meta tags** (the template for all pages) and **Custom meta tags** (rules for specific pages or conditions) now sit side by side in the same screen, organized by Product, Collection, and Blog post tabs. Inside the editor, type @ in any title or description field to pick a variable inline, with no more hunting through a separate variable list. A new **Generate with AI** button creates SEO-ready descriptions in one click, using your store's context and language (Pro plan: 100 credits, Enterprise: 1,000 credits). Managing rules is now drag-and-drop. Reorder priority by dragging rows, flip rules on or off with a quick toggle in the table, and hover any rule to preview exactly how it will render on Google, all without leaving the list. **Auto-disable schedule for time-limited campaigns (Enterprise)** Running a Black Friday, flash sale, or holiday campaign? Set a rule to auto-disable on a specific date and time, so stale sale meta tags don't linger on Google after the campaign ends. Available on the Enterprise plan. **Smarter Main Content fix with AI** Fixing Main Content issues with AI is now async. The job runs in the background and retries with a smarter model if the first attempt isn't good enough (up to five attempts). You can continue working in the app while it runs and check back when the job completes. **HTML Sitemap shows more** Your HTML sitemap now displays meta description and H1 tag alongside the page title and URL, giving visitors (and search engines) a richer preview of each page. **Faster image optimization** Image optimization has been rebuilt to process each unique image file once, instead of re-processing the same image every time it appears on a different page. Faster, less wasted credits, and more accurate progress reporting. **Trial AI credit limit** Trial stores now have a clear AI credit limit enforced at the platform level, so trial usage matches what's communicated at signup. **FAQs use H3 headings** Storefront FAQ blocks now render with H3 headings (previously mixed). This aligns with SEO best practice for nested heading hierarchies on product and collection pages. **Other Improvements** - Articles can no longer exceed an SEO score of 100 (ignored assessments now correctly factor in). - Skipped audit issues show an "unskip" option and the Fixed/Skipped counts update accurately. - Retry logic added for bulk FAQ and meta operations to recover from transient errors. - Cross-shop artifact isolation, so scan results no longer mix between stores in edge cases. **Bug fixes** Fixed negative credit display when meta count exceeded plan limit, 403 error fetching shop meta on the social networks page, duplicate results in redirect modal search, Crisp chat overlay blocking modals on mobile, FAQ prompt failing when focus keyword was empty, theme's original lazy-load attribute getting lost when the feature was disabled, pro modal incorrectly shown for revert optimize, meta description length validation, broken link migration getting stuck, and various small fixes across audit, redirect, and bulk operation flows. ## March 2026 **Internal Links with AI anchor text** A new way to build internal linking automatically. The app analyzes your store and suggests internal link opportunities across product, collection, and article pages, with AI-generated anchor text that matches each page's language and context. Review suggestions per page, apply in one click, and track which pages still need attention. **AI Alt Text, smarter and reversible** The image alt text workflow has been rebuilt around three things merchants asked for: - **Versioning**: every optimization is saved as a version. Don't like the new alt? Revert any image (or all images at once) back to a previous state. - **Three optimization modes**: choose **All** to re-optimize everything, **Unoptimized** to skip what AI already touched, or **Missing** to fill only empty alt fields. Each mode shows a tooltip explaining what it will do before you run it. - **File title cleanup**: toggle on to remove hyphens from file titles (e.g., red-cotton-shirt.jpg becomes Red cotton shirt) for cleaner AI input. The app also now stops gracefully when credits run out, instead of failing mid-batch. **Redirect chain detection** If a redirect points to another redirect (URL A → B → C), the app now spots the chain and suggests the final destination directly in the redirect editor. This prevents slow redirect hops and helps you keep clean 301s. **Better Product structured data** Product Schema.org markup has been overhauled for richer Google results: variant grouping (isVariantOf, variesBy), pre-computed review data, and cleaner ItemList output. The structured data preview now strips HTML/CSS from product descriptions so what you see matches what Google sees. **Bulk FAQ: primary language and Norwegian** Bulk FAQ generation now respects your store's primary locale. Norwegian added to the supported FAQ languages. **HTML Sitemap: your own URLs** You can now add custom URLs to your HTML sitemap, beyond the auto-generated product, collection, and article entries. Useful for landing pages, policies, or external campaign pages. **App Block status on Dashboard** The Home page now shows which Avada app blocks are enabled on your active theme at a glance. **Other Improvements** - Slovenian and Norwegian added as supported languages across AI content and audit features. - Broken link table now supports cross-page selection (select 200 rows across pages, deselect specific ones). - Lighthouse audit runs faster and at lower cost thanks to parallel data fetching. - Smarter keyword density target that adjusts the recommended count based on your content length. - "Powered by" link removed from sitemap output. **Bug fixes** Fixed Page Loader showing a white screen on certain themes, Hyper Speed not detecting some custom domains, wrong URL in the redirect edit form, image optimization displaying the wrong file format, meta fields not persisting on save, wrong URL submitted to Instant Indexing, broken links not opening when the store locale was Norwegian, redirect modal timing out on large collections, image alt issues not navigating correctly, related keyword display errors, and various small UI fixes in the audit and broken link flows. ## February 2026 **Google Structured Data Multilingual Autofill** Merchants selling in multiple languages had to manually enter structured data for each locale. Structured data fields now autofill based on the store's active locales, pulling translated product data automatically and saving significant setup time for multilingual stores. **Multi-Language Meta Tags in SEO Audit** SEO Audit Detail pages now display meta tag data across all active languages, making it easier to spot missing or inconsistent translations in your meta titles and descriptions. **Other Improvements** - Improved Google Ads performance tracking. - Export broken links flow redesigned with more filtering options. - Broken link sync now fully supports multilingual stores. - Added Bulgarian language for AI alt text generation. - Weekly and daily broken link scanning improvements for more accurate detection. **Bug fixes** Fixed meta tag rule validation failures, images not displaying in social post preview, XML sitemap generation issues, image alt revert not working, return fees option display, speed request tab state, sitemap URL sync, import broken link page visibility, FAQ Builder data loss on publish, email broken link report formatting, sitemap locale prefix causing 404s, and 404 task completion status not updating. ## January 2026 **SEO Audit Import & Export** Merchants managing SEO across multiple stores or working with agencies needed a way to share audit data. You can now export your full SEO audit results and import audit configurations, making it easy to replicate SEO setups or track progress externally. **AI Credit Usage History** With AI-powered features consuming credits across alt text, meta tags, and FAQ generation, merchants wanted visibility into their spending. A new AI Credit History page shows detailed usage logs — what was generated, when, and how many credits were consumed. **Other Improvements** - Image optimization history now tracks scan status for each image. - Structured data supports price range display for variable-priced products. - SEO score export for sharing audit results with clients or teams. - Broken link sync supports detailed filtering options. - Local business structured data improvements. **Bug fixes** Fixed meta tags not applying in certain scenarios, AI credit purchase errors in Safari and Firefox, image section display issues, alt text optimization getting stuck, image compression failures, FAQ visibility on storefront, broken link import with invalid dates, related keyword display, and image filename optimization for product variants. ## December 2025 **Multilingual SEO Audit** Stores selling internationally need SEO audits that understand language context. SEO Audit now runs checks across all active store languages, flagging missing translations, inconsistent meta tags, and locale-specific issues in a unified report. **AI Alt Text Prompt Enhancement** The AI for generating image alt text has been refined to produce more descriptive, SEO-friendly results. Alt text now better describes product context, colors, and use cases rather than generic descriptions. **Other Improvements** - Alt text optimization progress tracking redesigned for clarity. - Sub-local sitemap generation support. - Improved AI-generated URL handles for cleaner permalinks. - Structured data product shipping details now use actual shop currency. - Image optimization history for manual optimizations. - SEO Audit page navigation improvements. - Added more languages for AI content generation. **Bug fixes** Fixed duplicate broken links appearing in reports, theme errors on certain themes, sub-folder suffixes in local HTML sitemap, image compression timeout on large files, redirect URL handling for blog integration, currency format display, structured data preview with real product data, and sitemap rendering incorrect URLs for localized stores. ## November 2025 **AI Image Alt Text** Writing alt text for hundreds of product images is tedious and often skipped. AI Image Alt generates descriptive, SEO-optimized alt text for all your product images in bulk — just select the products, choose your language, and let AI handle the rest. **Bulk FAQ Generation** Creating FAQ pages manually is time-consuming. Bulk FAQ Generation uses AI to analyze your products and generate relevant Q&A pairs, then publishes them with proper FAQ schema markup for rich results in Google. **Referral Program** Merchants can now earn AI credits by referring other Shopify store owners to Avada SEO Suite. Share your unique referral code, and you will receive bonus Pro plan. **BFCM 2025 In-App Sale** Black Friday / Cyber Monday 2025 brings exclusive in-app discounts on Pro and Unlimited plans. The promotion includes bundle pricing to eligible merchants. **Other Improvements** - AI alt text pricing tiers for flexible usage plans. - Insight posts improvements for better content recommendations. - Broken link export flow streamlined. - Resolved 404 links count display accuracy. - Added Italian language support. - Referral banner added to dashboard. **Bug fixes** Fixed broken link sorting and resolution logic, FAQ schema display in SEO Audit, AI credit deduction, pricing plan translations, alt text for missing images, search functionality in page audit, data loading issues, and product sort options in listing tables. ## October 2025 **On-Page SEO Audit Agent** A new AI agent reviews your pages like a human SEO expert would — checking content quality, keyword usage, readability, internal linking, and technical SEO factors. It provides actionable recommendations ranked by impact. **Other Improvements** - Speed request page redesigned for clearer submission flow. - Weekly sitemap auto-updates for fresher index coverage. - Variables support in meta tag rules for dynamic templates. - Added Hebrew language. **Bug fixes** Fixed meta tag generation errors, empty product preview, duplicate handle creation, URL optimize max length, broken link manager issues, Hyper Speed affecting other apps, filename optimization, broken link report, subscription pricing table display, duplicate content detection, and audit page loading. ## September 2025 **Speed Request Page** Some stores need hands-on speed optimization beyond what automated tools can do. The new Speed Request page lets merchants submit their store for manual review by our speed optimization team, with progress tracking and status updates. **Dashboard SEO Tips** The dashboard now surfaces contextual SEO tips based on your store's current health score. Tips rotate regularly and link directly to the relevant settings or tools, helping merchants discover features they might be missing. **Other Improvements** - Default onboarding selections improved based on store type. - Overall performance improvements. **Bug fixes** Fixed broken link scan limits, last scan status not showing in checklist, dashboard display issues, 404 page saving, FAQ generation defaulting to English, sitemap skip functionality, related keyword display, and auto-redirect batch processing. ## August 2025 **Avada SEO AI Agent** An AI-powered assistant that understands your entire store's SEO health. Ask questions in natural language about any aspect of your SEO — image optimization, broken links, meta tags, speed performance, structured data — and get specific, data-driven recommendations based on your store's actual data rather than generic advice. **Other Improvements** - Domain support for Google Structured Data customization. - Added image tags to XML sitemap for better image indexing in Google. **Bug fixes** Fixed return shipping options in structured data, speed optimization conflicts, broken link CSV export, redirect count accuracy, broken link report counts, image visibility issues, image optimization processing, sitemap generation, and optimized image revert. ## July 2025 **Other Improvements** - Trailing slash configuration for sitemap URLs. - Improved sitemap generation performance. - In-app chat support integration. - Homepage improvements. **Bug fixes** Fixed AI FAQ generation bugs, uppercase related keywords, alt text issues, banner display, and FAQ action handling. ## June 2025 **Speed-Up Compare Modes** Choosing between speed optimization levels was a guessing game. Compare Modes shows a side-by-side performance comparison between optimization levels, so you can see exactly what each level does to your Core Web Vitals before committing. **Other Improvements** - HTML FAQs formatting improvements for better display. - Size and color support for Google Structured Data. - Page Loader performance improvements. **Bug fixes** Fixed alt text revert, default product structured data settings, social network save issues, speed optimization conflicts, domain loss, pricing display, sitemap URL generation, filter and pagination, FAQ saving and display, and image optimization issues. ## May 2025 **Speed-Up: Font Display Swap, Preconnect, and Critical CSS v2** Three new speed optimization techniques: **Font Display Swap** eliminates invisible text during font loading. **Preconnect** establishes early connections to critical third-party domains. **Critical CSS v2** delivers more accurate above-the-fold styling for faster initial render. **Feature Request v2** The feature request system has been redesigned. Submit requests with more context, upvote existing requests, and track their status as they move through our development pipeline. **Other Improvements** - Improved AI output accuracy. - Competitor bot blocking to protect your content from scraping. **Bug fixes** Fixed revert for blogs and collections, Bing indexing, multi-image revert, speed-up getting stuck in certain configurations, image optimization button on downgrade, loading settings save, social network toggle affecting organization schema, ignored files still being minified, keyword sort by volume, and structured data image/logo preview. ## April 2025 **Sync Product Reviews for Structured Data** Product review data from third-party review apps can now be synced directly into your Google Structured Data. Reviews appear as aggregate ratings in search results, improving click-through rates. **Delete All Redirects** Merchants migrating platforms or restructuring URLs needed a way to clean up outdated redirects in bulk. A new "Delete All" action removes all URL redirects at once, with a confirmation step to prevent accidents. **Other Improvements** - SEO Audit flow for blog posts improved. - Custom email notification support. - Broken link report and export improvements. **Bug fixes** Fixed toast notification on downgrade, schema limit issues, image revert timeout, select all functionality, favicon preview in meta tags, meta title length label, image size limits, and delete solved link issues. ## March 2025 **Optimize Product Image from Shopify Admin** Right from the Shopify admin product page, you can now trigger image optimization for that specific product. No need to navigate to Avada SEO — the optimization runs directly from admin. **Other Improvements** - Updated SEO Audit flow and labels for blog posts. - HTML Sitemap improvements. - Republish button for after-list content. - After-list content UI redesign. - Reworked pagination across the app. - Show only active links with trace URLs. - Security improvements. **Bug fixes** Fixed app status detection, Speed-Up settings page errors, audit query errors, related keyword data, image language settings, hidden links in HTML sitemap, hidden pages in HTML sitemap, broken link issues, and redirect count accuracy. ## February 2025 **Multi-Language XML Sitemap Generator** Stores selling in multiple languages need separate sitemaps per locale for proper indexing. The new generator automatically creates language-specific XML sitemaps with correct hreflang annotations, ensuring Google indexes the right version for each market. **Revert Image to Shopify Original** When image optimization produces unexpected results or you simply want to go back, you can now revert any optimized image to its original Shopify-hosted version with one click — including bulk revert for multiple images. **Other Improvements** - SEO Audit results now paginated for better performance on large stores. - Overall app performance optimization. - Form validation improvements. - Faster image revert processing. **Bug fixes** Fixed auto redirect issues, auto resolve 404 links, speed optimization conflicts, scan schema in audit, redirect modal, blog post pagination, subheading display, settings save, and image optimization banner. ## January 2025 **Other Improvements** - Structured data now includes price validity dates for richer search results. - Preview domain improvements. - Faster XML Sitemap generation. - FAQ Block UI/UX redesign. - Subscription UI improvements. - Re-trigger optimize by product support. **Bug fixes** Fixed main keyword finding, audit collection save error, speed score display, image table UI, blog app redirect integration, audit keyword issues, meta rule table, SEO checklist bugs, bulk operations, sitemap redirect tracing, settings save when disabling features, and various translation issues. ## December 2024 **Improvements** - Image optimization history tracking. - Direct new users to Avada AI Blog Builder for content guidance. - Unlimit old structured data features for free plan users. - Faster meta data extraction. - OG image width optimization. - Overall performance improvements. **Bug fixes** Fixed broken link export, instant indexing URL issues, scroll to content, structured data issues, social post image and metadata, product list performance, URL import, payment amount calculation, meta description generation, and preview image display. ## November 2024 **XML Sitemap Generator** A completely rebuilt sitemap engine. The new generator handles multi-language stores, custom domain configurations, and large product catalogs efficiently. Sitemaps are generated and cached for instant delivery to search engines. **Multilingual Meta Tags** Meta titles and descriptions can now be managed per language. For each active locale, set custom meta tags or let AI generate translations — ensuring every language version of your store has optimized meta data. **Other Improvements** - Optimized alt text descriptions for images. - Theme settings management improvements. - Allow empty URL paths in robots.txt. - Block sitemap submission without website added. - Trial badge updates. - Lock robots.txt feature. - Faster image optimization using preview images. - Added Serbian language for AI meta tags. - Speed-up queue improvements. - Checklist UI improvements. **Bug fixes** Fixed image optimization, meta tag override behavior, settings retrieval, integration page links, 404 page editor, blank after content, local business fields, collection schema audit, alt image format, 404 image revert, meta description in audit list, sitemap domain issues, duplicate meta tag rules, email for uninstalled shops, sitemap display, speed score UI, meta tag preview, multi-redirect resolution, sitemap bulk creation, and SEO analysis issues. ## October 2024 **BFCM 2024 Boost Sale** Black Friday / Cyber Monday promotional pricing with special discounts for annual plans. Available for a limited time during the holiday shopping season. **SEO Checklist ver 2.0** Expanded the SEO checklist with new checks for structured data completeness, internal linking health, and content quality metrics. The checklist now covers 30+ SEO factors with clear pass/fail status and fix-it links. **Structured Data Overall Revise** Google Structured Data interface has been completely revised — cleaner layout, better field organization, live preview of how your data appears in Google, and improved validation that catches errors before they reach Google Search Console. **Rich Text Editor for Content** The content editor for after-list content, 404 pages, and FAQ answers now features a full rich text editing experience with formatting toolbar, link insertion, and image embedding. **Other Improvements** - Faster app loading. - Homepage UX/UI redesign. - URL redirects interface revision. - Schema removal from non-relevant pages. - Google Search Console integration revised. - SEO Audit detail display improvements. - Broken link label updates. - URL redirect import supporting http/https. - Speed-up improvements. - Draft page badge display. - Sticky checklist for easier navigation. - Updated robots.txt user agents. **Bug fixes** Fixed broken link UI, critical CSS always applying, subscription settings, URL redirect import filter, image format issues, meta tags overwrite, speed-up issues, breadcrumb snippet, image optimize re-trigger, URL redirect bugs, FAQ schema, focus keyword cleaning, 404 link display, structured data bugs, and phone number validation. ## September 2024 **Related Keywords** Discovering keyword opportunities is critical for content strategy. The new Related Keywords feature suggests semantically related keywords for your focus keywords, showing search volume and competition data to help prioritize content creation. **URL Redirect Import** Migrating from another platform or reorganizing URLs generates hundreds of redirects. CSV import lets you upload redirect mappings in bulk, with validation to catch loops and conflicts before applying. **Image Optimize in Product Descriptions** Product description images were previously ignored by the optimizer. Now, images embedded in product descriptions are included in optimization — compression, alt text, and lazy loading are applied to every image on the page. **Blog App Integration** Avada SEO Suite now integrates with Avada AI Blog Builder, syncing SEO data between the two apps. Blog posts created in Avada AI Blog Builder automatically inherit SEO settings and appear in audit reports. **Other Improvements** - Audit banner and label updates. - Error handling improvements. - Broken Link Manager improvements. - Home page UI improvements. - Bulk image revert support. - Theme support checking for new OS versions. **Bug fixes** Fixed keyword density calculation, image optimize status, on-page meta preview, audit redirect updates, articles search, broken link manager, review app selection, audit products filter, SEO Audit max score, image report, 404 page handling, articles list, meta tag handling, related keyword issues, Google structured data opening hours, image optimization, and meta description handling. ## August 2024 **Robots.txt On-Page Management** Previously, robots.txt could only be edited as a single file. Now you can set noindex/nofollow directives per page directly from the SEO on-page editor, giving granular control over which pages search engines can crawl and index. **AI FAQ Generator** Creating FAQ content from scratch is time-consuming. The AI FAQ Generator analyzes your product data and generates relevant question-answer pairs. Edit, reorder, and publish them with proper FAQ schema markup for Google rich results. **More SEO Audit checklists** A comprehensive SEO audit system that scores your pages across 20+ factors including meta tags, content quality, keyword usage, images, and structured data. Each issue includes a severity rating and a direct link to fix it. **Speed Score In-App** View your store's performance score directly inside the app without visiting external tools. The score updates regularly and shows trends over time. **Other Improvements** - Testimonial logos update. - Banner warning when theme size is too large. - SEO Checklist Phase 1. - Image optimization improvements. - Instant Page optimization. **Bug fixes** Fixed image optimization issues, email sending, 404 email redirect, robots on-page, FAQ validation, FAQ content styling, checklist issues, global meta tags mass overwrite, after collection for old stores, HTML sitemap, Hebrew language, structured data domain preview, trial plan detection, meta tag defaults, suggest URL, meta tags overwrite, image compression preview, themes list sorting, audit scoring, and downgrade speed-up mode. ## July 2024 **SEO Audit with New Pricing (5->20 free audits)** Launched the full SEO Audit feature with updated pricing plans. Every page gets a comprehensive SEO score based on meta tags, content quality, keyword optimization, images, and structured data — with actionable recommendations to improve each score. **Convert Images to WebP** WebP images are up to 30% smaller than JPEG/PNG with no visible quality loss. One-click conversion transforms your product images to WebP format, served automatically to browsers that support it while falling back to originals for older browsers. **Other Improvements** - Optimized data crawling performance. - Updated banner offers. - Real-time speed score display. - Dashboard improvements. - Image optimization support for up to 1500 images. **Bug fixes** Fixed audit pagination, article URL updates, on-page SEO UX, blog post redirects, blog handle generation, banner display on speed-up settings, discount display, audit save, meta preview, downgrade pricing, 404 email redirect, title tag check, speed score defaults, critical CSS generation, image URL updates, audit scores, product review snippets, Speed-Up UI, blog article search, collection update, save bar, image optimization issues, FAQs in audit, meta tag bugs, and social post fields. ## June 2024 **AI Meta Tag Suggestions** Generate optimized meta titles and descriptions using AI. Provide your focus keyword and the AI creates multiple variations optimized for click-through rate and search relevance, following Google's latest best practices for title tags. **Social Post Preview** See exactly how your product pages will appear when shared on Facebook, Twitter, and LinkedIn. Edit Open Graph and Twitter Card metadata with a live preview to ensure your social shares look professional. **Other Improvements** - Fixed pricing for legacy plans and free trial users. - Improved text editing experience. - Faster page prefetching with Instant Page. - Unsaved changes indicator moved to top of page. - Pricing downgrade flow improvements. - Updated audit guide links. **Bug fixes** Fixed country code support in Google Structured Data, minify banner display, SEO Audit UX, Google Ads tracking, head content issues, advanced page speed, Ali Review integration, broken link mass delete, and subscription issues. ## May 2024 **App Navigation Redesign** The main navigation has been reorganized for faster access to commonly used features. Key tools are now one click away instead of buried in submenus. **Assets Optimization** Beyond images, you can now optimize CSS and JavaScript assets. The optimizer minifies, compresses, and defers non-critical assets to improve your store's loading performance. **Real User Monitoring (RUM)** Lab scores don't always reflect real user experience. RUM collects actual performance data from your store visitors — load times, interaction delays, and layout shifts — giving you the true picture of your store's speed. **Other Improvements** - Updated user guide links. - Duplicate theme confirmation banner update. - Select all in broken link report bulk action. - Updated pricing, onboarding, and subscription pages. **Bug fixes** Fixed discard popup, speed-up scheduling, exclude minify settings, H1 in SEO Audit, revert image for collections, alt text with variant name, unsaved changes on-page, critical CSS, instant indexing load more, broken link pagination, mobile click issues, blog post pagination, word count, duplicate image downloads, image search, and search box state. ## April 2024 **Speed-Up Levels** Choose between three speed optimization levels: **Basic** (safe defaults), **Standard** (balanced optimization), and **Advanced** (aggressive optimization). Each level clearly shows which techniques are applied so you can pick the right balance of speed vs. compatibility for your theme. **Lazyload Video and Iframes** Videos and iframes embedded in product pages and blog posts now lazy load automatically. They only start loading when users scroll near them, significantly reducing initial page load time on content-heavy pages. **Auto Optimize Images** Enable automatic image optimization and every new product image uploaded to your store gets optimized instantly — compression, alt text generation, and filename optimization happen without manual intervention. **What's New Feed** A new in-app feed shows recent feature releases and improvements. Stay informed about what's new without leaving the app or checking external changelogs. **Other Improvements** - Combined pages for streamlined navigation. - Image size reporting. - Image optimization filter badges. **Bug fixes** Fixed structured data price on collections, site speed-up page bugs, speed-up labels and translations, main keyword in audit, skip optimize alt, page loader save, product review display, 404 page, publish theme issues, duplicate theme, page query, URL encoding, instant page ignore, checklist enable, and running task display. ## March 2024 **Generate Q&A for Structured Data** AI-generated questions and answers for FAQ schema markup. Based on your product data, the AI creates natural-sounding Q&A pairs that can be added to your pages as FAQ structured data, increasing your chances of appearing in Google's "People Also Ask" section. **Other Improvements** - SEO Audit layout improvements. - Updated user guide links. - Review optimization improvements. - Speed-up settings cleanup on uninstall. **Bug fixes** Fixed best seller popup, labels and banners, back button in SEO Audit, blog post URLs not showing, variant title display, duplicate title in SVG tags, and structured data sync. ## February 2024 **URL Optimization** Product and page URLs often contain unnecessary words that dilute SEO value. URL Optimization suggests cleaner, keyword-focused URLs and handles the redirect from old to new URLs automatically, preserving link equity. **Page Loader** A customizable page loading animation that improves perceived performance. Configure the loading screen style, colors, and animation to match your brand while the store loads behind the scenes. **After Collection List Block** Add custom content below collection product listings — promotional banners, SEO text, cross-collection links, or FAQ sections. Content is managed per collection and supports rich text editing. **Other Improvements** - Product Google Structured Data improvements. - Updated guide links. - Total count display in redirect report. **Bug fixes** Fixed stock display in preview, history limit, empty product handling, image URL issues, escaped keyword display, layout and color picker, best seller cancel trial, and dashboard checklist free count. ## January 2024 **Duplicate Title Tag Detection** Duplicate title tags across pages confuse search engines about which page to rank. The new detection system identifies pages sharing the same title tag and flags them for review. **Other Improvements** - Local business address improvements. - Speed-Up for OS 2.0 themes. - Speed-Up for analytics scripts. - Translation updates. - Inline widget improvements. - Structured data product review snippet improvements. - SEO Audit product list improvements. - Keyword analytics block repositioned. - Speed change email notifications. **Bug fixes** Fixed checklist URL, nofollow exclude, blog URL optimization, OS 2.0 compatibility, meta rule enable, date filtering, meta checklist action, and optimize time completion. *This changelog covers updates from January 2024* [Google Update 2024](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/google-update-2024/)[FAQs](/seo-suite-help-center/faqs/) --- # Google structured data Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/ # Google structured data Google uses structured data to understand the content on your page and show it in a richer appearance in search results — known as a **rich result**. Avada SEO Suite formats your store content following Google's structured data guidelines so your pages become eligible for these rich results. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. ## What is Google structured data Rich results are experiences on Google surfaces (such as Search) that go beyond the standard blue link. They can include images, ratings, prices, FAQs, breadcrumbs, and more — helping your store stand out on the results page and increase click-through rate. Learn more about [Structured data with Google (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/intro-structured-data). ## How does this work In Avada SEO Suite, we help you set up the rich results most critical for an eCommerce store: organization, local business, product, review snippet, breadcrumb, loyalty program, FAQs, and article. - From the Avada SEO Suite sidebar, go to **Google structured data** - Click **Preview** to see how your store information will be displayed on Search as rich results - **Toggle on** the rich result type you want to enable - Click **Edit** to set up your content. Learn about Google's [rich result testing tool (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/blog/2017/12/rich-results-tester). Features may work differently across rich result types. See the section below for setup details per rich result. ## Rich results we support ### 1. Organization Information about your organization, such as your logo, legal name of the organization, address, contact information, and company identifiers. This information can show up in knowledge panels and other visual elements. - Go to **Google structured data** - In the **Organization** card, **toggle on** - Click **Edit** to set up your content, which includes store information and social network links - Click **Save** - Click **Preview** to see how the rich result will appear on Google #### Advanced information (Enterprise plan only) We've added advanced organization details for Enterprise users, offering richer schema data for improved visibility. Need help with custom schema? Click **Contact Us** to connect with support via chat for quick assistance. Reference: [Google's Organization structured data documentation (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/organization) ### 2. Review snippet A short excerpt of a review or rating from a review website — usually an average of the combined rating scores from reviewers. - Go to **Google structured data** - In the **Review snippet** card, **toggle on** - Click **More options** to select a review app to show your reviews. All reviews from the review app will be eligible for the Review rich result. - Supported review apps: Air Reviews, Judge.me, Growave, Ali Reviews and Loox. - Click **Preview** to see how the rich result will appear on Google Reference: [Google's Review snippet structured data documentation (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/review-snippet) ### 3. Product Product information displayed in richer ways in search results: price, availability, review ratings, shipping information, and more. - Go to **Google structured data** - In the **Product** card, **toggle on** - Click **Edit** to set your product information - Click **Save** - Click **Preview** to see how the rich result will appear on Google #### Product information fields - **Offer Schema**: Choose between **Offer** (single offer, one price) or **AggregateOffer** (multiple offers with a price range — useful for products with variants at different prices) - **Show product's stock status**: Display availability (*in stock*, *out of stock*, *backorder*) in Google search results - **Show price valid until**: Show an expiration date for the product's current price — useful for flash sales or seasonal discounts - **Show shipping details**: Display shipping information (cost, delivery time) in Google search results - **Show return policy**: Display your store's return and refund details in Google search results - **Exclude on collection pages**: Skip structured data on collection pages to avoid conflicts with other apps or themes that may also inject product schema Reference: [Google's Product structured data documentation (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/product) ### 4. Breadcrumb A breadcrumb on a page indicates its position in the site hierarchy and may help users understand and explore the site more effectively. - Go to **Google structured data** - In the **Breadcrumb** card, **toggle on** - Click **Preview** to see how the rich result will appear on Google Reference: [Google's Breadcrumb structured data documentation (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/breadcrumb) ### 5. Local business Show more information about your store — such as address, store location, opening hours — on the search results page. - Go to **Google structured data** - In the **Local business** card, **toggle on** - Click **Edit** to set up store information - Click **Save** - Click **Preview** to see how the rich result will appear on Google #### Configuration options **General information** - **Company name**: Your business or store name as it should appear on Google - **Image URL**: Direct URL to your store logo or representative image - **Phone number**: Contact phone number shown in the rich result - **Business type**: Select the schema type that matches your business (e.g. *AutoBodyShop*, *Restaurant*, *Store*). See Google's [LocalBusiness types list (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/local-business#business-type) - **Price range**: Indicator of typical price level (e.g. `$`, `$$`, `$$$`) **Location details** - **Address**: Full street address of your business - **GeoLocation**: Coordinates in `latitude, longitude` format (e.g. `20.970634, 105.820044`). Click *How to get the coordinates of a place* if you need help finding them **Service area** *(optional)* - Click **Add service area** to specify the geographic areas where your business provides service — cities, regions, or countries. Useful for businesses that serve customers beyond their physical address (e.g. delivery, on-site services) **Opening hours** - **Open 24/7**: Always open (no schedule needed) - **Schedule time**: Set specific opening/closing hours per day of the week **Apply for** - **Home page**: Show this schema on your storefront homepage - **Other pages**: Show this schema on other pages of your store as well Reference: [Google's Local business structured data documentation (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/local-business) ### 6. Frequently asked questions A Frequently Asked Question (FAQ) page contains a list of questions and answers pertaining to a particular topic. - Go to **Google structured data** - In the **FAQs** card, click **Add FAQs** - Select which page you want to add FAQs to by clicking the page title - In page settings, **toggle on** to make your FAQs eligible for Google Structured Data - To show your FAQ list on the storefront page, tick **Show FAQs block** If unchecked, your questions are still eligible to show on Google search results but not on the storefront - Click **Go to theme editor** to add a FAQ block to your page - In the theme editor, click **Add block** to insert the FAQ block in your preferred position, then click **Save** - You can Add, Edit, and Delete Question–Answer pairs, or reset all to default. Maximum 10 questions per list. You can also add FAQs to a specific page by: - Go to **On-page SEO audit** - Select the page you want to add FAQs to - Go to **FAQs builder** and do the same setup If you're using [Avada FAQs (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/m4ZN3M), questions and answers are auto-synced from the app. Change content in Avada FAQs. Reference: [Google's FAQ structured data documentation (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/faqpage) ### 7. Article A news, sports, or blog article displayed in various rich result formats — such as the article title and larger-than-thumbnail images. - Go to **Google structured data** - In the **Article** card, **toggle on** - Click **Preview** to see how the rich result will appear on Google Reference: [Google's Article structured data documentation (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/article) ### 8. Loyalty program Showcase your loyalty / membership program in search results — including member tiers, benefits and points earned. Helps loyal customers see "member pricing" and program details directly on Google Search and Shopping, increasing click-through rate for returning customers. - Go to **Google structured data** - In the **Loyalty program** card, **toggle on** - Click **Edit** to open the configuration - Set up **Program information**: **Program name**, **Program URL**, **Description** - Add one or more **Membership tiers** (e.g. Gold, Silver). For each tier you can configure: **Tier name**, **Tier ID**, **Tier URL** - **Benefits**: tick *Loyalty points* and/or *Loyalty price* - **Points earned**: number of loyalty points (or miles) earned per spending unit (typically $1). For higher tiers, this can also represent a multiplier vs your base tier — e.g. base tier = 1 point/$, Gold = 5 means Gold members earn 5× the base rate - **Tier requirement** — choose one of four types: **Text** — free-text description of how to reach the tier - **Credit card** — name of the credit card required - **Monetary amount** — minimum spend value + currency - **Subscription fee** — recurring membership fee, with billing duration and increment - Click **Save** - Click **Preview** to see how the rich result will appear on Google Reference: [Google's Loyalty program structured data documentation (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/structured-data/loyalty-program) ## Test Google structured data After turning on a rich result type, validate that the schema is correctly generated using Google's official testing tools. - **Schema Markup Validator** — [validator.schema.org (opens in a new tab)](https://validator.schema.org/) Enter your URL - Click **Run test** - You'll see a list of eligible rich results on your page - Click **Preview** to check how it looks on search results - **Rich Results Test** — [search.google.com/test/rich-results (opens in a new tab)](https://search.google.com/test/rich-results) Enter your URL - Click **Test URL** - You'll see a list of eligible rich results on your page - Click **Preview results** to check how it looks on search results [Social Networks](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/social-networks/)[Robots.txt Editor](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor) --- # Rich results Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/rich-results/ Avada SEO Suite Search Appearance [Google Structured Data](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/) Rich results Copy page This page has moved. Redirecting to [Google structured data → Rich results](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/#rich-results-we-support)... [Google Structured Data](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/)[Wildcards](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor/wildcards/) --- # Test Google structured data Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/test-google-structured-data/ Avada SEO Suite Search Appearance [Google Structured Data](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/) Test Google structured data Copy page This page has moved. Redirecting to [Google structured data → Test](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/#test-google-structured-data)... [Google Structured Data](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/)[Wildcards](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor/wildcards/) --- # Instant indexing Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/instant-indexing/ # Instant indexing Instant indexing refers to the process of getting a webpage quickly added to a search engine's index W**ho can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. ## What is Indexing? Your website content will not be available on Google search right after being published. Google Search needs to explore your web to find content and add to search results. Google Search works in three stages, and Indexing is one among them : - Crawling: Google downloads text, images, and videos from pages it found on the internet with automated programs called crawlers. - Indexing: Google analyzes the text, images, and video files on the page, and stores the information in the Google index, which is a large database. - Serving search results: When a user searches on Google, Google returns information that's relevant to the user's query. Learn more about [how Google search works. (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/fundamentals/how-search-works) ## How does this work? Not all websites can go through three stages of Google Search process. And when you update information on your site, instead of waiting for being indexed again, Instant index helps notify search engines so they can crawl your page soon. Avada SEO Suite helps you use Google and Bing's Indexing API to support the indexing of URLs on your store. - Go to "Search appearance" *→* "Instant indexing" and click Turn on - Set up Google & Bing Instant API Key [Get your Google Instant API Key from Google search console](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/instant-indexing/google-indexing-api/) and fill in your key - Click Generate to get the Bing indexing API key - Select pages you want to be indexed by Google Search Click Add URL to select pages. You can manually add page URL to list of URLs. - You can submit maximum 100 pages each times and 200 pages per day. - Click Submit to Google & Bing - Select pages you want to be removed from Google Search Click Add URL to select pages. You can manually add page URL to list of URLs. - Click Submit to remove - Click **Save** to save all your settings [Variables](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/variables/)[Google Indexing API](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/instant-indexing/google-indexing-api/) --- # Google Indexing API Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/instant-indexing/google-indexing-api/ # Google Indexing API Activate the Google Indexing API from Google Cloud Console **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. - Learn [Indexing API Quickstart with Google (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/apis/indexing-api/v3/quickstart) ## How to get Google Instant Index key? **Sign in to** [Google Cloud Console (opens in a new tab)](https://console.developers.google.com/) Create a project in **Google Cloud Console** (if you don't already have one) In the main navigation menu, click **APIs & Services, Library** Search for **Indexing API** and enable it Click **Credentials** *→* Click **Create credentials** *→* Select **Service account option** Give it a name and description Click **Create and continue** Choose **Owner** from the dropdown list *→* click **Continue** *→* Click **Done** on last step From the **Service accounts table**, click on the newly service account to edit it Click on Keys tab *→* Click **Add key** *→* Click **Create new key** Select JSON as key type and click **Create.** JSON file will be auto downloaded to your device. Now you need to add your service account as a site owner to Google Search Console. Go to [Google Search Console (opens in a new tab)](https://search.google.com/search-console/welcome) *→* Login with your website From the left navigation panel, click on **Settings**. In Property settings, click **Users and permissions** *→* Click **Add user button** Enter the email address provided by the Service account you just created. Make sure to select **Owner** from the Permission field to prevent 403 error when submitting the URLs for indexing. This email can be retrieved from Google Cloud Console, IAM & Admin, Service Accounts, your service account, Details tab. You can get email by opening your downloaded JSON file and select `client_email line`. [Instant Indexing](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/instant-indexing/)[Social Networks](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/social-networks/) --- # Meta tags Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/ # Meta tags Meta tags provide information for search engines to understand the content and relevance of a webpage. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. ## What is it? Meta tags provide information for search engines to understand the content and relevance of a webpage. The two most important meta tags — meta title and meta description — are the elements that appear for your store in Google search results, and they directly influence whether a shopper clicks your page or a competitor's. ## How meta tags appear on Google Every search result in Google is made up of three visible parts — and two of them come from your meta tags: - **Meta title** — the clickable blue headline - **Meta description** — the short summary below the title ## Why meta tags matter - **Higher click-through rate (CTR):** well-written meta tags stand out among competing search results and attract more clicks - **Better SEO ranking:** Google uses the title as a ranking signal. Relevant, keyword-rich titles help your page rank for the right searches - **Brand consistency:** meta tags control how your store is represented on Google. Without them, Google writes its own descriptions, which may not reflect your brand voice ## How Avada manages meta tags Shopify gives you one meta title and description per page, which means setting them manually for a store with hundreds of products is impractical. Avada SEO Suite solves this with two layers that work together in one screen under **Search appearance → Meta tags**: - **[Default meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/default-meta-tags/)** — a template with dynamic variables applied to every page of a type (all Products, all Collections, or all Blog posts). Available on all plans. - **[Custom meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags/)** — conditional rules that override the default for specific groups of pages (e.g., Nike products, items on sale). Available on Pro and Enterprise plans. Meta tags you set up in Avada SEO Suite will replace your default content ([Search engine listing in Shopify (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/seo/adding-keywords)) when you create a product, collection, or blog. ### Priority order - **Custom meta tags in SEO Audit** — set directly on a specific page from the SEO Audit detail view - **Custom meta tags rule** — with the lowest priority number that matches the page - **Default meta tags** — the template for that page type - **Shopify's native meta tags** — if Default is off and no rule or SEO Audit override matches ## Multi-language meta tags This feature lets you create meta tags for different languages, making your website's meta titles and descriptions responsive to all languages of your site. For example, if your store supports English, Spanish, and French, you can set up different meta tags for each language. We don't offer automatic translation for meta tags. You need to add the content for each language manually. This ensures that search engines display the most relevant meta information based on the visitor's language and helps: - **Better SEO:** Search engines show the right meta tags for each language. This helps your store rank higher in search results. - **Better user experience:** Visitors see meta titles and descriptions in their language. This makes your store look professional and easy to understand. - **More clicks:** Users are more likely to click your store link if they see it in their language. The list of languages available for setting up meta tags are **published languages** in your Shopify store. How to check your languages of your store: In Shopify Admin, click **Settings → Language** and set up your languages. Learn more about [managing languages in Shopify (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/international/languages/manage-languages). ### How to check multi-language meta tags - Go to your site - Right click → click **Inspect** - In **Elements**, check `` and `<meta name="description"` - Change website's language and check `<title>` and `<meta name="description"` again ## How to test meta tags on search results - Go to [metatags.io (opens in a new tab)](https://metatags.io/) - Enter a website link you want to check - Press `Enter` to get your results ## Plan comparison FeatureFreeProEnterprise Default meta tags✅✅✅ Custom meta tags rules—✅✅ Multi-language meta tags—✅✅ Auto-disable schedule——✅ AI generate (per month)—1001,000 [Preconnect](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/preconnect/)[Default meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/default-meta-tags/) --- # Custom meta tags details Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags-details/ # Custom meta tags details Set unique meta title and description for a single page directly from SEO Audit. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. Custom meta tags details let you set unique meta title and description for a specific page. This overrides everything else — your [Default meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/default-meta-tags/), any matching [Custom meta tags rule](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags/), and Shopify's native meta data. ## How to set custom meta tags for a page ### Open SEO Audit In **SEO Audit**, click **Explore details** on the page you want to edit. ### Select the page to edit Pick the page whose meta tags you want to customize. ### Turn on Custom meta data In the **Meta tags** tab, turn on **Custom meta data**. ### Edit your title and description Type the meta title and description you want. ### Click Save Save the settings. ### Test on search results [Test how your page looks on search results](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/#how-to-test-meta-tags-on-search-results). ## AI generate You can use our AI to generate your meta title and meta description. - After turning on **Custom meta data**, click **AI generate**. - Provide AI your product information and click **Generate** so it can generate proper content. - Select **Keep** to use the content generated by AI, or **Generate again**. ### How many times can I use the AI meta tags generator? AI generator credits vary by plan: - **Free** — 100 credits - **Pro** — 1,000 credits - **Enterprise** — 10,000 credits ## Auto-sync with Shopify Custom meta tags are auto-synced with the **Search engine listing** section in Shopify admin. [Custom meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags/)[Variables](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/variables/) --- # Custom meta tags Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags/ # Custom meta tags Conditional rules that override default meta tags for specific groups of pages Previously called "Meta tags rule". Your existing rules are preserved with their priorities and conditions. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. Custom meta tags are conditional rules that override your [Default meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/default-meta-tags/) for specific groups of pages. Use them when you need different meta content for a subset of your catalog — for example, products tagged "sale", items from a specific vendor, or blog posts by a particular author. All other pages that don't match any rule will stay the same as your [default content in Shopify (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/seo/adding-keywords#edit-the-title-and-meta-description-for-a-page). ## Where to find it Go to **Search appearance → Meta tags** → select a tab (Product, Collection, or Blog post) → find the **Custom meta tags** card below Default meta tags. The card contains: - An **Add rule** button to create new rules - A table listing all rules for the current tab - A tip to hover a rule for a live preview on the right Rules are scoped per tab — rules you create in the Product tab only apply to Product pages, and so on. ## Create a rule - Click **Add rule** - The rule editor opens with three sections — fill them in (details below) - Toggle the rule **On** at the top of the form - Click **Save** ### Section 1 — General settings - **Rule name** — a descriptive name for yourself (e.g., "Nike sale products", "Summer collection"). Not visible to shoppers. - **Priority** — a number starting at 0; lower numbers apply first when multiple rules match the same page. Use 0 for the most important rules, higher numbers for catch-all rules. - **Auto-disable schedule** — Never (default) or Schedule. See [Auto-disable schedule](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags/#auto-disable-schedule-enterprise-plan) below. ### Section 2 — Content Enter the **Meta title** and **Meta description** for this rule. The same tools from Default meta tags work here: - Type `@` in any field to open the variable picker - Click the `</>` icon to browse variables including custom metafields - Click **Generate with AI** next to the Meta description label to auto-generate content (costs 1 credit per generation) See the [variables reference](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/variables/) for the full list. ### Section 3 — Display conditions Conditions decide which pages the rule applies to. - Choose a logic: **If all of these conditions are true** (AND) or **If any of these conditions are true** (OR) - Click **+ Add condition** to add a condition - Each condition has three parts: **field + operator + value** Available conditions depend on the tab: TabFieldsOperators ProductTitle, Type, Vendorequals, not equals, contains, not contains ProductTags, Collectionscontains, not contains CollectionTitleequals, not equals, contains, not contains CollectionTagscontains, not contains Blog postTitle, Authorsequals, not equals, contains, not contains Blog postTagscontains, not contains **Example rule — Nike sale products** - Logic: **all** - Condition 1: Vendor **equals** "Nike" - Condition 2: Tags **contains** "sale" Only Nike products that are also tagged "sale" will use this rule. A rule with no conditions applies to every page in the current tab. Use this for a catch-all override. ## Auto-disable schedule (Enterprise plan) Running a Black Friday, flash sale, or holiday campaign? Auto-disable schedule turns the rule off automatically at a time you choose — no risk of stale sale meta tags lingering on Google after the campaign ends. - In the rule's **General settings**, select **Schedule** under Auto-disable schedule - Pick the date and time the rule should turn off - Save At the scheduled time, the rule's status flips to **Off** automatically. The rule stays in your list and can be turned back on manually at any time. You'll receive an in-app notification when a rule auto-disables. Free and Pro plans can only use **Never**. The Schedule option shows an **Enterprise** badge on those plans. The table paginates at 10 rules per page. Change the page size from the selector at the bottom right. ## How rules compete — priority resolution When a page matches multiple rules, the rule with the **lowest priority number** wins. If two rules share the same priority number, the one created first wins (tie-breaker: earliest `Created at`). **Example** RulePriorityConditionResult on a Nike product tagged "sale" "Sale products"0Tags contains "sale"✅ Wins (priority 0) "Nike products"1Vendor equals "Nike"Doesn't apply (rule 0 already won) **Tip:** use low priority numbers (0, 1, 2) for specific rules with multiple conditions, and high numbers (10, 20) for catch-all rules that should apply last. Pages that don't match any rule fall through to your [Default meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/default-meta-tags/) — or to Shopify's native meta tags if Default is turned off for that tab. ## Condition reference ### 1. All / any - **If all conditions are true** — the product or collection must match all conditions. - **If any condition is true** — the product or collection only needs to match at least one condition. ### 2. Basic operators - **Contains / Not contains** — checks if a certain piece of text is included in the variable. - **Equals to / Not equals to** — checks if the variable matches exactly or is different from a specific value. ### 3. Product rule - **Title** — product title - **Type** — a custom category you create for a product. See [product type on Shopify (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/details/product-type). - **Vendor** — the source of the products you sell. [Manage vendor info (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/managing-vendor-info). - **Tags** — product tags. We list all available tags for you to pick from quickly. - **Collections** — collections the product belongs to. We list all available collections for you to pick from quickly. ### 4. Collection rule - **Title** — collection title - **Tags** — collection tags ### 5. Blog rule - **Title** — blog title - **Authors** — authors of the blog - **Tags** — blog tags [Default meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/default-meta-tags/)[Custom meta tags details](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags-details/) --- # Default meta tags Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/default-meta-tags/ # Default meta tags Set up meta tags faster and more consistently across your store with a single template per page type. Previously called "Meta tags basic". Your existing settings are preserved. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. Default meta tags let you set a single template that applies to every page of a type — all Products, all Collections, or all Blog posts — with [dynamic variables](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/variables/). Instead of writing a unique meta title and description for each product manually, you define the format once and let the app fill it in with dynamic data for every page. If you need a different meta title or description for one specific page, use [Custom meta tags details](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags-details/). ## Where to find it Go to **Search appearance → Meta tags**. The screen has three tabs at the top — **Product**, **Collection**, **Blog post**. Each tab contains a **Default meta tags** card. Homepage meta tags are not configured here. Go to **Shopify Admin → Online Store → Preferences** to set the homepage title and description. ## Set up a template - Select the tab for the page type you want to configure (Product, Collection, or Blog post) - Turn on the **Default meta tags** toggle - Enter a template in the **Meta title** field (e.g., `{{ product.title }} - {{ shop.name }}`) - Enter a template in the **Meta description** field - Watch the **Google preview** panel on the right update in real time - Click **Save** Repeat for the Collection and Blog post tabs to cover your whole store. ### Insert variables with @ Type `@` anywhere in the meta title or description field to open the variable picker. Pick a variable from the list and it's inserted at the cursor — no need to remember the exact syntax. You can also click the `</>` icon on the right side of any field to browse the full list of available variables, including Shopify custom metafields. See the full [variables reference](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/variables/) for everything you can use. ## Tips for a good template - **Include the page-specific variable** (e.g., `{{ product.title }}`, `{{ collection.title }}`) so every page has unique content - **Add your store name** with `{{ shop.name }}` for brand recognition - **Keep titles around 50–60 characters** — Google truncates longer titles in search results - **Keep descriptions around 140–160 characters** — enough room for a benefit, a CTA, and a keyword - **Avoid keyword stuffing** — Google may ignore an unnatural description and generate its own from page content ## Save and verify After saving, open a product, collection, or blog page on your storefront and check the result: - Right-click the page → **Inspect** → look for `<title>` and `<meta name="description">` in `<head>` - Or paste the URL into [metatags.io (opens in a new tab)](https://metatags.io/) to preview how it will appear on Google If a page doesn't use your default template, check whether a [Custom meta tags rule](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags/) is overriding it — rules always take precedence over Default. ## Multi-language templates If your store is published in multiple languages, use the **language selector** at the top right of the Meta tags screen to switch. Each language has its own Default templates — you'll need to write (or AI-generate) them separately for every language. Languages must first be published in **Shopify Admin → Settings → Languages** to appear in the selector. ## How to add a metafield to meta tags ### Open Shopify admin settings In Shopify admin, click **Settings**. ### Select Custom data ### Pick the page type Select which page type (Products, Collection, Blogs) you want to add the metafield to. ### Add a metafield definition Click **Add definition** to add a new metafield. ### Build and save Configure your metafield and click **Save**. ### Insert into meta tags In the app, go to **Search appearance → Meta tags**. Open the page type you want to add the metafield to. Click `</>` to insert your metafield. [Meta Tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/)[Custom meta tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags/) --- # Variables Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/variables/ # Variables What variables are and how to use it to set up content on your website Variables act as placeholders that you fill in with actual information as the workflow happens, such as who's buying and what they're buying. Using variables helps you save time and effort. You can set different content for different products all at once. They change accordingly to different products or collection. ContentWhat visitors see `{{collection name}}``Valentine Flower Bouquet` Visit `{{store name}}`to get your giftVisit `Flower in France` to get your gift Buy `{{ product.title }}`at the best price in `{{address}}`Buy `Summer flower bouquet` at the best price in `Paris`. Learn more about [variables in Shopify. (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/shopify-flow/reference/variables) Avada SEO Suite support all variables in Shopify. Check all [product (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.dev/docs/api/liquid/objects/product) and [shop variables (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.dev/docs/api/liquid/objects/shop) to find your best fit. this format and change into your variables. ``` {{ variables }} ``` [Custom meta tags details](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/custom-meta-tags-details/)[Instant Indexing](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/instant-indexing/) --- # Robots.txt editor Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor/ # Robots.txt editor Robots.txt tells search engines which pages they should or shouldn't crawl **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro users. ## What is robots.txt? Robots.txt is a simple yet powerful tool that guides search engines on how to crawl your website. Think of it as a set of instructions for search engine bots. A robots.txt file is a simple text document. With this file, you can allow or block access to specific parts of your site. ## Why do you need robots.txt? Robots.txt helps you control how search engines see your site. You can use it to hide private or duplicate content from search results. By controlling what gets indexed, you can improve your site's SEO and ensure your most important pages get seen. Learn more about [robots.txt with Google (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/crawling-indexing/robots/intro). ## Robots.txt on Shopify All Shopify stores have a default robots.txt file that has basic optimization for SEO. File is located at the link `yourdomain.com/robots.txt` You can check all default rules in [robots.txt file](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor#manage-robots.txt-file) by filtering with default. ## How does Robots.txt editor work? Shopify Support can't help with edits to the `robots.txt.liquid` file. With Avada Robots.txt editor, you can add new rule to robots.txt file. You can also edit rules which are already in default file. Before getting to know how to use Robots.txt, we help you go through some terms in this topic. **Understand terms** - **User-agent** User agents are like different types of search engine bots. Each bot has a unique name in robots.txt. For example, Google's bot is called "Googlebot". You can set rules for each bot. This lets you control how different search engines interact with your site. You might allow Google to crawl everything but limit other bots. - **URL path** The URL path of pages that you want search engines to crawl or not to. - **Rule type** Rule type defines what the user-agent will do with your URL path. ### Add rules - Go to **Search appearance** -> Click **Robots.txt** - Select user-agent and rule type - Enter your URL path. Enter only the path (like "/example") without the full website address or domain name. The path can contain [wildcards](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor/wildcards/). - Select **Sitemap** if you want to insert sitemap to your rule.[Why should I add sitemap to my robots.txt file?](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor#why-should-i-add-sitemap-to-my-robots.txt-file) [How to set up sitemap?](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/sitemap-generator/html-sitemap/) - Click **Add rule**. - After adding rule, your rule will be shown in the Robots.txt file below. ### Manage Robots.txt file With Robots.txt file, you can: - View Robots.txt file in the link - Search rule by URL path or filter by user-agent, status, rule type - Change rule type - Delete rule - View Robots.txt file - Search and find rules You can click icon the **collapse** arrow to collapse and expand a group of rules to find rules easier. - Change rule type - Delete rules You cannot delete default rules but change rule type. Why should I add sitemap to my robots.txt file? The robots.txt file is the first document search engine bots look at when they visit your website. It gives them information about what is available to crawl. Adding sitemap in robots.txt file helps search engine find your sitemap faster and understand the structure of your website for indexing. [Google Structured Data](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/)[Wildcards](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor/wildcards/) --- # Wildcards Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor/wildcards/ # Wildcards How to use wildcards in URL path for robots.txt file ## What are wildcards? Wildcards in robots.txt are special characters that help you create flexible rules, like `*`, `$` They're like a shortcut to match multiple pages or folders at once. Wildcards are helpful for big websites with lots of pages. They make your robots.txt file simpler and easier to manage. There are 2 wildcards that are often used in robots.txt. - `*` - `$` ## How to use wildcards? - `*` The `*` wildcard matches any sequence of characters. It's like a blank space that can be filled with anything. For example: `/blog*` matches `/blog`, `/blog1`, `/blogpost`, etc. - `$` The `$` wildcard marks the end of a URL. It ensures the rule only applies to exact matches. For example: `/page$` only matches `/page`, not `/page1` or `/page/subpage` [Robots.txt Editor](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/robots.txt-editor)[AI Content](/seo-suite-help-center/ai-content/) --- # Social networks Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/social-networks/ # Social networks Connect your store with the right social metadata to boost visibility, branding, and click-through rates. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for **Pro users**. ### What is Social Networks? Social media is a powerful channel to drive traffic, spread awareness, and build your brand’s presence. With **Avada SEO Suite**, you can ensure your store links and content are correctly displayed when shared on platforms like Facebook, Twitter, and LinkedIn. This feature helps: - Link your store to the correct social pages - Automatically generate rich previews with correct **meta tags**, **images**, and **store name** - Control how your content appears when shared on social platforms ## 🚀 Ready to set up Social Networks? See how easy to boost your store’s visibility and brand trust: ## ⚙️ How to Set Up Social Networks ### Step 1: Enable the feature - Open **Avada SEO Suite** - From the left menu, click **Social Networks** - Click **Enable** to activate the feature ### Step 2: Add General Info - **Site Name**: Enter the name of your store for use in social meta tags - **Shop Logo**: Paste the image URL to be used as your store’s logo in social previews - **Default Social Network Image**: Paste an image URL to be used when no other image is available - **Homepage URL**: Enter the full URL of your store’s homepage [Google Indexing API](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/instant-indexing/google-indexing-api/)[Google Structured Data](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/) --- # Optimize in bulk Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/bulk-optimize/ # Optimize in bulk Instead of opening every page and fixing issues one by one, pick a score threshold and let AI optimize all pages below it in one run. You review the suggested changes before anything is published to your store. **Who can use this feature?** - Available on all plans. - Each run uses AI credits. The app shows an estimate before it starts. ## What is Optimize in bulk? On-page audit gives every product, collection, blog post and page an on-page score. **Optimize in bulk** takes all the pages scoring below the threshold you choose and asks AI to rewrite the fields you allow: meta title and description, URL handle, content and FAQs. The result is a list of proposed changes with a before and after comparison for each page. Nothing is written to Shopify until you click **Apply**. ## Before you start - Run a scan first. Only pages that already have an on-page score can be picked up by the threshold filter. If you have just installed the app, click the refresh icon next to **Report** and wait for the scan to finish. - Make sure you have enough AI credits. To start a run, your remaining credits must be equal to or greater than the **Maximum charge** shown in the estimate. ## How to run a bulk optimization ### Open the audit report Go to **SEO Audit → On-page audit**. In the **Report** card, click **Optimize**. ### Choose the score threshold Drag the slider under **Optimize pages scoring below** to set the threshold. The default is 50, and you can jump to 30, 50 or 80 with the shortcuts below the slider. A lower threshold means fewer pages and fewer credits. A higher threshold covers more pages. ### Pick the fields AI can change Under **Fields to optimize**, keep the fields you want AI to rewrite and untick the rest: - **Meta title & description** - **URL handle** - **Content** - **FAQs** All four are selected by default. Then click **Estimate**. ### Check the credit estimate The app shows how many pages match your threshold, the **Estimated credits** and the **Maximum charge**. You are only charged for what is actually used, so the final number is usually lower than the maximum. Click **Start optimizing** to run, or **Back** to change the threshold or fields. The job runs in the background. You can close the page or keep working. The audit page shows a progress banner while AI is working and a **Bulk AI content fix completed** banner with a **Review & apply** button when it finishes. ## Review and publish the changes ### Open the results Click **Review & apply** on the completion banner, or click **History** in the **Report** card and select the run you want. ### Compare before and after The **Bulk AI content fix** page lists every page in the run with its score before and after, its status and the credits it used. Click a row to see the before and after comparison for each field, including the keyword, related keywords, meta title, meta description, URL, content and FAQs. Issues that AI cannot fix are listed separately under **Remaining issues (not AI fixable)**. ### Publish the ones you want Click **Apply all** to publish everything, or tick individual rows and click **Apply selected** to publish only those. This is the step that writes the changes to Shopify. ⚠️ If you let AI change the **URL handle**, the app automatically creates a 301 redirect from the old URL to the new one, so existing links and search results do not break. ## Re-run or undo - **Re-optimize all** or **Re-optimize selected**: ask AI for a new suggestion on the same pages. This uses credits again. - **Revert all** or **Revert selected**: restore the previous content on pages you already applied. Credits already spent are not refunded. - **Cancel**: stop a run that is still in progress, from the job page or from the action menu in **History**. ## Track past runs Click **History** in the **Report** card to see every bulk run: the date, page type, total pages, how many were fixed or failed, the run status and progress, the apply status and the credits used. From the action menu on each row you can apply a finished run or cancel one that is still going. ## Good to know - Only one bulk run can be active at a time. The **Optimize** button is disabled while a scan or another run is in progress. - AI improves content fields only. Technical and structural factors stay unchanged, so some pages will not reach a score of 100 even after a successful run. - If the new score is not higher than the original score, the page is marked as **Skipped** and no credits are charged for it. [Checklist](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/checklist/)[Keyword Research](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/keyword-research/) --- # Checklist Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/checklist/ # Checklist The SEO Checklist analyzes your page across 7 categories and 20+ checks. Each issue comes with a clear description and a fix suggestion. Resolve all issues to push your SEO score toward 100. ## ℹ️ Keyword ### Missing main keyword 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The main keyword field is empty. Without a main keyword, the app cannot evaluate keyword density, keyword placement, or most other content checks. ### Missing related keywords 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The related keywords field is empty. Related keywords add context and help your page rank for a broader range of search queries. ## 🎯 Technical SEO ### H1 tag 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do You should add only one heading 1 (H1 tag) in your page. Think of H1 like the title on the cover of a book. It helps indicate the only topic of the page to readers and search engines. **For example:** In product page, H1 usually is your product name. In short, using only one H1 per page is recommended because: - It clearly signals the main topic of your page to both readers and search engines. - It creates a clear content hierarchy, improving user experience and readability. - Search engines give special weight to the H1 tag when determining what your page is about. ### Missing product structured data 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do This product page has no Product structured data. Without it, Google cannot display rich results like price, availability, and ratings in search. ### Missing article structured data 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do This blog post has no Article structured data. Article schema helps Google understand your content type and display it properly in search results. ### Duplicate title 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do You have more than one title in the same page or different pages. This can confuse search engines, making it unclear which page should rank for a specific keyword, ultimately affecting your site's visibility in search results. ## 🖇️ Link recommend ### Missing internal links 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do No internal links found in your page. **Internal links** are links that connect different pages within your website. Internal links act like a roadmap for both users and search engines, guiding them through your website. According to [Google's guidelines (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/crawling-indexing/links-crawlable#internal-links), internal links help Google discover new content and understand the structure of your site. ### Missing external links 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do No outbound links found in your page. **Outbound links** are links from your website that point to external websites. These links can improve the relevance and authority of your content by showing search engines that you are linking to trusted, high-quality sources. ## ✍️ Main content ### Main keyword density 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The main keyword density is outside the optimal range. Too low means search engines may not understand your topic; too high looks like keyword stuffing. ### Related keyword density 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do One or more related keywords are missing from your content or fall outside the optimal density range. ### Content length off target 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do Your content is shorter or longer than the recommended word count for this page type. ### Paragraphs off target 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do Some paragraphs are too long or too short, making the content harder to read. ### Sentence length off target 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do Some sentences are too long, which reduces readability and can lose the reader's attention. ### Missing main keyword in subheading 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do None of your subheadings (H2, H3) contain the main keyword. Subheadings help search engines understand content structure. ### Missing main keyword in introduction 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The main keyword does not appear in the first paragraph. The introduction is one of the strongest signals for search relevance. ## 🏷️ Meta tags ### Meta title length off target 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The meta title is shorter than 50 or longer than 70 characters. Titles outside this range may be truncated in search results or fail to convey enough information. Learn more [about title with Google (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/site-names). ### Meta description length off target 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do Meta description is the element below the title on the search results. If often provides a summary of a page's content. This won't help direct with rankings but helps with click through rate. Description length should be between 150 and 160 characters. Learn more [about meta description with Google. (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/snippet) ### Missing main keyword in meta title 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The main keyword does not appear in the meta title. The title tag is one of the strongest ranking signals. ### Missing main keyword in meta description 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The main keyword does not appear in the meta description. Google often bolds matching keywords in search results, improving click-through rates. ## ⁉️ FAQs ### Missing FAQs 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do Your page has no FAQs. FAQs help users find answers quickly and make your page eligible for Google's rich results. ### Missing main keyword in FAQs 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do None of your FAQ questions or answers contain the main keyword. Including it helps Google understand the relevance of your FAQs to the page topic. ### Missing FAQ structured data 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do Your page has FAQs but no FAQ structured data (schema markup). Without it, Google cannot display your FAQs as rich results in search. ## 🔗 URL ### URL length off target 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The full URL exceeds 75 characters. Long URLs are harder for users to read and share, and may be truncated in search results. A clean, well-structured URL helps search engines understand the content of your page and improves user experience. ### Invalid characters in URL 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The URL contains characters that are not recommended for SEO — such as uppercase letters, spaces, underscores, or special characters. ### Missing main keyword in URL 🤕 What happened🛠 What to do The main keyword does not appear in the URL. Including it reinforces relevance for search engines. [SEO Checklist](/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/seo-checklist/)[Optimize in Bulk](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/bulk-optimize/) --- # Collection page Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/collection-page/ # Collection page Mastering On-Page SEO for collection pages **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. Content on collection page follows the same On-page [checklist](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/checklist/). One thing in collection page is different is After item list content. **After item list content:** is keyword-rich content below collection pages. This helps improving SEO rankings and optimize data structure. - In "On-page SEO audit", click on your collection page - Insert your content and click **Save** - Click **Go to theme editor** - You're directed to your theme editor. A block of After item list is added to your collection page. Change position as you want. - Click **Save** to save all settings. [Keyword Research](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/keyword-research/)[FAQs Builder](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/faqs-builder/) --- # FAQs builder Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/faqs-builder/ # FAQs builder Make FAQs eligible for rich results on Google Search. In each page, you can add FAQs to answer customer's problems about product, order, pricing, etc. We help make your FAQs eligible for [rich results](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/rich-results/) and visible on Google Search. ## How to add FAQs to a page ### Go to SEO audit In the app, open **SEO audit**. ### Turn on FAQs builder In **FAQs builder**, click **Turn on**. ### (Optional) Show FAQs as a page section If you want to display FAQs as a section in your page, click **Show FAQs**. Then add the FAQs block to your theme. ### Add questions and answers Add up to 10 questions per page. Or use AI to generate your FAQs. You have 100 credits — each generation uses one credit. Click **AI generate** → select number of FAQs (1–5) → select language → click **Generate** → review and edit FAQs written by AI → click **Add** to insert them. ### Click Save [Collection Page](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/collection-page/)[Social Meta Tags](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/social-meta-tags/) --- # Keyword research Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/keyword-research/ # Keyword research Discover the right terms with our Keyword Research guide helps you effectively target your audience **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. ## A. Related keyword ### What is this and how does it help? This helps find more keywords which are related to your main keywords. - Go to **SEO audit** -> Select a page -> Enter main keyword -> Check related keywords below. You can add, remove related keywords or click **Find more** to get more suggestions. Related keywords are filtered in different colors by search volume and keyword difficulty (competitor). Keywords with high search volume will be placed first. - Green - Competitor: Low -> Few competitors rank for that keyword - Yellow - Competitor: Medium -> Medium amount of competitors rank for that keyword - Red - Competitor: High -> Most competitors rank for that keyword Include related keywords in your content at 0.5-1% density. This helps search engines understand your topic better and may improve rankings. You can check related keywords density right in checklist for Content SEO. ## B. Find keyword ### What is this and how does it help? This tool helps you find more keywords that are related to your website. You can also take advantage of Google Trends to have a complete view on your topic. Google Trend is a free service that helps you see what’s trending across Google Search, Google News and YouTube. It's like a popularity chart for words people type in Google search. It shows which words, like 'sunflower' or 'roses,' are getting searched a lot. This can help you find the keywords that people want to read about or buy. Learn the [Google Trends lesson (opens in a new tab)](https://newsinitiative.withgoogle.com/resources/trainings/google-trends-lesson/). ### How Find keywords works In "On-page SEO audit", select your page and click **Find keywords.** Let's take an overall to look to know what you have in Find keywords and what you can do. There're 3 main parts in Find keywords: - Your main keyword - Your main keyword's analytics. This helps you make a good decision in your SEO strategy. - Related keywords. This helps you to easily identify other potential keywords your page content can aim at. With Find keyword, you can filter your keyword by countries and add related keywords to compare with your main keywords. [Optimize in Bulk](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/bulk-optimize/)[Collection Page](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/collection-page/) --- # Social meta tags Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/social-meta-tags/ # Social meta tags Customize how your page looks like when shared on social media With social media meta tags, you can customize how your page looks when they're shared on social media. - In SEO audit, select page. - Go to Social post - Edit your social meta tags. You can edit image, social title and social description. Hover on the image and click **Replace** to upload your images. We support [variables](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/variables/) in the social title and social description. - Click **Save**. [FAQs Builder](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/faqs-builder/)[Image Compression](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/image-compression/) --- # Overview Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/overview/ # Overview Learn how our SEO audit analyzes your site's performance with clear, actionable insights to improve your search rankings **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users ## What is SEO Audit? The SEO audit is a crucial step for your success in the world of SEO. An SEO audit checks how well your website is doing. It points out what's working well, what you need to make better, or fix to show up more in search results and get more visitors naturally. ## How does SEO Audit help you? After analyzing your website, we give out your website's [SEO Score](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/#s) and [SEO checklist](/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/seo-checklist/) based on 3 criteria: performance, accessibility, content. An SEO Score from 0-49 is considered bad, from 50-79 is medium, and from 80 upwards is good. - **Performance Score** measures how quickly your website loads. - **Accessibility Score** indicates how easy it is for search engines to find and understand your website's content. - **Content Score** evaluates the quality, relevance of your website's content and how eligible it is for SEO. Here are some standout features of the Avada SEO Checklist: - **Task List:** A comprehensive set of specific SEO-related tasks to optimize your website. - **Task Prioritization:** Ability to sort tasks by importance for efficient management. - **Guidance Information:** Detailed instructions with each task, explaining the steps and their purpose. - **Regular Updates:** Reflects the latest changes in search algorithms and SEO strategies. - **Completion Check:** Functionality to mark and track completed tasks. - **Result Tracking:** Integrated tools to check website performance post-optimization. - **Diverse Optimization Support:** Covers various SEO dimensions, including content, pages, images, and links. ## How to get your website audit? ### Step 1: Start scanning your website Get access to SEO Audit by one of these ways: - In SEO Score in Dashboard, click **View checklist** - Or in Quick start guide, open Check SEO Audit and click **Run SEO audit** - Or go to "SEO Checklist" -> Check SEO audit ### Step 2: Follow your checklist Your checklist has three kinds of tasks by importance: - Issues: Fix these first, as they might hurt how well your site does in search results. - Improvement: Work on these to make your site better and do well in search rankings. - Good results: These are what you're doing right. Keep an eye on them when you update your site. For every issue, we provide you detailed information and a call-to-action button that helps you to fix it. Fix all your issues, then come to improvements one-by-one. [SEO checklist](/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/seo-checklist/) Can all the issues be fixed automatically? No, they can't. We can fix automatically some issues but we need you check through each issue to make sure you've got the problem and how we solve it. And some issues require actions that are unique for your store. ### Step 3: Re-scan your website After finishing improving your website with our checklist, re-scan your store to get a better SEO score. [Referral Code](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/referral-code/)[SEO Checklist](/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/seo-checklist/) --- # SEO checklist Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/seo-checklist/ # SEO checklist Explore essential tips for understanding and fixing your SEO checklist. Improve your website's visibility and attract more organic traffic with expert insights and actionable strategies. ## SEO checklist There are two types of SEO scores in our app that require your attention, they are the SEO checklist score, and the on-page SEO score. While the on-page SEO scores focus on one single product score, the SEO checklist score focuses on the implementation of overall SEO best practices for your store including various topics such as metadata, site performance, indexing, etc. In this post, we will cover all the existing SEO checklists you need to do within our app to help your jumpstart your store and SEO campaign. ## A. Performance ### JavaScript error We detect Javascript error in your website. This error may come from the Console tab on the dev tool. This error may badly affect your site functionaltity. JavaScript can help you find new users and re-engage existing users as they search for the content your web app provides. Understand the [JavaScript SEO basics (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/crawling-indexing/javascript/javascript-seo-basics). In issue detail, we detect pages that have Javascript errors. You can follow guide [how to fix Javascript errors (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/crawling-indexing/javascript/fix-search-javascript) or click **Contact us** so that our Customer Success can assist you. ### Speed up Speed up is disabled on your website. Speed up is our set of features that helps speed by optimizing three aspects: Loading, Interactivity, Visual Stability. Click **Enable** to turn on speed up feature for your store Or go to **Speed up** -> Find tab **Site Speed up** -> Turn on the toggle. ### Speed score We are currently using PageSpeed Insights to measure this audit metrics. Regarding the PageSpeed Insights: For desktop, your speed core is from 0 - 89 which means there's still room for you to improve. For mobile, your speed score is around 50 is quite good already, since PageSpeed Insight or Lighthouse test the mobile audit on throttled low-end device with low connection bandwidth. It may be reflect your speed all the time but as a "lab" audit. Click **Fix**, then you're directed to our [Speed up](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/) tab where you can speed up your store with our speed up features designed for Shopify stores. ### Page response time Your response time is more than 1 second. Response time refers to the speed at which the server can respond to a request. The longer the response time, the more users leave your website. Here are some common tips to reduce response time: - Compress images - Optimize Your Database - Create CDN Or you can click **Contact us** so that our Customer Success can assist you. ### Reduce JavaScript file long time loading Your website's JavaScript execution takes more than 2 seconds, which slows down your page performance. We help you identify the biggest contributors to execution time. You can learn more about [how to speed up Javascript execution time (opens in a new tab)](https://developer.chrome.com/docs/lighthouse/performance/bootup-time/?utm_source=lighthouse&utm_medium=lr#how_to_speed_up_javascript_execution) to reduce time of thosse files. Or click **Contact us** so that our Customer Success can assist you. ### Lazy load Your website hasn't enabled lazy loading. This helps reduce initial load time by waiting to load certain parts of a webpage (especially images) until they are needed. Click **Enable** so that lazy loading works on your website. [Check your lazy loading performance](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/lazy-loading/). ### Minification Your website's code needs to be refined with minification. Minification helps your website load faster by removing all unnecessary characters from JavaScript source code without altering its functionality. Click **Enable** so that lazy loading works on your website. You can keep track with our process and [set up your minification](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/minification/). ### HTML document size Your HTML document size is bigger than 75kb. HTML document size refers to the downloaded file size of your web page. Keeping this below 75kb helps improve your website performance. These are some common tips to reduce your page size: - Compress images - Minimize resources - Remove unnecessary custom fonts Learn more about [optimize resources with Google (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/articles/optimizing-content-efficiency-optimize-encoding-and-transfer#minification_preprocessing_context-specific_optimizations). Or you can click **Contact us** so that our Customer Success team can assist you. ### Heading structure Headings are using <div>, <span>, etc. which might cause broken format. Replace <div>, <span>, etc. around your headings with the correct tags to maintain structure and improve SEO. ### LCP image loading LCP image uses loading=""lazy"", delaying loading. Change the loading attribute of LCP image to loading=""eager"" for faster page load and better user experience. ### Image loading method Some of your images are loading not using <img> tag. Some theme use JavaScript to load images instead of <img> tag, which might result in slow page speed. Use <img> tag to load images directly for improved performance. You should not use JavaScript loading. ### Efficiently encode image Your images are not efficiently encoded. Lighthouse collects all the JPEG or BMP images on the page, sets each image's compression level to 85, and then compares the original version with the compressed version. If the potential savings are 4KiB or greater, Lighthouse flags the image as optimizable. In the issue detail, we'll help your detect all images that are not optimized. Click the images to optimize them. ### Serving image in modern formats Images on your website are either not in the format AVIF or WEBP. Your images should be in those format because: - They reduce your page load time - They improve your [LCP](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/#l) score - They are recommended by Google In the issue detail, we'll help your detect all images and which page they are at. - Click **View** to see your image - Click **Fix** -> Your image will be automatically optimized and converted to WebP format -> Click **Download** image -> Go to theme editor, select the page that we detected & replace with your original photo. ### Image alt Images on your website do not have [alt](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/#a). Alt images help you tell search engine what an image is displaying and allowing them to index an image correctly. We help you detect all the images without alt and which pages they are on. Click **Fix** -> Click **Optimize all** to add alt automatically to your images. You can edit your image alt later. ### Heavy videos impacting page load Heavy video files detected on your site that are slowing down your page load times. They significantly increase page load times, leading to poor user experience and potentially lower search engine rankings. Slow-loading pages can increase bounce rates and decrease engagement, negatively impacting your site's SEO performance. To fix this issue and improve SEO, consider the following methods or contact our support team: compress videos, use lazy load, host video externally, etc. ## B. Content ### Validate HTML Your website has invalid HTML which might affect how browsers and search engines interpret and display the content. It may break your site, or not letting one or a few app running correctly. Learn more about [how to fix HTML errors (opens in a new tab)](https://www.linkedin.com/advice/1/how-do-html-errors-affect-seo-skills-search-engines-nkx3f). Or click **Contact us** so that our Customer Success can assist you. ### Meta title Some of your pages don't have meta titles. Learn more about [how to influence your title links in search results (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/title-link). We help you detect pages that don't have titles. Go to each page and insert your meta title or simply use our meta title rules. Follow [best practices for title with Google. (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/title-link#page-titles) ### H1 tag More than one H1 tag (heading 1) is detected on a single page of your site. The H1 tag is typically used to represent the main headline of a page and its overall content. Having more than one H1 in a page will confuse seach engines about the main topic of your page. Ensure each page has exactly one H1 tag. ### Meta title length Your meta title length is not in the range from 10 - 70 characters. While there's no limit on how long a element can be, the ideal length for the meta title is 50–60 characters to be truncated in Google Search results as needed, typically to fit the device width. We help you detect pages that have titles that are too long or short. Go to each page and insert your meta title. Follow [best practices for title with Google. (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/title-link#page-titles) ### Meta description [Meta description](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/#m) is not available on your pages. Meta descriptions are important because they let Google know what your webpage will be about. If Google can read and comprehend the content of your meta description, they will have an easier chance of ranking your page to answer search queries. In issue detail, we help your detect which pages are missing meta descriptions. Click **Fix** and follow our guide to add meta description to each page. - For example: Homepage: Click **Fix** and you're directed to Online store - Preference to edit your meta description. Follow [best practices for meta descriptions (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/snippet#meta-descriptions). ### Meta description length Your meta description is longer than recommended. Description length should be between 50 and 160 characters. In issue detail, we help your detect which pages have the too long/short meta descriptions. Click **Fix** and follow our guide to edit your meta description. - For example: Product page: Click **Fix** and edit your meta description. Follow [best practices for meta descriptions (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/appearance/snippet#meta-descriptions). ### Duplicate title Some of your pages have the duplicated <title> tag on the same page. It may displaying the undesired title content as you wish. Having duplicate title on your website can negatively impact your search engine rankings. In issue detail, we help you identify which pages have duplicate titles. Hover on the page to see duplicate titles. You can check and edit themselves or click **Contact us** so that our Customer Success team can assist you. ### Duplicate content Your website has duplicated content. Duplicate content might confuse Google & affect how websites rank on search engine results pages. Click **Contact us** so that our Customer Success can assist you. ### Google structures data Your website doesn't have [Google Structured Data.](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/#g) Using Google structured data helps Search engines to understand the content on your website and show that content in a richer appearance in search results. Click **Enable** to enable Google structured data for your website. Then Go to **Search appearance** -> [Google Structured Data](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/) to set up more for your rich results on Search. ### Link not found - missing images on 404 error page Images are missing on your 404 error page, potentially reducing its effectiveness and user engagement. While 404 pages don't directly influence rankings, they play a crucial role in retaining visitors and maintaining site credibility. A well-designed 404 page with appropriate images can help improve user experience on your site. - Design a custom 404 page with relevant and branded images. Ensure that images are optimized for quick loading. - Activate [auto-resolve broken links](/seo-suite-help-center/other-features/broken-link/) to redirect all 404 pages to a specific page. ### Open Graph meta tags Open Graph meta tags are missing on your website. They control how URLs are displayed when shared on social media. You should use them because: - They make content more eye-catching in social media feeds. - They tell users what the content is about at a glance. - They help Facebook understand what the content is about, which can help increase your brand visibility through search. Click **Enable** to turn add Open Graph meta tags to your website. You can edit your social content later in [Social Network](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/google-structured-data/rich-results/#id-1.-organization). ### Favicon Your website hasn't set up [favicon](/seo-suite-help-center/getting-started/seo-dictionary/#f). Using Favicon helps users identify your website tab, even if they open multiple tabs at the same time. This helps improve your brand authority, brand image and user experience. In the tab Favicon, click **Update** -> You're directed to your theme editor -> In theme settings, in Favicon image -> Click Select image to set your favicon image -> Click **Save.** ### Indexing status Your website is not indexed on Google yet, which means if you go to Google and search for your site, it is no where to be found. Indexing is the process that Google analyzes the text, images, and video files on the page, and stores the information in the Google index. If you are setting up your site, and not yet want it to be indexed, there should be nothing to worry about. Learn more about [How Google Search works. (opens in a new tab)](https://developers.google.com/search/docs/fundamentals/how-search-works) To get your website indexed by Google, Googlebot first needs to find your site and then it needs to determine if your content is worth indexing. Learn more [how to get your page get indexed (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/E0J2X2) or click **Contact us** so that our customer support team can assist you. ## C. Accessibility ### Rating & reviews structured data Rating & reviews on your store are not eligible for search results. Enable structured data for your store's reviews with our [Google Structured Data](/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/seo-checklist/#google-structures-data). [Air Product Review (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/n4og3A) helps collect and showcase product reviews. ### Google Safe If your site is flagged as phishing and malware sites or not ### Store password If your store has password, we may not be able to scan it. If possible fill your password to our app or simply remove the password temporarily for auditing. ### Robots.txt Check if there is robots.txt avaiable on your site. Normally, the robots.txt will be handled by Shopify. But sometimes, you might do something wrong that affect the availability of the robots.txt. ### Sitemap Sitemap or sitemap.xml would be needed for search engines to crawl throughout your website. ### No-index content If somehows you by mistake mark your content as 'no-index'. Search engines may find your site, but it will not store your content in their index. ### URL broken links There is 404 links on your sites. It can be a URL on your content that has been removed, your just renamed without taking action replacing previous content. It is best practice to redirect previous renamed, 404 URLs to new pages, or existing page. You can go to our Broken link manager to manage this. ### www and non-www version of URL It is recommended to redirect www and non-www URL to one same version. No matter redirect to which one, but one must be of the preference. ### Expires headers Your server is not using "expires" headers for your images. Expires headers tell the browser when to grab fresh items from the website's main store (server) and when it's okay to use what's already on the shelf (cache). This helps websites load faster for your customer. [Overview](/seo-suite-help-center/shop-seo-checklist/overview/)[Checklist](/seo-suite-help-center/seo-on-page-audit/checklist/) --- # Speed up - custom mode Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/ # Speed up - custom mode Customize your speed up feature with our advanced features **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users With custom mode, you can check a list of speed up feature and set up them in your way. - Go to "Speed up" -> "Site speed up" - In Speed up mode, select Custom - Click **Settings**. You can [customize speed up mode](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/) with your own settings. - Click **Speed up** We'll create a copy of your store to speed up without risk on your first speed up. You can preview and check your speed-optimized store before going live. On your next speed up, you can select to apply changes directly to your site or speed up now. ## Speed up customization [JS deferral](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/js-deferral/)[Style optimization](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/style-optimization/)[Assets optimization](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/assets-optimization/)[Lazy loading](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/lazy-loading/)[Minification](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/minification/)[Instant page](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/instant-page/) [Web Performance](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/web-performance/)[Assets Optimization](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/assets-optimization/) --- # Assets optimization Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/assets-optimization/ # Assets optimization Optimize all images in assets file to load page faster **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users ## What is asset? Asset files in theme the individual files that make up a shop's theme. You can find assets file in the Online store -> Theme -> Edit code -> Find "Assets" A theme's assets include its templates, images, stylesheets, and extra snippets of code. They are arranged among the theme's directories, such as **layout**, **templates**, and **assets**. Learn more about [Asset with Shopify (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.dev/docs/api/admin-rest/2024-04/resources/asset). ## How does Assets optimization help? We help optimize all images in assets file. Images in assets: - are typically files uploaded to the [Files (opens in a new tab)](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/shopify-admin/productivity-tools/file-uploads?utm_source=sidekick) section in your Shopify admin - might not be in product, collections and blog posts pages - In "Speed up customization" -> Assets optimization - Turn on the Asset image optimization - Click **Save** - After speeding up with customized mode, you'll see details of the assets optimization. [Speed Up Custom Mode](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/)[Critical CSS](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/critical-css/) --- # Critical CSS Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/critical-css/ # 🧩 Critical CSS Boost your store’s speed by prioritizing only the CSS needed for above-the-fold content. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for **Enterprise users**. ## What is Critical CSS? Critical CSS helps your page load faster by identifying and loading only the essential CSS needed to render the visible part of the page (above the fold). Other CSS is loaded later, ensuring quicker initial rendering and a smoother user experience. ## Why use Critical CSS? - Prioritizes key visual elements for faster first paint - Significantly improves **First Contentful Paint (FCP)** - Reduces render-blocking styles - Helps pass Core Web Vitals and improves SEO performance ## ⚙️ How to Set Up Critical CSS ### Step 1: Enable the feature - Go to **Avada SEO Suite > Speed Up > Custom > Settings** - Find **Critical CSS** and toggle it ON ### Step 2: Apply changes - Return to **Speed Up Now** - Select your theme and click to optimize ### Step 3: Verify it's working **A. In theme code** - Go to **Online Store > Themes > Actions > Edit Code** - After running optimization, check your `.liquid` files - You’ll see a `preload` code snippet automatically added **B. On your storefront** - Visit your store frontend - Check your **FCP** score using Google Lighthouse or PageSpeed Insights - If the feature is active, FCP should be significantly improved ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Always run **Speed Up Now** after enabling the feature to apply changes to your chosen theme - Make sure that your theme is published - Look for `preload` tags injected into `.liquid` files — these help load critical CSS faster [Assets Optimization](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/assets-optimization/)[Font Display Swap](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/font-display-swap/) --- # Font-display: swap Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/font-display-swap/ # Font-display: swap Ensure your store's text loads immediately — even before custom fonts are fully downloaded. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available on the **Enterprise plan**. ## What is Font-display: swap? When custom fonts are loading, browsers may temporarily hide your text (a problem known as *Flash of Invisible Text* or FOIT). The `font-display: swap` feature solves this by telling the browser to show fallback text instantly, and swap it out once the custom font is ready — creating a smoother, more user-friendly experience. ## Why use Font-display: swap? - Prevents invisible text while fonts load - Improves **First Contentful Paint (FCP)** and **Largest Contentful Paint (LCP)** - Reduces bounce rate by showing content faster - Helps meet **Core Web Vitals** thresholds ## ⚙️ How to Set Up Font-display: swap ### Step 1: Enable the feature - Open **Avada SEO Suite > Speed Up > Custom > Settings** - Find **Font-display: swap** and toggle it ON ### Step 2: Apply changes - Go back to **Speed Up Now**, select the theme you want to optimize, and click to apply the feature ### Step 3: Verify it's working **A. Check theme files** - Go to **Online Store > Themes > Actions > Edit Code** - Search for `avada-seo-font-display.css` - Open the file to confirm it's been added **B. Check on the storefront** - Visit your store and use PageSpeed Insights or Lighthouse - Compare metrics before and after activation → You should see improvements in **FCP** and **LCP** ### 📌 Merchant Notes Make sure to **click Speed Up Now** after enabling to apply changes to your selected theme [Critical CSS](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/critical-css/)[Hyperspeed](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/hyperspeed/) --- # Hyperspeed Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/hyperspeed/ # ⚡ Hyperspeed Boost page performance by optimizing non-essential JavaScript execution. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for **Enterprise users**. ## What is Hyperspeed? Hyperspeed improves loading efficiency by deferring JavaScript that doesn’t directly affect your store’s visible content. This reduces render-blocking scripts, helping your store load faster and smoother — especially on mobile. ## Why use Hyperspeed? - Prioritize visible content for faster first paint - Reduce delays caused by heavy JavaScript - Improve Core Web Vitals and user experience - Ideal for stores with multiple apps or custom scripts Let’s activate Hyperspeed and make every millisecond count. ## ⚙️ How to Set Up HyperSpeed ### Step 1: Enable the Hyperspeed feature - Open **Avada SEO Suite** - Go to **Speed Up > Custom > Settings** - Find **Hyperspeed** and toggle it **ON** ### Step 2: Apply changes to your theme - Go to **Speed Up Now** - Select your theme and click **Optimize** to apply the Hyperspeed feature ### Step 3: Verify the feature is working **A. In your theme files** - Go to **Online Store > Themes > Actions > Edit Code** - Search for the file: `avada-seo-hyperspeed.liquid` - Open the file — you should see **6 JavaScript files** listed, confirming the feature is active **B. On your storefront** - Visit your store frontend - Use tools like **PageSpeed Insights** or **Lighthouse** - Check performance scores — **FCP** (First Contentful Paint) and **LCP** (Largest Contentful Paint) should be lower than before ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Always click **Speed Up Now** after enabling the feature - Hyperspeed works best on stores with multiple apps or custom scripts - If FCP and LCP improvements aren’t visible, try clearing your browser cache or using incognito mode when testing [Font Display Swap](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/font-display-swap/)[Instant Page](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/instant-page/) --- # Instant page Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/instant-page/ # Instant page Instant page helps your site's pages load instantly and improve your conversion rate. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users. ## What is Instant Page? Instant Page is a speed optimization feature that preloads page content before users click on links. This creates a faster browsing experience by reducing the time it takes for pages to load after a user clicks. Instant Page works by preloading HTML content in the background when a user hovers over a link. ## Why Instant Page? When visitors browse your store, Instant Page preloads the linked pages they're likely to visit next. This creates a seamless browsing experience by: - Eliminating waiting time between page loads - Creating an instant response when customers click links - Improving Core Web Vitals metrics ## How to set up Instant Page ### Go to Speed up customization ### Turn on Instant page ### (Optional) Add URLs to ignore If you don't want to apply Instant page to a specific page, enter the URL in **Ignore URLs**. ### Click Save In some scenarios, you may not want to preload links such as `/account/logout`, which logs the customer out. These special links are already handled by our app — we only preload links that matter. [Hyperspeed](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/hyperspeed/)[JS Deferral](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/js-deferral/) --- # JS deferral Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/js-deferral/ # JS deferral The Script Manager and JS deferral are crucial tools in SEO for organizing and selectively loading various scripts on your website, enhancing site speed and user experience **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. ## What is JS deferral? The JS deferral feature delays loading non-essential scripts like chat, popups, and widgets until the user interacts with the page. This reduces the amount of Javascript running at once, improving site speed and performance, especially on mobile devices. ## Why JS Deferral matters for your store You might install 3rd-party apps to enrich your store features and user experience. This might cause problems: - You have many used apps and scripts that have been added long ago without noticing - Too many apps can slow down your site because they run a lot of Javascrip To fix this, we delay loading non-essential scripts like chat, popups, and floating widgets until users interact with the page. This helps your store load faster, especially on mobile devices, by reducing the amount of Javascript running at once. We also have a list of apps to prioritize or delay to make sure your store works well. This approach improves your store's performance and creates a smoother experience for your customers. See our [App Deferral for Shopify Store Speed Optimization](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/app-deferral-for-shopify-store-speed-optimization-deep-dive/) deep dive post here to fully understand the idea behind this approach. Does this impact how 3rd-party apps work? No, the JS deferral feature does not affect the core functionality of 3rd-party apps. It only delays their scripts until the user interacts with the page, ensuring your store loads faster without compromising app performance. ## How does it work? - Go to **Speed up customization** - Click **Turn on** - Click **Save** If you remove the app, Speed up will be disabled after 48 hours. Then the store's score will be affected and may drop suddenly. ## Script manager **Scripts** are pieces of code that add features and functionality to your store (mostly from 3rd-party apps), such as popups, live chat, or analytics tracking. You can manually manage all scripts on your store to improve page loading and user experience by customizing the **Script manager.** This will let you configure each script behavior on your site. You select which scripts are allowed to run on your store. For now, it will only manage your app script registered via Script Tag API, with OS 2 blocks, we are on the way to deliver this update SOON enough. With this update, customers will have more controls over the JS scripts on their website. What's in the Script manager: - Script: List of scripts on your site. You can click on each script to check - Source: Shows where the script comes from, like a URL or app - Size: Displays the file size of the script in kilobytes (KB) - Used: Shows the percentage of the file that is actually loaded and used on your store - Updated at: Shows the last time the script was updated - Load on user action: The script will load only when a user interacts with the page - In speed up customization, click **Script manager** - Click **Check for new scripts** to load all scripts on your site - Select "**On user action**" to make the scripts load when user take action on your site. - Click **Save.** [Instant Page](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/instant-page/)[Lazy Loading](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/lazy-loading/) --- # Lazy loading Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/lazy-loading/ # Lazy loading Lazy loading images on a website improves performance by loading images only as they scroll into view. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for Pro and Enterprise plan users. ## What is lazy loading? Lazy loading is a way to make your website faster. Instead of loading all the images at once, it loads them only when the user needs them. This helps users see your site faster and prevents them from leaving before it's fully loaded. We won't use lazy loading for videos, images, or iframes at the top of the page. Eager loading is applied there, which makes the page load faster. ## How does it help? Lazy loading can bring these benefits to your site: - Reduce initial loading time - Improve score of crucial elements including [FCP (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/fcp/) and [LCP (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/lcp/) at Google PageSpeed, boosting your site's speed score - Increase customer shopping experience and minimize bounce rate due to slow load speed ## How to set up lazy loading ### Open Speed up customization Go to **Speed up customization → Lazy loading**. ### Turn on Lazy loading Enable lazy loading for images and video & iframes. ### Select pages to apply We support lazy loading for pictures in: Theme assets (file liquid in current theme), Product description, Collection description, Blog post content, Pages. ### Click Save If you don't want to apply lazy loading to specific images, insert your file (.liquid file) in **Ignore files**. This requires technical knowledge — contact us through live chat for support. ## How to check if lazy loading works ### Open your storefront Go to your website. ### Inspect the page Right-click anywhere on the page and click **Inspect**. ### Search for the lazy attribute Hit `Ctrl + F` and search for `loading="lazy"`. If it shows up (as in the image below), lazy loading is working on your store. Check on other pages to confirm. [JS Deferral](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/js-deferral/)[Minification](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/minification/) --- # Minification Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/minification/ # Minification Reduce load times and improve user experience by streamlining your website's code. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users, but some options are only available on paid plans. ## What is minification? As a process of code optimization, minification removes unnecessary information from the source code — white spaces, line breaks, comments, etc. — to help your pages load faster. ## How does it help? Minification can bring these benefits to your site: - Decrease the loading time of your website for better performance - Improve score of crucial Google PageSpeed elements: [FCP (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/fcp/), [LCP (opens in a new tab)](https://web.dev/lcp/), boosting your site's speed score ## How to set up minification ### Open Speed up customization Go to **Speed up customization → Minification**. ### Turn on Minification ### Select file types to minify We support CSS and JavaScript. ### Click Save ## How to check if minification works ### Open Shopify admin themes In Shopify admin, go to **Online Store → Themes**. ### Edit theme code In your current theme, click **Edit code**. ### Search for "min" in Assets Under **Assets**, search for `min` or `minified`. If it shows up (image below), minification is working on your store. ### Open your storefront Visit your website, right-click, and click **Inspect**. ### Open Network tab Click **Network** → click **JS** or **CSS**. ### Find the minified file Find a file with the `aio.min` tag (image below). **What if I change my theme content?** If you make any changes in your live theme relevant to image elements (HTML or Liquid source code, not image URLs), click **Update now** so Avada SEO Suite stays in sync. [Lazy Loading](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/lazy-loading/)[Page Loader](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/page-loader/) --- # Page Loader Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/page-loader/ # 🔄 Page Loader Deliver a smoother browsing experience by optimizing how your store loads - right from the first interaction. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for **Free users** (loading circle) and **Enterprise users** (loading circle + custom loading logo). ## What is Page Loader? Page Loader enhances site performance and user experience by showing a visual indicator while your page is loading. This gives customers instant feedback, reduces perceived waiting time, and helps prevent bounce from slow-loading moments. ## Why use Page Loader? - Create a smoother, more polished experience during page transitions - Reduce perceived wait time and boost engagement - Customize the loading animation to match your brand - Keep customers informed while content loads in the background Let’s make your store feel faster — and more premium — with just a few clicks. ## ⚙️ How to Set Up Page Loader? ### Step 1: Enable the feature - Open **Avada SEO Suite** - Go to **Speed Up > Custom > Settings** - In the left menu, select **Style Optimization** - Toggle **Page Loader** ON to activate the feature ### Step 2: Customize the Page Loader appearance **A. Choose a loading style** - Select **Loading Circle** to show a spinning icon while the page loads - Choose from **3 preset styles** to apply instantly - Click **Loading Size** to adjust the icon’s size **B. Choose a loading logo** Display a logo or icon while the page loads, with two options: - **Use store favicon**: Display your store’s current favicon - **Upload custom logo**: Upload a custom logo for branding consistency ### Step 3: Preview your Page Loader - Click the **Preview** button to see how your page loader looks in action - Switch between **Mobile mode** and **Desktop mode** to test both views [Minification](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/minification/)[Preconnect](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/preconnect/) --- # Preconnect Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/preconnect/ # Preconnect Preconnect helps your store load external resources faster, improving page speed and user experience. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available on the **Enterprise plan**. ## What is Preconnect? Preconnect is a speed optimization feature that allows the browser to establish early network connections to external domains — such as CDNs, fonts, APIs, or image servers — *before* they are actually needed. By setting up these connections in advance, the browser skips DNS lookups, TLS handshakes, and TCP connections during the actual page load, resulting in a smoother experience for your customers. ## Why Preconnect? Preconnect improves your store performance by: - Reducing loading time for third-party resources - Improving Time to First Byte (TTFB) and First Contentful Paint (FCP) - Creating faster, more responsive pages — especially on mobile - Enhancing overall **Core Web Vitals** ## ⚙️ How to Set Up Preconnect - Go to **Speed Up > Custom > Settings** - Turn on **Preconnect** - Go back to **Speed Up Now**, select the theme you want to optimize, and click to apply changes - To verify: Search for the file `avada-seo-preconnect.liquid` in your theme code - View your storefront → right-click > View Page Source → check for `<link rel="preconnect">` tags [Page Loader](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/page-loader/)[Meta Tags](/seo-suite-help-center/search-appearance/meta-tags/) --- # Speed up Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/ # Speed up Boost your website's performance with Avada SEO Suite's speed up modes. Experience faster loading times and better user engagement. **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users - Some speed up modes are only available for Pro and Enterprise users ## What is speed up? Speed up helps to improve web performance by applying all SEO best practices. In Speed up, we help you measure your [web performance](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/web-performance/) and provide solutions to help improve it. Speed up solutions are delivered by speed up modes. We have 3 automatic modes (Basic, Turbo, Rocket) and 1 customized mode. With old version of Avada SEO Suite, we offer 4 automatic modes: Basic, Standard, Turbo, Rocket. Standard mode is no longer available for new users who installed app after 17 Jul, 2024. ## How speed up works? Speed up mode helps to improve your web performance - Go to "Speed up" -> "Site speed up" - Check your [web performance score](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/web-performance/) - Select a suitable mode for your store. [Compare automatic modes](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/compare-modes/) or select [custom mode](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/). - Click **Speed up now** - Select **Speed up method**. **Duplicate current theme** We'll create a copy of your store to speed up without risk. You can preview and check your speed-optimized store before going live. Go to Themes -> Select your themes and click **Duplicate** Go back to Avada SEO Suite -> Your duplicate theme will be auto-synced to speed up mode -> Click **Speed up now** - **Select theme from library** Select a theme in your library to speed up. You will apply changes directly to your store that may lead to unexpected impact. - While speeding up, tasks will be listed in the "Running tasks". It might take a while to finish all features. If there's a task which fails, click **Refresh** to restart. - When it's done, you can preview your duplicate store to make sure no changes are made and click **Publish**. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Compress Image Tool](/seo-suite-help-center/image-optimization/compress-image-tool/)[Compare Modes](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/compare-modes/) --- # Compare modes Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/compare-modes/ # Compare modes Compare 3 automatic speed up modes BasicTurboRocket **Site impact**MinimalMediumHigh Instant page☑️☑️☑️ Minify CSS☑️☑️☑️ Minify JS☑️☑️ Circle pageloader☑️☑️☑️ Logo pageloader☑️ Image lazy-loading☑️☑️ Video & iFrame lazy load☑️ JS defer☑️☑️ Assets image optimization☑️☑️ Critical CSS☑️ Preconnect☑️ Font-display: swap☑️ With old version of Avada SEO Suite, we offer 4 automatic modes: Basic, Standard, Turbo, Rocket. Standard mode is no longer available for new users who installed app after 17 Jul, 2024. [Speed Up](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/)[Web Performance](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/web-performance/) --- # Web performance Source: https://docs.avada.io/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/web-performance/ # Web performance Understand web performance and how important it is in SEO within Avada SEO Suites ## What is web performance? **Website performance** (or speed score) measures the responsiveness of your website and how quickly it loads. Web perfomance includes: - **Loading speed:** Measures how quickly the main content of a website appears. It is equivalent of Largest Contentful Paint. - **Total blocking time:** Measures how long it takes visitors to fully interact with the website - **Visual stability:** Measures how much the webpage content moves around while loading - **Interactivity:** Measures how fast the website responds to user's click ## Learn more about web performance [Basic Core Web Vitals](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/basic-core-web-vitals/)[Web performance and speed with Shopify eCommerce in 2024](/seo-suite-help-center/knowledge-hub/web-performance-and-speed-with-shopify-ecommerce-in-2024/) ## How web performance is calculated? Currenty, this performance score report is using the PageSpeed Insight API to measure your Home, Product and Collection pages. It varies on each page of your website and on user devices. Select page and devices to check web performance. Shopify recently updates the Shopify Admin Performance report, which leverage real customer loading data. We will soon integrate this report. ## What's considered a good score? ### Desktop Scores - 90 or above: Excellent performance - 75-89: Good performance, but room for improvement - Below 75: Needs optimization ### Mobile Scores - 50-55: Average for Shopify stores - Above 55: Above average performance - Below 50: Needs attention Why are mobile scores typically lower? It's normal and expected for mobile scores to be lower than desktop scores due to: - Hardware limitations Mobile devices have less processing power - Cellular networks are typically slower than broadband - Technical factors Mobile-specific CSS rules for responsive design - Additional viewport considerations - Image resizing requirements [Compare Modes](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up/compare-modes/)[Speed Up Custom Mode](/seo-suite-help-center/site-speed-up/speed-up-custom-mode/) --- # Avada Shipping Labels Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/ # Welcome to Avada Shipping Labels **Buy and print Shopify shipping labels in a few clicks. Powered by Avada.** **Who can use Avada Shipping Labels?** - Avada Shipping Labels is available on Shopify App Store for all Shopify store plans Avada Shipping Labels is a Shopify app that lets you compare carrier rates, buy labels, and mark orders as fulfilled — all from one screen inside Shopify Admin. ## What you can do today - 🔌 **Connect your shipping account** with a single API key (Test or Production mode) - 📦 **Save reusable packages** with dimensions and weight for 1-click rate fetching - 💵 **Compare live rates** from multiple carriers on a per-order basis - 🏷️ **Buy and print labels** directly from the Orders screen - ✅ **Auto-fulfill in Shopify** with tracking number and tracking URL after purchase - 🖨️ **Print or download** the label and packing slip in 4×6, 8.5×11, or Letter format ## Where to start - Read [Get started](/shipping-labels/get-started/) to install the app and complete onboarding - Open [Settings](/shipping-labels/settings/) to connect your shipping account and add your saved packages - Buy your first label from the [Orders](/shipping-labels/orders/) screen ## Need help? Email us at [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io). [Get started](/shipping-labels/get-started/) --- # How shipping label charges work Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/faq/shipping-label-billing/ # How shipping label charges work Understand exactly who charges you, where the money comes from, and why these charges don't appear on your Shopify invoice. ## Introduction When you buy a shipping label with **Avada Shipping Labels**, the cost of the label is **not** billed through your Shopify subscription. Instead, the charge is handled directly by **EasyPost**, our shipping carrier provider, using funds you top up into your own **EasyPost wallet**. This page explains how that billing flow works, what Avada does (and does not) do with your money, and where to manage your shipping payments. Read it before you buy your first label so there are no surprises on your statements. ## Understanding the billing flow Two separate things are being paid for when you use Avada Shipping Labels, and each is handled by a different company: - **The Avada Shipping Labels app itself** — billed through the **Shopify Billing API** on your regular Shopify invoice, according to the plan you chose (Free, Starter, Growth, or Pro). - **The shipping labels you buy** — charged directly by **EasyPost** from the wallet inside your own EasyPost account. Avada never sees your card, never holds your shipping funds, and never charges you for labels. We simply pass your label request to EasyPost on your behalf, using the API key you provide. EasyPost then deducts the label cost from your wallet and returns the printable label to the app. In short: Avada is the app. EasyPost is the shipping carrier and the payment processor for your labels. Two companies, two separate charges. ## How to set up your EasyPost wallet ### Sign up for EasyPost Open a new browser tab and go to **easypost.com**. Click **Sign up** and create a free EasyPost account using your business email. ### Open Account Settings → Billing Once signed in to your EasyPost dashboard, expand **Account Settings** in the left sidebar and click **Billing**. ### Set up the Shipping Wallet Scroll to the **Shipping Wallet** section. If you see **No Funds in Wallet**, click **+ Setup Wallet** to create it. ### Connect a payment method In the **Payment Methods** card, connect a credit card or bank account. This is the source EasyPost will use to refill your wallet. ### Top up the wallet Back in the **Shipping Wallet** card, add the amount you want to top up and confirm the charge. The balance becomes available in your wallet immediately. ### Connect the API key to the app In the sidebar, go to **Account Settings → API Keys** and copy your **Production** API key. Paste it into **Avada Shipping Labels → Settings → API keys** to connect your wallet to the app. You are now ready to buy shipping labels. Every label purchased in the app will be paid from your EasyPost wallet. ## How a label charge works ### Click Buy label in the app In Avada Shipping Labels, open an order and click **Buy label** after picking a carrier and service. ### EasyPost charges your wallet Avada sends your label request to EasyPost using your API key. EasyPost deducts the exact label cost from your wallet — no markups, no hidden fees added by Avada. ### EasyPost returns the label EasyPost returns the printable label and tracking number. The full transaction is recorded in your **EasyPost dashboard → Account Settings → Billing**, which is the source of truth for every shipping charge. ## How to review and manage your charges All shipping payments live in your own EasyPost account, not in Avada. From **easypost.com → Account Settings → Billing** you can: - View your current **Shipping Wallet** balance - See every transaction (label purchases, refunds, top-ups) - Download monthly invoices for accounting - Request refunds for unused or voided labels — refunds are credited back to your wallet directly by EasyPost - Update your payment method or configure auto-recharge in **Wallet Settings** Because the wallet belongs to you, you have full control. Avada cannot see your balance, move funds, or refund a label on your behalf. ## Trying the app without paying for real labels If you want to evaluate **Avada Shipping Labels** before opening an EasyPost account, you can use the **Avada demo key** that is pre-loaded in the app on first install. The demo key runs in **Test mode**, which means: - You can fetch real rates, generate sample labels, and explore every screen - No money is charged — to you, to Avada, or to EasyPost - Sample labels are marked **TEST** and cannot be scanned at a post office When you are ready to ship real orders, sign up for EasyPost, top up your wallet, and replace the demo key with your own Production key. The switch takes under a minute and your test data is preserved. For full details on EasyPost pricing, refunds, and billing rules, see the [EasyPost billing documentation (opens in a new tab)](https://support.easypost.com/hc/en-us/categories/360003185272-Billing). [API keys](/shipping-labels/settings/api-keys/) --- # Get started Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/get-started/ # Get started Get from install to your first label in three short steps — about 5 minutes total. ## Introduction Avada Shipping Labels takes about 5 minutes to set up. You install the app from the Shopify App Store, save your ship-from address during onboarding, then connect your shipping account so Avada can fetch rates and buy labels on your behalf. The setup is one-time. After it's done, every Shopify order shows up in **Orders** ready to compare rates and ship. ## Step 1 — Install the app Avada Shipping Labels is distributed through the Shopify App Store. Installation is free and only requires the standard Shopify permissions to read your orders and update fulfillments. **1.1.** Open the [Avada Shipping Labels listing (opens in a new tab)](https://shopify.pxf.io/X4OWAX) on the Shopify App Store and click **Install**. **1.2.** Review the permissions requested by the app and click **Install app** to confirm. **1.3.** Shopify redirects you into the app. The first screen is the onboarding form for your ship-from address. ## Step 2 — Complete onboarding The very first time you open Avada Shipping Labels, you see a **Welcome** screen with a single form: your ship-from address. This address is used to quote real rates, schedule carrier pickups, and print the return info your customers see on every parcel. You can edit it later in **Settings → Warehouse address**. Carriers like UPS, FedEx, and DHL also need a valid contact phone number to print labels. **2.1.** Fill in **Full name**, **Company** (optional), and **Phone**. Phone must include the country code, for example `+1 555 123 4567`. **2.2.** Choose your **Country / Region**, then enter the **Address**, **City**, **State / Province**, and **ZIP / Postal code**. **2.3.** Click **Save and continue**. The button shows **Saving…** while submitting and **Saved** once complete, then takes you straight to the Orders screen. ## Step 3 — Connect your shipping account Avada uses [EasyPost (opens in a new tab)](https://www.easypost.com/) as the carrier integration behind the scenes. EasyPost gives you instant access to USPS, UPS, FedEx, DHL, and more from a single account — no per-carrier negotiations or contracts. You only need to paste an API key once. EasyPost gives you two API keys: - **Test key** (`EZTK…`) — Free, no credit card. Returns sample rates and labels you can print but not actually ship. Perfect while setting up. - **Production key** (`EZAK…`) — Required to buy real labels. Charges your EasyPost wallet for each label. Avada auto-detects which mode you pasted and shows it in the connection banner. **3.1.** Sign up for a free account at [easypost.com (opens in a new tab)](https://www.easypost.com/signup). Email only, no credit card required for Test keys. Verify your email when EasyPost sends the link. **3.2.** In your EasyPost dashboard, go to **Account Settings → API keys**. Copy your **Test key** (`EZTK…`) for setup, then swap in your **Production key** (`EZAK…`) when you're ready to ship real orders. **3.3.** In Avada Shipping Labels, open **Settings → API keys** and paste the key into the **API key** field. The help text shows **Detected: Test mode** or **Detected: Production mode** as soon as you type the prefix. **3.4.** Click **Connect**. Avada verifies the key before saving and shows a green **Connected** banner with the last verified date. ## Tips & best practices - Start in Test mode. You can fetch rates and "buy" sample labels without spending money. - When you're ready to ship for real, swap to your Production key — Avada re-verifies and updates the banner immediately. - A valid contact phone is required for UPS, FedEx, and DHL labels. USPS works without it, but we recommend filling it in anyway. - If you ship from multiple warehouses, set the warehouse address to your primary location and switch in **Settings** when needed. ## Overall Three steps and you're done. Once the **Connected** banner is green, head to the [Orders](/shipping-labels/orders/) screen to fetch your first rates and buy a label. [Introduction](/shipping-labels/)[Overview](/shipping-labels/orders/) --- # Orders Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/orders/ # Orders The Orders screen is where you fetch rates, buy labels, and fulfill Shopify orders without leaving the app. ## Introduction Every Shopify order that needs shipping appears as a row in this table. Each row shows the order number, status badge, destination address, line items, package, shipping service, tags, and a contextual action button. The button changes based on where the order is in the buying flow — **Get rates**, **Buy label**, **Retry**, or print/download icons once it's fulfilled. ## Understanding the status badges BadgeMeaning **Ready to buy**The order has not been fulfilled yet. Fetch rates and buy a label. **Review errors**A previous attempt failed (rates, buy, or fulfillment). Read the error and retry. **Fulfilled**The label has been purchased and the order marked as fulfilled in Shopify. ## What you can do from this screen - [Fetch and compare rates](/shipping-labels/orders/fetch-rates/) for any order - [Buy a label](/shipping-labels/orders/buy-label/) and auto-fulfill it in Shopify - [Print or download](/shipping-labels/orders/print-download/) the label and packing slip - [Edit the shipping address](/shipping-labels/orders/edit-address/) directly on the order row - [Filter, search, and sort](/shipping-labels/orders/filter-search/) the list to find orders fast - [Review errors and retry](/shipping-labels/orders/review-errors/) when a step fails ## Overall Orders is the daily home screen for anyone shipping with this app. Bookmark it — every action you take during the day starts here. [Get started](/shipping-labels/get-started/)[Fetch and compare rates](/shipping-labels/orders/fetch-rates/) --- # Buy a label Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/orders/buy-label/ # Buy a label Convert a selected rate into a paid shipping label and auto-fulfill the Shopify order. ## Introduction Once a shipping service is selected on a row, **Buy label** purchases the label from the carrier, downloads the PDF behind the scenes, and updates the Shopify order to **Fulfilled** with the carrier's tracking number and tracking URL. The customer receives the standard Shopify shipping confirmation with that tracking link. ## Understanding what happens on click When you click **Buy label**, Avada runs three steps: - **Buy** — charges your shipping account for the selected rate and receives the label. - **Fulfillment** — creates a fulfillment in Shopify with the carrier and tracking number. - **Link** — attaches the label PDF to the order so you can print or download it later. If any step fails, the row turns into the **Review errors** state and the error message tells you which step failed. ## How to buy a label ### Confirm a service is selected Make sure the row shows a selected service in the **Shipping service** dropdown. If it shows **Get rates** instead, fetch rates first. ### Click Buy label Click the **Buy label** button at the right end of the row. ### Wait for the fulfillment confirmation The status badge flips to **Fulfilled** with a green checkmark, and a success banner appears at the top: **Order #1234 fulfilled — Label purchased and order marked as fulfilled in Shopify.** ### Print or download the label The action column now shows two icons — **Print** and **Download** — for the label. ## Tips & best practices - In Test mode, the purchase is free and the label is a sample. Switch to Production mode in **Settings → API keys** when you're ready to ship for real. - If you buy multiple labels in a row, the success banner aggregates: **3 orders fulfilled — Labels purchased for orders #1234, #1235, #1236 and marked as fulfilled in Shopify.** - The customer's shipping confirmation email from Shopify includes the tracking link automatically — no extra step on your side. ## Overall Each label purchase is a single click after rates are fetched. Move on to [Print or download](/shipping-labels/orders/print-download/) to send the label to your printer. [Fetch and compare rates](/shipping-labels/orders/fetch-rates/)[Print or download](/shipping-labels/orders/print-download/) --- # Edit shipping address Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/orders/edit-address/ # Edit shipping address Fix typos or missing fields on the destination address before fetching rates. ## Introduction Sometimes a Shopify order arrives with an incomplete or malformed address — a missing apartment number, a typo in the ZIP code, a country in the wrong field. Carriers reject these at the rate step, so Avada lets you edit the destination address inline on the order row before you fetch rates. ## Understanding what you can edit Only the **destination** address (where the order ships to) is editable on the row. The ship-from address is set once in **Settings → Warehouse address** and applies to every label. Edits saved on the row are persisted to the order in the app — they don't write back to the Shopify order itself. ## How to edit the address ### Click the destination address On the **Orders** screen, click the destination address in the **Destination** column of the order you want to fix. ### Edit the fields An inline form expands with the customer name, address lines, city, state, ZIP, and country. Edit the fields that need fixing. ### Save the changes Click **Save**. A toast confirms **Shipping address updated** and the row collapses back to the address summary. ## Tips & best practices - Edit the address **before** fetching rates — fixing it after a rate error means re-fetching anyway. - If the save fails with **Failed to update shipping address**, retry; it's usually a transient network issue. - If many orders arrive with the same field missing, fix it upstream in your Shopify checkout settings to avoid editing one by one. ## Overall Inline address editing keeps the bad-address fix loop on a single screen. Once the address is clean, [fetch rates](/shipping-labels/orders/fetch-rates/) and the order moves through the rest of the flow normally. [Print or download](/shipping-labels/orders/print-download/)[Filter, search, and sort](/shipping-labels/orders/filter-search/) --- # Fetch and compare rates Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/orders/fetch-rates/ # Fetch and compare rates Pull live rates from your connected carriers in one click and pick the service you want. ## Introduction Rates are not pre-loaded for every order — they're fetched on demand when you click **Get rates** on a specific row. This keeps the screen fast and avoids burning through your rate quota for orders you may never ship. ## Understanding the package and rates Before rates can be fetched, Avada needs three things on the row: - A valid shipping address (auto-filled from Shopify, editable inline) - A selected package (defaults to your store-default saved package) - A connected shipping account If any are missing, **Get rates** returns an error explaining which one. ## How to fetch rates ### Confirm the package selection Find the order on the **Orders** screen and confirm the package selector shows the box you want to use. Click the dropdown to switch packages if needed. ### Click Get rates Click the **Get rates** button on the right side of the row. ### Wait for the rate list to load A loading spinner appears, then the **Shipping service** dropdown fills with returned rates. Each rate shows the carrier, service name, price, and estimated delivery in business days. ### Select a service Click the dropdown and select the service you want. The action button changes from **Get rates** to **Buy label**. ## Tips & best practices - Rates returned reflect your account pricing and any carrier discounts you've negotiated. - If the dropdown shows **No rates returned for this shipment**, the destination is likely outside your carriers' service area or your package exceeds carrier size limits. - Re-fetching rates is safe and free — click **Get rates** again to refresh if prices look stale. ## Overall Once a service is selected, the row is one click away from a printed label. Continue to [Buy a label](/shipping-labels/orders/buy-label/). [Overview](/shipping-labels/orders/)[Buy a label](/shipping-labels/orders/buy-label/) --- # Filter, search, and sort Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/orders/filter-search/ # Filter, search, and sort Cut the order list down to exactly the rows you need. ## Introduction When the Orders screen has hundreds of rows, scrolling for a single order wastes time. The list supports a status filter, a free-text search, and three sort options so you can isolate a single order or batch of orders in seconds. ## Understanding the controls - **Status filter** — Limits rows to a single label status: **Ready to buy**, **Review errors**, or **Fulfilled**. - **Search** — Matches against order number, customer name, or destination city. - **Sort** — Reorders the visible rows by order number, order date, or destination, ascending or descending. All three combine. For example, you can filter to **Review errors**, search for "California", and sort by oldest first to find the oldest broken California order. ## How to filter by status ### Open the Status filter Click the **Status** filter chip above the table. ### Pick a status Pick **Ready to buy**, **Review errors**, or **Fulfilled** from the dropdown. The applied filter shows as a chip: **Status: Review errors**. ### Clear the filter To clear, click the **×** on the filter chip. ## How to search ### Type your query Type into the **Search by order #, customer, or city...** field above the table. Results update as you type, with a short debounce. ### Clear the field Clear the field to restore the full list. ## How to sort ### Open the Sort menu Click the **Sort** button above the table. ### Pick a field and direction Pick a field — **Order #**, **Order date**, or **Destination** — and a direction — **Ascending**, **Descending**, **Newest first**, **Oldest first**, **A–Z**, or **Z–A**. The table reorders immediately. ## Tips & best practices - Use **Status: Review errors** at the start of every shipping session to clear blockers before processing new orders. - Search is most useful by order number — customer and city work but match more rows. - Sort by **Oldest first** to ship orders in the order they were placed and avoid leaving any aging in the queue. ## Overall Filter, search, and sort all live above the table and update the visible rows instantly. Combine them to slice the list any way you need. [Edit shipping address](/shipping-labels/orders/edit-address/)[Review errors and retry](/shipping-labels/orders/review-errors/) --- # Print or download Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/orders/print-download/ # Print or download Send the label and packing slip to your printer or save them locally. ## Introduction Once an order is **Fulfilled**, the action column on its row shows two icons: a **Print** icon and a **Download** icon. Both apply to the label PDF that Avada generated when you bought the label. The format (4×6 thermal, 8.5×11, or Letter) follows your **Settings → Saved packages → Default label size** preference. ## Understanding the format The label format is set globally, not per order. If you switch your default label size in **Settings**, every label printed or downloaded after that uses the new size. Already-fulfilled orders will re-render in the new size when you click Print or Download again. ## How to print a label ### Find the fulfilled order On the **Orders** screen, find the order with the **Fulfilled** badge. ### Click the Print icon Click the **Print** icon (printer icon) on the right side of the row. Your browser's print dialog opens with the label PDF already loaded. ### Send to your printer Pick your printer in the browser dialog and click **Print**. For thermal printers, make sure your default label size in **Settings** is set to **4×6 inch**. ## How to download a label ### Click the Download icon On the same row, click the **Download** icon (folder-down icon) next to the Print icon. ### Save the PDF Your browser downloads the label PDF to your default download folder. You can email it, archive it, or print it later. ## Tips & best practices - Use **4×6 inch** for any thermal label printer (Rollo, DYMO, Zebra). Use **8.5×11 inch** or **Letter** for a standard office printer. - The label and packing slip are separate files. Print the label for the carrier and the packing slip for the customer. - If you re-print, you're not charged again — the label PDF is stored after the first purchase. ## Overall Print and download are unlimited and free after the label is bought. Adjust your label size once in [Settings → Saved packages](/shipping-labels/settings/saved-packages/) and every printout follows it from then on. [Buy a label](/shipping-labels/orders/buy-label/)[Edit shipping address](/shipping-labels/orders/edit-address/) --- # Review errors and retry Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/orders/review-errors/ # Review errors and retry When a step fails, the row tells you exactly what broke and lets you try again. ## Introduction Buying a label runs three steps under the hood — fetch rates, buy, fulfill — plus a final link step that attaches the label PDF. If any step fails, the row's status flips to **Review errors** with a yellow badge and the failed step plus the carrier's error message appears right below it. ## Understanding the error labels Step labelWhat it means **Could not fetch rates**The rate request was rejected. Usually caused by a bad address, missing package dimensions, or service area limits. **Label purchase failed**The rate was accepted but the buy step failed — often a wallet balance or carrier outage issue. **Fulfillment failed**The label was purchased but Shopify's fulfillment API rejected the update. Retry usually fixes it. **Label saved, link failed**The label is bought and Shopify is fulfilled, but the PDF link couldn't be saved. The label still works — retry to re-link. **Review error**A generic catch-all when the failure didn't match the steps above. ## How to retry ### Filter to Review errors Filter the list to **Status: Review errors** so only failed orders show. See [Filter, search, and sort](/shipping-labels/orders/filter-search/) for how. ### Read the error message Read the red error text below the **Review errors** badge on the row. It shows the failing step and the message returned by the carrier or Shopify. ### Fix the underlying issue Common fixes: - **Bad address** — click the destination address and edit it. See [Edit shipping address](/shipping-labels/orders/edit-address/). - **Missing package dimensions** — pick a different package from the Package selector. - **Shipping account balance** — top up your wallet from your shipping account dashboard. ### Click Retry Click the **Retry** button at the right end of the row. The app re-fetches rates and the row returns to the normal flow. If it succeeds, the badge clears and a toast confirms **Error cleared — rates fetched**. ## Tips & best practices - Retry is safe — it never double-charges. The buy step only runs again if the previous one didn't succeed. - A **Label saved, link failed** error means the label exists and shipped fine. Retrying just re-attaches the PDF for printing. - If retry keeps failing on the same order with the same error, the upstream cause hasn't been fixed. Re-read the message before clicking again. ## Overall The Review errors flow is designed to clear blockers in seconds. Filter, read, fix, retry — then continue with the rest of your shipping queue. [Filter, search, and sort](/shipping-labels/orders/filter-search/)[Warehouse address](/shipping-labels/settings/warehouse-address/) --- # Privacy Policy Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/privacy-policy/ # Privacy Policy *Coming soon — official privacy policy will be published here before public launch.* For questions, contact [privacy@avada.io](mailto:privacy@avada.io). [How shipping label charges work](/shipping-labels/faq/shipping-label-billing/) --- # Settings Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/settings/ # Settings One screen, three tabs — everything that controls how Avada fetches rates, prints labels, and connects to your shipping account. ## Introduction Settings holds the configuration that applies to your whole store, not to a single order. The page has a left sidebar with three tabs and a content area on the right. ## The three tabs - **[Warehouse address](/shipping-labels/settings/warehouse-address/)** — Your ship-from address. Used as the origin point for every rate quote and printed on every return label. - **[Saved packages](/shipping-labels/settings/saved-packages/)** — Your reusable boxes, envelopes, and soft packages, plus your default label size for printing. - **[API keys](/shipping-labels/settings/api-keys/)** — Your shipping account API key. Connect, swap modes (Test / Production), or remove. ## How to switch tabs **Step 1:** Open **Avada Shipping Labels → Settings** from the Shopify Admin sidebar. **Step 2:** Click any tab on the left — **Warehouse address**, **Saved packages**, or **API keys**. The right side updates instantly. **Step 3:** If you have unsaved changes on the current tab, the app asks you to confirm before switching so you don't lose them. ## Overall Most settings are set once and rarely touched again. Walk through all three tabs after install, then revisit only when you add a new package size, swap to Production mode, or move warehouses. [Review errors and retry](/shipping-labels/orders/review-errors/)[Saved packages](/shipping-labels/settings/saved-packages/) --- # API keys Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/settings/api-keys/ # API keys Connect, swap, or remove the EasyPost API key that powers rates and labels. ## Introduction The **API keys** tab is the bridge between Avada Shipping Labels and EasyPost. Without a connected key, the Orders screen can't fetch rates or buy labels. With one, every action on Orders runs against your EasyPost account. For first-time setup, follow the full walkthrough in [Get started → Step 3](/shipping-labels/get-started/#step-3--connect-your-shipping-account). This page covers what you can do on this tab once you're already connected. ## Understanding the connection states StateWhat you see **Connected (Test)**Green banner, key works, fetches sample rates only. No real money charged. **Connected (Production)**Green banner, key works, fetches real rates and charges your EasyPost wallet on buy. **Couldn't connect to EasyPost**Red banner, key is invalid or revoked. Re-paste from the EasyPost dashboard. **Not connected**No banner, only the **API key** input and a **Connect** button. The status card also shows the **Last verified** date — the most recent time the app re-checked your key against EasyPost. ## How to swap to Production mode ### Remove the current key Open **Settings → API keys**. Click **Remove key** on the status card. ### Paste the Production key Paste your **Production key** (`EZAK…`) into the **API key** field. The help text changes to **Detected: Production mode**. ### Click Connect Click **Connect**. The green banner updates to **Connected to EasyPost (Production mode)** and the next label you buy charges your EasyPost wallet for real. ## How to remove the key ### Click Remove key On the status card, click **Remove key**. ### Confirm the disconnect A toast confirms **API key removed** and the tab returns to the **Not connected** state. The Orders screen will refuse to fetch rates until you connect a key again. ## How to view or hide the key On the input field, click **Show** to reveal the masked characters. Click **Hide** to mask them again. ## Tips & best practices - Stay in Test mode while you're setting up packages or training a new team member. Switch to Production only when you're ready to ship. - If the **Couldn't connect to EasyPost** banner appears out of the blue, your key was revoked in EasyPost. Generate a new one and re-connect. - The app re-verifies the key every time you fetch rates — you'll see connection issues quickly, not days later. ## Overall This tab is short by design. Connect once during setup, swap to Production when you're ready, and only come back if something changes on the EasyPost side. [Saved packages](/shipping-labels/settings/saved-packages/)[How shipping label charges work](/shipping-labels/faq/shipping-label-billing/) --- # Saved packages Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/settings/saved-packages/ # Saved packages Save the boxes you ship in once, then pick them on any order in one click. ## Introduction Every shipping rate depends on the package's dimensions and weight. Typing those in for every order is slow and error-prone. Saved packages let you store your common boxes, envelopes, and soft packages once and pick them from a dropdown on each order row. The tab also holds your **Default label size** for printing. ## Understanding the package types TypeUsed for **Box**Rigid boxes — most common. Uses length × width × height. **Envelope**Flat envelopes for documents or thin items. **Soft package**Poly mailers or soft bags that can flex around the contents. One package can be marked as the **store default**. The default is auto-selected on every new order row, so you can usually fetch rates without picking a package at all. ## How to set the default label size ### Open the Saved packages tab Open **Settings → Saved packages**. ### Pick a label size Under **Label format → Default label size**, pick **4×6 inch (Thermal printer)**, **8.5×11 inch (Standard printer)**, or **Letter**. A toast confirms **Label format updated** the moment you select. ## How to add a package ### Click Add package Click **Add package** in the **Packages** section. If the list is empty, click **Add your first package**. ### Choose a package type In the modal, choose a **Package type** — **Box**, **Envelope**, or **Soft package**. ### Enter the package details Enter a **Package name** so you can recognize it in the dropdown later, then **Length**, **Width**, **Height**, and **Weight (empty)** — the weight of the empty package itself, not the contents. ### Set as default (optional) Toggle **Use as default package** if this should be auto-selected on every new order row. ### Save the package Click **Add package**. A toast confirms **Package saved** and the new package appears in the list. ## How to edit, set as default, or delete a package ### Open the actions menu In the **Packages** list, click the actions menu (•••) on the row of the package you want to change. ### Pick an action Pick **Edit** to change dimensions, **Set as default** to make it the auto-selected package, or **Delete** to remove it. ### Confirm Confirm the action. Toasts confirm **Package updated**, **Default package updated**, or **Package deleted**. ## Tips & best practices - Set your most-used box as the default. You'll fetch rates without ever opening the package selector. - Package weight should be the **empty** weight of the box. Item weight comes from the Shopify product. Avada adds them together for the rate. - Use thermal labels (4×6) if you have a Rollo, DYMO, or Zebra printer — they're faster, cheaper, and don't require cutting paper. ## Overall Saved packages turn rate fetching from a 30-second form-fill into a single click. Add your three or four most-used boxes after install and you'll rarely touch this tab again. [Warehouse address](/shipping-labels/settings/warehouse-address/)[API keys](/shipping-labels/settings/api-keys/) --- # Warehouse address Source: https://docs.avada.io/shipping-labels/settings/warehouse-address/ # Warehouse address Update the ship-from address used on every rate quote and label. ## Introduction Your warehouse address is the address Avada treats as the origin for every shipment you create. It's the same address you entered during onboarding — this tab lets you edit it after the fact, for example when you move warehouses or fix a typo. ## Understanding required fields Carriers reject rate requests if any required field is missing. The tab shows a warning banner with the count — for example **2 required fields missing** — until you fill them in. Required fields: - **Address line 1**, **City**, **State / Province**, **ZIP / Postal code**, **Country** — always required - **Phone** — required for UPS, FedEx, DHL labels (USPS works without it) - **Contact name** OR **Company name** — at least one of the two is required ## How to update the address ### Open the Warehouse address tab Open **Settings → Warehouse address**. ### Edit the fields Edit any field — **Company name**, **Contact name**, **Phone**, **Email**, **Address line 1**, **Address line 2**, **City**, **State / Province**, **ZIP / Postal code**, **Country**. ### Save the changes Click **Save** in the top-bar save button. A toast confirms **Settings saved**. ## Tips & best practices - Use the actual physical address you ship from. Carriers verify it for service area and pickup eligibility. - The **Email** field is for shipping account notifications, not customer-facing. - If the **2 required fields missing** banner persists after saving, check the field-level error text under each input. - Changing this address affects every future rate quote. Already-bought labels keep their original ship-from address. ## Overall Your warehouse address rarely changes after the first save. When it does, this tab is the single source of truth — every label printed afterward picks up the new address automatically. [Review errors and retry](/shipping-labels/orders/review-errors/)[Saved packages](/shipping-labels/settings/saved-packages/) --- # Intro to Shopvid Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/ # Intro to Shopvid ### What Are Shoppable Videos? Shoppable videos are interactive video content that allows customers to purchase products directly while watching. Unlike traditional videos, product information overlays that appear seamlessly during playback. This creates an immersive shopping experience where inspiration meets instant action. Think of it as bringing the engaging, dynamic nature of social media shopping directly to your store - but with full control over the experience and direct conversion capabilities. ### How Shoppable Videos Stand Apart #### Beyond Traditional Review Apps While review apps focus on static text and images, shoppable videos bring products to life through: - **Dynamic demonstrations** showing products in action - **Real-time engagement** that captures attention longer than text reviews - **Visual storytelling** that builds emotional connections with customers - **Instant purchasing** without leaving the video experience #### More Than Social Feed Integration Unlike basic TikTok and Instagram feed apps that simply display content, Shopvid offers: - **Direct shopping functionality** with built-in "Add to Cart" buttons - **Product tagging** that links specific items shown in videos - **Conversion-focused design** optimized for your store's checkout flow - **Full customization** to match your brand aesthetic - **Performance tracking** to measure video impact on sales ### How Shopvid Helps Your Business Grow #### 🚀 Boost Engagement - **Increase time on site** - Videos keep visitors engaged 88% longer than text - **Reduce bounce rates** - Interactive content encourages exploration - **Create memorable experiences** - Moving visuals stick in customers' minds #### 🤝 Build Trust - **Show authentic product usage** - Let customers see items in real-world contexts - **Feature user-generated content** - Display genuine customer experiences - **Demonstrate product quality** - Videos reveal details photos can't capture #### 💰 Increase Conversion Rates - **Streamline the buying journey** - From discovery to purchase in one click - **Reduce purchase hesitation** - Videos answer questions before they're asked - **Create urgency** - Dynamic content drives immediate action - **Boost average order value** - Showcase related products within videos ### Ready to Get Started? Transform your static product pages into dynamic shopping experiences. With Shopvid, you're not just adding videos to your store - you're creating an interactive shopping journey that turns browsers into buyers. [Quick start](/shopvid/getting-started/quick-start/) [Quick start](/shopvid/getting-started/quick-start/) --- # Analytics Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/analytics/analytics/ # Analytics Welcome to the Shopvid Analytics Dashboard. This guide explains the key performance indicators (KPIs) available in your report. These metrics help you understand user engagement, video performance, and the direct impact of video content on your sales revenue. ## 1. Video Performance Metrics These metrics help you evaluate how often your videos are being seen and interacted with by visitors on your store. ### Page View The total number of times pages containing your video widgets were loaded on your storefront. ### Video Engagement The percentage of sessions that included at least one interaction (Like, Share, or Add-to-cart). - **Formula:** `(Sessions with interaction / Total sessions) × 100` - Calculated per session. A session is "Engaged" if the user performs a Like, Share, or Add-to-cart action. ### Interactions (Likes / Shares / Add-to-cart) The total count of Likes, Shares, and Add-to-cart actions performed. ### Inline Video View The number of times a video was played directly on the page (gallery view) for at least 3 seconds, without opening full-screen mode. - The video must be 100% visible on screen. - The video must play for at least 3 seconds. - **Replay logic:** A replay within the same session counts as a new view, provided it plays for ≥ 3 seconds. ### Expanded Video View The number of times a video was opened in full-screen or popup mode and watched for at least 3 seconds. - The video must play for at least 3 seconds. - **Replay logic:** Replays and re-opens within the same session count as additional views when they meet the 3-second threshold. ### Average Videos Watched The average number of unique videos viewed per session. - **Formula:** `Total unique videos viewed / Total sessions` - Only views with a duration of ≥ 3 seconds are included. - Includes both Inline and Expanded views. ### Average Video Watch Time The average duration (in seconds) that users spend watching your videos. - **Formula:** `Total watch time (s) / Total video starts` - Only views with a duration of ≥ 3 seconds are included. - Includes both Inline and Expanded views. ### Completion Rate The percentage of video plays that reached 100% of the video duration. - **Formula:** `(Total completed views / Total video starts) × 100` - A "Completed View" is watching ≥ 90% of the video's total length. ## 2. Top Videos Top performing videos from your store are ranked based on the following criteria. ### Add-to-Cart Count The number of times viewers add products to their cart directly from the video. ### Conversion Rate In-Video The percentage of video views that resulted in an order during video watching. - **Formula:** `(Orders via in-video cart / Total video views) × 100` - **Attribution:** The item must be added to the cart with the action tag `in_video`, or the checkout source must be marked as `video`. The user must have watched the video for ≥ 3 seconds. ### Conversion Rate Post-Video The percentage of video views that resulted in an order after video watching. - **Formula:** `(Orders from video viewers / Total video views) × 100` - **Attribution:** The user has a valid video view session but no direct `in_video` add-to-cart action. The order is created within 24 hours of the video view. Only counts the value of products featured in the watched video. ## 3. Sales & Conversion Metrics The direct financial impact of your shoppable videos. ### % of Total Orders from Shopvid The contribution of video-assisted orders to your total store orders. - **Formula:** `(Orders from Shopvid / Total Orders) × 100` - An order is attributed to Shopvid if it contains at least one Add-to-cart action originating from a video. ### Add-to-Cart (ATC) Rate The rate at which viewers add products to their cart directly from the video. - **Formula:** `(Total ATC clicks / Total video views) × 100` - To prevent spam, this is calculated uniquely per `session` + `video_id`. ### Conversion Rate (CVR) The percentage of expanded video views that result in a purchase. - **Formula:** `(Total attributed orders / Total video views) × 100` **Tip:** Hover your mouse over any metric title in the dashboard to view its definition and calculation rule. [Speed check](/shopvid/widgets-load-speed/speed-check/)[Feature request](/shopvid/feature-request/feature-request/) --- # Feature Request Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/changelog/feature-request/ # Feature Request **Applies to:** All merchants Merchants can now submit and vote on feature ideas directly inside Shopvid. Go to **Feature Request** in the left navigation to view all submitted requests, add your own, or vote for ideas you'd like to see built. New submissions start with status **Wait to review**. Once reviewed, the development team will move requests through **Planned** → **In progress** → **Done**. [Sync your theme colors](/shopvid/changelog/sync-your-theme-colors/)[Video Studio](/shopvid/changelog/video-studio/) --- # Full-Screen Layout Options Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/changelog/full-screen-layout-options/ # Full-Screen Layout Options **Applies to:** All merchants — Desktop only Merchants can now choose between two full-screen video layouts for the desktop experience. In **Manage widget**, open a widget and go to the **Full Screen** tab → **Style** → **Fullscreen video layout** to switch between: - **Video with product panel** — the existing layout, showing a product panel alongside the video. - **Video only** — a new, distraction-free layout without the product panel. **Video only** layout comes with its own product card style settings. When a viewer clicks **Add to cart**, a product detail sidebar slides in from the right side of the page — keeping customers in the video experience without a full page redirect. **How to use:** Go to **Manage widget** → open a widget → **Full Screen** tab → **Style** → **Fullscreen video layout** → select **Video only** → customize product card style as needed → **Save**. [Setting](/shopvid/others/setting/)[Product Description](/shopvid/changelog/product-description/) --- # Product Description Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/changelog/product-description/ # Product Description **Applies to:** All merchants Merchants can now manage product descriptions directly within Shopvid. In the **Products** module, open any product to edit its **Description** — either by typing a custom description or pulling in the existing Shopify description with one click. Customers can then view the product description and add items to cart without leaving the video. **How to use:** Go to **Products** → click **Edit** on a product → update the **Description** field → click **Save**. [Full-Screen Layout Options](/shopvid/changelog/full-screen-layout-options/)[Video Caption](/shopvid/changelog/video-caption/) --- # Speed Check Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/changelog/speed-check/ # Speed Check Merchants can now test how fast the Shopvid widget loads on their storefront directly from the Dashboard. Click **Start widget performance test** to run a real browser test — Shopvid opens your live store, measures widget performance, and returns the results to the Dashboard. Three metrics are reported: - **Widget load time** — Total time for the widget to fully load. Fast: under 1s / Average: 1–3s / Slow: over 3s - **First render** — When shoppers first see the widget. Fast: under 500ms / Average: 500ms–1s / Slow: over 1s - **Widget size** — Total size of scripts and assets. Light: under 512 KB / Average: 512 KB–2 MB / Heavy: over 2 MB How to use: Go to **Dashboard** → find the **Speed check** card → select a **Page** to test → click **Start widget performance test** → view results. [Video Studio](/shopvid/changelog/video-studio/)[Sync Videos by Hashtag](/shopvid/changelog/sync-videos-by-hashtag/) --- # Sync Videos by Hashtag Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/changelog/sync-videos-by-hashtag/ # Sync Videos by Hashtag Merchants can now import videos from TikTok or Instagram using a hashtag — manually or on an automatic recurring schedule. Great for sourcing UGC content without hunting for individual videos. - **Manual import:** Go to Video Library → TikTok or Instagram tab → **Add video** → **Use hashtag** → enter hashtag → confirm rights → **Import** - **Auto-sync:** Go to Video Library → **Auto-sync** → **Hashtag** tab → **Add hashtag** → set schedule (Daily / Weekly / Monthly) → **Add**. Shopvid will automatically import up to 30 new videos per session. How to use: Go to Video Library → **Add video** → **Use hashtag** for a one-time import, or set up **Auto-sync** for recurring imports on a schedule. [Speed Check](/shopvid/changelog/speed-check/) --- # Sync your theme colors Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/changelog/sync-your-theme-colors/ # Sync your theme colors Once the support team unlocks the feature, the **Sync theme** button appears. Click it to apply your theme's color scheme to the widget. Click **Sync theme** multiple times to cycle through different color schemes from your live theme, then save when you find the right one. [Video Caption](/shopvid/changelog/video-caption/)[Feature Request](/shopvid/changelog/feature-request/) --- # Video Caption Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/changelog/video-caption/ # Video Caption **Applies to:** All merchants Merchants can now add and display captions on videos in the storefront. - For videos imported from **Instagram** or **TikTok**, the caption is fetched automatically from the source platform. You can edit it manually, then click **Resync** to fetch the latest version from the platform. - For uploaded videos, you can type a caption manually in the **Video caption** field. - To show captions on your storefront, enable **Caption** in **Full Screen Settings** per widget. **How to use:** Open a video in the video library → scroll to **Video caption** → edit or resync → go to **Manage widget** → **Full Screen** tab → enable **Caption** → **Save**. [Product Description](/shopvid/changelog/product-description/)[Sync your theme colors](/shopvid/changelog/sync-your-theme-colors/) --- # Video Studio Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/changelog/video-studio/ # Video Studio Merchants can now create dedicated video gallery pages on their storefront — a TikTok-like browsing experience to showcase products. Use it as a landing page, campaign page, or link it directly from your menu or social channels. Each page is fully manageable from the Video Studio section: search by name, filter by status (Visible / Hidden), sort by name or last updated, and bulk delete pages when needed. How to use: Go to Video Studio → click Create page → add videos and set a title → Save. [Feature Request](/shopvid/changelog/feature-request/)[Speed Check](/shopvid/changelog/speed-check/) --- # Feature request Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/feature-request/feature-request/ # Feature request The **Feature Request** board lets all merchants submit ideas and vote on features they'd like to see in Shopvid. The development team reviews submissions and uses vote counts to prioritize the roadmap. Go to **Feature Request** in the left navigation menu to get started. ### Submit a request Click **Add request** → fill in a **Title** and **Description** → click **Submit**. Your request will appear with status **Wait to review** until the team reviews it. ### Vote on requests Browse the list and click **Vote** on any request you'd like to see built. You can filter by **Most Voted**, **In Progress**, or **Done**, and sort by **Most vote**, **Trending**, or **Newest**. ### Request statuses StatusMeaning Wait to reviewSubmitted, pending team review PlannedAccepted and added to the roadmap In progressCurrently being developed DoneReleased [Analytics](/shopvid/analytics/analytics/)[Privacy policy](/shopvid/others/privacy-policy/) --- # Quick start Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/getting-started/quick-start/ # Quick start ### Why Use Quickstart? The Quickstart feature helps you: - **Save time** by following a proven setup process - **Launch faster** with only the essential steps needed ### How to Use Quickstart #### Step 1: Enable Shopvid in Your Theme First, you need to activate Shopvid in your Shopify theme settings to allow the app to display videos on your store. **To enable the app:** - Click **Enable App** in Step 1 - You'll be redirected to your Shopify theme editor - In the App embeds section, find "Shopvid" - Toggle the switch to **ON** position - Click **Save** in the top right corner - Return to the Shopvid app to continue **Note:** The app must be enabled for videos to appear on your store. This is a one-time setup. #### Step 2: Import Your Videos Now it's time to add video content to your library. You can upload your own videos with these specifications: **Video requirements:** - **Format:** MP4 only - **Maximum size:** 20 MB per video - **Maximum videos:** 10 videos **To import videos:** - Click **Import Video** in Step 2 - You can select up to 10 MP4 files (max 20 MB each) - Please wait while processing. You can still exit the app or browse other pages — your videos will continue uploading. - Your videos will appear in the library when ready **Need help with large videos?** Contact our support team via chatbot for help with video compression and scaling. #### Step 3: Create Your First Widget A widget is a container for your shoppable videos. You'll customize how videos display and add shopping features. **To create a widget:** - Click **Create Widget** in Step 3 - Give your widget a name (e.g., "Homepage Featured Products") - **Add videos to your widget:** Click **Add Videos** - Select videos from your library - Click **Confirm Selection** - **Configure display settings:** - **Gallery View:** Play Video: None: Videos play only when clicked - Autoplay on Hover: Videos start playing when customers hover over them (this feature is not available on mobile) - **Full Screen:** Seek Control: On: Customers can skip to different parts of the video - Off: Videos play from start to finish only - Mute Control: On: Shows mute/unmute button for audio control - Off: No audio control available to customers - Click **Save Widget** - Copy the **Widget ID** shown on screen (you'll need this next) #### Step 4: Add the Widget to Your Store The final step connects your widget to your storefront where customers can see it. **To display your widget:** - Click **Add to Store** in Step 4 - You'll see your Widget ID (e.g., `WIDGET_12345`) - Click **Copy Widget ID** - Navigate to your theme customizer: Go to **Online Store** > **Themes** - Click **Customize** on your current theme - Add a "Custom Liquid" or "Shopvid Widget" section where you want videos - Paste your Widget ID in the designated field - Click **Save** in the theme editor - Preview your store to see your shoppable videos live! **Tip:** You can add the same widget to multiple pages or create different widgets for different sections of your store. ### Best Practices - **Start with your best content** - Choose high-quality videos that showcase your products clearly - **Keep videos short** - 15-60 seconds performs best for engagement - **Test on mobile** - Most customers shop on mobile devices - **Monitor performance** - Check analytics after launching to optimize placement [Intro to Shopvid](/shopvid/)[Upload video](/shopvid/video-library/upload-video/) --- # Create new widget Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/ # Create new widget ### What is the Manage Widget Feature? The Manage Widget feature is your control center for creating and customizing video displays on your store. A widget is a container that holds your videos and determines how they appear to customers. ### How to Create and Manage Widgets #### Creating a New Widget **To create your widget:** - Navigate to **Manage widget** in your Shopvid dashboard - Click **Create new widget** #### Select widget type You can choose from 5 of our widget types: - Highlighted carousel: Display video list as a carousel with a highlighted video in the middle - Basic carousel: Display video list as a carousel - Grid: Display videos as rows and columns - Float: Display video as a float element - Story: Display video list as stories just like that of social platforms #### Select display page Choose a page you want to display videos: - Product pages: Appear on product pages but not on other site pages - Other pages: Appear on all pages except product pages #### Adding Videos to Your Widget Based on your selection of display page, the video setting may differ accordingly. **For Product pages**, to add videos of tagged product: - In the General tab, click **Add products** - Browse your product or use search to find specific videos - Select products by clicking the checkbox - Click **Done** and view added products on the left side of the editor **For Other pages**, to add videos from your library: - In the General tab, click **Video or Browse** - Browse your video library or use search to find specific videos - Select videos by clicking the checkbox on each thumbnail - Click **Done** and view added videos on the left side of the editor #### Configuring Settings To see specific configuration of each widget type, please navigate to according page: [Setting up widgets](/shopvid/manage-widget/setting-up-widgets/) [Grid](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/grid/) [Float](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/float/) [Story](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/story/) #### Previewing Your Widget Always preview your widget before publishing to ensure it looks perfect on all devices. #### Managing Widget Status Control when your widget is visible to customers using the status setting. - Locate the **Status** toggle in General tab - Choose your status: **Active:** Widget can be displayed when added to theme - **Inactive:** Widget is hidden even if added to theme ### Widget Display Requirements For a widget to appear on your store, ensure: - Widget status is Active ✓ - Widget is saved with videos ✓ - Widget ID is added to theme settings ✓ - Shopvid app is enabled in theme ✓ If your widget isn't showing, check each requirement in order. [How to manage product description in Shopvid](/shopvid/product/how-to-manage-product-description-in-shopvid/)[Float](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/float/) --- # Float Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/float/ # Float ### General Widget ID /Widget snippet: - After completing all the neccessary settings and clicking **Save**, the Widget ID and Widget snippet will be generated and you can either copy Widget ID or Widget snippet to paste into your theme. - For older theme: you must use the snippet to manually place the app's code in yopur theme files. - For modern theme: you should be able to Add Block and paste the Widget ID. Mind you that, in the first time you set up a widget, an instruction modal will pop up and guide you through the theme editing! Status: - Make sure to select Active for widget that you want to display on the storefront Widget name: - Name the widget for the ease of management - Widget name is a required field Font: - Choose a suitable font for all text within the widget here Page targeting: - Choose your targeted page to display videos, 5 options available: Home page - Cart page - Product pages - Collection pages - Blog pages - For product pages, to select the product page you want to display: Click **Select products** - Browse your product or use search to find specific products - Select products by clicking the checkbox - Click **Done** and view added products on the left side of the editor Video: - Click **Video or Browse** - Browse your video library or use search to find specific videos - Select videos by clicking the checkbox on each thumbnail - Click **Done** and view added videos on the left side of the editor ### Preview Default position: - Choose the placement of float, 2 options available: Bottom right - Bottom left Border radius: - Adjust border radius of the video frame using the slider Popup close behavior: - Set how you want the popup to be displayed when customers click "X": Minimize to circle: Customers can reopen the video by clicking the circle - Close completely: Customers can only see the video by reloading the website Auto start the video with sound: - On: Videos automatically play when customers click the circle - Off: Customers need to open and click play video Display unmute button: - On: Show unmute button - Off: Hide unmute button When playlist ends: - Stop playing: Stop after the last video finishes - Replay from start: Automatically replay from the first video ### Full Screen Scroll type: - Horizontal: Customers can scroll left and right - Vertical: Customer can scroll up and down Replay Control: - On: Videos automatically restart after finishing - Off: Videos only play once Seek Control: - On: Customers can skip to different parts of the video - Off: Videos play from start to finish only Mute Control: - On: Shows mute/unmute button for audio control - Off: No audio control available to customers Like: - By switching it on, you can see how many customers like your videos - You can choose from 2 like icons Share: - By switching it on, you enable customers to share videos via multiple social platforms - You can choose from 3 share icons ### Product Settings CTA Button - Button action: Add to cart: Only add product to cart when customers click button - Open product detail page: Redirect customers to product detail page when clicking button - Add to cart and open cart page: Add product to cart and open cart page when customers click button - Button text: Adjust the text you want to appear on the button (e.g., "Shop now"). - Button text color: Choose color of your liking for the button Style - Layout: Choose how products are displayed, 2 options available: Grid: Display 2 products displayed per row - List: Display 1 product per row - Heading text: Customize the title that appears above your products (e.g., "Product seen in the video"). Product Card - Product name: Adjust the font size of the product titles - Product name color: Select a suitable color for product title text - Price: By switching this on, your product price is displayed Price display: Choose whether to show the current price only, or both the current and "Compare-at" price. - Styling: Customize the size and color for both the current price and the compare-at price (usually used to highlight discounts). [Grid](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/grid/)[Story](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/story/) --- # Grid Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/grid/ # Grid ### General Widget ID /Widget snippet: - After completing all the neccessary settings and clicking **Save**, the Widget ID and Widget snippet will be generated and you can either copy Widget ID or Widget snippet to paste into your theme. - For older theme: you must use the snippet to manually place the app's code in yopur theme files. - For modern theme: you should be able to Add Block and paste the Widget ID. Mind you that, in the first time you set up a widget, an instruction modal will pop up and guide you through the theme editing! Status: - Make sure to select Active for widget that you want to display on the storefront Widget name: - Name the widget for the ease of management - Widget name is a required field Font: - Choose a suitable font for all text within the widget here Block Title: - Block Title is displayed in the middle, above videos. - Input a descriptive Block Title to get more customers' attention Title color: - Choose a suitable color for the Block Title Title size: - Adjust the font side using the slider Video: - Based on your selection of display page, the setting of videos may differ. - For Product pages: Click **Add products** - Browse your product or use search to find specific products - Select products by clicking the checkbox - Click **Done** and view added products on the left side of the editor You can attach/detach videos by clicking `...` button > Edit attached videos - For Other pages: Click **Video or Browse** - Browse your video library or use search to find specific videos - Select videos by clicking the checkbox on each thumbnail - Click **Done** and view added videos on the left side of the editor ### Gallery View Column number: - Adjust the number of column displayed Click **Increase column range** to contact us so we can add more column for you Border radius: - Adjust border radius of the video frame using the slider Column Spacing: - Choose your prefered spacing options: Extra small - Small - Medium - Large Video ratio: - Choose your prefered video ratio: Portrait (9:16): Looks more natural, familar to most customers - Square (1:1): Optimizes display to fit more videos on screen Row per "See more" click: - Adjust the number of rows appears when customers click see more Title: - Adjust the Title size using the slider - Choose the maximum number of line to display title - Choose Title alignment To edit the title: - Go to Video section in General tab - Click `...` button >> Edit display title - Input the new title of your liking Product card: - By switching it on, you can choose a suitable template: Overlay: Product card is displayed overlay the video - Icon: Same as Overlay, but a clickable icon button is also displayed - Text button: Same as Overlay, but a clickable, customizable text button is also displayed - Card outside video: Product card with icon button is displayed under the video frame - For templates with button, you can also customize: For Icon button, Card outside video template: Button background color - Button icon color - For Text button: Button background color - Button text - Button text color Play Video: - None: Videos play only when clicked - Autoplay: Videos start playing when customers scroll to videos - Autoplay on Hover: Videos start playing when customers hover over them (this feature is not available on mobile) ### Full Screen Scroll type: - Horizontal: Customers can scroll left and right - Vertical: Customer can scroll up and down Replay Control: - On: Videos automatically restart after finishing - Off: Videos only play once Seek Control: - On: Customers can skip to different parts of the video - Off: Videos play from start to finish only Mute Control: - On: Shows mute/unmute button for audio control - Off: No audio control available to customers Like: - By switching it on, you can see how many customers like your videos - You can choose from 2 like icons Share: - By switching it on, you enable customers to share videos via multiple social platforms - You can choose from 3 share icons ### Product Settings CTA Button - Button action: Add to cart: Only add product to cart when customers click button - Open product detail page: Redirect customers to product detail page when clicking button - Add to cart and open cart page: Add product to cart and open cart page when customers click button - Button text: Adjust the text you want to appear on the button (e.g., "Shop now"). - Button text color: Choose color of your liking for the button Style - Layout: Choose how products are displayed, 2 options available: Grid: Display 2 products displayed per row - List: Display 1 product per row - Heading text: Customize the title that appears above your products (e.g., "Product seen in the video"). Product Card - Product name: Adjust the font size of the product titles - Product name color: Select a suitable color for product title text - Price: By switching this on, your product price is displayed Price display: Choose whether to show the current price only, or both the current and "Compare-at" price. - Styling: Customize the size and color for both the current price and the compare-at price (usually used to highlight discounts). [How to manage product description in Shopvid](/shopvid/product/how-to-manage-product-description-in-shopvid/)[Float](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/float/) --- # Story Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/story/ # Story ### General Widget ID /Widget snippet: - After completing all the neccessary settings and clicking **Save**, the Widget ID and Widget snippet will be generated and you can either copy Widget ID or Widget snippet to paste into your theme. - For older theme: you must use the snippet to manually place the app's code in yopur theme files. - For modern theme: you should be able to Add Block and paste the Widget ID. Mind you that, in the first time you set up a widget, an instruction modal will pop up and guide you through the theme editing! Status: - Make sure to select Active for widget that you want to display on the storefront Widget name: - Name the widget for the ease of management - Widget name is a required field Font: - Choose a suitable font for all text within the widget here Block Title: - Block Title is displayed in the middle, above videos. - Input a descriptive Block Title to get more customers' attention Title color: - Choose a suitable color for the Block Title Title size: - Adjust the font side using the slider Video: - Based on your selection of display page, the setting of videos may differ. - For Product pages: Click **Add products** - Browse your product or use search to find specific videos - Select products by clicking the checkbox - Click **Done** and view added products on the left side of the editor You can attach/detach videos by clicking `...` button > Edit attached videos - For Other pages: Click **Video or Browse** - Browse your video library or use search to find specific videos - Select videos by clicking the checkbox on each thumbnail - Click **Done** and view added videos on the left side of the editor ### Gallery View Size: - Adjust size of story frame Gap: - Adjust the gap between stories Border color: - Choose color of your liking for the border of stories Title: - Adjust the Title size using the slider - Choose the maximum number of line to display title - Choose Title alignment To edit the title: - Go to Video section in General tab - Click `...` button >> Edit display title - Input the new title of your liking Play Video: - None: Videos play only when clicked - Autoplay: Videos start playing when customers scroll to videos - Autoplay on Hover: Videos start playing when customers hover over them (this feature is not available on mobile) ### Full Screen Scroll type: - Horizontal: Customers can scroll left and right - Vertical: Customer can scroll up and down Replay Control: - On: Videos automatically restart after finishing - Off: Videos only play once Seek Control: - On: Customers can skip to different parts of the video - Off: Videos play from start to finish only Mute Control: - On: Shows mute/unmute button for audio control - Off: No audio control available to customers Like: - By switching it on, you can see how many customers like your videos - You can choose from 2 like icons Share: - By switching it on, you enable customers to share videos via multiple social platforms - You can choose from 3 share icons ### Product Settings CTA Button - Button action: Add to cart: Only add product to cart when customers click button - Open product detail page: Redirect customers to product detail page when clicking button - Add to cart and open cart page: Add product to cart and open cart page when customers click button - Button text: Adjust the text you want to appear on the button (e.g., "Shop now"). - Button text color: Choose color of your liking for the button Style - Layout: Choose how products are displayed, 2 options available: Grid: Display 2 products displayed per row - List: Display 1 product per row - Heading text: Customize the title that appears above your products (e.g., "Product seen in the video"). Product Card - Product name: Adjust the font size of the product titles - Product name color: Select a suitable color for product title text - Price: By switching this on, your product price is displayed Price display: Choose whether to show the current price only, or both the current and "Compare-at" price. - Styling: Customize the size and color for both the current price and the compare-at price (usually used to highlight discounts). [Float](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/float/)[Setting up widgets](/shopvid/manage-widget/setting-up-widgets/) --- # Setting up widgets Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/manage-widget/setting-up-widgets/ # Setting up widgets ### General Widget ID /Widget snippet: - After completing all the neccessary settings and clicking **Save**, the Widget ID and Widget snippet will be generated and you can either copy Widget ID or Widget snippet to paste into your theme. - For older theme: you must use the snippet to manually place the app's code in yopur theme files. - For modern theme: you should be able to Add Block and paste the Widget ID. Mind you that, in the first time you set up a widget, an instruction modal will pop up and guide you through the theme editing! Status: - Make sure to select Active for widget that you want to display on the storefront Widget name: - Name the widget for the ease of management - Widget name is a required field Font: - Choose a suitable font for all text within the widget here Block Title: - Block Title is displayed in the middle, above videos. - Input a descriptive Block Title to get more customers' attention Title color: - Choose a suitable color for the Block Title Title size: - Adjust the font side using the slider Video: - Based on your selection of display page, the setting of videos may differ. - For Product pages: Click **Add products** - Browse your product or use search to find specific videos - Select products by clicking the checkbox - Click **Done** and view added products on the left side of the editor You can attach/detach videos by clicking `...` button > Edit attached videos - For Other pages: Click **Video or Browse** - Browse your video library or use search to find specific videos - Select videos by clicking the checkbox on each thumbnail - Click **Done** and view added videos on the left side of the editor #### Auto Match Theme **Auto match theme** aligns your widget's colors with your live Shopify theme — no manual color picking needed. Found in **Manage widget** → open a widget → **General** tab. ### Step 1: Request unlock Click **Check my theme**. This sends a message to the support team to unlock the feature for your store. ### Step 2: Sync your theme colors Once the support team unlocks the feature, the **Sync theme** button appears. Click it to apply your theme's color scheme to the widget. Click **Sync theme** multiple times to cycle through different color schemes from your live theme, then save when you find the right one. ### Gallery View Column number: - Adjust the number of column displayed Click **Increase column range** to contact us so we can add more column for you Border radius: - Adjust border radius of the video frame using the slider Column Spacing: - Choose your prefered spacing options: Extra small - Small - Medium - Large Title: - Adjust the Title size using the slider - Choose the maximum number of line to display title - Choose Title alignment To edit the title: - Go to Video section in General tab - Click `...` button >> Edit display title - Input the new title of your liking Product card: - By switching it on, you can choose a suitable template: Overlay: Product card is displayed overlay the video - Icon: Same as Overlay, but a clickable icon button is also displayed - Text button: Same as Overlay, but a clickable, customizable text button is also displayed - Card outside video: Product card with icon button is displayed under the video frame - For templates with button, you can also customize: For Icon button, Card outside video template: Button background color - Button icon color - For Text button: Button background color - Button text - Button text color Play Video: - None: Videos play only when clicked - Autoplay: Videos start playing when customers scroll to videos - Autoplay on Hover: Videos start playing when customers hover over them (this feature is not available on mobile) **Enable sound while playing** On iOS Operating System, sound cannot play on the initial load in Preview mode. The video will play silently, and audio will start when navigating to the next video. ### Full Screen Scroll type: - Horizontal: Customers can scroll left and right - Vertical: Customer can scroll up and down Replay Control: - On: Videos automatically restart after finishing - Off: Videos only play once Seek Control: - On: Customers can skip to different parts of the video - Off: Videos play from start to finish only Mute Control: - On: Shows mute/unmute button for audio control - Off: No audio control available to customers Like: - By switching it on, you can see how many customers like your videos - You can choose from 2 like icons Share: - By switching it on, you enable customers to share videos via multiple social platforms - You can choose from 3 share icons #### Full-Screen Layout Options Shopvid supports two full-screen video layouts for desktop. Go to **Manage widget** → open a widget → **Full Screen** tab → **Style** → **Fullscreen video layout**. LayoutDescription **Video with product panel**Default. Product panel shown alongside the video. **Video only**New. Full-screen video without product panel. Clicking **Add to cart** opens a product detail sidebar on the right instead. **Video only** has its own product card style settings — configure them below the layout selector before saving. ### Product Settings CTA Button - Button action: Add to cart: Only add product to cart when customers click button - Open product detail page: Redirect customers to product detail page when clicking button - Add to cart and open cart page: Add product to cart and open cart page when customers click button - Button text: Adjust the text you want to appear on the button (e.g., "Shop now"). - Button text color: Choose color of your liking for the button Style - Layout: Choose how products are displayed, 2 options available: Grid: Display 2 products displayed per row - List: Display 1 product per row - Heading text: Customize the title that appears above your products (e.g., "Product seen in the video"). Product Card - Product name: Adjust the font size of the product titles - Product name color: Select a suitable color for product title text - Price: By switching this on, your product price is displayed Price display: Choose whether to show the current price only, or both the current and "Compare-at" price. - Styling: Customize the size and color for both the current price and the compare-at price (usually used to highlight discounts). [Story](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/story/)[Video caption](/shopvid/manage-widget/video-caption/) --- # Video caption Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/manage-widget/video-caption/ # Video caption ### Set caption on a video Open a video from the video library. In the **Video caption** field: - **Instagram / TikTok videos** — caption is auto-fetched from the platform. Edit if needed, then click **Resync** to pull the latest version from Instagram or TikTok. - **Uploaded videos** — type a caption manually. Edited captions on TikTok or Instagram may take a few hours to resync. If changes don't appear immediately, try resyncing again later. ### Enable caption display on storefront Go to **Manage widget** → open a widget → **Full Screen** tab → enable **Caption** → set **Caption size** → **Save**. [Setting up widgets](/shopvid/manage-widget/setting-up-widgets/)[Speed check](/shopvid/widgets-load-speed/speed-check/) --- # Privacy policy Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/others/privacy-policy/ # Privacy policy This Privacy Policy explains what Personal Data (defined below) we collect, how we use and share that data, and your choices concerning our data practices. Before using the Service or submitting any Personal Data to Company, please review this Privacy Policy carefully and contact us at [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) if you have any questions. By using the Service, you agree to the practices described in this Privacy Policy. If you do not agree to this Privacy Policy, please do not access the Site or otherwise use the Service. #### 1. Personal data we collect **We collect information that alone or in combination with other information in our possession could be used to identify you (“Personal Data”) as follows:** **Personal data you provide** We collect the following categories of Personal Data from you when you visite or interact with the Site or the Service: Identification Data: We may collect your name, email address, website address when you engage in certain activities on the Site, when using the Service, or when a customer uses a website or mobile application in which the Service is integrated. Financial Data: Our payment processor Shopify Inc. (“Shopify”) collects the financial information necessary to process your payments for the Service. Accordingly, in addition to this Privacy Policy and our Terms of Service, your Financial Data is also processed pursuant to Shopify’s services agreement and privacy policy. Communication Data: We may collect information when you contact us with questions or concerns and when you voluntarily respond to questionnaires, surveys or requests for market research seeking your opinion and feedback. Providing communication data is optional to you. Commercial Data:We may retain a history of the products you browse and/or purchase using the Service. Using Cookies we track how users interact with Shopvid's video widget and retain the order ID if a user has purchased a product through your website in order to provide valuable analytics. **Internet activity data** When you visit, use, and interact with the Service, we may receive certain information about your visit, use, or interactions. For example, we may monitor the number of people that visit the Service, peak hours of visits, which page(s) are visited, the domains our visitors come from (e.g., google.com, yahoo.com, etc.), and which browsers people use to access the Service (e.g., Chrome, Firefox, Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.), broad geographical information, and navigation pattern. In particular, the following information is created and automatically logged in our systems: Log Data: Information that your browser automatically sends whenever you visit the Site. Log Data includes your Internet Protocol address, browser type and settings, the date and time of your request, and how you interacted with the Site. Cookies Data: Please see the “Cookies” section below to learn more about how we use cookies. Device Data: Includes name of the device, operating system, and browser you are using. Information collected may depend on the type of device you use and its settings. Usage Data: We collect information about how you use our Service, such as the types of content that you view or engage with, the features you use, the actions you take, and the time, frequency, and duration of your activities. Location Data: We derive a rough estimate of your location from your IP address. We collect your location information through the App using your device IP address, WiFi, Bluetooth, and GPS coordinates (e.g. latitude/longitude) of your mobile device. If you want to opt-out of the collection of your location data, please adjust your settings in your mobile device to limit the App’s access to your location data. Email Open/Click Data: We use pixels in our email campaigns that allow us to collect your email and IP address as well as the date and time you open an email or click on any links in the email. Personal Data We Process on Behalf of Our Business Customers: In order to provide the Service, we use Cookies to track the interactions a user makes with Shopvid's video widget on the Business Customer’s website in order to provide analytics such as number if widget clicks, videos viewed and if the visitor has purchased the product after interacting with Shopvid’s video widget. We process that information pursuant to our Terms of Service and other agreements with our business customers. We have no direct relationship with the individuals whose Personal Data we process on behalf of our business customers. If you are such an individual and would no longer like your data to be used by one of our business customers that use our Service or you would like to access, correct, or request deletion of your data, please contact the business customer that you interact with directly. **Cookies** We use cookies to operate and administer our Site, gather usage data on our Site, and improve your experience on it. A “cookie” is a piece of information sent to your browser by a website you visit. Cookies can be stored on your computer for different periods of time. Some cookies expire after a certain amount of time, or upon logging out (session cookies), others survive after your browser is closed until a defined expiration date set in the cookie (as determined by the third party placing it), and help recognize your computer when you open your browser and browse the Internet again (persistent cookies). On most web browsers, you will find a “help” section on the toolbar. Please refer to this section for information on how to receive a notification when you are receiving a new cookie and how to turn cookies off. Please see the links below for guidance on how to modify your web browser’s settings on the most popular browsers: Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, Apple Safari. Please note that if you limit the ability of websites to set cookies, you may be unable to access certain parts of the Site and you may not be able to benefit from the full functionality of the Site. Advertising networks may use cookies to collect Personal Data. Most advertising networks offer you a way to opt out of targeted advertising. If you would like to find out more information, please visit the Network Advertising Initiative’s online resources at [http://www.networkadvertising.org (opens in a new tab)](http://www.networkadvertising.org) and follow the opt-out instructions there. If you access the Site on your mobile device, you may not be able to control tracking technologies through the settings. **Analytics** We use Google Analytics, a web analytics service provided by Google, Inc. (“Google”). Google Analytics uses cookies to help us analyze how users use the Site and enhance your experience when you use the Site. For more information on how Google uses this data, go to [www.google.com/policies/privacy/partners/ (opens in a new tab)](http://www.google.com/policies/privacy/partners/). #### 2. How to use personal data **We may use Personal Data for the following purposes:** By accepting this TOS or by accessing or using the Service or Site, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and agree to be bound by this TOS. If you are entering into this TOS on behalf of a company, business or other legal entity, you represent that you have the authority to bind such entity and its affiliates to this TOS, in which case the terms “you” or “your” shall refer to such entity and its affiliates. If you do not have such authority, or if you do not agree with this TOS, you must not accept this TOS and may not use the Service. - To provide the Service; - To respond to your inquiries, comments, feedback, or questions; - To send administrative information to you, for example, information regarding the Service and changes to our terms, conditions, and policies; - To analyze how you interact with our Service; - To maintain and improve the Service; - To develop new products and services; - To prevent fraud, criminal activity, or misuses of our Service, and to ensure the security of our IT systems, architecture, and networks; and - To comply with legal obligations and legal process and to protect our rights, privacy, safety, or property, and/or that of our affiliates, you, or other third parties. **Aggregated information** We may aggregate Personal Data and use the aggregated information to analyze the effectiveness of our Service, to improve and add features to our Service, and for other similar purposes. In addition, from time to time, we may analyze the general behavior and characteristics of users of our Service and share aggregated information like general user statistics with prospective business partners. We may collect aggregated information through the Service, through cookies, and through other means described in this Privacy Policy. **Marketing** We may use your Personal Data to contact you to tell you about products or services we believe may be of interest to you. For instance, if you elect to provide your email or telephone number, we may use that information to send you special offers. You may opt out of receiving emails by following the instructions contained in each promotional email we send you. You can also control the marketing emails and/or text messages you receive by updating your settings through your account. In addition, if at any time you do not wish to receive future marketing communications, you may contact us at [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io). If you unsubscribe from our marketing lists, you will no longer receive marketing communications but we will continue to contact you regarding management of your account, other administrative matters, and to respond to your requests. #### 3. Sharing and disclosure of personal data **Company does not sell your Personal Data. In certain circumstances we may share the categories of Personal Data described above without further notice to you, unless required by the law, with the following categories of third parties:** **Vendors and service of personal data** To assist us in meeting business operations needs and to perform certain services and functions, we may share Personal Data with vendors and service providers, including providers of [hosting services, cloud services, and other information technology services providers, event management services, email communication software and email newsletter services, advertising and marketing services, payment processors, customer relationship management and customer support services, and web analytics services]. Pursuant to our instructions, these parties will access, process, or store Personal Data in the course of performing their duties to us. We take commercially reasonable steps to ensure our service providers adhere to the security standards we apply to your Personal Data. **Business transfers** If we are involved in a merger, acquisition, financing due diligence, reorganization, bankruptcy, receivership, sale of all or a portion of our assets, or transition of service to another provider (collectively a “Transaction”), your Personal Data and other information may be shared in the diligence process with counterparties and others assisting with the Transaction and transferred to a successor or affiliate as part of that Transaction along with other assets. **Legal requiments** If required to do so by law or in the good faith belief that such action is necessary to (i) comply with a legal obligation, including to meet national security or law enforcement requirements, (ii) protect and defend our rights or property, (iii) prevent fraud, (iv) act in urgent circumstances to protect the personal safety of users of the Service, or the public, or (v) protect against legal liability. **Affiliates** We may share Personal Data with our [current and] future affiliates, meaning an entity that controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with Company. Our affiliates may use the Personal Data we share in a manner consistent with this Privacy Policy. #### 4. Data retention We keep Personal Data for as long as reasonably necessary for the purposes described in this Privacy Policy, while we have a business need to do so, or as required by law (e.g. for tax, legal, accounting, or other purposes), whichever is longer. #### 5. Update your information if you need to change or correct your Personal Data please contact us at [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) #### 6. Children **Our Service is not directed to children who are under the age of 16.** Company does not knowingly collect Personal Data from children under the age of 16. If you have reason to believe that a child under the age of 16 has provided Personal Data to Company through the Service please contact us at [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) and we will endeavour to delete that information from our databases. #### 7. Links to other websites **The Service may contain links to other websites not operated or controlled by Company, including social media services (“Third Party Sites”).** The information that you share with Third Party Sites will be governed by the specific privacy policies and terms of service of the Third Party Sites and not by this Privacy Policy. By providing these links we do not imply that we endorse or have reviewed these sites. Please contact the Third Party Sites directly for information on their privacy practices and policies. #### 8. Security **You use the Service at your own risk. We implement commercially reasonable technical, administrative, and organizational measures to protect Personal Data both online and offline from loss, misuse, and unauthorized access, disclosure, alteration, or destruction.** However, no Internet or e-mail transmission is ever fully secure or error free. In particular, e-mail sent to or from us may not be secure. Therefore, you should take special care in deciding what information you send to us via the Service or e-mail. Please keep this in mind when disclosing any Personal Data to Company via the Internet. In addition, we are not responsible for circumvention of any privacy settings or security measures contained on the Service, or third party websites. #### 9. International users By using our Service, you understand and acknowledge that your Personal Data will be transferred from your location to our facilities and servers in Vietnam. #### 10. Your choices **In certain circumstances providing Personal Data is optional. However, if you choose not to provide Personal Data that is needed to use some features of our Service, you may be unable to use those features.** You can also contact us at [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) to ask us to update or correct your Personal Data. You may also delete your account. Please note that we will need to verify that you have the authority to delete the account and certain activity generated prior to deletion may remain stored by us and may be shared with third parties as detailed in this Privacy Policy. Deleting the "Shopvid Shoppable Videos Reels" app from your Shopify account will result in the deletion of personal data along with all your video files, video imports, associated YouTube video links, analytics data and any scripts installed on your Shopify store. #### 11. Changes to privacy policy **The Service and our business may change from time to time.** As a result we may change this Privacy Policy at any time. When we do we will post an updated version on this page, unless another type of notice is required by the applicable law. By continuing to use our Service or providing us with Personal Data after we have posted an updated Privacy Policy, or notified you by other means if applicable, you consent to the revised Privacy Policy and practices described in it. #### 12. Right to erasure The right to get your data deleted is also known as the ‘right to erasure’. You can ask Avada.inc to delete the data it holds about you. #### Contact us If you have any questions about our Privacy Policy, please feel free to contact us at [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) [Feature request](/shopvid/feature-request/feature-request/)[Terms of service](/shopvid/others/terms-of-service/) --- # Setting Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/others/setting/ # Setting Configure your Shopvid app to match your store's theme and language preferences. These settings help ensure video display correctly across your storefront and reach customers in their preferred language. ### General Settings #### Selecting Your Theme The theme setting determines how videos display on your storefront. **To select a theme:** - Navigate to the **General** tab in Settings. - Click the **Theme** dropdown menu. - Select your store's active theme from the list (e.g., "Horizon"). - The change applies automatically. ### Translation Settings Make your videos accessible to customers worldwide by configuring language detection and adding translations. #### Language Detection Choose how Shopvid determines which language to display to your customers. **To configure language detection:** - Navigate to the **Translation** tab in Settings. - Under **Detect language**, select one of two options: **Browser's language**: Detects language based on customer's browser settings (recommended) - **Customer's IP**: Determines language based on customer's location #### Adding Translated Languages Shopvid supports multiple languages to help you reach international customers. **To add a new language:** - In the **Translation** tab, click **Add language**. - A dropdown menu appears with several available languages - Select your desired language from the list. - Click **Add** to confirm. #### Managing Translated Languages After adding languages, they appear in your **Translated languages** section. **To view or edit a language:** - Find the language in your **Translated languages** list. - Click **View** next to the language name. - Update translations for video elements like captions, buttons,.... **Default language:** Your store's primary language appears as "Default language" and cannot be removed. This ensures shopvid always have a fallback language option. [Terms of service](/shopvid/others/terms-of-service/)[Full-Screen Layout Options](/shopvid/changelog/full-screen-layout-options/) --- # Terms of service Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/others/terms-of-service/ # Terms of service ## 1. Acceptance of Terms Shopvid is a product of Avada Inc. Avada Inc. ("Company" or "we") provides its Service (as defined below) to you, subject to this Terms of Service agreement ("TOS"). By accepting this TOS or by accessing or using the Service or Site, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and agree to be bound by this TOS. If you are entering into this TOS on behalf of a company, business or other legal entity, you represent that you have the authority to bind such entity and its affiliates to this TOS, in which case the terms "you" or "your" shall refer to such entity and its affiliates. If you do not have such authority, or if you do not agree with this TOS, you must not accept this TOS and may not use the Service. Company may change this TOS from time to time by providing thirty (30) days prior notice, either by emailing the email address associated with your account or by posting a notice on the Site. We may update this Agreement by posting a revised version on our website. By continuing to use our Services, you accept any revised Agreement. You can review the most current version of this TOS at any time at [this page](/shopvid/others/terms-of-service/). The revised terms and conditions will become effective thirty (30) days after we post or send you notice of such changes, and if you use the Service after that date, your use will constitute acceptance of the revised terms and conditions. If any change to this TOS is not acceptable to you, your only remedy is to stop using the Services and send a cancellation email to [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io). As part of the registration process, you will identify an administrative email address and password for your account ("Account"). By accepting this TOS or by accessing or using the Service or Site, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and agree to be bound by this TOS. If you are entering into this TOS on behalf of a company, business or other legal entity, you represent that you have the authority to bind such entity and its affiliates to this TOS, in which case the terms "you" or "your" shall refer to such entity and its affiliates. If you do not have such authority, or if you do not agree with this TOS, you must not accept this TOS and may not use the Service. ## 2. Description of Service Subject to the terms hereof, we grant you access to our Services. This includes the right to: - create an interactive, shoppable video, video quiz, shoppable hotspot image gallery & easily embed on site, Shop app, Tapcart & emails; - create video channel pages for learning & shopping experiences; - use our AI-optimization for all videos & images to reduce file size; - upload video, import TikTok video, Instagram posts, reels, stories & YouTube video; - find UGC posts on social that mentions your brand; and - use all related functionality that we may provide, all software (including the Software, as defined below), data, reports, text, images, sounds, video, and content made available through any of the foregoing (collectively referred to as the "Content"). Any new features added to or augmenting the Service are also subject to this TOS. ## 3. Acceptable Use Policy ### 3.1 Code of Conduct Subject to the terms and conditions of this TOS, you may access and use the Service only for lawful purposes. All rights, title and interest in and to the Service and its components will remain with and belong exclusively to Company. You must not: - sublicense, resell, rent, lease, transfer, assign, time share or otherwise commercially exploit or make the Service available to any third party; - access, download, reproduce, redistribute, frame, mirror, create derivative works from, decompile, reverse engineer, alter, archive, or disassemble any part of our Service or content without explicit authorization from us; - attempt to bypass any security, rate-limiting, filtering, digital rights management, or other access restrictions we have in place; - remove or alter any logo, watermark, or proprietary rights notice embedded in the Service or their output without our permission; - submit any malicious programs, scripts, or code; - submit an unreasonable number of requests to our servers; - take any actions that manipulate, interfere with, modify, adapt or hack the Service to, or otherwise attempt to gain unauthorized access to the Service or its related systems or networks; - use the Service in any unlawful manner (including without limitation in violation of any data, privacy or export control laws) or in any manner that interferes with or disrupts the integrity or performance of the Service or its components. You shall comply with any codes of conduct, policies, or other notices Company provides you or publishes in connection with the Service, and you shall promptly notify Company if you learn of a security breach related to the Service. ### 3.2 License and Use of Proprietary Software Any software that may be made available by Company in connection with the Service ("Software") contains proprietary and confidential information that is protected by applicable intellectual property and other laws. Subject to the terms and conditions of this TOS, Company hereby grants you a non-transferable, non-sublicensable and non-exclusive right and license to use the object code of any Software on a single device solely in connection with the Service, provided that you shall not (and shall not allow any third party to) copy, modify, create a derivative work of, reverse engineer, reverse assemble or otherwise attempt to discover any source code or sell, assign, sublicense or otherwise transfer any right in any Software. You agree not to access the Service by any means other than through the interface that is provided by Company for use in accessing the Service. Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved, and no license or right to use any trademark of Company or any third party is granted to you in connection with the Service. ### 3.3 Responsibility and Liability for Your Content You are solely responsible for all data, information, feedback, suggestions, text, content and other materials that you upload, post, deliver, provide or otherwise transmit or store (hereafter "upload(ing)") in connection with or relating to the Service ("Your Content"). You may only upload or import content that you have the right to upload, import, share, or embed on your website, emails, SMS campaigns, or anywhere else online or offline. By using our Service, you acknowledge and agree that Company is not responsible for any content you upload to our platform. You are solely responsible for ensuring that your content complies with all copyright laws and regulations. You must have the necessary rights and permissions for any content you upload, import or use to share and distribute with Shopvid. If you do not own the rights to the content or do not have permission from the rights owner, you must not use such content with Shopvid. Company will not be liable for any copyright infringements or legal actions resulting from the content you upload or import. It is your responsibility to resolve any disputes or issues related to copyright violations. By uploading or importing Your Content on or through the Service, you agree to indemnify and hold the Company harmless from any claims, damages, or legal fees arising from copyright infringement or any other legal issues related to your content. You agree to take full legal responsibility for the content used through Shopvid. By uploading or importing Your Content on or through the Service, you hereby do and shall grant Company a worldwide, non-exclusive, perpetual, irrevocable, royalty-free, fully paid, sublicensable and transferable license to use, modify, reproduce, distribute, display, publish and perform Your Content in connection with the Service. ### 3.4 Account Security and Content Monitoring You are responsible for maintaining the confidentiality of your login, password and account and for all activities that occur under your login or account. Company reserves the right to access your account in order to respond to your requests for technical support. Company has the right, but not the obligation, to monitor the Service, Content, or Your Content. You further agree that Company may remove or disable any Content at any time for any reason (including, but not limited to, upon receipt of claims or allegations from third parties or authorities relating to such Content) or for no reason at all. ### 3.5 Service Operations and Data Responsibility You understand that the operation of the Service, including Your Content, may be unencrypted and involve: - transmissions over various networks; - changes to conform and adapt to technical requirements of connecting networks or devices; and - transmission to Company's third-party vendors and hosting partners to provide the necessary hardware, software, networking, storage, and related technology required to operate and maintain the Service. Accordingly, you acknowledge that you bear sole responsibility for adequate security, protection and backup of Your Content. Company will have no liability to you for any unauthorized access or use of any of Your Content, or any corruption, deletion, destruction or loss of any of Your Content. ### 3.6 Responsibility for Equipment and Account Security You shall be responsible for obtaining and maintaining any equipment and ancillary services needed to connect to, access or otherwise use the Services, including, without limitation, modems, hardware, server, software, operating system, networking, web servers, long-distance and local telephone service (collectively, "Equipment"). You shall be responsible for ensuring that such Equipment is compatible with the Services (and, to the extent applicable, the Software) and complies with all configurations and specifications set forth in Company's published policies then in effect. You shall also be responsible for maintaining the security of the Equipment, your Account, passwords (including but not limited to administrative and user passwords) and files, and for all uses of your Account or the Equipment with or without your knowledge or consent. ### 3.7 Rights Enforcement The failure of Company to exercise or enforce any right or provision of this TOS shall not be a waiver of that right. You acknowledge that this TOS is a contract between you and Company, even though it is electronic and is not physically signed by you and Company, and it governs your use of the Service. ### 3.8 Authorization for Marketing and Promotion Company reserves the right to use your name and/or company name and/or company logo as a reference for marketing or promotional purposes on Company's website and in other communication with existing or potential Company customers. You agree to cooperate with and provide reasonable assistance to Company in promoting and advertising the Services. To decline Company this right you need to email [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) stating that you do not wish to be used as a reference. ### 3.9 Provision of Technical Support Subject to the terms hereof, Company may (but has no obligation to) provide technical support services through email or other communication channels in accordance with our standard practice. ## 4. Third-party Content and External Links ### 4.1 Third-Party Content and External Links Disclaimer Some information made available on or through the Site or Services is provided by third parties such as content distributors and aggregators ("Third-Party Content"). The inclusion or appearance of Third-Party Content on the Site does not indicate any approval or endorsement by the Company of such Third-Party Content. The Company is not responsible for, and hereby disclaims any and all liability that may arise from, Third-Party Content or the act of accessing, browsing, or otherwise using such Third-Party Content. The Site or Services may contain links to third-party websites or video and photo content ("External Content"). The content of such External Sites is developed and provided by others. These links are provided solely as a convenience to you and not as an endorsement by us of the content on such External Content. You should contact us at [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) for those External Content if you have any concerns regarding such links or any content located on such External Sites. We are not responsible for the content of any External Content and do not make any representations regarding the content or accuracy of materials on such External Content. You should take precautions when downloading files from all websites to protect your computer from viruses and other destructive programs. If you decide to access linked External Content, you do so at your own risk. ## 5. Representations and Warranties You represent and warrant to Company that (i) you have full power and authority to enter into this TOS; (ii) you own all of Your Content or have obtained all permissions, releases, rights or licenses required to engage in your posting and other activities (and allow Company to perform its obligations) in connection with the Services without obtaining any further releases or consents; (iii) Your Content and other activities in connection with the Service, and Company's exercise of all rights and license granted by you herein, do not and will not violate, infringe, or misappropriate any third party's copyright, trademark, right of privacy or publicity, or other personal or proprietary right, nor does Your Content contain any matter that is defamatory, obscene, unlawful, threatening, abusive, tortious, offensive or harassing; and (iv) you are eighteen (18) years of age or older. ## 6. Disclaimer of Warranties The Services may be temporarily unavailable for scheduled maintenance or for unscheduled emergency maintenance, either by Company or by third-party providers, or because of other causes beyond our reasonable control. HOWEVER, THE SERVICE, INCLUDING THE SITE AND CONTENT, AND ALL SERVER AND NETWORK COMPONENTS ARE PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, AND COMPANY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, TITLE, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SERVICE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, TIMELY, SECURE, ERROR-FREE OR VIRUS-FREE, NOR DOES IT MAKE ANY WARRANTY AS TO THE RESULTS THAT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM USE OF THE SERVICES, AND NO INFORMATION, ADVICE OR SERVICES OBTAINED BY YOU FROM COMPANY OR THROUGH THE SERVICE SHALL CREATE ANY WARRANTY NOT EXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS TOS. ## 7. Limitation of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE) SHALL COMPANY BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR (A) ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, LOST DATA, OR (B) FOR ANY DIRECT DAMAGES, COSTS, LOSSES OR LIABILITIES IN EXCESS OF THE FEES ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU IN THE SIX (6) MONTHS PRECEDING THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO YOUR CLAIM OR, IF NO FEES APPLY, ONE HUNDRED ($100) U.S. DOLLARS. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION ALLOCATE THE RISKS UNDER THIS TOS BETWEEN THE PARTIES, AND THE PARTIES HAVE RELIED ON THESE LIMITATIONS IN DETERMINING WHETHER TO ENTER INTO THIS TOS. Some states do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties or limitation of liability for incidental or consequential damages, which means that some of the above limitations may not apply to you. IN THESE STATES, COMPANY'S LIABILITY WILL BE LIMITED TO THE GREATEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION ALLOCATE THE RISKS UNDER THIS TOS BETWEEN THE PARTIES, AND THE PARTIES HAVE RELIED ON THESE LIMITATIONS IN DETERMINING WHETHER TO ENTER INTO THIS TOS. ## 8. Indemnification You shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless Company from and against any claims, actions or demands, including without limitation reasonable legal and accounting fees, arising or resulting from your breach of this TOS, any of Your Content, or your other access, contribution to, use or misuse of the Service. Company shall provide notice to you of any such claim, suit or demand. Company reserves the right to assume the exclusive defense and control of any matter which is subject to indemnification under this section. In such case, you agree to cooperate with any reasonable requests assisting Company's defense of such matter. ## 9. Assignment You may not assign this TOS without the prior written consent of Company, but Company may assign or transfer this TOS, in whole or in part, without restriction. ## 10. Miscellaneous If any provision of this TOS is found to be unenforceable or invalid, that provision will be limited or eliminated to the minimum extent necessary so that this TOS will otherwise remain in full force and effect and enforceable. Both parties agree that this TOS is the complete and exclusive statement of the mutual understanding of the parties and supersedes and cancels all previous written and oral agreements, communications and other understandings relating to the subject matter of this TOS, and that all waivers and modifications must be in a writing signed by both parties, except as otherwise provided herein. No agency, partnership, joint venture, or employment is created as a result of this TOS and you do not have any authority of any kind to bind Company in any respect whatsoever. In any action or proceeding to enforce rights under this TOS, the prevailing party will be entitled to recover costs and attorneys' fees. All notices under this TOS will be in writing and will be deemed to have been duly given when received, if personally delivered; when receipt is electronically confirmed, if transmitted by facsimile or email; the day after it is sent, if sent for next day delivery by recognized overnight delivery service; and upon receipt, if sent by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested. ## 11. Privacy Please visit [Privacy policy](/shopvid/others/privacy-policy/) to understand how Company collects and uses personal information. ## Contact us If you have any questions about our Terms of Service, please feel free to contact us at [support@avada.io](mailto:support@avada.io) [Privacy policy](/shopvid/others/privacy-policy/)[Setting](/shopvid/others/setting/) --- # How to manage product description in Shopvid Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/product/how-to-manage-product-description-in-shopvid/ # How to manage product description in Shopvid The Products module lets you manage all products tagged in your Shopvid videos, including which videos they appear in and the description customers see when they interact with your products in the video player. ### Prerequisites - Products must already be tagged to at least one video in Shopvid. Products appear in the **Products** list automatically once tagged. ### Steps #### Step 1: Go to the Products module From the Shopvid app, click **Products** in the left navigation menu. You will see a list of all products currently tagged in your videos. #### Step 2: Click Edit on a product Find the product you want to manage. Click the **Edit** button in the **Action** column to open the product detail page. #### Step 3: Review the Product Detail page On the **Product Detail** page, you can manage two things: - **Attach video(s)** — which videos this product is linked to - **Description** — the product description customers see in the video #### Step 4: Edit the product description Scroll to the **Product information** section. In the **Description** field, enter or update the product description. - To pull in the existing Shopify description, click **Use Shopify description**. This will load the description from your Shopify product page. - To write a custom description, type directly in the **Description** field (placeholder: *Enter product description...*). #### Step 5: Preview the description Click **Preview** to see how the description will appear to customers in the video player before saving. #### Step 6: Save your changes When you are satisfied with the description, click **Save** to apply the changes. #### Step 7: (Optional) Manage attached videos Still on the **Product Detail** page, you can also manage which videos this product appears in: - Click **Attach video** to link an additional video. - On any existing attached video, click **Unattach** to remove the link. #### Step 8: (Optional) Attach videos from the Products list You can also attach videos directly from the **Products** list without entering the Product Detail page. Click **Attach video** in the **Action** column, select your videos in the **Attach videos** modal, then click **Save**. ### Tips - Use **Use Shopify description** for consistency with your Shopify storefront, or write a custom description to tailor the message for video viewers. - The **Sync description** button on the Products list page lets you sync descriptions for all products at once. - Changes to the description only affect what customers see inside the Shopvid video player — your Shopify product page is not modified. - Products are added to this list automatically when you tag them in a video. You can also use **Add products** on the Products page to tag products in bulk. [Video Studio](/shopvid/video-library/video-studio/)[Grid](/shopvid/manage-widget/create-new-widget/grid/) --- # SEO metadata Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/video-library/seo-metadata/ # SEO metadata The Video SEO Optimization feature lets you customize crucial metadata—such as title, description, and alt text—for every video on your store, whether synced from social media or uploaded directly. This eliminates the risk of displaying raw filenames or messy social captions, helping you strictly follow Google's ranking guidelines. By optimizing these details, you ensure your videos are discoverable in search results and accessible to all users, effortlessly driving more organic traffic to your products. To edit SEO, you can easily follow these steps: - In the Video detail screen, navigate to SEO tab - To edit SEO values, simply click and enter the content to your desire. - To restore to the default value, simply click the Restore default button in the upper right corner. For sync videos from Tiktok/Instagram, default values for Title, SEO keywords and Description are auto-generated, deriving from the title and caption of the video. We suggest that you customize the Title and Description according to your video content to maximize visibility on Google. [Upload video from Shopify files](/shopvid/video-library/upload-video-from-shopify-files/)[Set thumbnail](/shopvid/video-library/set-thumbnail/) --- # Set thumbnail Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/video-library/set-thumbnail/ # Set thumbnail The Custom Video Thumbnail feature gives you full control over the first impression your videos make, whether they are imported from social feeds or uploaded directly. This eliminates the issue of displaying blurry, awkward, or low-quality auto-generated frames that often occur by default. By selecting a polished cover image—either by uploading a custom design or selecting the perfect frame—you ensure a cohesive brand aesthetic and significantly boost click-through rates (CTR) before the video even begins. ### How to select thumbnail To select thumbnail for video, you can either pick frame from video or upload an image #### Pick frame from video - Open Video library, choose any video that you want to select thumbnail - Click **Set thumbnail** >> **Pick frame from video** to select a frame from your footage - Browse the video timeline and choose a frame - Click **Save** to apply the new thumbnail #### Upload thumbnail - Open Video library, choose any video that you want to select thumbnail - Click **Set thumbnail** >> **Upload thumbnail** to upload a designated thumbnail image from your device - Click **Upload thumbnail** in the modal once again to open file finder of your device - Find and Select the image to use as thumbnail - Click **Done** to apply the new thumbnail [SEO metadata](/shopvid/video-library/seo-metadata/)[Video Studio](/shopvid/video-library/video-studio/) --- # Sync video from TikTok / Instagram Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/video-library/sync-video-from-tiktok-instagram/ # Sync video from TikTok / Instagram ### What is the Sync Video Feature? Connect your Instagram and TikTok accounts to browse and import videos into your store - no need to download and re-upload files manually. Simply select the videos you want to add, then turn them into shoppable content to boost engagement and drive sales. ### How to sync video To sync video from Tiktok/Instagram, you can easily follow these steps: - Click Add video >> Use username/Use URL - Input your username on Tiktok/Instagram or copy and paste the link of video - Make sure that you have obtained neccessary permissions, copyrights and authorizations - Click Import and view synced videos in the video list ### Working with Video Details Each uploaded video can be customized with product information and details. #### Tagging Products to Videos Product tags make your videos shoppable by linking them to items in your store. **To tag products:** - Open the video detail panel - Scroll to the **Tagged product(s)** section - Click **Tag product** - In the product selector: Browse your synced Shopify products - Use the search bar to find specific items - Select multiple products if the video features several items - Click **Confirm** [Upload video](/shopvid/video-library/upload-video/)[Sync videos by hashtag](/shopvid/video-library/sync-videos-by-hashtag/) --- # Sync Videos by Hashtag Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/video-library/sync-videos-by-hashtag/ # Sync Videos by Hashtag Shopvid lets you pull in videos from TikTok or Instagram using a hashtag — either as a one-time manual import or on an automatic recurring schedule. This is useful for sourcing UGC content without manually searching for each video. ## Prerequisites - You have connected at least one TikTok or Instagram account in Video Library - You have confirmed you hold the necessary rights to use the videos ## Manual Import by Hashtag ### Step 1: Open Video Library In the Shopvid sidebar, click **Video Library** and go to the **TikTok** or **Instagram** tab. ### Step 2: Add video by hashtag Click **Add video** → select **Use hashtag**. ### Step 3: Enter the hashtag In the **Add new videos by TikTok hashtag** (or Instagram) modal, enter a hashtag in the **#hashtag** field. Tick the confirmation checkbox to confirm you have the rights to use the content, then click **Import**. ### Step 4: Select and import videos Shopvid fetches matching videos. Select the ones you want to add to your library, then confirm. ## Auto-Sync by Hashtag ### Step 1: Open Auto-sync settings In **Video Library**, click **Auto-sync** (or go to the **Manage auto-sync** section). Switch to the **Hashtag** tab, then click **Add hashtag**. ### Step 2: Set up the sync schedule Enter the hashtag in the **#hashtag** field. Under **Sync schedule**, choose how often to sync: **Daily**, **Weekly**, or **Monthly**. Set the preferred day and time, then click **Add**. ### Step 3: Confirm auto-sync is active The hashtag appears in the **Hashtag** tab with its schedule and last sync time. Shopvid will automatically import up to 30 new videos per session on the configured schedule. ## Tips - Each auto-sync session imports a maximum of **30 latest videos** from the hashtag - Check **Sync history** on each row to see how many videos were imported or skipped per session - To stop auto-sync for a hashtag, click **Delete** on its row — this won't remove already-imported videos - Use the **Auto-sync** filter in Video Library to see which videos were synced automatically vs. manually added [Sync video from TikTok / Instagram](/shopvid/video-library/sync-video-from-tiktok-instagram/)[Upload video from Shopify files](/shopvid/video-library/upload-video-from-shopify-files/) --- # Upload video from Shopify files Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/video-library/upload-video-from-shopify-files/ # Upload video from Shopify files The Upload video from Shopify library feature lets you get videos from Shopify files which stores all videos you've uploaded via other apps, or directly uploaded to Shopify files. This eliminates the need to re-upload files manually, helping you effortlessly repurpose your media content for your online sotre. Just like other uploaded videos, videos from Shopify files can be made shoppable to drive engagement and sales immediately. ### How to upload video from Shopify files To upload video from Shopify files, you can easily follow these steps: - In Video library screen, navigate to Shopify library tab - Click Add Video >> Click the checkbox of the video you want to upload - Click Done to upload video ### Working with Video Details Each uploaded video can be customized with product information and details. #### Tagging Products to Videos Product tags make your videos shoppable by linking them to items in your store. **To tag products:** - Open the video detail panel - Scroll to the **Tagged product(s)** section - Click **Tag product** - In the product selector: Browse your synced Shopify products - Use the search bar to find specific items - Select multiple products if the video features several items - Click **Confirm** [Sync videos by hashtag](/shopvid/video-library/sync-videos-by-hashtag/)[SEO metadata](/shopvid/video-library/seo-metadata/) --- # Upload video Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/video-library/upload-video/ # Upload video ### What is the Upload Video Feature? The Upload Video feature lets you add video content from your computer directly to Shopvid. Once uploaded, you can organize, tag products, and turn these videos into shoppable experiences for your customers. This gives you complete control over your video content while maintaining high quality and brand consistency. ### How to Upload Videos #### Preparing Your Videos Before uploading, ensure your videos meet these requirements: **Video specifications:** - **Format:** MP4 only - **File size:** Maximum 20 MB per video - **Quantity:** Up to 10 videos per upload session - **Recommended resolution:** 1080p or 720p for best quality - **Recommended length:** 15-60 seconds for optimal engagement #### Uploading Videos **To upload videos from your computer:** - Navigate to **Video library** in your Shopvid dashboard - Click the **Upload Video** button - Select up to 10 MP4 files (max 20 MB each) - Wait for the upload progress bar to complete - Your videos will appear in the library once processed #### Managing Your Video Library Once uploaded, you can organize and find videos easily using these tools: **Viewing options:** - **Alphabetical order:** Click "Name A-Z" to sort by video title - **Uploaded at:** Click "Newest First" or "Oldest First" **Finding specific videos:** - **Search by name** - **Filter videos:** Choose "Tagged product" or "Uploaded at" ### Working with Video Details Each uploaded video can be customized with product information and details. #### Tagging Products to Videos Product tags make your videos shoppable by linking them to items in your store. **To tag products:** - Open the video detail panel - Scroll to the **Tagged product(s)** section - Click **Tag product** - In the product selector: Browse your synced Shopify products - Use the search bar to find specific items - Select multiple products if the video features several items - Click **Confirm** [Quick start](/shopvid/getting-started/quick-start/)[Sync video from TikTok / Instagram](/shopvid/video-library/sync-video-from-tiktok-instagram/) --- # Video Studio Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/video-library/video-studio/ # Video Studio Video Studio lets you build a dedicated video gallery page on your storefront, a TikTok-like browsing experience where customers can discover and shop your products. Use it as a landing page, a campaign page, or link it from your menu or social channels. ### Prerequisites - Your store is on the Pro plan (Earlybird merchants: click Unlock feature inside Video Studio to request access via support) - You have at least one video imported in your Video Library ### Steps #### Step 1: Open Video Studio In the Shopvid sidebar, click Video Studio. #### Step 2: Create a new page Click Create page to open the page editor. #### Step 3: Name your page In the General tab, enter a name in the Page name field. This name is for internal reference only, customers won't see it. #### Step 4: Set the page title Fill in the Block title field to set the heading customers see on the page. Adjust Title color and Title size to match your brand. #### Step 5: Add videos to the page Go to the Videos tab. Use Search videos or click Browse to find and add videos from your library. Optionally enable Loop video or Shuffle videos to control playback behavior. #### Step 6: Set the page status Back in the General tab, set Status to Visible when you're ready to publish, or keep it Hidden while editing. #### Step 7: Save the page Click Save. Once saved, an **Add Video Page to your store** panel appears — expand the **To add menu item** section to copy the page link. #### Step 8: Set up the theme (one-time setup) The first time you create a page, a Theme setup required prompt appears. Click Open Theme Editor to complete a one-time setup: - Click Create template when prompted in Theme Editor - Click Add block, search for Video Studio Page, and add it to the template This only needs to be done once for your store. #### Step 9: (Optional) Add a menu item To make the page accessible from your store navigation, copy the page URL and add it as a menu item in Shopify Admin → Navigation → Menus. ### Tips - Use filter (All / Visible / Hidden) and sort (Name, Last updated) to manage pages as your library grows - You can bulk delete multiple pages at once by selecting them from the list - Use Copy URL from the actions menu to quickly grab a page link for campaigns or social posts - Tag products to videos before adding them to a Video Studio page — untagged videos won't be shoppable [Set thumbnail](/shopvid/video-library/set-thumbnail/)[How to manage product description in Shopvid](/shopvid/product/how-to-manage-product-description-in-shopvid/) --- # Speed Check Source: https://docs.avada.io/shopvid/widgets-load-speed/speed-check/ # Speed Check Speed check lets you test how fast the Shopvid widget loads on your actual storefront, measured from a real browser session — not a simulation. Use it to spot performance issues before your customers do. ## Prerequisites - The Shopvid widget is installed on at least one page in your theme - App embed is enabled in your Shopify theme settings ## Steps ### Step 1: Open the Dashboard In the Shopvid sidebar, click **Dashboard**. Scroll to find the **Speed check** card. ### Step 2: Select a page to test In the **Page to test** dropdown, choose which page type to run the test on: **Homepage** or **Product page**. Pick the page where your widget is installed. ### Step 3: Run the test Click **Start widget performance test**. Shopvid opens your live store in a new tab, measures how the widget loads, then returns the results to the Dashboard. Keep the tab open until the test finishes. ### Step 4: Read the results Three metrics appear, each with a status badge: MetricWhat it measuresFastAverageSlow **Widget load time**Total time for the widget to fully loadUnder 1s1–3sOver 3s **First render**When shoppers first see the widgetUnder 500ms500ms–1sOver 1s **Widget size**Total size of scripts and assetsUnder 512 KB512 KB–2 MBOver 2 MB ### Step 5: View test details (optional) Click **View details** to see the browser environment captured during the test — connection type, browser, viewport, and exact timestamp. Useful if you need to report a performance issue to support. ### Step 6: Run the test again Click **Run again** to retest at any time — for example after making theme changes or optimizing your setup. ## Tips - Run the test on the page where most of your traffic lands for the most relevant result - If the test times out, make sure the diagnostic tab finished loading and try again - If you see **Widget not detected**, confirm the Shopvid widget block is added to the page you selected - For a **Heavy** widget size result, click **Contact us** with the message "I want to optimize page loading" to get help from support [Video caption](/shopvid/manage-widget/video-caption/)[Analytics](/shopvid/analytics/analytics/) --- # Avada Image & Page Speed Up Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/ # Welcome Welcome to Avada Images & Page Speed Up — the speed-first app that makes your Shopify store load faster, from your theme code down to every image. ## Avada Images & Page Speed Up Everything in the app answers one question: **does this make your store faster?** We work on two fronts: - **Speed up** — optimize the heavy parts of your store: JavaScript, CSS, fonts, scripts, and how your pages load. - **Image optimizer** — compress your images without quality loss and keep their alt text clean for search. Together they cut load time and lift your Core Web Vitals, so customers stay and pages rank. ## Why store speed matters A slow store costs you sales and search rankings. Here's what speed does for you: - **Faster pages convert better** — every extra second of load time drops conversions and pushes visitors to bounce. - **Speed is a ranking factor** — Google uses page speed and Core Web Vitals (LCP, FCP, CLS) to decide where you rank. - **Images are usually the bottleneck** — large, uncompressed photos are the single biggest reason most stores load slowly. - **Doing it by hand doesn't scale** — tuning theme code and optimizing every new image manually is slow and inconsistent. ## Discover Avada Images & Page Speed Up [Speed up your storeOptimize JS, CSS, fonts, and scripts for faster page loads](/speed-optimizer/speed-up)[Compress imagesCompress images to a smaller size with the same quality](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/image-compression)[Optimize alt textMake sure every image has SEO-optimized alt text](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer) [Introduction](/speed-optimizer/getting-started/intro/) --- # Analytics Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/analytics/ # 📊 Analytics Who can use this feature? Analytics is available on **all plans**. The **Optimization activity** section is available on the **Expert plan only**. ### What is Analytics? This isn't a simulation or a one-time test. Analytics pulls real visitor data from Shopify Analytics, so the numbers reflect what your customers actually experience over the last 30 days. It works by: - Showing your **real speed score**, broken down by Core Web Vitals. - Reporting **performance by page**, so you can see which pages are dragging the rest down. - Logging **optimization activity** *(Expert plan)* — a full record of every change your speed specialist has made to your theme. This ensures you always know whether your store is getting faster — and exactly what's been done to make it that way. ### Why use Analytics? - **Reflects real-world performance** — uses live visitor data, not lab simulations. - **Pinpoints problem pages** — breaks Core Web Vitals down by page type so you know where to focus. - **Proves the impact of optimization work** — see the measured before/after for every change (Expert plan). - **Adds zero overhead** — no scripts are added to your store, so it stays as fast as ever. ### ⚙️ How to use Analytics #### Step 1: Open Analytics Go to **Analytics** in the Avada Speed menu. #### Step 2: Check your Speed score overview At the top of the page you'll see: - **FCP** (First Contentful Paint) — how fast the first content appears. - **LCP** (Largest Contentful Paint) — how fast the main content loads. - **CLS** (Cumulative Layout Shift) — how stable your layout is while loading. Each metric shows your **p75** value (what 75% of your visitors experience) and a status badge: **Good**, **Needs improvement**, or **Slow**. The page also tells you how many Core Web Vitals are passing right now. #### Step 3: Review Performance by page Scroll down to **Performance by page**. This breaks the same numbers down by page type — Home, Product, Collection, and so on. Use it to spot which page type needs the most attention. #### Step 4: Review Optimization activity (Expert plan) If you're on the **Expert** plan, scroll down to **Optimization activity** — a full log of every change your speed specialist has made to your theme. Each row shows: - **What was changed** (e.g. "Deferred 4 third-party scripts") - **Who made the change** (your specialist's name) - **When** it was applied - **The measured impact** (e.g. "LCP −1.2s") - **Status** — Done or In progress Click **Contact your expert** at the top right to reach out about any item directly. #### Step 5: Refresh your data Click **Rescan now** at the top right to refresh the data with the latest from Shopify. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Analytics **doesn't add any scripts** to your store — all data comes from Shopify's built-in analytics, so your store stays as fast as ever. - Data reflects the **last 30 days** of real visitor activity, not a one-time lab test. - p75 is the 75th percentile — 75% of your visitors experience this speed or better. Google uses it for Core Web Vitals so a few slow sessions don't distort the score. - **Optimization activity** is **Expert plan only**; other plans won't see this section. - Click **Rescan now** if your numbers look out of date or after a major theme change. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Variables](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer/variables/)[Speed Expert](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/) --- # Changelog Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/changelog/ # 📌 Changelog AP Speed Optimizer changelog for merchants who wants a regularly-updated product. ## June 2026 **Speed Request — Get a Hands-On Speed-Up From Our Experts** You can now ask our expert team to optimize your store's speed for you. Submit a Speed Request and it enters a tracked queue, so you always know where your request stands. When the work is done, you receive an Expert review showing before/after speed scores for both mobile and desktop, along with screenshots — so you can see exactly what changed and how much faster your store got. **App Embed Status at a Glance** The app now shows whether its storefront app embed is active on your live theme. If the embed is off, the speed-up features that rely on it won't run — so this status makes it clear when action is needed to keep your store optimized. **Dashboard Speed Checklist** A new speed checklist on the Dashboard guides you through the key steps to a faster store. Work through each item to make sure you've turned on the optimizations that matter most for your store's performance. **Other Improvements** - Rebuilt image optimization engine (v3) for faster, more reliable results. - New speed education banner and speed-score FAQ explain how your score is calculated and how to improve it. - More accurate dashboard counts, savings totals, and quota tracking, so the numbers always match your actual optimization. - Refined multi-version revert — pick exactly which optimization version to roll back to. - Speed audit now covers more page types, with clearer URL display for audited pages. - Reach support directly from an in-app modal to request a higher optimization or speed-up limit. - Onboarding polish for a smoother first-time setup. **Bug Fixes** - Fixed the applied theme not refreshing immediately after confirming a speed-up. - Fixed the app-embed status not syncing when toggling a storefront feature. - Fixed image quota not being counted correctly in some cases. - Fixed App settings toggles not respecting plan limits. - Fixed a stuck "waiting" state when optimizing manually. - Various UI fixes and error-message improvements across Speed Request and Settings. ## May 2026 **Expert Review With Before & After Scores** When our expert team optimizes your store, you now get a full review of the work: before and after PageSpeed scores for both mobile and desktop, the underlying PageSpeed report links, and screenshots. It's a clear, verifiable record of the speed gains delivered to your store. **Choose Which Theme to Speed Up** Speed-up now targets a theme you select instead of always applying to your main theme. This lets you test optimizations on a draft or backup theme before rolling them out to your live store. **Advanced ALT Text Variables** The ALT text template builder now supports additional variables, so you can build richer, more descriptive ALT text for your images. **Other Improvements** - More reliable optimization for very large catalogs — stores with up to around one million images now process without running out of memory. **Bug Fixes** - Fixed a theme error that could occur when a store had no blog articles at optimization time. - Fixed slow PageSpeed scans occasionally timing out before finishing. - Fixed speed-up not always applying to the correct live theme. - Fixed duplicate processing that could double-count optimized images. - Fixed image recount accuracy after optimization. - Fixed asset optimization occasionally not resuming after an interruption. ## April 2026 **Speed Report (Analytics) Page** A new Analytics page gives you a dedicated Speed Report for your store. It shows Core Web Vitals (FCP, LCP, CLS) from real user data, a Performance by Page breakdown, and an Optimization Activity log covering both automatic and expert optimizations. It's the clearest view yet of how your store is performing and what's been done to improve it. **Speed-First Onboarding** Onboarding has been redesigned around speed. Instead of jumping straight to image settings, the new flow walks you through Get Started → Diagnose → Optimizing → Result → Choose Plan — so you see your store's speed diagnosis and a first round of optimization before you finish setup. **New Plan Structure** Subscription plans have been redesigned into three tiers — **Basic ($19/mo)**, **Pro ($49/mo)**, and **Expert ($99/mo)** — each with a clearer set of features. The redesigned pricing page includes a side-by-side comparison table, customer testimonials, and an FAQ so you can pick the plan that fits your store. **Multiple Optimization Versions** Every optimization now backs up your true original image before making changes, and keeps multiple versions along the way. That means you can revert to any earlier version — including the untouched original — with confidence, on any plan. **Other Improvements** - Your current plan now appears in the Automated optimization section. - New preview button on the optimization review page. - Subscription and Analytics now have their own top-level menu items with direct deep-links. - Updated compression banner to better reflect your file-compression status. **Bug Fixes** - ALT text revert now handles Shopify rate limits gracefully and counts only genuine successes. - Fixed ALT text revert re-applying optimized text instead of restoring the original. - Fixed history filtering by optimization type (file vs. store images). - Fixed animated WebP files being picked up by compression. - Fixed revert not finding images stored under the newer file-image storage path. - Fixed occasional email report errors. - Corrected tooltip and label translations in the history table across several languages. ## March 2026 **Dashboard Redesign** The app now opens to a full Dashboard showing your store's speed performance at a glance. The Speed Score section displays your overall score with mobile/desktop toggle and a rescan button. Core Web Vitals (FCP, LCP, TBT, CLS) are pulled directly from Google PageSpeed Insights. An Image Optimizer summary card shows total images, total compressed, and total optimized ALT — so you always know where you stand without navigating away. **Image Optimizer — Split into Compression & ALT Text** Image Optimizer has been split into two dedicated tabs. **Compression** focuses purely on file size reduction with a before/after preview, compression level selector, and report showing total savings. **ALT text optimizer** is its own tab with two modes: Custom template (drag-and-drop variables) and AI automation (coming soon). Each tab has its own report, history, and FAQs. **Faster, Smarter Optimization** The backend has been rebuilt to optimize images by file instead of by page. Previously, the same image appearing across multiple product pages would be processed multiple times. Now each unique file is handled once — making optimization faster and more accurate. **ALT Text Optimization** New dedicated ALT text optimization flow with batch processing, report dashboard (optimized/unoptimized/missing), bulk revert capability, and ALT text manager for individual image control. **Other Improvements** - Force WebP option for more aggressive file size reduction. - Fallback preview when original image is unavailable. - Recalculate analysis for accurate report numbers. **Bug Fixes** - Fixed optimization process getting stuck on connection errors. - Fixed empty ALT text handling in revert and optimize flow. ## February 2026 **Other Improvements** - Improved memory handling for stores with large image inventories. **Bug Fixes** - Fixed large stores experiencing timeouts during optimization. - Fixed ALT text variant name not being applied correctly. - Fixed compression percentage conflict in settings. ## January 2026 **Page Loader** New Page Loader feature with customizable loading animations. Choose between a circle spinner or your store logo. The app auto-detects your store favicon, or you can upload a custom image. **Other Improvements** - GIF files are now properly excluded from compression (supported formats: JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, BMP, WebP). - Improved filename matching for more accurate optimization. **Bug Fixes** - Fixed image quality display not reflecting actual settings. - Fixed settings not saving correctly during onboarding. ## December 2025 **Other Improvements** - Bulk revert ALT text option added — restore original ALT text across all images at once. - ALT text optimization now correctly handles product variant names. ## November 2025 **Speed Up** New Speed Up feature to help improve your store's page loading performance beyond image optimization. **Pricing Plans** Subscription pricing plans introduced with tiered feature access. **Bug Fixes** - Fixed notification delivery issues. ## August 2025 **Split Image & ALT Optimization** Image compression and ALT text optimization can now be triggered independently, giving you more control over which type of optimization to run. ## June 2025 **Other Improvements** - Search and filter improvements in Image Manager. - ALT text revert now restores your true original ALT text. ## January 2025 **Other Improvements** - Improved automatic optimization when new products are added to your store. - Email reports are only sent when there's actual optimization data to show. **Bug Fixes** - Minor UI and stability fixes. ## December 2024 **Onboarding Flow** New guided onboarding walks you through initial setup — compression level, image selection, and your first optimization run. **Other Improvements** - In-app chat support for instant help. - Notification system for optimization reports. ## October 2024 **Initial Release** App Plaza SEO Image Optimizer launched with core features: image compression, ALT text optimization, Image Manager with bulk processing, and optimization reports. [FAQs](/speed-optimizer/faqs/)[Privacy Policy](/speed-optimizer/privacy-policy/) --- # FAQs Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/faqs/ # ⁉️ FAQs Frequently asked questions about Avada Images & Page Speed Up Which image formats can be optimized?The supported image types are PNG, JPG, GIF, and WebP. How long will it take to optimize my images?Most individual images are optimized within seconds. For bulk optimization, processing time depends on the number and size of images - typically a few minutes for 100 images. Progress tracking is available while optimization runs. Will the optimization process alter the dimensions of my images?No, the optimization preserves your original image dimensions. We only compress the file size while maintaining the same width, height, and aspect ratio of your images. Are new images optimized automatically?Yes, with auto-optimization enabled, any new images uploaded to your store are automatically optimized. You can adjust or disable this feature in settings. How can I optimize images that are not directly tied to products, collections, or blog posts?To optimize images outside product pages, go to 'Other images' tab and select images manually for optimization. Will optimization affect my image quality?No, our smart compression technology maintains visual quality while reducing file size. Most users can't tell the difference between original and optimized images. Is there a limit to how many images I can optimize?The number of images you can optimize is unlimited for now. If there's any changes in the future due to high traffic, we'll update later. Can I restore my original images?Yes. You can go to "Image manager", select images you want to restore and click **Revert.** [Subscription](/speed-optimizer/subscription/)[Changelog](/speed-optimizer/changelog/) --- # Introduction Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/getting-started/intro/ # Intro ## Why store speed matters A slow store quietly costs you sales and search rankings. Avada Images & Page Speed Up exists to fix that — making your store load faster from the theme code down to every image. - Slow pages hurt conversion rates: visitors leave before they buy. - Page speed and Core Web Vitals are Google ranking factors. - Large, uncompressed images are the single biggest reason most stores load slowly. - Tuning theme code and optimizing every new image by hand is slow and inconsistent. ### How speed helps your store Speed isn't a nice-to-have. It's the difference between a visitor who buys and one who bounces. - **Higher conversions**: faster pages keep visitors engaged and moving toward checkout. - **Better search rankings**: Google rewards fast-loading pages with stronger positions. - **Stronger Core Web Vitals**: optimizing images and scripts improves LCP, FCP, and CLS — the metrics search engines watch. - **Solid mobile experience**: most shoppers are on mobile, where every kilobyte counts most. - **More image search traffic**: clean alt text helps your product photos surface in image search. ### What the app does for you Everything in the app works toward one goal — a faster store: ToolWhat it does **Speed up**Optimize JavaScript, CSS, fonts, and scripts, and control how pages load **Image optimizer**Compress images without losing quality and clean up alt text **Speed audit**Run an on-demand scan to find what's slowing your store and how to fix it **Analytics**Track your real Speed Score and Core Web Vitals over time **Speed expert**Have a specialist optimize your store for you *(Expert plan)* ## Get more assistance If you have any further concern, search your topic on this page (hit `Ctrl` `K` for quick search) or look through our [Frequently Asked Questions](/speed-optimizer/faqs/). Our Customer Success team also offers 24/7 assistance via live chat. [Introduction](/speed-optimizer/)[Quick Start](/speed-optimizer/getting-started/quick-start/) --- # Pricing Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/getting-started/pricing/ # 💸 Pricing Avada Images & Page Speed Up offers four plans so you can start free and scale up as your store grows. Paid plans add image and speed optimization tools that help your store load faster. All charges are billed in USD on a recurring 30-day cycle. - 100 images & alt text/month - Image revert - 24/7 support - 10,000 images & alt text/month - Advanced alt text optimization - Bulk image revert - 24/7 support - Basic speed optimization - 50,000 images & alt text/month - Advanced alt text optimization - Bulk image revert - 24/7 support - Automatic speed optimization by expert - Hand-written theme code - Speed score increase guarantee - Theme break guarantee - Monthly re-optimization - Image version revert - Unlimited everything ## Comparison table FeatureFreeBasicProExpert Price (monthly)$0$19$49$99 Images & alt text / month10010,00050,000Unlimited Alt text optimization—AdvancedAdvancedAdvanced Image revertBasicBulkBulkVersion history Speed optimization——BasicAutomatic, by expert Hand-written theme code———✓ Speed score increase guarantee———✓ Theme break guarantee———✓ Monthly re-optimization———✓ Support24/724/724/724/7 **Yearly billing** is available on every paid plan and saves about **17%** versus paying monthly. ## FAQs about pricing Can I cancel my subscription at any time?Yes, you can cancel your subscription at any time. Is it easy to switch between plans?Yes, it is really easy to switch plans. To switch between plans, go to the subscription page and select your desired plan. You will then be directed to your Shopify admin to approve the subscription. Can I have a refund?Yes, you can. We offer a 30-day Money Back Guarantee (30 days from the start of your free trial), which applies for the following circumstances: - You do not wish to continue the subscription after the first month - You cancel the paid plan before the first circle ends - You forget to cancel the trial period or accidentally choose the paid plan without using it in the first month Will I be charged after uninstalling the app?The app's subscription charge module automatically charges the specified amount at regular intervals, usually monthly or annually. If you uninstall the app before the subscription period ends, you will still be charged the full amount for the entire subscription period. Will I be charged after downgrading from Paid plan to Free plan?The app's subscription charge module automatically charges the specified amount at regular intervals, such as monthly or annually. If you switch to the Free plan before the subscription period ends, you will still be charged the full amount for the entire subscription period. What's the difference between the image revert options?Free includes basic image revert to restore your latest original image before optimization. Basic and Pro add bulk image revert so you can roll back many images at once. Expert adds full version history, so you can restore any previous version of an image at any time. What does 'automatic speed optimization by expert' include?On the Expert plan, a dedicated speed specialist optimizes your store for you — hand-writing theme code, tuning Core Web Vitals, and re-optimizing every month. It comes with a speed score increase guarantee and a theme break guarantee, so your live store stays safe. [Quick Start](/speed-optimizer/getting-started/quick-start/)[Speed Audit](/speed-optimizer/speed-audit/) --- # Quick start Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/getting-started/quick-start/ # Quick start This guide walks you through making your store faster in three steps — audit your speed, compress your images, then run Speed up. The whole process takes just a few minutes. ## Step 1: Run a Speed Audit Open the app and go to **Speed Audit** to see where your store stands today. - Check your **Speed Score** (Mobile / Desktop) - Review your **Core Web Vitals**: FCP, LCP, TBT, CLS - See the list of **issues** dragging your store down — each one links to the fix This is your baseline before optimization. ## Step 2: Compress your images Large images are usually the biggest reason a store loads slowly. Go to **Image optimizer → Compression**. - **Choose a compression level** — Automatic (recommended) keeps photos sharp while cutting file size. - **Click "Optimize now"** and pick how much to run: **Optimize all** — recompress every image in your store. - **Optimize unoptimized** — only images not processed yet. Faster, and saves quota. - Or click **Optimize manually** to pick specific images by hand. - Track the progress on the page. ## Step 3: Speed up your store Go to **Speed up** to optimize your theme code, scripts, and loading. - **Turn on the optimizations** you want — lazy load, font swap, instant page, minify CSS & JS, and more. Each one targets a common speed problem. - **Click "Speed up now"** and pick a theme to apply the optimizations (use a theme duplicate to keep your live store safe). - **Preview and publish** when you're happy with the result. ## Step 4: Prefer hands-off? Try Speed expert On the **Expert** plan, you don't have to do any of this yourself — a dedicated speed specialist optimizes your store for you: - Upgrade to **Expert** from the **Subscription** page. - Your specialist works on a copy of your theme, so your live store stays untouched. - Review the before/after speed report and **approve** to publish. See [Speed expert](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/) for the full service. ## Done! Your store is now faster. Head back to the **Dashboard** anytime to see your improvement — click **Rescan** to refresh your Speed Score. [Introduction](/speed-optimizer/getting-started/intro/)[Pricing](/speed-optimizer/getting-started/pricing/) --- # Image manager Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/image-manager/ # Image manager **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users ### What is Image manager? Image manager is your central hub for optimizing all images. You can see all your store images in one place and optimize each one for better SEO and faster load times. The Image manager helps you: - View all store images in a single location - Monitor the optimization progress of individual images - Revert images to their original versions ### How to optimize/revert each image? ### Click Optimize manually From the **Compression** tab, click **Optimize manually** to open the Image manager. ### Click (⋅ ⋅ ⋅) next to your image and select action You can: - View image and its status - Compress image size - Optimize alt text: Keep alt texts SEO-optimized across your store - Revert: Revert image size and alt text to its original version There are 2 ways to optimized selected image. Check interactive guide for more. ### How to optimize/revert multiple image? ### Click Optimize manually From the **Compression** tab, click **Optimize manually** to open the Image manager. ### Select image Use search bar and filter to find your image. ### Select action You can: - Optimize all: Compress image size and optimize alt - Compress image size - Optimize alt text: Keep alt texts SEO-optimized across your store - Revert: Revert image size and alt text to its original version [Variables](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer/variables/)[Speed Expert](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/) --- # Image optimization Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/ # Image optimization **Who can use this feature?** - Available on **all plans**. Monthly limits and advanced options depend on your plan. ### What is Image optimization? Images are usually the heaviest part of a store — and the biggest reason pages load slowly. Image optimization makes them lighter and more useful, in two ways: - **[Image Compression](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/image-compression/)** — shrink image file sizes without visible quality loss, so pages load faster. - **[Alt Text Optimization](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer/)** — add clear descriptions to every image for better SEO and accessibility. Both run in bulk across your whole catalog, and you can revert any time. ### Where to start - Want a **faster store**? Start with **Image Compression**. - Want **better image SEO and accessibility**? Use **Alt Text Optimization**. [HyperSpeed](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/hyperspeed/)[Image Compression](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/image-compression/) --- # Alt text optimizer Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer/ # Alt text optimizer **Who can use this feature?** - This feature is available for all users ### What is alt text optimizer? Every image on your store should have **alt text**: a short description of what’s in the picture. Alt text helps: - **SEO** — Google reads alt text to understand your images, which can rank you higher in image search. - **Accessibility** — screen readers use alt text to describe images to visually impaired customers. Writing alt text by hand for every product image takes forever. Alt text optimizer uses a template to generate alt text for all your images at once. You can roll back any time if you don’t like the results.. ### Why use Alt text optimizer? - **Improves image SEO** — descriptive alt text helps Google rank your images in search. - **Makes your store accessible** — screen readers can describe every image to visually impaired shoppers. - **Saves hours of manual work** — generate alt text for your entire catalog in one pass. - **Stays relevant per product** — Advanced variables (Pro/Expert) produce "Nike Air Max running shoe" instead of just "running shoe". - **Risk-free** — revert to any previous version any time if you don't like the results. ### ⚙️ How to use Alt text optimizer #### Step 1: Open the Alt text tab Go to **Image optimizer → Alt text**. #### Step 2: Check your Report Check the **Report** at the top to see how many images have optimized, unoptimized, or missing alt text. #### Step 3: Build your template Choose the **Custom template** mode and build your template using available variables: - **File title** — the original image filename. - **Shop name** — your store's name. - **Shop domain** — your store's domain. - **Shop country** — your store's country. - **Shop province** — your store's state or province. **On Pro and Expert plans**, you also get **Advanced** variables tied to each product: - **Product title** — the product's name. - **Product type** — the product's category. - **Product vendor** — the product's brand or supplier. - **Product tags** — the product's tags. - **Variant SKU** — the variant's SKU code. - **Variant price** — the variant's price. - **Variant name** — the variant's name (e.g. "Red / Large"). This makes the alt text much more relevant — "Nike Air Max running shoe" instead of just "running shoe". #### Step 4: Preview the output Preview the output below the template builder to make sure it reads naturally. #### Step 5: Run the optimization Click **Optimize now** and choose which images to apply the template to: - **All** — every image, re-applying the template across your store. - **Unoptimized** — only images that haven't been optimized yet. Faster, and saves quota. - **Missing** — only images that have no alt text at all. Want to edit specific images by hand? Open the **ALT text manager**. #### Revert to previous alt text Didn't get the result you wanted? You can restore your previous alt text any time. - Click **Revert** next to **Optimize**. - Pick which version to restore — original, or a recent change from the list. - Confirm the revert. The job runs in the background. When it's done, your alt text is back to the chosen version. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - **AI automation** mode (auto-generate alt text using AI) is coming soon. For now, custom template is the way to go. - Click **History** at the top right to see a full log of every alt text change. - You can **revert any time** to your original alt text or a recent version — reverts run in the background. - The **Advanced template** with product fields (vendor, type, tags, etc.) requires **Pro** or **Expert**. - To shrink your image file sizes as well, see **Image compression**. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Image Compression](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/image-compression/)[Variables](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer/variables/) --- # Variables Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer/variables/ # Variables What variables are and how to use it to set up content on your website ## What are variables Variables act as placeholders that you fill in with actual information as the workflow happens. They automatically populate with your store's data when generating ALT text. Using variables helps you save time and effort. You can set ALT text for all images at once instead of editing them one by one. Format: `{{ variables }}` ContentWhat visitors see `{{ file_title }}` - `{{ shop_name }}`theme_cover_image - My store `{{ shop_name }}`- `{{ file_title }}`Mystore-green_indoor_plant_white_ribbed_ceramic_pot `{{ file_title }}` ## Benefits - Maintain consistency across your store - Save hours on image optimization - Automatically generate alt text for all images at once - Improve your store's SEO performance ## Supported variables VariableDescriptionExample `File title`Image file namegreen_indoor_plant `Shop name`Your Shopify store nameMy store `Shop domain`Store domainmystore.myshopify.com `Shop country`Store countryUS `Shop province`Store province/stateCalifornia **Note:** Variables are based on image file and store information. Since the app now optimizes by file (not by product page), product-level variables (product type, collection name) are no longer available. ## Tips - Combine multiple variables for more detailed descriptions - Review the **Preview** before applying changes - Use variables consistently across all images for uniform SEO optimization - Click `<>` in the template builder to switch to code view for advanced editing [Alt Text Optimization](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer/)[Analytics](/speed-optimizer/analytics/) --- # Image compression Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/image-compression/ # Image compression **Who can use this feature?** - Image compression is available on **all plans**. - Monthly limits depend on your plan: - **Free** (100) - **Basic** (10,000) - **Pro** (50,000) - **Expert** (unlimited). ### What is Image compression? Big image files are usually the biggest reason a store loads slowly. A single uncompressed product photo can be several megabytes. Image compression squeezes those files down to a fraction of their size while keeping them looking sharp. Customers see the same photos — they just arrive much faster. If you don't like how an optimized image turned out, you can roll back to a previous version in seconds. ### Why use Image compression? - **Faster page loads** — smaller image files are the single biggest speed win for most stores. - **No visible quality loss** — Automatic mode keeps photos sharp while cutting file size. - **Full control when you want it** — choose fixed quality levels or compress specific images by hand. - **Saves your quota** — "Optimize unoptimized" skips already-processed images. - **Risk-free** — revert to any earlier version in seconds. ### ⚙️ How to use Image compression #### Step 1: Open the Compression tab Go to **Image optimizer → Compression**. #### Step 2: Check your image quota Check the **Image quota** bar near the top to see how many images you have left this month and when your quota resets. #### Step 3: Review your Report Look at the **Report** card to see your current savings — **Total compression** % (with a status badge like "Good") and **Saving** in MB. #### Step 4: Choose your image quality In the **Image compression** card, choose your **Image quality**: - **Automatic – 92%** *(default)* — keeps your photos looking sharp while still cutting the file size. Best for most stores. - **92%**, **80%**, and other fixed levels — pick a specific quality if you want full control. Lower numbers mean smaller files but more visible quality loss. #### Step 5: Run the optimization You have three ways to run the compression: - **Optimize all** — click **Optimize now → Optimize all** to recompress every image in your store. Use this when you've changed the **Image quality** setting and want to re-run on everything. - **Optimize unoptimized** — click **Optimize now → Optimize unoptimized** to only compress images that haven't been processed yet. Faster, and saves quota. - **Optimize manually** — click **Optimize manually** to open the [Image manager](/speed-optimizer/image-manager/) and pick specific images by hand. #### Step 6: Let it run in the background While the job runs, you can keep using the app — it works in the background. Click **Notify me** to get a notification when the optimization is done. #### Revert to a previous version Didn't like how the compression turned out? You can go back to any earlier version. - Click the **revert icon** (the circular arrow) next to **Optimize manually**. - Pick which version to go back to: **Revert to original version** — restores your images before any compression. Available on **Basic, Pro, and Expert**. - **A recent version from the list** — restores a specific earlier version. Available on the **Expert plan only**. - **View more versions** — opens the full History page. - Confirm the revert. The card switches to a progress view while your images are restored. You can keep browsing — the job continues in the background. - When it's done, your store's images are back to the chosen version automatically. A success toast confirms the revert. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Click **History** at the top right of the page to see a full log of every optimization and revert. - **Automatic – 92%** is the best choice for most stores; only drop to lower fixed levels if you specifically want smaller files and accept some visible quality loss. - Use **Optimize unoptimized** to save quota — it skips images that have already been processed. - Compression counts against your **monthly quota** (Free: 100 · Basic: 10,000 · Pro: 50,000 · Expert: unlimited); the quota bar shows when it resets. - You can **revert any time** to your original images or an earlier version — reverts run in the background. - To improve your image alt text for SEO and accessibility, see [Alt text optimizer](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer/). Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Image Optimization](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/)[Alt Text Optimization](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/alt-text-optimizer/) --- # Privacy policy Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/privacy-policy/ # 🔏 Privacy policy How Avada collects, handles, and processes data of its clients and customers ## Introduction This privacy policy describes the information Avada Commerce, Inc. ("Avada", “we” or “us”) collect from End Users (“you”) of our website (the “Site”) and the information we collect on behalf of our clients who employ our technology to use our email messaging, analytics, and other services (the “Services”). This policy does not apply to third parties that Avada does not own or control. Such third parties are not under Avada's control and Avada is not responsible for their privacy or security practices. Any order forms or additional agreements to which users agree governing the provision of optional Avada features shall take precedence over the terms of this Privacy Policy to the extent of any differences, so please read such order forms or additional agreements carefully. Avada participates in and complies with the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework and the Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework. Avada's accountability for personal data that it receives under the Privacy Shield and subsequently transfers to a third party is described in EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks below. In particular, Avada remains responsible and liable under the Privacy Shield Principles if third-party agents that it engages to process the personal data on its behalf do so in a manner inconsistent with the Principles, unless Avada proves that it is not responsible for the event giving rise to the damage. ## Site Privacy Policy We collect, process, and retain information from you and any devices you may use when you use or interact with our Site and Services, and in other ways described below. We receive and store information you enter on our Site or give us in any other way, including your name, mailing address, phone number, email address, and payment information, as well as company name, and colleagues’ names and email addresses. We collect information about your use of our Site, such as the pages you view and other interactions you have. We receive and store certain types of information whenever you interact with our Site. Our Site uses “cookies,” tagging and other tracking technologies to help enable us to enhance or personalize your online browsing experience. This information includes computer and connection information such as statistics on your page views, traffic to and from our Site, referral URL, ad data, your IP address, and device identifiers. This information also may include your browsing history, transaction history, and your web log information. We use your information to help us personalize and continually improve your experience on the Site, including fulfilling requests for information, analyzing and compiling trends and statistics, and communicating with you. For information about how to manage your information and the choices you have, see how to limit the use of your information below. ## Cookies and Interest-Based Advertising Cookies are alphanumeric identifiers transferred to your computer’s hard drive through your Web browser to enable our systems to recognize your browser and tell us how and when pages in our Site are visited and by how many people. Like most internet sites, We uses cookies to enhance our users’ experience on the internet. These cookies do not collect personal information, and we do not combine information collected through cookies with other personal information to tell us who you are or what your name or e-mail address is. Most browsers allow you to prevent the browser from accepting new cookies, to be notified when you receive a new cookie, or to disable cookies. If you delete your cookies or if you set your browser to decline cookies, some features of the Site may not work or may not work as designed. Note that if you choose to remove cookies, you may remove opt-out cookies that affect your advertising preferences. We partner with third-party advertising companies who also use these tracking tools to provide advertisements on other websites. These third parties may use these technologies to collect information about you when you use the Site. They may collect information about your online activities over time and across different websites and other online services. They may also use persistent identifiers to track your Internet usage across other websites in their networks beyond the Site. They may use this information to provide you with interest-based advertising or other targeted content. While we do not knowingly provide these entities with information that personally identifies you such third parties may, with sufficient data from other sources, be able to personally identify you, unknown to us. Some content or applications on the Site may be served by unaffiliated third parties. We do not control these third parties’ tracking technologies or how they may be used. We are not responsible for the content or privacy practices on any website not operated by us to which our Site links or that links to our Site. Your browser or device may include “Do Not Track” functionality. Our information collection and disclosure practices, and the choices that we provide to visitors, will continue to operate as described in this privacy notice, whether or not a Do Not Track signal is received. We use Google Analytics, a web analytics service provided by Google, Inc., on our Site. Google Analytics uses cookies or other tracking technologies to help us analyze how users interact with and use the Site, compile reports on the Site’s activity, and provide other services related to Site activity and usage. The technologies used by Google may collect information such as your IP address, time of visit, whether you are a return visitor, and any referring website. The Site does not use Google Analytics to gather information that personally identifies you. The information generated by Google Analytics will be transmitted to and stored by Google and will be subject to Google’s privacy policies. To learn more about Google’s partner services and to learn how to opt out of tracking of analytics by Google click here. Many of the third party advertisers that place tracking tools on our Site are members of programs that offer you additional choices regarding the collection and use of your information. You can learn more about the options available to limit these third parties’ collection and use of your information by visiting the websites for the Network Advertising Initiative and the Digital Advertising Alliance. Similarly, you can learn about your options to opt-out of mobile app tracking by certain advertising networks through your device settings. Please note that opting-out of advertising networks services does not mean that you will not receive advertising on other websites, nor will it prevent the receipt of interest-based advertising from third parties that do not participate in these programs. It will, however, exclude you from interest-based advertising conducted through participating networks, as provided by their policies and choice mechanisms. ## Collection, Use, and Disclosure of End Users’ Information Through Our Services This section describes our policies for handling information about End Users provided to us by our clients using our Services or other sources of their choosing. We provide our clients with the ability to create profiles of their End Users in order to effectively communicate with them via marketing communications tools like email, analytics services. To do this, our clients integrate our technology into their applications, websites, or other online services. Our clients’ collection, use, and disclosure of data is separately governed by their privacy policies. Our clients may collect information about their users directly; in that case, each of our clients is responsible for ensuring that their data collection follows their privacy policies and terms of use. **Collection** In the course of providing Services to our clients, We collects customer information, purchases or product views (WITHOUT customer's emails, credit card information, customer's addresses, or any personally identifiable information (“PII”) ) about End Users of our clients. We uses this information to provide our Services to our clients. We may automatically collect information about your use, navigation of, and interactions with our clients’ applications, websites, or other online services when our client has installed our technology on its properties. Cookies that we set on our clients’ websites expire after three years and the expiration date updates every time you encounter our server. We retains standard web log data 5 years after you visit a client’s website, and aggregations and reports for up to 10 years after you visit a client’s website. **Use and Disclosure** We collect information about End Users at our clients’ direction and may append information to End Users’ profiles from third party sources. We do this to provide our Services, which enable our clients to optimize their communications with, and understanding of, their End Users. We consider our clients’ End Users’ information to be confidential to that client. Accordingly, we do not disclose End User information to unaffiliated third parties except in response to our clients’ explicit instructions, as provided for in an agreement between us and our client, or as otherwise described in this Privacy Policy (for example, as necessary to respond to legal requirements). We may provide services or sell products jointly with affiliated businesses. We may share End User information collected from our clients that is related to such transactions with those affiliated businesses. We require our affiliates, via contract, to provide the same level of privacy protection as set forth in this policy and they do not have the right to share or use PII for any purpose other than for an authorized transaction. If we ever were to engage in any onward transfers of your data with third parties for a purpose other than which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized, we would provide you with an opt-out choice to limit the use and disclosure of your personal data. **Information Clients Provide to Us** We receive and store any information clients enter on the Site, through the Services, or provide to us in any other way. Clients can choose not to provide us with certain information, but then they may not be able to take advantage of many of our features. We use clients’ information for such purposes as responding to their requests for Services, customizing the content they see, communicating with them about our products, and marketing our Services to them. In order for clients to use all of our features, they must register with us. We require clients’ e-mail addresses and passwords during the registration process. Further information may be required if clients choose to purchase paid components of the Services, such as credit card and billing information. We uses third party partners for credit card processing who may require and store your credit card and billing information. **E-mail Communications** If a client purchases Avada's online tools to collect and analyze user and usage data for its websites, applications, or services, we will communicate with it about the services it purchases by e-mail. Clients consent to receiving such confirmations by e-mail. If clients contact us via e-mail, we may retain a record of their contact information and any information they provide us in their messages to respond to them. We may receive a confirmation when clients open an e-mail from us. We may also send e-mails with news or promotions. If clients do not want to receive news or promotional e-mail from us, please contact us at [[email protected]](/cdn-cgi/l/email-protection/#573f323b2717362727273b362d3679362727) (this will not affect e-mails related to certain important, legal, or service-related messages such as outage information). ## Other Important Information **Your California Privacy Rights** If you are a California resident, California law permits you to request certain information regarding the disclosure of your PII by us and our related companies to third parties for the third parties’ direct marketing purposes. To make such a request, please send your request, by mail or email, to the addresses listed at the end of this policy. **Agents** We employ other companies and people to perform tasks on our behalf and need to share client and End User information with them to provide products and services. Examples include billing, processing payments, providing marketing assistance, and providing customer service. Our agents use the same level of privacy protection as we do. Unless we tell you differently, We does not share, and our agents do not have any right to use, PII collected from our Site and Services beyond what is necessary to assist us. **Business Transfers** In some cases, we may change our ownership or corporate organization, or may choose to buy or sell assets. End User information may be transferred to another entity, its affiliates, or service providers in connection with the transaction. You acknowledge that such transfers may occur, and that Avada or its successor organization may continue to use your information as set forth in this policy. **Protection of Avada** **and Others** We may release PII when we in our sole discretion believe in good faith that release is necessary or appropriate to comply with the law, enforce or apply our conditions of use and other agreements, or protect the rights, property, or safety of Avada, our employees, our clients, or others. We also may be required to disclose an individual’s PII in response to a lawful request by public authorities, including to meet national security or law enforcement requirements. **Information Security** Avada's account information is protected by a password for your privacy and security as well as other reasonable security measures. We use reasonable safeguards to protect the security of clients’ information during transmission, including by encrypting all of the information clients input. Only employees or agents who need PII to perform a specific job are granted access to it. All of our employees are kept up to date on our privacy and security practices. While we uses commercially reasonable means to secure information provided to us, we do not guarantee that such information will not be improperly accessed, disclosed, or destroyed by breach of any of our safeguards. Clients and End Users are responsible for the security of their information that is transmitted to us or that is viewed, downloaded, or otherwise accessed when using unencrypted, public or otherwise unsecured networks. **Accessing Information** You are able to access, add to, update, correct, amend, or delete certain information about you, including PII. When you update information, however, we often maintain a copy of the unrevised information in our records. A client may deactivate its Avada account by following the deactivation process set forth on the Site. Some information may remain in our records after account deletion. Please contact us at [[email protected]](/cdn-cgi/l/email-protection/#28404d445868495858584449524906495858) if you have questions or concerns about accessing, correcting, or deleting your PII. EU and Swiss data subjects have a right to access their information. Please see the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks section below. **Conditions of Use** Your use of the Site and Services and any possible dispute over privacy are subject to this Privacy Policy and our Terms of Service, including limitations on damages, dispute resolution, and application of New York state law. **International Users (Except for EU and Swiss Data Subjects)** If you use our Websites outside of the United States, you understand and consent to the transfer of your personal information to, and the collection, processing, and storage of your personal information in, the United States and elsewhere. The laws in the U.S. and these countries regarding personal information may be different than the laws of your state or country. **Use of Avada's Site by Children** Avada's Site is not intended for children under the age of 18. Accordingly, we will not knowingly collect or use any PII from children that we know to be under the age of 18. If we become aware of PII in our database that was collected from a child under 18, we will delete such information. ## EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Frameworks **Definitions** For purposes of this section only, the following definitions shall apply: “Agent” means any third party that collects or uses personal information under the instructions of, and solely for, Avada or to which Avada discloses personal information for use on Avada's behalf. “Personal information” means any information or set of information that identifies or could be used by or on behalf of Avada to identify (together with other information) a living individual. Personal information does not include information that is anonymized or aggregated. For the purposes of data received from Switzerland under the Swiss-U.S. privacy shield, personal information also includes ideological views or activities, information on social security measures or administrative or criminal proceedings and sanctions. “Sensitive information” means any personal information that reveals race, ethnic origin, political opinions, religious or philosophical beliefs, trade union membership, information that concerns health or sex life, and information about criminal or administrative proceedings and sanctions. **EU-U.S. Privacy Shield and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield** Avada Commerce, Inc. participates in and complies with the EU-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework and the Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Framework as set forth by the U.S. Department of Commerce regarding the collection, use, and retention of personal information from the European Union and Switzerland to the United States, respectively. Avada has certified to the Department of Commerce that it adheres to the Privacy Shield Principles. If there is any conflict between the policies in this privacy policy and the Privacy Shield Principles, the Privacy Shield Principles shall govern. To learn more about the Privacy Shield program, and to view our certification page, please visit [https://www.privacyshield.gov/ (opens in a new tab)](https://www.privacyshield.gov/). **Principles** Notice: Avada receives personal information about individuals in the EEA and Switzerland collected by Avada and its clients, and personal information about clients in the EEA and Switzerland. The types of information collected and the uses of that information are described in the privacy policy above. Avada will subject all personal information received via the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shields to these Principles. Choice: Avada will offer individuals the opportunity to choose whether their information is to be used for a purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized by the individual. An individual may opt-out of such uses of their personal information by contacting us at the address given below. Avada offers an opt-out to individuals whose personal information is disclosed to non-agent third parties. Additionally, Avada will not use sensitive personal information for a purpose other than the purpose for which it was originally collected or subsequently authorized by the individual unless Avada has received the individual’s affirmative and explicit consent (opt-in). Avada will treat as sensitive any personal information received from a third party where the third party identifies and treats it as sensitive. Data Integrity: Avada will use personal information only in ways that are compatible with the purposes for which it was collected or subsequently authorized by the individual. Avada will take reasonable steps to ensure that personal information is relevant to its intended use, accurate, complete and current. Transfers to Agents: Avada contracts with third parties who perform business functions on our behalf. Avada uses these third parties to assist with activities such as billing, processing payments, providing marketing assistance, and providing customer service. These entities may have access to personal information if needed to perform their functions for Avada. For information received under the Privacy Shield, Avada will require its agents to safeguard personal information consistent with this Policy by contract, obligating the agent to provide at least the same level of protection as is required by the Privacy Shield Principles. Under certain circumstances, Avada may bear liability for onward transfers of personal data where its agent processes personal data inconsistent with the Privacy Shield Principles, unless Avada proves that it is not responsible for the event giving rise to the damage. Access and Correction: Upon request, Avada will grant individuals reasonable access to personal information that it holds about them. In addition, Avada will take reasonable steps to permit individuals to correct, amend, or delete information that is demonstrated to be inaccurate or incomplete. An individual may request to access their information, or otherwise correct, amend, or delete their information by contacting us at the address given below. Security: See “Information Security,” above. **Enforcement** Avada will conduct compliance audits of its relevant privacy practices to verify adherence to this Policy. Any employee that Avada determines is in violation of this policy will be subject to disciplinary action. Avada is subject to the investigatory and enforcement powers of the Federal Trade Commission (FTC). **Dispute Resolution** In compliance with the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Principles, Avada commits to resolve complaints about your privacy and our collection or use of your personal information. European Union or Swiss individuals with inquiries or complaints regarding this privacy policy should first contact Avada at [[email protected]](/cdn-cgi/l/email-protection/#dcb4b9b0ac9cbdacacacb0bda6bdf2bdacac) or using the contact information below. Avada will investigate and attempt to resolve complaints regarding use and disclosure of personal information by reference to the principles in this policy. Avada has further committed to refer unresolved privacy complaints under the EU-U.S. and Swiss-U.S. Privacy Shield Principles to an independent dispute resolution mechanism, the BBB EU PRIVACY SHIELD, operated by the Council of Better Business Bureaus. If you do not receive timely acknowledgment of your complaint, or if your complaint is not satisfactorily addressed, please visit [www.bbb.org/EU-privacy-shield/for-eu-consumers/ (opens in a new tab)](http://www.bbb.org/EU-privacy-shield/for-eu-consumers/) for more information and to file a complaint. Please note that if your complaint is not resolved through these channels, under limited circumstances, a binding arbitration option may be available before a Privacy Shield Panel. ## Questions or Concerns If you have any questions or concerns regarding privacy at Avada , please send us a detailed message to [[email protected]](/cdn-cgi/l/email-protection/#157d707965557465656579746f743b746565) or to Avada at 651 N Broad St, Suite 206, Middletown, DE 19709. Your privacy is important to us and we will make every effort to resolve your concerns. [Changelog](/speed-optimizer/changelog/) --- # Ask Sidekick Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/sidekick/ # 🤖 Ask Sidekick **Who can use this feature?** - Available on **all plans**, automatically, once Avada Speed is installed. ### What is Sidekick? **Sidekick** is Shopify's built-in AI assistant in your Shopify Admin. Once Avada Speed is installed, you can chat with Sidekick to check your store's speed and image optimization — and even start an optimization — without opening the app. Everything Sidekick tells you comes from your real Avada Speed data, the same numbers you'd see in the app. ### Why use Sidekick? - **Answers in the flow of work** — ask about your speed while you're already in Shopify Admin. - **Plain-language answers** — get your score, your image savings, or what to fix, in a sentence. - **Start optimizing from chat** — kick off image compression and alt text without leaving the conversation. - **No setup** — it works automatically as soon as Avada Speed is installed. ### How to access - Open your **Shopify Admin**. - Open **Sidekick** (Shopify's AI assistant). - Ask a question about your store's speed or images — see the examples below. No extra setup is needed. Sidekick can read your Avada Speed data as soon as the app is installed. ### 💬 What you can ask Ask Sidekick about your store and it pulls the answer from Avada Speed: - **Your speed score** — *“What's my page speed score?”* → your PageSpeed score and Core Web Vitals (LCP, FCP, TBT, CLS). - **A deeper audit** — *“Why is my store slow? What should I fix?”* → a ranked list of the top issues to fix (takes a little longer than the score check). - **Which optimizations are on** — *“Which speed features are turned on?”* → the on/off status of features like minify, lazy load, preload, critical CSS, and font swap. - **Your image results** — *“How many images have I compressed? How much storage have I saved?”* → compressed image count, alt-text count, and storage saved. - **Your image settings** — *“How is image compression set up?”* → compression and alt-text status plus your quality level. - **Recent activity** — *“What did I optimize recently?”* → your latest compression and alt-text runs, newest first. ### ⚡ What you can do Beyond answering questions, Sidekick can **start an image optimization** for you: #### Step 1: Ask Sidekick to optimize Type something like *“Compress my images”*, *“Generate alt text”*, or *“Optimize my images”*. #### Step 2: Confirm what to run Sidekick opens a short **Optimize images** confirmation in Avada Speed. Choose what to run: - **Compress images** — shrink file sizes on images that aren't optimized yet. - **Generate AI alt text** — add alt text to images that don't have any. Pick at least one, then click **Start optimization**. #### Step 3: Let it run The optimization runs in the background — you can keep working in Shopify. Nothing starts until you confirm, so you're always in control. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Sidekick only **reads your data and starts jobs you confirm** — it never changes anything on its own. - For a quick number, ask for your **score**; for *why* you're slow and *what* to fix, ask for an **audit** — that's the same deep scan as [Speed audit](/speed-optimizer/speed-audit/). - Optimizations you start from Sidekick show up in your [Image optimizer](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/image-compression/) history, just like jobs you run in the app. [Speed Request](/speed-optimizer/speed-request/)[Subscription](/speed-optimizer/subscription/) --- # Speed audit Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-audit/ # Speed audit **Who can use this feature?** - Speed audit is available on **all plans**. The number of audits you can run depends on your plan: - **Free / Basic** — 1 audit every 7 days - **Pro** — up to 20 audits every 24 hours - **Expert** — up to 50 audits every 24 hours ### What is Speed audit? An on-demand deep scan that finds what's slowing a page down and how to fix it. Paste a URL, click **Run audit**, and get a full diagnostic powered by Google PageSpeed and your Shopify Analytics data. Speed audit runs on demand. To track your speed continuously, use [Analytics](/speed-optimizer/analytics/). ### ⚙️ How to run an audit #### Step 1: Audit a URL Open **Speed audit**, paste any page (product, collection, or homepage), and click **Run audit**. #### Step 2: Wait for the scan (~45s) #### Step 3: Read your score **Speed Score** (0–100, Mobile/Desktop toggle, issue counts, **Rescan**) plus a card with your URL, last audit time, an **Industry benchmark**, and the conversion cost of slow loading. #### Step 4: See how visitors experience your store - **Real visitor data** (real Chrome users, last 28 days) — Page load speed, Layout stability. - **Simulated browser test** (one lab test) — TTFB, FCP, TBT, Speed Index. #### Step 5: Review the issues Issues are grouped into tabs with counts — **Pages speed · Images weight · Code blocking · External service · Good result**. Click any issue to see **The problem** and **Why it matters**. #### Step 6: Fix it - **Done for you** — the **Speed Expert Service** optimizes your store for you. Click **Talk to an expert**. - **Do it yourself** — turn on the matching Speed up feature; each issue links straight to its fix. #### Step 7: Take action Click **Apply DIY fixes now**, or **Upgrade to Expert** to have a specialist do it. ### 📌 Notes - The **Limit** badge (e.g. `1/50`) shows audits used in your current window. - Real and simulated numbers can differ — that's normal. - Re-run an audit after any big change to see the impact. [Pricing](/speed-optimizer/getting-started/pricing/)[Speed Up](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/) --- # Speed expert Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/ # 👤 Speed expert **Who can use this feature?** - Speed up expert is available on the **Expert plan only**. ### What is Speed up expert? Speed up handles the standard stuff well, but some speed problems need a real person to fix — hand-tuning theme code, untangling third-party scripts, chasing down layout shifts in custom sections. That's what Speed up expert is for. A dedicated specialist works directly on a copy of your theme. Your live store is never touched until you give the go-ahead. When they're done, you get a report showing exactly what changed and how much faster your store is. **What's included:** - A dedicated speed specialist on your store, available 24/7 - Hands-on theme code optimization - Core Web Vitals tuning (LCP, FCP, CLS) - A speed audit report each month so you always know where you stand - Priority support - First optimization delivered in 3–5 days #### Why use Speed up expert? - **Fixes what automation can't** — hand-tuned theme code, third-party scripts, and custom-section layout shifts. - **Zero risk to your live store** — all work happens on a theme copy; nothing goes live until you approve it. - **Proof of impact** — before/after PageSpeed scores and a full change log, every time. - **Ongoing, not one-off** — a monthly speed audit report keeps your store optimized as it changes. - **Hands-off for you** — the specialist does the work; you just review and say yes. ### ⚙️ How Speed up expert works #### Step 1: Upgrade to Expert Go to **Subscription** and upgrade to the **Expert** plan. That's all you need to do to get started. #### Step 2: Meet your specialist Our **Customer Success** team reaches out automatically. They introduce you to your specialist and ask a few questions to kick things off — what pages matter most to you, any known issues, and theme access details. You can also start the conversation yourself. Go to **Speed up → Expert** and click **Chat with our expert**. #### Step 3: Your specialist optimizes a theme copy Your specialist creates a copy of your live theme and starts optimizing. Your live store stays exactly as it is — no risk while the work is in progress. #### Step 4: Review the optimization report When the optimization is ready, you'll get a short report from your specialist in the **in-app chat**. The report includes: - Your specialist's name and the theme they worked on - **Optimization summary** — how many changes were applied - **Speed improvement (PageSpeed score)** — your Mobile and Desktop scores before and after, with the change in points - **PageSpeed reports** — before/after links so you can dig into the details - A **Review the changes** link to open the optimized theme preview #### Step 5: Review and approve Click **Review the changes** to open the preview. Check everything looks right, then approve. The optimized theme only goes live once **you say yes** — you're always in control. #### Step 6: Get monthly reports Every month after that, your specialist sends a **speed audit report** with your current performance, anything new that needs attention, and what to do next. See [Notifications](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/notifications/) for what each update includes and where you receive them. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - We commit to **help improve your speed score** — we don't promise a specific number, because the final result depends on your theme, your apps, and your content, all of which are outside our control. - Every change your specialist makes is logged in **Analytics → Optimization activity**, so you have a full record of what was done, when, and the impact. - The optimized theme **only goes live when you approve it** — your live store is never changed without your go-ahead. - Your **first optimization** is delivered in **3–5 days** after kickoff. - To track your store's speed over time, see [Analytics](/speed-optimizer/analytics/). [Analytics](/speed-optimizer/analytics/)[Notifications](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/notifications/) --- # Notifications Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/notifications/ # 🔔 Notifications **Who can use this feature?** - Speed expert notifications are available on the **Expert plan only**. ### What are Speed expert notifications? When you're on the Expert plan, you don't have to chase your specialist for updates — they come to you. Speed expert notifications keep you informed at every stage, from the first optimization through the monthly check-ins that follow. You'll know when work starts, when it's ready for your review, and how much faster your store got — without logging in to check. ### When you'll hear from your specialist - **Kickoff** — your Customer Success team reaches out to introduce your specialist and confirm theme access. - **Optimization ready** — a notification when the optimized theme copy is ready for you to review and approve. - **Approval reminders** — a nudge if an optimization is waiting on your go-ahead. - **Monthly speed audit report** — every month, a report on your current performance, anything new that needs attention, and what to do next. ### The monthly speed audit report Each report your specialist sends includes: - **Optimization summary** — how many changes were applied - **Speed improvement** — your Mobile and Desktop PageSpeed scores before and after, with the change in points - **PageSpeed reports** — before/after links so you can dig into the details - What changed and what they recommend next ### Where you receive them - **In-app chat** — your specialist delivers reports and updates directly in the in-app chat. - **Email** — important updates also reach the email on your account, so nothing slips by. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Every change your specialist makes is also logged in **Analytics → Optimization activity**, so you always have a full record. - The optimized theme **only goes live when you approve it** — notifications never trigger changes on their own. - Your **first optimization** is delivered in **3–5 days** after kickoff. - For the full service overview, see [Speed expert](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/). Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Speed Expert](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/)[Speed Request](/speed-optimizer/speed-request/) --- # Speed request Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-request/ # ⚡ Speed request **Who can use this feature?** - Speed request is available on **all plans**. - **Free, Basic, and Pro** — one free expert speed-up to try the service. - **Expert** — unlimited requests, with priority in the queue. ### What is Speed request? Speed request is the easy way to get a real specialist from Avada to speed up your store for you — no technical work on your side. You submit a request, our speed expert audits and optimizes your store, and you get an optimized **“After” score** to compare against where you started. Every plan below Expert can try this once for free. It's the same hands-on optimization as [Speed expert](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/), offered as a one-time trial so you can see the difference before committing. ### Why use Speed request? - **Done for you** — a specialist does the work; you just submit and review. - **See the result first** — get a real before/after speed score so you know exactly what you're getting. - **Free to try** — your first expert speed-up costs nothing on Free, Basic, or Pro. - **No risk to your live store** — our team contacts you to set up access safely before any work begins. - **Track the queue** — see your position and watch your request move from Pending to Completed. ### ⚙️ How to use Speed request #### Step 1: Open Speed request Go to **Speed request** in the Avada Speed menu. At the top you'll see your **current store score**, the **current queue**, and a short **How it works** summary. #### Step 2: Submit your request Click **Submit a request**. A short form opens with: - **Your store URL** — filled in automatically. - **Current score** — your live Mobile and Desktop scores (hover to **Rescan** if you want fresh numbers). - **Note for expert** *(optional)* — tell us what to focus on, e.g. *“Product pages load slowly on mobile, most traffic from the US.”* - **Give our experts access to optimize your store** — tick this to continue. Our team reaches out right after you submit to set up access safely. Click **Submit**. You'll be taken to your request's detail page. #### Step 3: Track your request in the queue Your request appears in the list with a status badge: - **Pending** — in the queue, with your current position shown. - **Doing** — your specialist is actively optimizing your store. - **Completed** — the work is done and your optimized score is ready. You can also follow recently completed requests from other stores in the **Testimonials** section to see the kind of results to expect. #### Step 4: Review your before/after score When your request is **Completed**, your **store score** card shows your **Before** and **After** numbers side by side, plus a link to test the improved speed on your store. #### Step 5: Keep your speed boost live Your free trial keeps the optimized result live for a short window. To keep it running for your shoppers permanently — and to request more optimizations any time — **upgrade to Expert** from the banner or the [Subscription](/speed-optimizer/subscription/) page. If you don't upgrade before the trial ends, your store simply returns to its previous speed. Nothing is locked, and you can upgrade later to turn the optimizations back on. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - You can have **one request in progress at a time** — wait for it to complete before submitting another. - Speed request works on **real stores only** — Shopify development/test stores aren't supported. - Each completed request includes a **before/after speed score** so you can measure the impact. - Upgrading to **Expert** unlocks **unlimited requests**, **priority in the queue**, and keeps every optimization live — see [Speed expert](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/) for the full ongoing service. [Notifications](/speed-optimizer/speed-expert/notifications/)[Ask Sidekick](/speed-optimizer/sidekick/) --- # Speed up Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/ # 🚀 Speed up **Who can use this feature?** - Speed up is available on the Pro and Expert plans. ### What is Speed up? Speed up turns on the optimizations your store needs — like faster images, smarter loading, and lighter code — without you touching any code. You have two ways to do it: - **Do it yourself** — flip on the optimizations you want. Available on **Pro** and **Expert**. - **Speed up expert** — let our specialist do it for you. Available on **Expert** only. See **Speed up expert**. ### Why use Speed up? - **Faster load times** — quicker pages mean lower bounce rates and better conversions. - **No code required** — turn optimizations on with a toggle; the app handles the rest. - **Pick what you need** — enable individual optimizations à la carte, mobile and desktop. - **Safe to apply** — work on a theme duplicate and publish only when you're happy. - **Two ways to optimize** — do it yourself, or hand it to a specialist on the Expert plan. ### ⚙️ How to use Speed up #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. #### Step 2: Check your speed score Check your current speed score on the left. Switch between **Mobile** and **Desktop** to see how your store performs on each. #### Step 3: Choose the optimizations to enable Turn on the features you want. Locked features show an **Upgrade** link. **Available on Pro and Expert:** - **Lazy load** — loads images, videos, and embeds only when customers scroll to them, deferring heavy elements like YouTube and Maps. - **Instant page** — pre-loads pages the moment someone hovers a link. - **Asset image optimization** — shrinks the images in your theme. - **Preconnect** — gets a head start on external resources. - **Font swap** — shows text right away instead of waiting for fonts to load. - **Page loader** — keeps your layout steady while the page loads. **Available on Expert only:** - **Minify CSS and JS** — strips junk from your code. - **JS deferral** — holds back non-essential scripts until customers interact. - **Critical CSS** — loads only what's needed to show your page first. - **HyperSpeed** — pushes hidden scripts to the back of the line. #### Step 4: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick how to apply the optimizations: - **Duplicate current theme** *(recommended)* — works on a copy. Your live store stays safe. - **Select theme from library** — applies straight to a chosen theme. #### Step 5: Let it run Wait while the app works through each task. If anything fails, click **Refresh** to try again. #### Step 6: Preview and publish Preview the duplicate to make sure it looks right. When you're happy, publish it. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Edited your theme later (new pages, templates, or apps)? Just click **Speed up now** again to re-apply. - **Duplicate current theme** is the recommended option — it keeps your live store safe until you publish. - Locked features show an **Upgrade** link; some optimizations are **Expert-only** (Minify CSS/JS, JS deferral, Critical CSS, HyperSpeed). - If a task fails during processing, click **Refresh** to retry it. - Prefer hands-off? See **Speed up expert** to have a specialist do the work for you. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Speed Audit](/speed-optimizer/speed-audit/)[Lazy Load](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/lazy-load-images/) --- # Asset image optimization Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/asset-image-optimization/ # 🖼️ Asset image optimization **Who can use this feature?** - Asset image optimization is available on the **Pro** and **Expert** plans. ### What is Asset image optimization? Your theme has its own set of images: logos, decorative backgrounds, icons, hero banners. These show up on every page, so even a small saving on file size adds up fast. This feature compresses those theme images automatically. ### Why use Asset image optimization? - **Speeds up every page** — theme images load on every page, so the savings compound across your whole store. - **Fully automatic** — compresses your theme's images in one pass, no manual selection needed. - **Catches what product compression misses** — handles logos, icons, banners, and backgrounds that Image compression doesn't touch. - **Safe to apply** — changes go to a theme you choose, so your live store stays in your control. ⚙️ How to use Asset image optimization #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on Asset image optimization Turn on **Asset image optimization**. *[Screenshot: Asset image optimization toggle switched on]* #### Step 3: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* ### 📌 Merchant Notes - **Product, collection, and blog images** are handled separately by **Image compression** — this feature covers only the images built into your theme. - Theme images appear on **every page**, so compressing them gives a store-wide speed benefit. - This feature requires the **Pro** or **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see **Speed up**. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Instant Page](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/instant-page/)[Preconnect](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/preconnect/) --- # Critical CSS Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/critical-css/ # 🎨 Critical CSS **Who can use this feature?** - Critical CSS is available on the **Expert** plan. ### What is Critical CSS? Your store loads a big stylesheet with rules for the entire page — every section, every popup, every footer link. Normally the browser has to download the whole thing before it can show anything. Critical CSS pulls out just the styles needed for the top of the page (what customers see when they first land). That tiny slice loads instantly so your page appears right away. The rest of the styles load quietly in the background. ### Why use Critical CSS? - **Faster first paint** — your page appears right away instead of after the full stylesheet downloads. - **Better Core Web Vitals** — improves perceived load speed and FCP/LCP, which Google rewards. - **No visual change** — customers see the same design; it just renders sooner. - **Set and forget** — turn it on once and apply; the styling split happens automatically. ### ⚙️ How to use Critical CSS #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on Critical CSS Turn on **Critical CSS**. *[Screenshot: Critical CSS toggle switched on]* #### Step 3: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* #### Step 4: Verify it's working To check it's working, look in your theme code for `preload` tags on the stylesheets. *[Screenshot: theme code showing preload link tags]* ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Your theme has to be **published** before Critical CSS can run. - Always click **Speed up now** after turning this on to apply the changes. - This feature requires the **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see **Speed up**. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [JS Deferral](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/js-deferral/)[HyperSpeed](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/hyperspeed/) --- # Font swap Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/font-swap/ # 🔤 Font swap **Who can use this feature?** - Font swap is available on the **Pro** and **Expert** plans. ### What is Font swap? If your store uses a custom font (Google Fonts, brand fonts, etc.), the browser usually waits for that font to load before showing any text. That means customers see blank space where headlines and product names should be — sometimes for a full second or more. Font swap fixes that. Text appears instantly in a backup font, then quietly swaps to your custom font when it's ready. ### Why use Font swap? - **No invisible text** — headlines and product names appear instantly instead of waiting on font downloads. - **Faster perceived load** — customers can start reading right away, improving Core Web Vitals. - **Keeps your branding** — your custom font still loads; it just swaps in once ready. - **Set and forget** — turn it on once and apply; the swap happens automatically on every page. ### ⚙️ How to use Font swap #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on Font swap Turn on **Font swap**. *[Screenshot: Font swap toggle switched on]* #### Step 3: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* #### Step 4: Verify it's working (optional) To confirm it's active, check your theme's font CSS for `font-display: swap` on your web fonts. *[Screenshot: theme code showing font-display: swap]* ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Always click **Speed up now** after turning this on to apply the changes. - Font swap works with custom fonts (Google Fonts, brand fonts, etc.); stores using only system fonts won't see a difference. - This feature requires the **Pro** or **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see **Speed up**. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Preconnect](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/preconnect/)[Page Loader](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/page-loader/) --- # HyperSpeed Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/hyperspeed/ # ⚡ HyperSpeed **Who can use this feature?** - HyperSpeed is available on the **Expert** plan. ### What is HyperSpeed? If your store runs a lot of apps or has custom code, there's probably a pile of JavaScript loading on every page. Most of it has nothing to do with what customers actually see — it's for analytics, integrations, background tasks, and so on. HyperSpeed sorts the scripts: anything tied to visible content goes first, everything else waits. The result? Customers see your page much faster, even on heavy stores. This is especially powerful if you have several apps installed. ### Why use HyperSpeed? - **Faster visible content** — prioritizes the scripts that render what customers see and defers the rest. - **Built for heavy stores** — the more apps and custom code you run, the bigger the gain. - **Better Core Web Vitals** — cuts the JavaScript blocking your page from appearing quickly. - **No loss of functionality** — deferred scripts still run; they just load after visible content. ### ⚙️ How to use HyperSpeed #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on HyperSpeed Turn on **HyperSpeed**. *[Screenshot: HyperSpeed toggle switched on]* #### Step 3: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* #### Step 4: Verify it's working To check it's working, look in your theme code for the HyperSpeed optimization file. *[Screenshot: theme code editor showing HyperSpeed file]* ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Always click **Speed up now** after turning this on to apply the changes. - HyperSpeed delivers the biggest gains on stores with **several apps installed** or heavy custom JavaScript. - Deferred scripts still run normally — they just load after your visible content. - This feature requires the **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see [Speed up](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/). Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Critical CSS](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/critical-css/)[Image Optimization](/speed-optimizer/image-optimization/) --- # Instant page Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/instant-page/ # 🏃 Instant page **Who can use this feature?** - Instant page is available on the **Pro** and **Expert** plans. ### What is Instant page? When customers hover over a link, they almost always click it. Instant page uses that moment to quietly load the page in the background. By the time they actually click, the page is ready to go — feeling instant. This is especially noticeable on product cards, menu items, and "Learn more" links. ### Why use Instant page? - **Near-instant navigation** — the next page is already loaded by the time customers click. - **Smoother shopping** — most noticeable on product cards, menus, and "Learn more" links, where browsing speeds up. - **Higher engagement** — faster page transitions keep customers clicking deeper into your store. - **Safe by design** — risky links (like logout) are automatically skipped. ### ⚙️ How to use Instant page #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on Instant page Turn on **Instant page**. *[Screenshot: Instant page toggle switched on]* #### Step 3: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Instant page knows to **skip risky links** (like logout) so it doesn't trigger anything by accident. - Always click **Speed up now** after turning this on to apply the changes. - The effect is most noticeable on **product cards, menu items, and "Learn more" links**. - This feature requires the **Pro** or **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see **Speed up**. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Lazy Load](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/lazy-load-images/)[Asset Image Optimization](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/asset-image-optimization/) --- # JS deferral Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/js-deferral/ # 📜 JS deferral **Who can use this feature?** - JS deferral is available on the **Expert** plan. ### What is JS deferral? Every app you install adds JavaScript to your store. A chat widget, a popup builder, a review tool — each one runs on every page, even before customers see anything. That pile of scripts slows down your initial load. JS deferral holds those scripts back. Your page content loads first. The scripts only kick in when the customer scrolls, clicks, or taps — by which point they're already engaged with your store. For more control, you can use the **Script manager** to decide exactly which scripts get deferred. ### Why use JS deferral? - **Faster initial load** — your content appears before non-essential scripts run. - **Tames app bloat** — keeps chat widgets, popups, and review tools from slowing down every page. - **Better Core Web Vitals** — less JavaScript blocking the first render. - **Granular control** — use Script manager to choose exactly which scripts defer and which load immediately. - **No lost functionality** — deferred scripts still run as soon as the customer interacts. ### ⚙️ How to use JS deferral #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on JS deferral Turn on **JS deferral**. *[Screenshot: JS deferral toggle switched on]* #### Step 3: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* #### Want more control? Use Script manager - Open **Script manager** inside the JS deferral settings. *[Screenshot: Script manager panel with detected scripts list]* - Click **Check for new scripts** to scan your store. You'll see every script with its name, source, size, and where it's used. *[Screenshot: Check for new scripts button + scripts table]* - For each script, pick how it should load: **Immediate** — loads with the page (use for scripts your page needs right away). - **On user action** — waits until the customer clicks, scrolls, or taps. *[Screenshot: load trigger dropdown with Immediate and On user action options]* - Save your changes. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - JS deferral works on scripts added through **Shopify's Script Tag API**. Apps that inject scripts other ways may not appear in Script manager. - Always click **Speed up now** after turning this on to apply the changes. - Keep scripts your page needs right away set to **Immediate** — only defer non-essential ones to avoid breaking functionality. - This feature requires the **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see **Speed up**. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Minify CSS & JS](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/minify-css-and-js/)[Critical CSS](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/critical-css/) --- # Lazy load Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/lazy-load-images/ # 🖼️ Lazy load **Who can use this feature?** - Lazy load is available on the **Pro** and **Expert** plans. ### What is Lazy load? Normally, a browser tries to load everything on the page at once — even images, videos, and maps way down at the bottom. That slows everything down. With lazy load on, those elements stay paused until a customer scrolls close to them. The rest of your page loads quickly first, and pages with lots of media feel much snappier. Lazy load covers two kinds of heavy elements: **Images** — in: - Theme files - Product, collection, and blog descriptions - Regular pages **Iframes & videos** — including: - YouTube and Vimeo videos - Google Maps - Other iframe embeds ### Why use Lazy load? - **Faster initial load** — the browser only loads what customers can actually see. - **Cuts the heaviest page weight** — a single video embed can outweigh your whole page; deferring it loads your content first. - **Big win for media-heavy stores** — long pages full of photos, videos, or maps feel much snappier. - **Better Core Web Vitals** — less upfront work means a quicker first paint. - **No visual change** — images, videos, and maps still appear normally as customers scroll; they just load on demand. ### ⚙️ How to use Lazy load #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on Lazy load Turn on **Lazy load (images)** and **Lazy load (iframes and videos)** — enable whichever your store needs. *[Screenshot: lazy load toggles switched on]* #### Step 3: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* #### Step 4: Verify it's working To check it's working, open your store and look at an image in the page source — it should have `loading="lazy"` on it. Embedded videos and maps should only load once you scroll near them. *[Screenshot: browser inspector showing loading="lazy" attribute on an image tag]* ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Images at the top of your page (the first thing customers see) still load **right away** — no delay. - Always click **Speed up now** after turning this on to apply the changes. - The biggest gains come on **media-heavy pages** — lots of photos below the fold, or embedded videos and maps, which are the heaviest elements to load. - Covers **YouTube, Vimeo, Google Maps, and other iframe embeds**. - This feature requires the **Pro** or **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see [Speed up](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/). Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Speed Up](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/)[Instant Page](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/instant-page/) --- # Minify CSS and JS Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/minify-css-and-js/ # 🗜️ Minify CSS and JS **Who can use this feature?** - Minify CSS and JS is available on the **Expert** plan ### What is Minify CSS and JS? Your theme's code files have a lot of extra characters in them: blank lines, indentation, developer comments. Those are great for humans reading the code, but the browser doesn't care about any of it. Minifying removes all that fluff. The code still works exactly the same — it's just much smaller. Smaller files load faster, which lifts your speed score. ### Why use Minify CSS and JS? - **Smaller code files** — removes spaces, line breaks, and comments the browser doesn't need. - **Faster page loads** — lighter files download quicker, lifting your speed score. - **Zero functional change** — the code behaves exactly the same, just leaner. - **Set and forget** — turn it on once and apply; re-run after code edits. ### ⚙️ How to use Minify CSS and JS #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on Minify CSS and JS Turn on **Minify CSS and JS**. *[Screenshot: Minify CSS and JS toggle switched on]* #### Step 3: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* #### Step 4: Verify it's working To check it's working, open your theme's **Assets** folder in the Shopify code editor. Optimized files have "min" or "minified" in their names. *[Screenshot: Shopify code editor showing assets folder with minified files]* ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Edited your theme code? Click **Speed up now** again to re-minify the updated files. - Minifying doesn't change how your code behaves — it only removes characters the browser ignores. - This feature requires the **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see [Speed up](/speed-optimizer/speed-audit/). Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Page Loader](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/page-loader/)[JS Deferral](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/js-deferral/) --- # Page loader Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/page-loader/ # ⏳ Page loader **Who can use this feature?** - Page loader is available on the **Pro** and **Expert** plans. ### What is Page loader? You know that annoying moment when a page is loading and everything jumps — the image pops in, pushes the text down, then a banner appears and shoves it down again? That's called layout shift, and Google scores you down for it. Page loader hides the messy load behind a simple loader (a spinner or your logo). Once everything's ready, the page reveals all at once — clean, stable, no jumping. This directly improves your **CLS** score (Cumulative Layout Shift), one of Google's Core Web Vitals. ### Why use Page loader? - **Eliminates visible layout shift** — content reveals all at once instead of jumping as it loads. - **Improves your CLS score** — directly targets one of Google's Core Web Vitals. - **Looks polished** — a clean spinner or your logo replaces a messy, jumpy load. - **Matches your brand** — choose presets, sizes, or your store's favicon. #### ⚙️ How to use Page loader #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on Page loader Turn on **Page loader**. The settings panel opens with a live preview on the right. *[Screenshot: Page loader settings panel expanded with live preview]* #### Step 3: Pick a loading style - **Loading circle** — a spinning indicator. Choose a **preset** (Minimalist, Bright, or Dark) to match your store, and a **size** (Small, Medium, or Large). - **Loading logo** — shows your store's favicon instead of a spinner. *[Screenshot: loading style options with circle and logo, plus preset and size pickers]* 📝 **Note:** If you pick Loading logo but haven't set a favicon in Shopify yet, you'll see "No favicon found." Upload one in your Shopify theme settings first. #### Step 4: Check both views Use the **mobile / desktop** toggle in the preview to check both views look good. *[Screenshot: preview pane with mobile/desktop toggle]* #### Step 5: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Page loader is the key feature for **CLS**. Pair it with **Lazy load images**, **Critical CSS**, and **Preconnect** for a full speed boost. - Always click **Speed up now** after turning this on to apply the changes. - Using **Loading logo**? Make sure you've set a favicon in your Shopify theme settings first. - This feature requires the **Pro** or **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see **Speed up**. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Font Swap](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/font-swap/)[Minify CSS & JS](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/minify-css-and-js/) --- # Preconnect Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/speed-up/preconnect/ # 🔌 Preconnect **Who can use this feature?** - Preconnect is available on the **Pro** and **Expert** plans. ### What is Preconnect? Every external resource on your store (a Google font, a third-party app script, an image CDN) needs a handshake before it can load. That handshake takes time. Preconnect tells the browser to do those handshakes early, in the background. By the time the file is actually needed, the line is already open. It's especially helpful on mobile, where every millisecond of network setup matters. ### Why use Preconnect? - **Faster external resources** — fonts, CDNs, and app scripts start loading sooner because the connection is already open. - **Big mobile win** — saves network setup time where it matters most, on slower mobile connections. - **Better Core Web Vitals** — earlier resource loading improves perceived speed and LCP. - **Set and forget** — turn it on once and apply; the connection hints are added automatically. #### ⚙️ How to use Preconnect #### Step 1: Open Speed up Go to **Speed up**. *[Screenshot: Speed up page open]* #### Step 2: Turn on Preconnect Turn on **Preconnect**. *[Screenshot: Preconnect toggle switched on]* #### Step 3: Apply to your theme Click **Speed up now** and pick a theme to apply changes. *[Screenshot: Speed up now button and theme selection modal]* #### Step 4: Verify it's working To check it's working, view your store's page source — you should see `<link rel="preconnect">` tags near the top. *[Screenshot: page source showing preconnect link tags]* ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Always click **Speed up now** after turning this on to apply the changes. - Preconnect helps most when your store loads resources from **external domains** (fonts, CDNs, third-party apps). - The benefit is most noticeable on **mobile** and slower connections. - This feature requires the **Pro** or **Expert** plan. - For an overview of all optimization features, see **Speed up**. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Asset Image Optimization](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/asset-image-optimization/)[Font Swap](/speed-optimizer/speed-up/font-swap/) --- # Subscription Source: https://docs.avada.io/speed-optimizer/subscription/ # 💳 Subscription **Who can use this feature?** - Anyone using the app can view and change their subscription. ### What is Subscription? Avada Speed has four plans — **Free**, **Basic**, **Pro**, and **Expert** — built around different store sizes and needs. - **Free ($0/mo)** — Image optimizer only (100 images/month). Best for new stores trying things out. - **Basic ($19/mo)** — Image optimizer with a higher limit (10,000 images/month). Great if images are your main concern. - **Pro ($49/mo)** — Image optimizer (50,000 images/month) + basic Speed up features. - **Expert ($99/mo)** ⭐ — Unlimited images, all Speed up features, plus Speed up expert — a dedicated speed specialist working on your store. You can switch plans, cancel, or apply a promo code any time from this page. ### Why use Subscription? - **Match your plan to your store** — pay only for the images and features you actually need. - **Save with yearly billing** — switch to annual and save about 17%. - **Full flexibility** — upgrade, downgrade, or cancel any time, with no lock-in. - **Clear billing at a glance** — see your current plan, join date, next bill date, and amount in one place. - **Apply promo codes instantly** — enter a code and see the discount applied right away. ### ⚙️ How to manage your Subscription #### Step 1: Open Subscription Go to **Subscription** in the Avada Speed menu. #### Step 2: Choose your billing cycle Switch between **Monthly** and **Yearly** billing. Yearly saves you about 17%. #### Step 3: Compare the plans Review the three paid plan cards: **Basic**, **Pro**, and **Expert** (Expert is marked as Recommended). The **Free** plan card sits below as a full-width option. Click **Show more comparison** to see a full feature-by-feature breakdown across all plans. #### Step 4: Choose your plan To upgrade, click the **Choose plan** button on the plan you want. You'll be taken through Shopify's billing flow to confirm. #### Step 5: Review your subscription details Check **Subscription details** further down to see your current plan, when you joined, your next bill date, and the amount. #### Step 6: Apply a promo code Have a promo code? Enter it in the **Promotion code** field and click **Apply**. ### 📌 Merchant Notes - Each promo code can only be used **once per subscription**. - You can **cancel or downgrade any time**. If you cancel, you keep your current features until the end of your billing period. - **Yearly billing saves about 17%** compared to paying monthly. - Plan changes go through **Shopify's billing flow** — you confirm and pay through Shopify, not in-app. Contact us in live chat if you have any problems. [Ask Sidekick](/speed-optimizer/sidekick/)[FAQs](/speed-optimizer/faqs/)